Aeromec manual

User manual

Aeromec · precision machining

From the request for quotation to the certificate of conformity: programmes, engineering and changes, work orders, shop floor, quality and the ISO 9001 / EN 9100 management system, warehouse and traceability, MRP, purchasing and invoicing, explained section by section with screenshots of the app.

45 chapters 640 annotated screenshots Updated 6 October 2026

Getting started

Welcome

What Aeromec is, how all the work of a precision machining shop fits into the application and how to get the most out of this manual.

Aeromec is the management application for a precision machining shop serving aerospace and defence. It brings together in one place the full cycle of each part: the customer's request for quotation and the quote with quantity price breaks, the customer-approved manufacturing routing with its control plan and its cost breakdown, the work orders (WO) and their planning on each machine, the shop-floor terminal the operators work from, the maintenance of the machines, quality (inspections, first article, nonconformances and corrective actions), traceability by heat and serial number, MRP and purchasing, shipments with their certificate of conformity and, at the end, the invoice and the payment, with what comes after: bank reconciliation, accounting and tax (sending invoices to the Spanish Tax Agency, AEAT, VAT and Intrastat).

And around all of it, the aerospace quality system (ISO 9001 and EN 9100): the programmes (the aircraft, engine or system the parts are made for, with its production rate), each customer's requirements and the contract review before committing, the electronic signature of whatever is inspected, released or approved, controlled documentation, the management system (objectives, risks, audits and management review), each person's competence, drawing or process changes with their impact, and the standard, clause by clause, with where Aeromec covers it.

Everything is connected: the approved routing decides what can be made and from which material; its cost breakdown gives the cost per part from which prices are quoted; when a WO is released the heat is reserved, and the operator sees on the tablet their queue, the drawing, the CNC program and the control plan; whatever is measured stays linked to the gauge it was measured with; and for every part delivered you know which heat it came from, which machines it was made on, who made it, what it was measured with and who released it with their signature. And every invoice, receipt and payment is posted to the accounts automatically and recorded for the Tax Agency.

Aeromec right after signing in: the sidebar with the sections, the top bar and the Dashboard with the state of the shop. 12345
Figure 1. Aeromec right after signing in: the sidebar with the sections, the top bar and the Dashboard with the state of the shop.
  1. 1
    The sidebar takes you to each section, grouped by area: Overview, Sales, Engineering, Production, Quality, Quality system, Logistics, Supply, Resources and Finance.
  2. 2
    The search box finds any WO, part, customer, quote, heat, serial number or invoice from any screen.
  3. 3
    Create adds a quote, a WO, a customer, an NCR… without leaving where you are.
  4. 4
    Your user: your profile, your language and theme, the connection with Claude, «About» and signing out. If you are an administrator, also Users and Settings.
  5. 5
    The Help menu opens this manual —at the chapter for the screen you are on— and the interactive guides.

#The journey of a part

This is how an order travels through Aeromec, from the request for quotation to the last payment. Each step is a section of the application and a chapter of this manual (click any of them to go to it):

  1. 1Routing and cost breakdownOperations, control plan and the materials the customer accepts; from there, the cost per part.
  2. 2QuoteQuantity price breaks taken from the cost breakdown, with their lead time and the signed contract review. Sent as a PDF.
  3. 3OrderWhen the quote is accepted, the sales order is created, with its scheduled deliveries.
  4. 4Work orderReleased to the shop floor: routing frozen, material chosen, heat reserved, first article decided.
  5. 5PlanningEach machine with its queue and the hour-by-hour forecast, at real capacity.
  6. 6Shop-floor terminalThe operator clocks on, books good and rejected parts, and takes their gauges.
  7. 7QualitySigned inspections with in-date gauges, EN 9102 first article and nonconformances.
  8. 8ShippingDelivery note with its certificate of conformity (CoC) and the material certificates.
  9. 9Invoice and paymentWhat has been shipped is invoiced and recorded for the Tax Agency; the payment closes the loop.
  10. 10Bank and accountsThe receipt is matched with the bank statement and everything is posted to the accounts.
The full cycle of a part in Aeromec. MRP and purchasing feed in the material; traceability ties it all together.

#Where to start, depending on your job

In Aeromec each person sees what their access profile allows (see Profiles and permissions). These are the chapters you will use most, depending on your job:

Your job Start with And then
Management Dashboard, Reports Work orders, Programmes, Management system, Invoices, Accounting, Users
Engineering office Routings & costing, Items Changes, Quotes, Nonconformances
Sales Quotes, Customers Programmes, Sales orders, Integrations
Planning Work orders, Planning MRP, Work centres
Shop supervisor Shop-floor monitor, Planning Shop-floor terminal, People, Competence & training
Operator Shop-floor terminal —
Maintenance Maintenance Shop-floor monitor, Planning, Purchasing
Quality Inspection & FAI, Nonconformances Gauges, Traceability, Management system, Documentation, Standard
Warehouse Warehouse, Shipments Purchasing (receipts), Traceability
Purchasing MRP, Purchasing Suppliers, Warehouse
Finance Invoices, Payables, Banking Accounting, Tax, Customers, Suppliers
External auditor (read only) Standard, Management system Documentation, Inspection & FAI, Nonconformances, Traceability, Audit log

The external auditor row is for whoever comes to audit the shop (for certification or for a customer): they sign in with a read-only profile that expires on a set date (see Users and profiles).

If this is your first time in, read Signing in to Aeromec and The screen and common features first: they explain what works the same way in every section (searching, filtering, opening a record, filling in a form, signing).

#How to read this manual

  • Annotated screenshots. Every screenshot is of the real application. The numbers 1 point to the parts explained below, in the legend. Hover over a mark or over its line in the legend and the area is highlighted on the screenshot; click the screenshot to see it full screen.
  • On-screen labels. What you see written on a button, a tab or a field appears like this: Create, Save. Keys, like this: ⌘K.
  • Steps. Tasks are explained step by step in numbered boxes, with what happens at the end.
  • Coloured boxes. Tips are in green, important points in amber, standards (ISO 9001, EN 9100, EN 9102, EN 10204…) with a blue stripe on the left, how a figure is calculated in light blue, and what changes depending on your access profile with a padlock.
  • Search. The search box on the left (or the / key) finds any word in the whole manual.
  • Print. Print or save as PDF, at the bottom left, gives you the manual on paper or as a PDF, each chapter on its own page.

#How this manual is organised

After these first steps, each chapter matches a section of the application's sidebar, in the same order and with the same icon. At the end come the appendices: profiles and permissions, glossary and frequently asked questions.

Getting started

Signing in to Aeromec

How to sign in with your account, the demo accounts, the video and documents on the sign-in screen, your profile (language and theme), access with an end date and how to sign out.

Who uses it: Everyone who uses AeromecAccess: none: each person signs in with their own email and password

Each person in the shop signs in to Aeromec with their own user: an email and a password. What they see afterwards depends on their access profile (management, engineering office, sales, planning, shop supervisor, operator, quality, maintenance, warehouse, purchasing, finance or external auditor): the sections in the sidebar, the figures they can look at and what they can create or change. Accounts are created by an administrator in Users; there is no open sign-up.

  1. 1The administrator creates your userWith your email, your name, your job title and a password.
  2. 2They assign you an access profileSales, quality, operator… it decides what you see and what you can do.
  3. 3You sign in with your emailOn the sign-in screen, with your password.
  4. 4You start on the DashboardWith your profile's sections and figures (operators, on the shop-floor terminal).

#The sign-in screen

The sign-in screen on a computer: on the left, the Aeromec presentation with its video; on the right, the form to sign in. 12345678
Figure 2. The sign-in screen on a computer: on the left, the Aeromec presentation with its video; on the right, the form to sign in.
  1. 1
    Email: the address the administrator registered you with.
  2. 2
    Password. The eye on the right shows or hides it while you type.
  3. 3
    Sign in (or the Enter key in the password field) opens your workspace.
  4. 4
    Demo accounts: in the demo, one click on a person signs you straight in with their account.
  5. 5
    The presentation video: what Aeromec does, in under five minutes. Press ▶ to watch it (best with sound).
  6. 6
    Explore the proposal: Aeromec's specification, presentation and PDF summary.
  7. 7
    The application's language (Spanish or English), right from the sign-in screen.
  8. 8
    Switches between light and dark mode.

On narrow screens (a phone or a small window) the presentation on the left disappears and only the form remains, with the logo at the top and, below the demo accounts, the video and the proposal documents. In both, clicking the Aeromec logo opens its presentation website.

How to sign in with your account
  1. Type your email in the Email field.

  2. Type your password in Password. If you want to check what you have typed, press the eye on the right.

  3. Press Sign in or the Enter key.

Aeromec opens on the Dashboard (or on the first section your profile allows; an operator, straight on the shop-floor terminal). The session stays open even if you close the tab or reload the page, until you sign out yourself.
If the email or the password is wrong, Aeromec says so below the form. 1
Figure 3. If the email or the password is wrong, Aeromec says so below the form.
  1. 1
    Invalid email or password: check both fields (capital letters matter in the password). If the message is «Could not reach the server», the problem is the connection, not your details.

#The demo accounts

In the demo version, thirteen fictitious people from the sample shop («Aeromec Precisión») appear below the form. Each one has a different access profile, so you see the same application as each job would see it. They all use the password demo1234.

Person Job (profile) What they see, in short
Elena Navarro Managing director · administrator Everything; she also manages users, profiles, the company settings and the audit log
Javier Ortega Operations director (Management) Every section, with costs, prices and margins, and reports; approves concessions
Lucía Romero Engineering office Items, routings, control plans and cost breakdowns, with costs but without selling prices
Marta Gil Sales Customers, quotes and orders with selling prices, without costs or margins
Pablo Serrano Planning WOs, queue planning, MRP and proposals, without selling prices
Antonio Delgado Shop supervisor WOs and their progress, planning, terminal, monitor and time records, without financial data
Rafael Moreno Shop-floor operator Only the shop-floor terminal: his queue, his time records, his gauges and the instructions
Carmen Vidal Quality Inspections, FAI, nonconformances, CAPA, calibrations and traceability
José Luis Prieto Warehouse and shipping Stock, lots, receipts, cycle counts, shipments and traceability, without costs
Inés Márquez Purchasing Purchase orders, suppliers, MRP and receipts, with purchase costs
Tomás Rivas Maintenance The machines and their plans, work orders and breakdowns, corrective actions and the replenishment of tools and spare parts, with their cost
Sergio Blanco Finance Customer and supplier invoices, collections and payments, bank reconciliation, accounting and tax (sending to the Tax Agency), with every amount and without defence
Teresa Lozano External auditor Read only access to what an audit reviews: parts, routings, WOs, quality, nonconformances, gauges, traceability, shipments, suppliers, purchasing, people, machines, the management system, documentation, the standard and the change audit log; without amounts, contacts or defence. Her access ends 30 days after the last demo reload

The chapter The screen and common features explains how the screen shows what a profile cannot see (a padlock instead of the figure), and Profiles and permissions what exactly each profile allows.

#The proposal video and documents

In the presentation panel on the left there is a video of under five minutes about what Aeromec does. Press ▶ to watch it, ideally with sound; the full-screen button enlarges it and, in the player's ⋮ menu, you can turn on subtitles.

Below it, the Explore the proposal block brings together three documents about Aeromec, meant for whoever is evaluating it:

  • Specification — everything it does, section by section. Opens in a new tab.
  • Presentation — the key processes, animated. Opens in a new tab.
  • Proposal · PDF — a four-page summary that is downloaded to your computer.

If the browser blocks the new tab, Aeromec warns «Could not open the document»: allow pop-ups for the page and press again.

#If you forget your password

Aeromec does not send password-recovery emails: accounts are managed by an administrator. Ask them to go into Users (in their user menu), open your record and use Reset password: they will set a new one (at least 8 characters long), which they should pass on to you securely. The old one stops working immediately. The change is recorded in the access change history.

#Your user menu and «My profile»

At the top right is your user button: your initials, your name and your access (the name of your profile or «Administrator»). Clicking it opens your menu.

The administrator's menu. 12345
Figure 4. The administrator's menu.
  1. 1
    My profile: your details, the language and the theme.
  2. 2
    Connect to Claude: work with Aeromec from a chat with Claude (see Connect to Claude).
  3. 3
    Only administrators see Users and Settings here; the Audit log, whoever has its permission.
  4. 4
    About Aeromec: the version that is running and the tests it passed (see The screen).
  5. 5
    Sign out takes you back to the sign-in screen.
Marta's menu («Comercial», the sales profile): no Users, Settings or Audit log. 1
Figure 5. Marta's menu («Comercial», the sales profile): no Users, Settings or Audit log.
  1. 1
    Everyone else has My profile, Connect to Claude, About Aeromec and Sign out.
The «My profile» dialog. 12345
Figure 6. The «My profile» dialog.
  1. 1
    Job title: your position in the company, as the administrator entered it.
  2. 2
    Access: «Administrator» or your access profiles. If you have several, they are joined with «+».
  3. 3
    Language: ES (Spanish) or EN (English). It switches the whole application instantly.
  4. 4
    Theme: light, «System» (whatever your computer or phone uses) or dark.
  5. 5
    Close the dialog: the changes are already applied.
How to change the language or the theme from «My profile»
  1. Click your user button, at the top right, and choose My profile.

  2. Under Language, click ES or EN.

  3. Under Theme, click the sun (light), the automatic icon («System») or the moon (dark).

  4. Click Close.

#The shop-floor terminal

The shop tablets usually have a session open for a user with the Shop-floor operator profile (in the demo, Rafael Moreno). That profile only has the terminal, so Aeromec opens it full screen, with no sidebar: at the top, the brand, help, language and user; below, the machines and their queues. Each operator then identifies themselves on the terminal itself with their four-digit PIN, without closing the tablet's session. It is all explained in Shop-floor terminal.

If your profile has the terminal and other sections (the shop supervisor, for example), the terminal opens from the sidebar and, at the top right, Leave terminal takes you back to the rest of the application.

#Signing out

How to sign out
  1. Click your user button, at the top right.

  2. Choose Sign out (in red, at the end of the menu).

You are back on the sign-in screen. Always do it on a shared computer: otherwise the session stays open even if you close the tab.

#If your user has no access profile

A user who is not an administrator needs at least one access profile to see anything. If an administrator creates your account without a profile (or removes all of them), when you sign in you will see the No access profile screen: «Your user has no access profile assigned yet, so nothing can be shown. Ask an administrator to assign one.», with your email and the Sign out button. When the administrator assigns you a profile, sign in again. The same screen appears when your access has reached its end date (see below).

#If your access has an end date

An administrator can give a user an access end date: it is the usual thing for an external auditor, a consultant or someone working in the shop for a few weeks. Until then, your user menu reminds you of it below your email.

The menu of Teresa, the demo's external auditor: her access ends on a set date. 12
Figure 7. The menu of Teresa, the demo's external auditor: her access ends on a set date.
  1. 1
    Your access ends on …: the date set by the administrator, in amber.
  2. 2
    Her profile, External auditor, is read only; it includes the change Audit log.

From the day after that date you can no longer see or do anything: when you sign in you get the No access profile screen with the notice «Your access to Aeromec ended on … If you need to continue, ask an administrator to extend it.» and the Sign out button. Your data and what you did are kept; only the door is closed. To extend the date or remove it, see Users and profiles.

#Signing in from a phone or tablet

The sign-in screen on a phone: the form and, below it, the demo accounts. 12
Figure 8. The sign-in screen on a phone: the form and, below it, the demo accounts.
  1. 1
    The same form: email, password and Sign in.
  2. 2
    The demo accounts, one below the other. Scroll down to see the rest, the video and the proposal documents.

Aeromec works the same way in the browser of a phone or a tablet. If you are going to use it often, add it to the home screen from the browser menu («Add to Home Screen»): it will open like any other app.

Getting started

The screen and what is common

The parts of the screen and everything that works the same way in every section: the sidebar, the search, the Create button, help, the notification bell, lists, records with their documents and changes, forms, the electronic signature and the Signatures tab, the ⓘ icons, what your profile hides, «About» and the phone and tablet version.

Who uses it: Everyone who uses AeromecAccess: none; what you see depends on your access profile

Every section of Aeromec shares the same structure and the same building blocks: the side bar to move around, the top bar with search and the button to create things, lists that are searched and filtered the same way, records that open on the right with their documents and their changes, and forms with the same buttons. What you learn here works on any screen.

The only exception is the shop-floor terminal: it opens full screen, without the side bar, to be used on a tablet next to the machine (see Shop-floor terminal).

#The parts of the screen

The Aeromec screen: side bar on the left, top bar along the top and, below it, the content of the section. 1234
Figure 9. The Aeromec screen: side bar on the left, top bar along the top and, below it, the content of the section.
  1. 1
    Side bar: the sections, grouped by area. The section you are in is highlighted.
  2. 2
    Help menu, fixed at the foot: this manual and the interactive guides.
  3. 3
    Top bar: the title of the section and the tools that work on any screen (details below).
  4. 4
    The content of the section; it changes when you choose another one in the side bar.
The left-hand side of the top bar. 12
Figure 10. The left-hand side of the top bar.
  1. 1
    The title of the section you are in.
  2. 2
    The global search: click it or press ⌘K (Mac) / Ctrl+K (Windows).
The right-hand side of the top bar. 123456
Figure 11. The right-hand side of the top bar.
  1. 1
    Help for the screen you are on, with its animated guides (also with the F1 key).
  2. 2
    Create: add a work order, a quote, a customer, an NCR… from any screen.
  3. 3
    Language: Spanish or English.
  4. 4
    Theme: the moon switches to dark mode; in dark mode, the sun goes back to light.
  5. 5
    The notification bell, with the ones you have not read (see Your notifications).
  6. 6
    Your user menu, with your name and your access profile underneath.

#Your notifications: the bell

The bell in the top bar brings you what concerns you: not everything that happens in the shop (that is on the Dashboard), but what you have to resolve, approve, read or keep an eye on according to your profile. The red number is the notifications you have not read yet; it refreshes by itself every few minutes. The bell is also on the shop-floor terminal.

Carmen's notifications (Quality): new ones are highlighted and have a blue dot. 12345
Figure 12. Carmen's notifications (Quality): new ones are highlighted and have a blue dot.
  1. 1
    How many you have unread.
  2. 2
    Marcar todos como leídos at once.
  3. 3
    Settings: which notifications you want and whether by email too.
  4. 4
    A notification: what happened, the details and when. Click it to open its record (the work order, the NCR, the maintenance work order, the gauge…) and it is marked as read.
  5. 5
    Whether email sending is active on this installation.

What the bell notifies and to whom (each person only gets the types that make sense for their profile):

Notification When it arrives To whom
Shop-floor incidents An operator logs an incident at the terminal Whoever resolves it: machine down, maintenance (it opens its work order); material shortage, warehouse and planning; program error and fixture, engineering; broken tool, warehouse; instrument, quality. All of them, the shop supervisor
Non-conformances An NCR is opened Whoever dispositions NCRs; if it blocks a work order, also whoever releases work orders
Assigned to you You are made owner of a maintenance work order, an action, a change or an NCR You
Awaiting your approval A change moves to evaluation, a document revision is sent for approval, a concession is requested from the customer Whoever approves changes, documents or concessions
Documents to read A revision of a document in your distribution is approved Every person in its distribution
Customer complaints A complaint is registered Quality and sales
New orders A customer order comes in (in the app or through an integration) Sales and planning
Receipts to inspect The warehouse receives material that needs inspection Quality: the notification opens the pending inspection
SCAR answers A supplier answers a SCAR Quality, to verify and close it
Expiries Once a day: calibrations, qualifications, supplier approvals and scopes (Nadcap…) and fixture verifications overdue or due soon Whoever maintains them; your qualification, you; the gauge you have on loan, you
Overdue deadlines Once a day: your actions, unanswered complaints, SCARs with no answer, maintenance work orders and periodic document reviews The owner of each one
Deliveries at risk Once a day: work orders that will not make their delivery date Planning and, for customer orders, sales

In Preferencias de avisos (in the bell or in your user menu) you choose, type by type, whether you want it in the bell and also by email. Emails go to your user's address, in your language, with a link that opens the record.

Carmen's notification settings. 1234
Figure 13. Carmen's notification settings.
  1. 1
    Which address emails go to and whether sending is active on this installation.
  2. 2
    Each type of notification you can get; the ⓘ explains when it arrives and to whom.
  3. 3
    In the app: in the bell.
  4. 4
    By email: an email as well.

#Your user menu

Clicking your name, at the top right, opens your user menu. What is in it depends on your profile: the administration options are only shown to whoever has them.

Elena's menu (administrator). 123456
Figure 14. Elena's menu (administrator).
  1. 1
    My profile: your job title and your access, and the language and theme you prefer.
  2. 2
    Preferencias de avisos: which bell notifications you want and whether by email too.
  3. 3
    Connect to Claude: work with Aeromec from a chat with Claude (see Connect to Claude).
  4. 4
    Users and Settings (administrators only) and Audit log (with the «See the change audit log» permission).
  5. 5
    About Aeromec: the version that is running and the tests it passed (see below).
  6. 6
    Sign out: you leave Aeromec and go back to the sign-in screen.
Marta's, from the Sales profile. 1
Figure 15. Marta's, from the Sales profile.
  1. 1
    No administration options: Marta goes straight from Connect to Claude to About Aeromec and Sign out.

If your user has an access end date (for example, an external auditor), the menu reminds you of it below your email: «Your access ends on …». After that date you can no longer see anything (see Signing in to Aeromec).

#About Aeromec

About Aeromec, in your user menu, tells you which version of Aeromec is running: when it was deployed, with which database changes and which automated tests it passed when it was installed. Anyone can open it.

The «About Aeromec» dialog. 12345
Figure 16. The «About Aeromec» dialog.
  1. 1
    The running version and when it was deployed.
  2. 2
    The latest migration (the latest change to the database) and the code revision that was installed.
  3. 3
    Tests passed at deployment: the smoke tests (the basics work) and the security tests, with how many passed and in how many files.
  4. 4
    The standards Aeromec is designed to.
  5. 5
    The ⓘ explains what this record is for in an audit.

Every time a new version is installed it is recorded with its result; earlier ones appear below, under Previous versions (in the demo, which is reloaded every day, there is only the development one). The full history and the verified backups are in Standard, in its validation view.

#The side bar

The sections are grouped by area, in the order the shop works: from the quote to the payment. You only see the ones your access profile allows: someone in Sales does not get, for example, Planning or Gauges, and the shop-floor operator only has the terminal.

Area Sections
Overview Dashboard
Sales Customers · Programmes · Quotes · Sales orders · Integrations
Engineering Items · Routings & costing · Changes
Production Work orders · Planning · Shop-floor terminal · Shop-floor monitor · Maintenance
Quality Inspection & FAI · Nonconformances · Gauges
Quality system Management system · Documentation · Standard
Logistics Warehouse · Traceability · Shipments
Supply MRP · Purchasing · Suppliers
Resources Work centres · People · Competence & training
Finance Invoices · Payables · Banking · Accounting · Tax · Reports
Administration Users · Settings · Audit log (on a computer, in the user menu)

The Quality system group brings together what does not belong to one part or one WO but to the whole shop: objectives, risks, audits and the management review; the system documentation; and the standard, with what each clause requires and where Aeromec covers it.

If the list does not fit, the bar scrolls; the Help menu always stays at the foot. When you change section, the screen you leave goes back to its initial state: if you had searched or filtered something, you will find it unfiltered when you come back.

On a tablet or a medium-sized window, the side bar narrows and only shows the icons. 123
Figure 17. On a tablet or a medium-sized window, the side bar narrows and only shows the icons.
  1. 1
    Each icon is a section (hover over it to see its name); the areas are separated by a line.
  2. 2
    The Help menu stays at the foot.
  3. 3
    The search box narrows to make room for the title (and still opens with ⌘K / Ctrl+K).
The «Help» menu at the foot of the side bar. 123
Figure 18. The «Help» menu at the foot of the side bar.
  1. 1
    Opens this manual at the chapter for the screen you are on (here, Work orders), in another tab.
  2. 2
    Opens the full manual, from the cover page.
  3. 3
    Opens the interactive guides for the screen (the same as the Help button at the top or F1).

#Help: interactive guides and this manual

There are two kinds of help inside Aeromec:

  • This manual, which opens from the Help menu at the foot of the side bar, straight at the chapter for the screen you are on, in your language.
  • The screen help with its interactive guides: the Help button in the top bar (or the F1 key) opens a panel on the right with what the section is and the tasks you can do in it. Each guide plays over real screenshots of the app: a pointer goes to the spot, highlights it and performs the action while each step is explained. On the shop-floor terminal, the button is in its header.
The help panel for the Dashboard. 1234
Figure 19. The help panel for the Dashboard.
  1. 1
    Where you are: what this section is and what it is for.
  2. 2
    Link to this section's chapter in the manual.
  3. 3
    What you can do here: one guide per task, with its goal and the number of steps. Click it to watch it.
  4. 4
    Guides that work on any screen: searching, creating, understanding a figure, language and theme, documents, the manual and Claude.
An interactive guide playing: «Find anything». 12345
Figure 20. An interactive guide playing: «Find anything».
  1. 1
    The goal of the guide: what you are going to learn to do.
  2. 2
    The animated screenshot: the element of each step is highlighted and the pointer performs the action (click, type, scroll).
  3. 3
    The explanation of the current step.
  4. 4
    Controls: previous step, pause / play (at the end, «watch again») and next step. The guide moves on by itself.
  5. 5
    The list of steps: click any of them to jump straight to it.

#Finding anything

The global search in the top bar finds, from any screen, work orders, serial numbers, lots and heats, quotes, parts and items, suppliers, gauges, machines, people, routings, sales orders, integration messages, shipments, purchase orders, invoices, customers, maintenance equipment and work orders, programmes, changes, customer complaints, supplier SCARs, audits, risks, requirements, quality-system documents and the documents of each record (by their name or their note). It searches by name and also by number or code: «OF-2026-0158», «AMP-1015», a heat, a serial number, a CoC or the customer's order reference. It only shows what your profile can see.

Searching for «Bética»: documents, customer complaints, suppliers, orders, shipments and, further down, the customer. 1234
Figure 21. Searching for «Bética»: documents, customer complaints, suppliers, orders, shipments and, further down, the customer.
  1. 1
    Type at least two letters; results appear by themselves as you type.
  2. 2
    Results are grouped by type, each with its icon.
  3. 3
    Each result with the details that identify it (code, city, customer, status…). Click it to go to its section with the record open.
  4. 4
    The same name finds the customer and also their orders, delivery notes, complaints and documents.
How to find something with the search
  1. Click the search box in the top bar, or press ⌘K (Mac) / Ctrl+K (Windows).

  2. Type part of the name, the number or the code (for example «AMP-1015», «Bética» or a heat).

  3. Click the result you are looking for.

Aeromec takes you to its section and opens the record on the right; a document opens where you are, without changing section. Close the record with ✕ or Esc to go back to the list.

#Creating something new

The Create button in the top bar adds, without leaving where you are, any record your profile is allowed to create: it opens the same form as the «New…» button in its section. Once saved, Aeromec takes you to that section.

What an administrator can create. 12345678
Figure 22. What an administrator can create.
  1. 1
    Production: a work order.
  2. 2
    Sales: a programme, a quote, a sales order and importing a cXML order from the customer.
  3. 3
    Logistics and supply: a delivery note and a purchase order.
  4. 4
    A customer; below it, the invoice to a customer, recording a supplier's invoice and, in Accounting, a manual entry or a fixed asset.
  5. 5
    Engineering: item, routing and change request; and a supplier.
  6. 6
    Quality: NCR, customer complaint, inspection, gauge and gauge loan.
  7. 7
    Quality system: an audit, a risk and a document; and a maintenance work order.
  8. 8
    Resources: a machine or workstation, a person and a training session.
What Marta (Sales profile) can create. 1
Figure 23. What Marta (Sales profile) can create.
  1. 1
    Only the options the profile allows appear: here programme, quote, order, cXML order, customer and item.
Option Takes you to Who sees it
New WO Work orders whoever can edit work orders
New programme Programmes whoever can edit programmes
New quote · New order · New customer Quotes · Sales orders · Customers whoever can edit them
Import cXML order Integrations whoever sees Integrations
New shipment Shipments whoever can ship
New purchase order · New supplier Purchasing · Suppliers whoever can edit them
New invoice Invoices whoever can invoice
Record invoice Payables whoever edits payables and sees costs
New entry · New asset Accounting whoever can post entries
New item · New routing Items · Routings & costing whoever can edit them
New change Changes whoever manages changes
Raise NCR · New complaint · Record inspection Nonconformances · Inspection & FAI whoever edits quality
New gauge · New loan Gauges whoever edits quality
New audit · New risk Management system whoever edits the management system
New document Documentation whoever edits documentation
New work order Maintenance whoever edits maintenance
New work centre · New person Work centres · People whoever edits resources
New training Competence & training whoever edits training

If you cancel the form, nothing is created and you stay where you were. If your profile cannot create anything, the button does not appear.

#Language and theme

The language selector. 12
Figure 24. The language selector.
  1. 1
    The globe shows the current language (EN).
  2. 2
    Choose Spanish or English: the whole application changes at once.
«My profile», in the user menu. 123
Figure 25. «My profile», in the user menu.
  1. 1
    Your job title and your access (your profile, or Administrator).
  2. 2
    The language.
  3. 3
    The theme: light, system (follows your computer or phone) or dark.
Planning in dark mode. 12
Figure 26. Planning in dark mode.
  1. 1
    In dark mode, the sun goes back to light mode.
  2. 2
    Everything adapts: dark backgrounds, light text and the same colours for statuses and alerts. Designed for the office in low light and for screens on the shop floor.

The language and the theme are remembered in the browser you use. The PDFs Aeromec produces (routing sheets, delivery notes, CoCs, FAIs…) and the demo data stay in Spanish even if you change the language.

#Lists

Almost every section starts with a list: work orders, quotes, customers, purchase orders, lots, NCRs, invoices… They all work the same way. This is the Purchasing one.

A list (Purchasing): indicators, search, filters, the table and its footer with totals. 12345678
Figure 27. A list (Purchasing): indicators, search, filters, the table and its footer with totals.
  1. 1
    Indicators for the section (here, open orders, late orders, open amount and awaiting inspection). Each with its ⓘ.
  2. 2
    List search: filters instantly on the main columns (number, supplier, reference…).
  3. 3
    Export CSV: downloads what you see into a file that opens in Excel (if your profile allows it).
  4. 4
    The button to add a record in this section.
  5. 5
    Quick filters, each with its count. Only one is active at a time; those that do not fit are seen by scrolling the row.
  6. 6
    Sort: click a column header to sort from lowest to highest, again for highest to lowest and a third time to remove the sorting.
  7. 7
    Each row is a record: click it to open its record. Those that need attention (here, late ones) have a coloured background.
  8. 8
    The footer adds up the visible rows: how many there are, amounts and warnings.
Searching, filtering and sorting at once: raw-material purchase orders containing «aceros», highest amount first. 1234
Figure 28. Searching, filtering and sorting at once: raw-material purchase orders containing «aceros», highest amount first.
  1. 1
    What you type is searched in all the main columns; the ✕ on the right clears the search.
  2. 2
    The active filter, highlighted. The search applies within the filter; the count of each filter does not change when you search.
  3. 3
    Sorted by amount, highest first: the arrow shows the direction.
  4. 4
    The footer adds up again only what is left in view.
How to search, filter, sort and export a list
  1. Choose a quick filter (for example Late). The number next to each filter says how many records it has.

  2. Type one or more words in the list search: the rows that contain all of them are shown, regardless of accents or case.

  3. Click a column header to sort by it; click again to reverse the order.

  4. If your profile allows it, click Export CSV (the download icon) to take those rows into Excel.

  5. Click a row to open its record.

The lists of work orders, sales orders, FAIs (Inspection & FAI), nonconformances, shipments and invoices also have, next to the search box, the Programme filter: choose the aircraft, engine or system (for example, the AR-90) and the list keeps only what belongs to it, on top of the quick filters and the search (see Programmes).

#Records

Clicking a record opens it in a panel that slides in from the right, without losing the list behind it. They all follow the same layout: a header with the name and the actions, and tabs with the information grouped.

The record of a part (AMP-1015). 12345678
Figure 29. The record of a part (AMP-1015).
  1. 1
    The overline: the type and code of the record, with coloured tags showing its status (here, Production) and what you need to know about it (here, that it is a critical part).
  2. 2
    The name and, underneath, its main details.
  3. 3
    Record actions (here, edit). Hover over an icon to see what it does.
  4. 4
    Close the record (also with Esc or by clicking outside the panel).
  5. 5
    Tabs: each one groups part of the information and many show a count. Almost every record has Documents and Changes.
  6. 6
    The strip with the key figures of the record.
  7. 7
    Text in blue is a link: it opens the related record (here, the customer) on top of this one.
  8. 8
    Cards with the details grouped (here, the material); many have their ⓘ next to the title.

If you change something in a record, the list behind it refreshes by itself when you close it. Records you open from another one (a customer from its part, an NCR from its work order) open on top and, when you close them, you go back to the previous one. On a phone, records take up the whole screen.

#The documents of each record

Almost every record has the Documents tab: drawings, 3D models, CNC programs, instructions, certificates (the 3.1 of a heat, the calibration of a gauge, a supplier's approval), reports and photos, kept next to what they document. The number on the tab says how many there are.

The documents of part AMP-1015: its 3D render and the customer's drawing. 1234567
Figure 30. The documents of part AMP-1015: its 3D render and the customer's drawing.
  1. 1
    The Documents tab, with its count.
  2. 2
    Upload documents picks one or more files from your computer.
  3. 3
    Or drag them from your desktop onto the window.
  4. 4
    Each document with its type, its revision, its size, who uploaded it, when, and its note.
  5. 5
    View: PDFs and images open inside Aeromec; CNC programs, as text.
  6. 6
    Download the file exactly as it was uploaded.
  7. 7
    More actions: change its details (name, type, revision, note), mark it obsolete or delete it; for a CNC program on trial, also validate it.
An image inside Aeromec: the 3D render of the part. PDFs open the same way, with the browser's viewer. 1234
Figure 31. An image inside Aeromec: the 3D render of the part. PDFs open the same way, with the browser's viewer.
  1. 1
    The document, the record it belongs to, its type, its revision, its size, who uploaded it, when, and its note.
  2. 2
    Open it in another browser tab or download it.
  3. 3
    The image or the PDF (with the browser's viewer: pages, zoom, print), without leaving Aeromec.
  4. 4
    Its SHA-256 fingerprint: it proves it is the same file that was uploaded.
A CNC program of routing AMP-1015 rev. B, as text. 12
Figure 32. A CNC program of routing AMP-1015 rev. B, as text.
  1. 1
    Which routing and which operation it belongs to, its machine and its program number.
  2. 2
    CNC programs are read with their line numbers, without needing any other software.
How to attach a document to a record
  1. Open the record (a part, a work order, a lot, a supplier…) and click the Documents tab.

  2. Click Upload documents and choose the files, or drag them onto the window.

  3. Check the name, the type (drawing, CNC program, certificate, photo…) and the revision of each one, and add a note if needed.

  4. Click the upload button.

The documents stay in the record and in the global search (by their name). Up to 20 MB per file: PDF, images, text and CNC programs, Office, CAD and zip.

A drawing or a program that is no longer valid is not deleted: it is marked obsolete with its reason, it is kept and it no longer reaches the shop-floor terminal. A new CNC program starts on trial (the terminal shows it with a warning) until someone with the qualification validates it with their signature after making the first good part; once validated, it does not change. The documentation of the quality system itself (manual, procedures, instructions) has its own section: Documentation.

#The Changes tab

With the See the change audit log permission, records also have the Changes tab: who created or changed that record, when and which fields, newest first. Click a line to see each field before and after the change.

The «Changes» tab of a work order that has just been released. 12
Figure 33. The «Changes» tab of a work order that has just been released.
  1. 1
    The Changes tab.
  2. 2
    Each change: the fields that changed, when and who (and, if it was done at the shop-floor terminal or from Claude, it says so). Click it to see the detail.
The detail of the change: the release of the work order. 1234
Figure 34. The detail of the change: the release of the work order.
  1. 1
    What was done (created, changed or deleted), in which kind of record and which one.
  2. 2
    When and who.
  3. 3
    Each field before, struck through in red…
  4. 4
    …and after, in green.

All the changes of all the records, together with sign-ins and sign-outs, are in Audit log.

#Forms

To create or change a record you use a form in a window. They are all filled in and saved the same way.

The form to edit a customer. 12345
Figure 35. The form to edit a customer.
  1. 1
    The title says what you are doing («Edit customer», «New WO»…) and, when editing, on which record.
  2. 2
    Fields with an asterisk are required. Those with an arrow are chosen from a list.
  3. 3
    A switch for yes-or-no options, with its explanation.
  4. 4
    Long forms are split into blocks with a heading; scroll inside the window to see the rest.
  5. 5
    Save the changes, or Cancel (or the ✕ at the top) to leave without saving.
Choosing the part for a new work order. 12
Figure 36. Choosing the part for a new work order.
  1. 1
    Fields that point to another record (part, customer, supplier, machine…) open a selector with search: type a few letters to narrow the list.
  2. 2
    Click the option to choose it; under each one, a detail that tells it apart (here, the customer).
How to fill in and save a form
  1. Fill in at least the fields with an asterisk (*). If any is missing, it is marked in red with «Required» when you save.

  2. Dates are chosen on a calendar and times on a 24-hour clock; lists, by opening them; related records, with the selector and its search. Numbers accept a comma or a point as the decimal separator.

  3. Click Save.

The Saved notice appears at the bottom and the window closes. If something goes wrong (for example, «Your access profile does not allow this»), the notice is shown in red and the form stays open with what you had typed.

#The electronic signature

Whatever inspects, releases, dispositions or approves something is not done with a simple button: it is signed. When you press the button (Ship, Approve, Close…) the electronic signature dialog opens: you type your password again and Aeromec stores your signature bound to the record, with what it means, the date and time, your inspection stamp and a fingerprint of what you signed. These are signed:

Where What is signed
Inspection & FAI Recording an inspection (in-process, final or for the FAI) and the receiving inspection of material; releasing or rejecting an FAI (first article)
Nonconformances Dispositioning an NCR (the decision of the MRB, the material review board), approving a concession, closing or voiding it; the mutilation of scrap; closing a CAPA and a customer complaint
Gauges Recording a calibration
Routings & costing Sending a routing to the customer (reviewed) and approving it
Shipments Shipping: the certificate of conformity (CoC) is signed by whoever releases the shipment
Quotes and sales orders The contract review
Suppliers A supplier evaluation (it decides their approval) and closing a SCAR
Items The validation and verifications of a tool or fixture
Changes Approving or rejecting a change request
Documentation Reviewing and approving a document revision; validating a CNC program
Management system Closing an audit and approving the minutes of the management review
The signature when shipping a delivery note: José Luis, from the warehouse, releases the shipment with his inspection stamp (it was not signed in the screenshot). 1234567
Figure 37. The signature when shipping a delivery note: José Luis, from the warehouse, releases the shipment with his inspection stamp (it was not signed in the screenshot).
  1. 1
    The meaning of the signature: here, Released. Other times it is performed, reviewed, approved, rejected, dispositioned (MRB), verified, closed, voided or corrected.
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the record and what it involves (here, the delivery note, the customer and the parts leaving).
  3. 3
    Who signs: your name, your job title and your inspection stamp with its scope. Releasing product needs a current stamp with that scope (here, CoC).
  4. 4
    The statement you make by signing, depending on the meaning.
  5. 5
    Your password, the one you sign in with. The database checks it and it is not stored.
  6. 6
    What remains: the signature bound to the record with the date, the time, your stamp and the fingerprint of its content. It cannot be changed or deleted.
  7. 7
    Sign becomes active once you type the password. Cancel saves nothing.
How to sign
  1. Press the action button (for example Ship on a delivery note, Approve FAI on an FAI or Close NCR on a nonconformance).

  2. Read in the dialog what you are signing and the meaning of your signature, and check that it is your name and your stamp.

  3. Type your password and press Sign (or Enter).

The action is carried out and the signature appears on the record's Signatures tab (and, on the FAI and the CoC, printed on its PDF). If you cancel, nothing is saved: «Nothing is saved without a signature».

What the database checks before accepting your signature:

  • The password. After 5 failed attempts signing is locked for 15 minutes («Too many failed attempts»); the dialog tells you how many attempts you have left. A signature is valid for a single action and expires after 3 minutes.
  • The inspection stamp, when what you sign releases or dispositions product: receiving, in-process, final, FAI, MRB, CoC or calibration. Without a current stamp with that scope the dialog says so («You do not hold a current inspection stamp with … scope») and Sign stays disabled. Stamps are issued and withdrawn by Quality (see Stamps & signatures).
  • Your qualification. If the qualification that entitles you to that signature has expired (or you do not hold it), you cannot sign with that scope until it is renewed (see Competence & training).

#The Signatures tab

The records of whatever is signed —inspections, FAIs, NCRs, CAPAs, calibrations, routing revisions, shipments and, in the quality-system sections, document revisions, audits, management reviews, supplier evaluations, contract reviews, changes…— have the Signatures tab: who signed, when, with which stamp and what each signature means, and whether what is there today is still exactly what was signed.

The «Signatures» tab of a closed NCR: the MRB disposition and the closure, both signed by Quality. 12345678
Figure 38. The «Signatures» tab of a closed NCR: the MRB disposition and the closure, both signed by Quality.
  1. 1
    The Signatures tab.
  2. 2
    The record's status, in one sentence: here, the content is exactly what was signed.
  3. 3
    Intact, altered or being edited (see the table below).
  4. 4
    Fingerprint chain: each signature keeps the fingerprint of what was signed, linked to that of the previous signature. «Correct» if none is missing or added.
  5. 5
    Retain until: the date until which the record must be kept.
  6. 6
    Each signature: its meaning, who, with which stamp, the date and time and the start of its SHA-256 fingerprint. The latest, at the bottom.
  7. 7
    Verify again: recomputes the fingerprint with today's content.
  8. 8
    Correct a value in a signed record, with a reason and a signature.
Status What it means
Intact (green) What is there today is exactly what was signed.
Altered (red) Something changed without using Correct —only possible by touching the database outside Aeromec— and the notice says what.
Being edited (blue) The record has become a draft again (for example, a routing the customer rejected); its earlier signatures stay in the list.
Unsigned It is still a draft: it is edited or deleted like any other. If someone cancelled the signature when saving it, Sign now appears.

The SHA-256 fingerprint is like a fingerprint of the content: a code that changes completely if a single character changes. When signing, a copy of what was signed and its fingerprint are stored; Verify again recomputes it with today's content and compares them. To check every signed record at once, before an audit, Quality has Check integrity in Stamps & signatures.

Correcting a signed NCR: only the fields that can be corrected and, mandatory, the reason. 1234
Figure 39. Correcting a signed NCR: only the fields that can be corrected and, mandatory, the reason.
  1. 1
    Which record you are correcting; the previous value will be kept on the Changes tab.
  2. 2
    Only the fields that can be corrected for that type of record appear, with their current value. Here the quantity is corrected.
  3. 3
    The reason, mandatory: it is kept in the correction's signature.
  4. 4
    Save asks for your signature with the meaning Corrected (it was not pressed in the screenshot).
How to correct a signed record
  1. Open the record and click the Signatures tab.

  2. Press Correct. Only the fields that can be corrected for that type of record appear.

  3. Change what is wrong and type the reason for the correction.

  4. Click Save and sign with your password.

The record is corrected and signed again: the correction is added to its signatures with its reason, and the previous value stays on the Changes tab. The status is still «Intact».

#The ⓘ help on figures and acronyms

Next to many indicators, charts, cards, acronyms (FAI, OTD, cXML…) and permissions there is a small ⓘ. Clicking it opens an explanation in three parts: what it shows, how it is calculated (with an example) and how to read it. It is the quickest way to find out where a figure comes from.

The ⓘ help of the «Cost variance» indicator in Work orders. 123
Figure 40. The ⓘ help of the «Cost variance» indicator in Work orders.
  1. 1
    What it shows.
  2. 2
    How it is calculated, with its formula and an example.
  3. 3
    How to read it: when it is a good or a bad sign and what to do. Click outside or press Esc to close it.

#What your profile does not let you see

Each access profile decides which sections you see, which data you can look at and what you can create or change. What is not for you shows up like this:

  • Sections: those your profile does not allow are not in the side bar, nor are their results in the search.
  • Figures: a cost, a price or a margin you cannot see does not appear (the column or the indicator disappears) or shows as a grey padlock (hovering over it: «Hidden by your access profile»).
  • Contact details: emails and phone numbers of customers and suppliers, the same.
  • Defence: defence or export-controlled parts, customers, quotes, orders, work orders and invoices are only seen with «Defence data»; for everyone else they do not exist. Whoever sees them recognises them by a purple shield.
  • Buttons and tabs: the create, edit or delete buttons are not there if you do not have that permission, nor are the tabs of the sections you do not have.
  • Export: the export to CSV button only appears if your profile allows it.
The same customer as seen by Lucía (Engineering office): no contact details, no amounts and no editing. 12345
Figure 41. The same customer as seen by Lucía (Engineering office): no contact details, no amounts and no editing.
  1. 1
    Her side bar only has the sections for her work.
  2. 2
    No edit pencil: she can look at customers but not change them.
  3. 3
    No quotes, orders or invoices tabs (she does not have those sections), and no changes tab.
  4. 4
    The backlog, in parts rather than euros; no outstanding receivables.
  5. 5
    The contact details, with the padlock: her profile does not see them.

#Aeromec on a phone and a tablet

On a phone (or a narrow window) Aeromec rearranges the screen: the side bar hides in a drawer, indicators and filters scroll sideways, lists turn into cards (one per record, no columns) and records and forms take up the whole screen. On a tablet, the side bar shows icons only (see above).

Work orders on a phone. 123456
Figure 42. Work orders on a phone.
  1. 1
    The menu (☰) opens the drawer with the sections.
  2. 2
    The magnifying glass opens the global search.
  3. 3
    Help for the screen.
  4. 4
    Create (⊕).
  5. 5
    Your user menu: language and theme are changed from «My profile».
  6. 6
    Each record, on a card: tap it to open its record.
The drawer with the sections, scrolled to the end. 123
Figure 43. The drawer with the sections, scrolled to the end.
  1. 1
    The same areas and sections as on a computer; swipe to see them all.
  2. 2
    On a phone, administrators have Users, Settings and Audit log here.
  3. 3
    The Help menu, at the foot.
A work order's record on a phone, full screen. 12
Figure 44. A work order's record on a phone, full screen.
  1. 1
    The ✕ goes back to the list.
  2. 2
    The tabs scroll sideways.
The global search on a phone. 1
Figure 45. The global search on a phone.
  1. 1
    The same search, with the results grouped by type.

#Keyboard shortcuts

Key What it does
⌘K (Mac) / Ctrl+K (Windows) Opens the global search
F1 Opens the help and the guides for the screen you are on (also on the shop-floor terminal)
Esc Closes the open record, menu, ⓘ help or help panel (not forms)
Enter On the sign-in screen, with the password typed, signs you in

The ⌘K/Ctrl+K and F1 shortcuts work from the page; if you have a record or a window open, close it first.

#Direct links

You can bookmark a particular section or share a link that opens Aeromec in it, by adding to the end of the address:

Add To
?seccion=ordenes open that section directly (panel, ofertas, planificacion, calidad, almacen, facturas…)
?lang=en open Aeromec in English (es, Spanish)
?tema=dark open in dark mode (light, light)

They can be combined with &: for example ?seccion=planificacion&lang=en. In the demo, ?demo=carmen signs straight in with Carmen's account (also elena, javier, lucia, marta, pablo, antonio, rafael, jose, ines, tomas, sergio or teresa).

Overview

Dashboard

The shop at a glance: on-time delivery, work orders on the floor and late, this week's deliveries, machine load, quality, material, calibrations, programmes, management system, competence and training, maintenance, quotes, invoicing and overdue items. Each profile sees its own blocks and every figure takes you to the list where it gets resolved.

Who uses it: Every office profile; above all management and department headsAccess: «Dashboard» section; each block, its own «Dashboard · …» permission

The Dashboard is the first screen you see when you open Aeromec. It brings together on a single page whatever needs attention in the shop today: late or stopped work orders (WOs), customer deliveries falling due, machine load, nonconformances, held material, gauges whose calibration is about to expire, how the programmes are going, the objectives and risks of the management system, qualifications that are expiring, machines that are down, open quotes, what has been invoiced and what is owed.

It is not a report to be read from top to bottom, but a board of alerts: every figure is a shortcut that opens the section with the filter already applied, and every row opens its record. That way you go from «there are 4 late WOs» to the actual WO in two clicks.

The dashboard refreshes itself every 2 minutes (and when you press the reload button). What you see depends on your profile: each block has its own permission, and the database only calculates the blocks you can see, without amounts if your profile cannot see prices or costs.

  1. 1DashboardA figure in red or amber: something needs attention.
  2. 2Filtered listClicking it opens the section with that filter applied.
  3. 3RecordA row in the block opens the WO, the order, the NCR or the lot directly.
  4. 4ResolveFrom the record: reschedule, ship, decide the disposition, inspect…
How to get to the problem from the dashboard.

#Key figures

At the top, below the greeting with today's date, are the shop's key figures in large cards. Only those matching your profile's blocks appear; the administrator and management see all six.

The Dashboard key figures, as the administrator sees them. 12345678
Figure 46. The Dashboard key figures, as the administrator sees them.
  1. 1
    The dashboard reloads itself every 2 minutes; to its left, when it was last updated. This button reloads it straight away.
  2. 2
    OTD 12 months: the percentage of customer deliveries shipped on time over the last year, against the company target.
  3. 3
    WOs on the floor: released, in-progress or blocked work orders; below, how many have a machine running right now and how many are late.
  4. 4
    Invoiced this month (excluding VAT) and, in the badge, the change against the same days of the previous month.
  5. 5
    Open NCRs: nonconformances not yet closed and their average age in days.
  6. 6
    Open quotes: their amount (or their number, if your profile cannot see prices), how many there are and the win rate.
  7. 7
    Scrap · 30 days: the percentage of parts scrapped over the last month against the target.
  8. 8
    Every card and every block has its ⓘ: what it shows, how it is calculated and how to read it.

The whole card is a shortcut:

Card What it counts Clicking it opens
OTD 12 months Deliveries shipped complete by their date ÷ deliveries evaluated in 12 months. OTD stands for On-Time Delivery Sales orders
WOs on the floor Work orders released, in progress or blocked by a nonconformance Work orders
Invoiced this month Taxable base of the invoices issued since the 1st; credit notes subtract Invoices
Open NCRs Internal, supplier or customer nonconformances (Non-Conformance Report) not yet closed Nonconformances
Open quotes Draft or sent quotes, with the amount of their first quantity break Quotes
Scrap · 30 days Scrapped parts ÷ (finished parts + scrapped) over the last 30 days Indicators in Nonconformances
The ⓘ of «OTD 12 months» open: every figure is explained right where it appears. 123
Figure 47. The ⓘ of «OTD 12 months» open: every figure is explained right where it appears.
  1. 1
    What it shows.
  2. 2
    How it is calculated, with an example.
  3. 3
    How to read it and what to do. Close it with Esc or by clicking outside.

#Work orders and customer deliveries

Below, the blocks in two columns. The first two answer the question of the day: which WOs need a push and which deliveries are in danger? Each block has its ⓘ and a View all button that opens the full section.

The «Work orders» block. 123456
Figure 48. The «Work orders» block.
  1. 1
    On the floor: WOs released, in progress or blocked.
  2. 2
    Late: their due date has passed.
  3. 3
    At risk: the plan ends after the due date or there are operations that should already have finished.
  4. 4
    Blocked: a nonconformance (NCR) has stopped them.
  5. 5
    FAI pending: WOs whose first article inspection has not been released.
  6. 6
    The most critical WOs (blocked, late and at risk), with their customer, the reason and their progress. Click one to open its record.
The «Customer deliveries» block. 1234
Figure 49. The «Customer deliveries» block.
  1. 1
    This week: deliveries due in the next 7 days.
  2. 2
    Late: their date has passed and they still have parts to ship.
  3. 3
    At risk: the WO serving them finishes too late. Opens the delays and risks in Planning.
  4. 4
    Each delivery: date, part and open parts; below, the order, the customer and the WO serving it; on the right, its value. Late ones in red, at-risk ones in amber.

In Work orders, each figure opens the work order list with its filter (Late, At risk, Blocked, FAI pending); the list below shows the six most critical. In Customer deliveries, This week and Late open the sales orders with that filter, and At risk takes you to the delays and risks in Planning. The rows are the deliveries due in the next 14 days plus the overdue ones, most urgent first.

#Shop load and on-time delivery

The «Shop load» block. 1234
Figure 50. The «Shop load» block.
  1. 1
    Machines running right now, with a time record open in the terminal. Opens the Shop-floor monitor.
  2. 2
    Stopped or in maintenance: machines with an open breakdown or in maintenance.
  3. 3
    This week's bottleneck: the most loaded machine and its load percentage.
  4. 4
    Hours per week for the whole shop: actual in past weeks (grey), planned in the coming ones (blue) and capacity (amber line). The current week is highlighted.
The «On-time delivery by month (OTD)» block. 12
Figure 51. The «On-time delivery by month (OTD)» block.
  1. 1
    How many deliveries have been evaluated in the last 12 months: those shipped complete and those already overdue and unshipped.
  2. 2
    One bar per month with its OTD; the green line is the company target. The current month, highlighted, is not over yet.

Shop load adds up the hours of every machine per week: what was actually worked in past weeks and what is planned in the coming ones, against capacity (which drops in weeks with public holidays). If the blue bars go above the amber line, that week cannot fit what is planned; if three or four weeks ahead they are well below it, the order book is running short. The per-machine detail is in Planning.

On-time delivery by month is OTD month by month. It is the first thing aerospace customers look at when rating a supplier: if a month drops, the deliveries block and the sales orders show which deliveries explain it.

#Quality, material and calibrations

The «Nonconformances» block. 1234
Figure 52. The «Nonconformances» block.
  1. 1
    No disposition: NCRs where it has not yet been decided what to do with the parts (rework, concession, scrap or return).
  2. 2
    Waiting for customer: concessions requested from the customer with no answer yet.
  3. 3
    Blocking a WO: they stop a work order until the disposition is decided.
  4. 4
    Each NCR with its description, origin, part and disposition; on the right, the days it has been open (in red, more than 30).
The «Material requirements (MRP)» block. 1234
Figure 53. The «Material requirements (MRP)» block.
  1. 1
    Pending proposals from the last run (date and time, below the title): purchases and production not yet generated.
  2. 2
    To order today or late: their order date has arrived.
  3. 3
    Expected stock-outs and late receipts of purchases.
  4. 4
    The most urgent proposals: item, quantity, supplier (or in-house production) and the alert. Order now if the order date has passed.
The «Quarantined and blocked material» block. 123
Figure 54. The «Quarantined and blocked material» block.
  1. 1
    Lots in quarantine: raw material received and awaiting receiving inspection. It cannot be used until released.
  2. 2
    Blocked lots: rejected at inspection, awaiting return.
  3. 3
    Each lot with its material, its heat (the melt the material comes from, shown on its 3.1 certificate), the supplier and the quantity held. Click to open the lot.
The «Gauge calibration» block. 1234
Figure 55. The «Gauge calibration» block.
  1. 1
    Overdue: they cannot be used to measure or be lent out in the terminal.
  2. 2
    Due in 30 days: they need to go to the laboratory.
  3. 3
    Out of service: withdrawn from use.
  4. 4
    Each gauge with its status, the station where it is and when it fell due or will fall due.
  • Nonconformances: the figures open Nonconformances. An NCR that blocks a WO is the first one to resolve: until it has a disposition, the work order is stopped.
  • Material requirements (MRP): the result of the latest requirements run of the MRP (Material Requirements Planning): what has to be bought or made, how much and when.
  • Quarantined and blocked material: what Quality has to inspect or return. If a WO needs a lot in quarantine, inspect it before it stops the shop.
  • Gauge calibration: the measuring equipment to be checked (Gauges). The database rejects any measurement taken with an overdue gauge, so send them to the laboratory before they hold up an inspection.

#Scrap, quotes, invoicing and overdue payments

The «Scrap» block, with costs (profile that can see costs). 12
Figure 56. The «Scrap» block, with costs (profile that can see costs).
  1. 1
    Scrap for the current month (in red if above target) and for the previous month, with their parts.
  2. 2
    What scrap has cost this month and over 12 months (only with permission to see costs) and the main cause over the last 90 days.
The «Quotes» block. 1234
Figure 57. The «Quotes» block.
  1. 1
    Open: draft or sent.
  2. 2
    Awaiting answer: sent to the customer.
  3. 3
    Expiring this week: sent quotes whose validity ends within 7 days.
  4. 4
    The open amount (with permission to see prices) and the win rate: won over decided in 12 months.
The «Sales» block. 12
Figure 58. The «Sales» block.
  1. 1
    What has been invoiced in the year to date (excluding VAT) and, if there is data, the comparison with the same period last year.
  2. 2
    Monthly invoicing for the last 12 months; the current month, highlighted.
The «Overdue receivables and payables» block. 12
Figure 59. The «Overdue receivables and payables» block.
  1. 1
    Overdue receivables (customer invoices past due and unpaid), total outstanding receivables and overdue payables to suppliers.
  2. 2
    Overdue customer invoices, the oldest first, with the days overdue and what is still to be collected. Click one to open it and record the payment.

The Quotes block takes you to Quotes; Sales and Overdue receivables and payables, to Invoices (with the overdue filter). Scrap opens the indicators in Nonconformances, where the cause Pareto shows where to act.

#Programmes and management system

Two blocks look beyond the day-to-day: how the programmes are going (the aircraft, engine or system the parts are made for) and the quality management system (objectives, risks, audits and actions).

The «Programmes» block. 1234
Figure 60. The «Programmes» block.
  1. 1
    Active programmes and, of those, the ones with a planned rate increase.
  2. 2
    Late milestones across all programmes (in red) and their open NCRs.
  3. 3
    The programmes' backlog still to be delivered (only with «See prices»).
  4. 4
    Each programme with its rate (aircraft per month and, after the arrow, the next one), its phase, the next milestone or the late ones, its NCRs and its 12-month OTD. Click to open its record.
The «Management system» block. 12345
Figure 61. The «Management system» block.
  1. 1
    The quality objectives that are met and those not met or at risk.
  2. 2
    Open risks at critical or high level.
  3. 3
    Audit findings still open and overdue actions.
  4. 4
    Customer satisfaction over 12 months (out of 5) and the date of the last approved management review.
  5. 5
    The upcoming audits (internal, certification, customer or supplier audits), in red if they are late. Click one to open it.
  • Programmes opens Programmes. A programme shows in red if it has late milestones and in amber if its OTD is below the company target. It is what you look at before each review with the customer.
  • Management system opens Management system: each figure in its view (objectives, risks, audits or actions), with the filter applied. It is what management follows between one management review and the next.

#Competence and training, and maintenance

The «Competence & training» block. 12345
Figure 62. The «Competence & training» block.
  1. 1
    Expired: qualifications past their date. They block what they enable (a machine, a signature).
  2. 2
    Expiring in 30 days: they need renewing now.
  3. 3
    Missing: competences someone's job requires and they do not hold.
  4. 4
    The hours of training over the last 12 months.
  5. 5
    Each person with the qualification that is expiring or missing (and the machine that requires it); below, the upcoming training sessions.
The «Maintenance» block. 12345
Figure 63. The «Maintenance» block.
  1. 1
    Over the last 90 days: availability, MTBF, MTTR and the cost this month (with «See costs»).
  2. 2
    Machines down (because of a breakdown or in maintenance) and unresolved urgent breakdowns.
  3. 3
    Overdue plans and tools and spare parts to order.
  4. 4
    The alerts: corrective actions past due, tools out of stock…
  5. 5
    A new work order without leaving the dashboard.

Competence & training opens Competence & training on its expiry list or its matrix. An expired qualification is not just another alert: Aeromec will not let you sign with that stamp scope, validate programs, close internal audits or start a time record on the machine that requires it, so it is worth renewing it before it expires.

The Maintenance block sums up the state of the machines: how many are down, the urgent breakdowns, the overdue maintenance plans and the tools and spare parts that need ordering, with the availability, the MTBF (running hours between breakdowns) and the MTTR (mean time to repair) over the last 90 days. Each figure opens Maintenance with its filter.

#Getting to the problem from the dashboard

How to go from a dashboard figure to solving it
  1. Look for the figures in red (something is already wrong: delays, blocks, overdue items) and in amber (something will go wrong unless you act).

  2. Click the figure: for example, Late in Work orders opens the work order list with the Late filter already applied.

  3. Or click a row in the block directly: the blocked WO opens its record, which says why it is stopped and links to the NCR blocking it.

  4. Resolve it from the record and go back to the Dashboard from the sidebar: within two minutes at most (or when you press reload) the figure is updated.

#What each profile sees

Each block has its own permission. With the demo's sample profiles, the dashboard looks like this:

Profile Blocks
System administrator and Management All of them, with costs, prices and amounts
Engineering office Work orders, Shop load and Nonconformances
Sales Customer deliveries, OTD, Programmes and Quotes (with prices, without costs)
Planning Work orders, Deliveries, OTD, Shop load, MRP, Quarantined material, Programmes and Maintenance
Shop supervisor Work orders, Shop load, Nonconformances, Scrap (without its cost), Calibrations, Competence & training and Maintenance
Maintenance Shop load and Maintenance (with its cost)
Quality OTD, Nonconformances, Scrap, Quarantined material, Calibrations, Management system and Competence & training
Warehouse Deliveries and Quarantined material
Purchasing MRP and Quarantined material
Administration (finance) OTD, Sales, Overdue receivables and payables and Competence & training

The shop-floor operator has no dashboard: they only see the shop-floor terminal. Nor does the external auditor: they go straight into the first of their sections, read only.

Marta's dashboard (Sales profile): only her blocks, with prices but without costs or anything defence-related. 123456
Figure 64. Marta's dashboard (Sales profile): only her blocks, with prices but without costs or anything defence-related.
  1. 1
    Only the key figures for her blocks: OTD and Open quotes, now in wider cards.
  2. 2
    The amount of open quotes without the defence ones: her profile cannot see them, so they do not count in her figures.
  3. 3
    Customer deliveries, also without the defence ones: that is why there may be fewer than on the management dashboard.
  4. 4
    OTD by month, calculated only with the deliveries she can see.
  5. 5
    The programmes, without the defence ones.
  6. 6
    The Quotes block, with the open amount because her profile can see prices. She has no production, quality, material or finance blocks.

#Tips

Overview

Connect to Claude

Work with Aeromec from a chat with Claude, Anthropic's artificial intelligence assistant: ask it about work orders, machine queues, quotes, quality, stock or traceability and, if your profile allows it, ask it to make changes. Always with your own permissions and with keys you can revoke.

Who uses it: Everyone who uses Aeromec in the office (the shop-floor operator works at the terminal)Access: «Use from Claude» in your access profile; for Claude to make changes, also «Make changes from Claude»

Claude is Anthropic's artificial intelligence assistant. Aeromec comes with a connector for Claude: a secure connection through which Claude can work with your Aeromec data from a chat, on claude.ai (in the browser), in the desktop and mobile apps and in Claude Code. Instead of going screen by screen, you ask in your own words:

  • «Which work orders are late or at risk, and why?»
  • «How is the F5-01 queue going, and what comes next?»
  • «Which parts and which customers have material from heat A10G6677?»
  • «Quote Talleres Aeronáuticos del Ebro for AMP-1015 in 10, 25 and 50 pieces, with the suggested prices.»
  • «Receive purchase order PC-2026-0176: everything has arrived, heat H45812 with its 3.1 certificate.»

Claude enters Aeromec as you: it sees what you see in the app and can only change what you can change.

#What you can ask it

  • Look things up: search for anything (like the app's ⌘K search); open the full record of a work order, a part, a routing, a customer, a supplier, a quote, an order, a purchase order, a delivery note, an invoice, an NCR, a CAPA, a FAI, a lot, a machine, a piece of equipment, a maintenance work order, a person or a gauge, with everything hanging from it and its documents; pull any list with filters, sorting and totals; the Dashboard, the monthly indicators (OTD, PPM, scrap, OEE…) and the reports; the machine queues with their hour-by-hour forecast; the cost breakdown of a part (if you see costs), the traceability of a serial number, a work order, a heat or a lot and maintenance: breakdowns, work orders, plans that are due, tools and spare parts to order, KPIs (MTBF, MTTR) and the impact of a failed verification.
  • Look up the quality system: a programme (the parts demand its rate calls for against what has been ordered, and «what if the rate goes to N?» with the load on each machine); the management system summary (objectives, risks, findings, actions, satisfaction) and the management review inputs for a period; the requirements that apply to a quote, an order, a part or a purchase order; a supplier's scope, evaluations and SCARs and why a purchase order cannot be sent; the EN 9131 data of an NCR and the affected shipped product; the impact of a change request and a part's configuration; competences and training; the signatures on a record and the inspection stamps; and how Aeromec covers each clause of ISO 9001 and EN 9100, with the backups and their verified restore.
  • Make changes, if your profile allows it: add, change or delete customers and contacts, suppliers, items, quotes, orders and purchase orders with their lines, NCRs, CAPAs, supplier invoices, payments, collections and demand forecasts for the MRP; set the quantity price breaks of a quote (also the suggested ones), send it, make a new version or accept it (the order is created with its deliveries) if its contract review is signed; create, release, reschedule, close or cancel a work order; move an operation in a machine's queue; move a routing to internal review or record the customer's rejection; send, confirm and receive a purchase order (with its heat and its 3.1 certificate); prepare a delivery note; invoice; run the MRP and generate its proposals; resolve a shop-floor incident; in maintenance, generate the plan orders, schedule a stop in the best slot, start, record spare parts and close a work order, follow up a corrective action and order the tools and spare parts that are missing; and in the quality system, programmes with their milestones, reviews and MRP forecasts, requirements, risks, audit findings (and opening their CAPA), actions, customer ratings, training courses and competences, draft change requests, customer complaints, FOD inspections, customer property and suppliers' approved scope and customers' approved sources.

Claude fills in the same things as the app: document numbers, the validity of the quote, the customer's or supplier's terms, the purchase price or the due dates. A quote, an order or a purchase order is created with all its lines at once, and if anything fails nothing is created. You can name things the way you know them («the blocked AMP-1015 work order», «the Aceros Finos Vascos purchase order») or by their number (OF-…, OFE-…, PV-…, PC-…, NCR-…, OT-…, MC-…).

Aeromec also offers five ready-made prompts that Claude shows next to the connector: Resumen del día (summary of the day), Estado de una OF (status of a work order), Entregas en riesgo (deliveries at risk), Mantenimiento de la semana (this week's maintenance) and Preparar una oferta (prepare a quote).

#Why it is safe

  • Claude enters as you, never with more permissions. The connector has no permissions of its own: every request from Claude carries your identity, and the Aeromec database applies your access profiles to it exactly as in the app: sections, sensitive data (costs, prices, margins, contacts), defence and export-controlled data, and actions. What your profile cannot see, Claude cannot see either.
  • Never the terminal or administration. Time records and gauge loans of the shop-floor terminal are not recorded from Claude (they go with the person and their PIN, next to the machine), nor are users, profiles, permissions, keys or Settings managed: that is only done in the app.
  • With a personal key you can revoke. Claude identifies itself with an access key of yours. Aeromec does not store the key, only a fingerprint to recognise it, so it is shown only once. It is revoked with a button and access is cut on the next request; it is also cut if it expires, if an administrator disables your user or if your profile loses the permission.
  • Everything is recorded. Every time Claude looks something up or changes something it goes into the activity log: what it did, on what, and whether it was allowed. What it changes also goes into the Audit log and the Changes tab of each record, flagged «from Claude».
  • Without the «Export CSV» permission, Claude gets at most 50 rows per query (500 with it).
  • Your password is not stored in Claude. When you connect, you type your user and password on an Aeromec page, not in Claude; Claude only receives a key you can revoke.

The connector follows MCP (Model Context Protocol), the open standard for connecting AI assistants with applications.

#What Claude asks you first

Claude always asks you to confirm before:

  • deleting anything (it cannot be undone; and what is in use, like a customer with orders, cannot be deleted: it suggests deactivating it);
  • releasing a work order to the shop floor (it first tells you which materials there are, how much free stock, and which one Aeromec proposes);
  • receiving a purchase order, preparing a delivery note or invoicing (the invoice is issued);
  • accepting a quote (it creates the order with its deliveries);
  • and creating or changing anything you have not explicitly asked for.

Afterwards it sums up what it did with the numbers (OF-…, OFE-…, PV-…, PC-…, NCR-…), so you can find it in the app.

#Claude never signs

Whatever inspects, releases, dispositions or approves is signed in the app with a person's electronic signature: their password and, if it releases product, their inspection stamp. A signature belongs to a person and states what it means; that is why Aeromec does not let Claude sign, not even with the key of someone who can. From a chat you cannot:

  • record a product inspection (in-process, final or the receiving inspection of a lot), nor release or reject an FAI;
  • disposition, grant a concession on, mutilate, close or void an NCR, notify an escape, close a CAPA, a SCAR or a complaint;
  • record a calibration, send a routing to the customer or record its approval, nor verify a fixture;
  • ship a delivery note with its CoC (Claude prepares it; whoever holds the CoC stamp ships it in the app);
  • sign the contract review of a quote or an order, evaluate or approve a supplier, approve a change request or a document, close an audit or approve the management review.

What it does do is explain why something is stuck and what is missing: that a quote cannot be sent because its contract review is missing, that a purchase order cannot be sent because the supplier's Nadcap has expired, that a work order cannot be released because its fixture's verification has expired. And it can read the signatures of any record you can see, with their stamp and status.

#Where it is in Aeromec

Everything about the connector is in your user menu, at the top right: Connect to Claude. Everyone who works in the app has it, whatever their profile.

On a computer: your user menu. 12
Figure 65. On a computer: your user menu.
  1. 1
    Click your name to open the menu.
  2. 2
    Connect to Claude opens the connector panel.
On a phone: the same menu, on your initials. 1
Figure 66. On a phone: the same menu, on your initials.
  1. 1
    On a phone too, from your initials, at the top right.

A panel opens with four parts: what Claude can do for you, how to connect it, your access keys and the recent activity.

Marta's «Connect to Claude» panel, from the Sales profile. 1234567
Figure 67. Marta's «Connect to Claude» panel, from the Sales profile.
  1. 1
    The ⓘ explains how the connector works and why it is safe.
  2. 2
    What your profile lets you do from Claude: Look things up and, if it has it, Make changes (if not, it is greyed out, with the no-entry sign).
  3. 3
    The sensitive data you see, and Claude with you. Marta sees prices and contacts, but not costs, margins or defence data.
  4. 4
    Examples of what you can ask. Those that make changes only appear if your profile can make them.
  5. 5
    Opens this chapter of the manual.
  6. 6
    The steps to connect it and the connector address, with the copy button: this is what you paste into Claude.
  7. 7
    For Claude Code, the command to add it with a key.

#What Claude can do depending on your profile

It is decided by two switches in your access profile, in the Assistant (Claude) group: Use from Claude (without it, none of your keys work) and Make changes from Claude (without it, Claude only looks things up, even if you can edit in the app). On top of that, Claude can only do what the other actions of your profile allow. This is how the demo profiles come set up:

Profile (person) Look up Make changes What you can ask Claude
Administrator (Elena) Yes Yes Everything she does in the app, except managing users, profiles, keys and Settings.
Management (Javier) Yes Yes The whole business with costs, prices and margins (dashboard, reports, cost breakdowns, queues, programmes, management system). Routings, concessions and changes are approved in the app, with a signature.
Engineering office (Lucía) Yes Yes Items, routings (up to internal review), cost breakdowns with costs, requirements, change requests, work orders and quality. No prices.
Sales (Marta) Yes Yes Customers, quotes (suggested quantity price breaks, send and accept → order, with the contract review signed in the app), orders, programmes, requirements and items. Sees prices, not costs or margins, and nothing about defence.
Planning (Pablo) Yes Yes Create, release and reschedule work orders, move operations in the machine queues, programmes and their forecasts, MRP and purchasing.
Shop supervisor (Antonio) Yes Yes Work orders (release, reschedule, close), machine queues and shop-floor incidents. No costs.
Quality (Carmen) Yes Yes NCRs and CAPAs (whatever is signed, in the app), complaints, FOD, management system, suppliers' scope, gauges and traceability.
Warehouse (José Luis) Yes Yes Stock and lots, receiving purchase orders, preparing delivery notes (shipped in the app, with a signature), traceability. No costs.
Purchasing (Inés) Yes Yes Purchase orders (send —if the supplier is approved and the purchase is within its scope—, confirm, receive), suppliers and MRP.
Administration (Sergio) Yes No Look up invoices, collections, payments and reports. Invoices, collections and payments are issued in the app, with the whole document in view.
Shop-floor operator (Rafael) No No Nothing: he works at the shop-floor terminal, with his PIN.
External auditor (Teresa) No No Nothing: she looks things up in the app, read-only, until her access end date.

If a profile should only look things up from Claude, an administrator turns off Make changes from Claude with a switch (see Profiles and permissions): Claude will still answer, but it will not be able to create or change anything, and your panel will say so.

Sergio's panel (Administration): Claude only looks things up. 12
Figure 68. Sergio's panel (Administration): Claude only looks things up.
  1. 1
    Make changes, greyed out: his profile does not have «Make changes from Claude».
  2. 2
    And the panel says so: Claude cannot create or change anything. The examples are only queries.

#Connecting Claude: on the web, on the desktop and on a phone

Claude's custom connectors are available on all its plans: Free (with a single connector), Pro, Max, Team and Enterprise. Connect it once on claude.ai or in the desktop app: what you connect also appears in the other Claude apps with the same account, including the mobile one.

How to connect Claude to Aeromec
  1. In Aeromec, open your user menu → Connect to Claude and copy the connector address with the copy button. In the public demo it is https://aeromec.app/mcp.

  2. In Claude, go to Settings → Connectors and click Add custom connector.

  3. Type the name Aeromec and paste the address into the URL field. Leave the advanced settings blank: Aeromec introduces itself. Click Add.

  4. Click Connect next to Aeromec. The Connect Claude to Aeromec page opens (below).

  5. On the With my user tab, type the email and password you use to sign in to Aeromec (a «Claude» key valid for 90 days is created). Or, on With a key, paste a key you have created in Aeromec.

  6. Click Allow access. You go back to Claude with Aeromec connected.

  7. In a conversation, open the + tools menu (Search and tools) and turn on Aeromec. Ask whatever you need: the first time Claude uses each Aeromec tool it will ask for your permission, and you can always allow it.

Claude now works with Aeromec as you. In your Aeromec panel, the key appears under «My access keys» as «Created when connecting Claude».
The Aeromec page Claude opens when you click «Connect»: with your user… 1234
Figure 69. The Aeromec page Claude opens when you click «Connect»: with your user…
  1. 1
    What Claude will be able to do and where to revoke access.
  2. 2
    With my user: your Aeromec email and password, the same as in the app.
  3. 3
    Aeromec creates a «Claude» key valid for 90 days.
  4. 4
    Allow access takes you back to Claude with the connector connected.
…or with a key created in Aeromec. 12
Figure 70. …or with a key created in Aeromec.
  1. 1
    With a key: if you prefer not to type your password here.
  2. 2
    Paste the access key you created in Aeromec (it starts with «aeromec_»).

#Claude Code

Claude Code (Claude in the terminal, for people who program or automate) connects with a key created in Aeromec. When you create the key, Aeromec gives you the command ready to use; it is this one, with your key at the end:

claude mcp add --transport http aeromec https://aeromec.app/mcp --header "Authorization: Bearer aeromec_…"

You can also add it without the key (without --header) and, inside Claude Code, type /mcp → aeromec → Authenticate: the same Aeromec page opens in the browser. Any other program compatible with that open standard connects the same way, with the connector address and a key.

#Your access keys

An access key is what Claude uses to enter Aeromec as you. There are two ways to get one:

  • When you connect Claude with your user and password (With my user tab), Aeromec creates a 90-day «Claude» key. You do not have to do anything else.
  • By creating it yourself in Aeromec, to paste it on the With a key tab or for Claude Code.

Each person can have up to 20 active keys at a time.

How to create a key
  1. Open your user menu → Connect to Claude and scroll down to My access keys.

  2. Click New key.

  3. Type a name that tells you where you are going to use it («Claude on my laptop», «Claude Code»…) and choose when it expires: In 30 days, In 90 days, In a year or Never.

  4. Click Create key.

  5. Aeromec shows you the key only once, with the button to copy it and the Claude Code command ready to use. Copy it and click Done.

The key appears in your list as «Created in Aeromec». If you lose it, it cannot be shown again: revoke it and create another one.
A new key: its name and when it expires. 123
Figure 71. A new key: its name and when it expires.
  1. 1
    Name: where you are going to use it, so you can recognise it later in the list.
  2. 2
    Expires: in 30 days, in 90 days (the one Aeromec suggests), in a year or never.
  3. 3
    Create key creates it and shows it to you only once (it has not been clicked in the screenshot).

Further down the panel are your keys and what Claude has done with them:

The key Marta connected Claude with, and her recent activity. 12345
Figure 72. The key Marta connected Claude with, and her recent activity.
  1. 1
    Each key, with its name and its status: Active, Expired or Revoked.
  2. 2
    The start of the key (aeromec_…), how it was created, when it expires, when it was last used, how many calls it has made and how many changes in the last 7 days.
  3. 3
    Revoke cuts that key's access on Claude's next request.
  4. 4
    The activity: each call from Claude, newest first. Here, a change: Marta sent a quote from the chat.
  5. 5
    Denied: Claude asked for something the profile does not allow (here, a part's cost breakdown, with its costs) and Aeromec did not give it.

Each line of the activity is one call from Claude: a lookup (magnifying glass) or a change (pencil), with what it looked up or changed and when. If it could not be done, it carries the Denied label (your profile does not allow it) or Error. Revoked and expired keys are hidden; Show revoked and expired shows them, with who revoked each one and when.

How to revoke a key
  1. Open your user menu → Connect to Claude and scroll down to My access keys.

  2. Click Revoke on the key you want to cut off.

  3. Confirm it. It cannot be undone: to connect again, you will need a new key.

Claude loses access with that key on its next request. The revocation is recorded in the Users change log.

#What Claude changes is recorded

What Claude creates or changes goes into the Audit log as if you had done it, under your name, and also flagged from Claude. Whoever has the «See the change audit log» permission finds it with the From Claude filter in Audit log and in the Changes tab of each record.

Audit log with the «From Claude» filter: what Marta and Pablo changed from a chat. 1234
Figure 73. Audit log with the «From Claude» filter: what Marta and Pablo changed from a chat.
  1. 1
    The From Claude filter: only what was done through the connector.
  2. 2
    Who: the person who owns the key, with the from Claude flag.
  3. 3
    What: the record that changed. Click the row to see each field before and after.
  4. 4
    What was done with a key that was later revoked is also kept (here, the work order Pablo created).
The «Changes» tab of the quote Marta created from Claude. 12
Figure 74. The «Changes» tab of the quote Marta created from Claude.
  1. 1
    The record's Changes tab.
  2. 2
    The creation of the quote, with when, who and from Claude.

#For the administrator: Users → Claude

An administrator sees the keys of every user and everyone's activity in Users → Claude tab, and can revoke any of them. Creating and revoking keys is also recorded in the Users change log.

Users → Claude: everyone's keys; below, everyone's latest activity. 1234
Figure 75. Users → Claude: everyone's keys; below, everyone's latest activity.
  1. 1
    The Claude tab in Users (administrators only).
  2. 2
    Active keys, how many people use Claude, calls and changes in the last 7 days.
  3. 3
    Each key, with whose it is.
  4. 4
    The administrator can revoke anyone's key.

#Disconnecting Claude

To stop using Aeromec from Claude, do it on both sides:

  1. In Claude: Settings → Connectors → Aeromec → Disconnect, or remove the connector.
  2. In Aeromec: revoke the key it was using (in Connect to Claude → My access keys).

If you just want Claude not to use Aeromec in one conversation, turn Aeromec off in that conversation's + tools menu.

#If something does not work

  • Claude says the key is not valid or that it cannot connect. The key has been revoked or has expired: check it in My access keys (it will show as Revoked or Expired). In Claude, disconnect Aeromec and connect it again with your user, or paste a new key.
  • On the Aeromec page, the email or the password is not accepted. They are the same ones you use to sign in to the app. If your user is disabled, you will not be able to connect: talk to an administrator.
  • The panel says «Your profile does not allow using Aeromec from Claude». Your profile does not have Use from Claude: ask an administrator to turn it on. In the meantime, none of your keys work.
  • Claude looks things up but does not make changes. Your profile does not have Make changes from Claude, or it does not have the permission for that action in the app (for example, «Release work orders»).
  • Claude says it cannot see some data (a cost, a price, a phone number, a defence part). Your profile does not see it, and neither does Claude: that is expected.
  • Claude says something «is signed in the app». That is expected: inspecting, releasing, dispositioning, approving or shipping are signed by a person in Aeromec (see Claude never signs).
  • Claude does not use Aeromec when you ask. Turn Aeromec on in the conversation's + tools menu and, when Claude asks for permission to use an Aeromec tool, allow it.
  • I cannot add it on Claude's Free plan. That plan allows a single custom connector: remove the one you have or move to another plan.
  • In the public demo, what Claude did has disappeared. The demo data goes back to its initial state every day at 08:00 (Spain time). Your active keys, on the other hand, are kept: there is no need to connect again.

Sales

Customers

Each customer with their quality requirements (FAI, routing approval, CoC, 3.1 certificate, serial number, approved sources), their tax details (country and VAT number), their contacts and terms, their open backlog, how well they are served (OTD) and what they owe; and in tabs, their parts, quotes, orders, invoices, the clauses of their quality manual, the subcontractors they accept, their complaints and their documents.

Who uses it: Sales, management, administration; engineering office and quality for referenceAccess: «Customers» section; to add or edit, «Edit customers»; their requirements, «Edit requirements»; their approved sources, «Approve suppliers»

Customers holds every company Aeromec makes parts for. There are four types:

  • Integrator: the manufacturer of the aircraft or of the complete system, which buys from many suppliers.
  • Tier 1: a first-tier supplier to the integrator (structures, engines, landing gear…) that orders parts.
  • Defence: a defence contractor.
  • MRO (Maintenance, Repair and Overhaul): maintenance shops that order spares.

The most important part of each record is the quality requirements: what that customer demands on every delivery. Aeromec applies them by itself in the other sections (it does not let you release a WO without an approved routing if the customer requires it, it does not ship without an approved FAI, it puts the CoC and the 3.1 certificates with every delivery note, it does not let you buy a treatment from a subcontractor the customer does not accept…), so it pays to get them right when the customer is created. In addition, the clauses of their quality manual are kept one by one as requirements, and the contract review of every quote and every order brings them along by itself.

A customer from the defence sector or flagged for export control (dual-use material) is protected: they and everything belonging to them (parts, quotes, orders, WOs, invoices) are only visible to those with the Defence data permission.

The customer's country decides how their invoices are issued: with VAT if they are in Spain, without VAT as an intra-Community supply if they are in another EU country (with their VAT number) and as an export if they are outside the EU.

  1. 1CustomerQuality requirements, contacts and payment terms.
  2. 2QuoteThe answer to their request for quotation, with quantity prices.
  3. 3OrderTheir scheduled deliveries: OTD is measured against their dates.
  4. 4ManufacturingWO with the approved routing and the FAI if required.
  5. 5ShippingDelivery note with its CoC, heats, 3.1 certificates and serial numbers.
  6. 6Invoice and paymentFalls due according to their payment terms.
Everything done with a customer stays in their record.

#The customer list

The customer list: indicators, search, filters and the table with requirements, backlog, OTD and what they owe. 123456789
Figure 76. The customer list: indicators, search, filters and the table with requirements, backlog, OTD and what they owe.
  1. 1
    Active customers (inactive ones do not count).
  2. 2
    Open backlog: what has been ordered and not yet shipped by all customers, in euros (or in parts if your profile cannot see prices).
  3. 3
    OTD 12 months for all customers together: green if it meets the company target, amber if it is close and red if not.
  4. 4
    Receivables: issued invoices not yet collected; in red if any is already overdue.
  5. 5
    The search box finds by name, code, legal name, tax ID, VAT number, city, country or contact person.
  6. 6
    The filters, with their counts (see the table below).
  7. 7
    Export CSV downloads the list you are looking at.
  8. 8
    New customer opens the form to add one.
  9. 9
    The customer's requirements as acronyms: FAI, RUTA (routing approval), S/N (serial number) and 3.1. Hover over each to read it. The CoC is not shown here: nearly every customer requires it.
Filter What it shows
Active All active customers (the default)
Integrators · Tier 1 · MRO Active customers of that type
Defence Defence-sector or export-controlled customers (only with the «Defence data» permission)
With backlog Those with ordered parts still to ship
Routing approval required Those who must approve how each part is made before it is released
Outside Spain Those in other countries: their invoices carry no VAT (intra-Community supply or export)
Inactive Deactivated customers, who no longer appear when choosing a customer

Each row shows the name with its code (CLI-…), type, city and, for customers outside Spain, their country code (FR, PT…); a purple shield if it is a defence customer; their requirements; how many of their parts Aeromec has on file; their backlog (open parts and the next delivery) and its value; their 12-month OTD and what they have receivable. Click a column header to sort by it and a row to open the record.

Customers who require routing approval, sorted by OTD from lowest to highest. 1234
Figure 77. Customers who require routing approval, sorted by OTD from lowest to highest.
  1. 1
    The Routing approval required filter: the integrators, the defence customers and the engine Tier 1s.
  2. 2
    Clicking the OTD 12 m header sorts by it, worst-served first.
  3. 3
    Each customer's OTD, coloured against the target: here, one in red.
  4. 4
    Receivable: in red if part of what they owe is already overdue, in amber if it is still within terms and a dash if they owe nothing.

#Quality requirements

Every requirement you tick on the customer record is then applied in the rest of Aeromec, without anyone having to remember it:

Requirement What it is What Aeromec does
Requires FAI (AS9102) First article inspection per the EN 9102 / AS9102 standard: the first part of a new reference, or of a drawing revision change, is measured in full The WO for a part without an approved FAI includes its FAI; parts from a WO whose FAI has not been released are not shipped
Requires routing approval The customer approves how the part is made (operations, machines, material) before production A WO cannot be released with a routing revision the customer has not approved
Requires certificate of conformity (CoC) The signed statement that the parts meet the order and the drawing On shipping, the CoC is issued with its number and travels with the delivery note
Requires 3.1 material certificate The material maker's certificate per EN 10204 type 3.1, with the heat number The delivery note and the CoC list the heats and their 3.1 certificates
Serial-number traceability Each part carries its own number and is traced individually The WO generates the serial numbers and the delivery note says which ones ship
Only accepts subcontractors from its list The customer has a list of approved sources: the suppliers it accepts for each special process (treatments, tests…) A purchase of an outside-processing operation for their parts from a supplier not on their list cannot be sent (see Requirements and approved sources)

Below the six switches, Quality clauses & notes holds anything else the customer asks for (frozen process approval, source inspection, special packing…), which can be read on their record and their orders. For a clause to reach the contract review and, if needed, the suppliers, add it as a requirement (see Requirements and approved sources).

#Adding a customer

The «New customer» form (not saved). 123456789
Figure 78. The «New customer» form (not saved).
  1. 1
    Customer type (required): Integrator, Tier 1, Defence or MRO.
  2. 2
    Name (required), as the customer is called day to day. Next to it, legal name and tax ID, for quotes, delivery notes and invoices.
  3. 3
    Tax details: the country (required, from a list: it decides the VAT on their invoices) and the VAT number, with the country prefix, to invoice them without VAT if they are in another EU country.
  4. 4
    Sector (Civil, Defence or Civil and defence) and export control (defence or dual-use material): the customer and everything belonging to them will only be visible to those with «Defence data».
  5. 5
    The six quality requirements. The CoC and the 3.1 certificate come ticked by default.
  6. 6
    Quality clauses & notes: anything else the customer asks for.
  7. 7
    The company's contact details: email, phone, address, city, postcode and website.
  8. 8
    Payment terms in days (60 by default; 0 = cash) and payment method: they set when their invoices fall due.
  9. 9
    Active: inactive customers do not appear when choosing a customer in quotes and orders. At the end, internal notes.
How to add a customer
  1. Click New customer (or Create → New customer in the top bar, from any screen).

  2. Choose the Customer type, type the Name and, if you have them, the legal name and tax ID.

  3. Under Tax details, choose the Country and, if they are in another EU country, enter their VAT number (check it in VIES first). If you forget the prefix, Aeromec adds it when saving.

  4. If it is a defence customer, choose the Sector or tick Export control (only if your profile has «Defence data»).

  5. Tick their quality requirements according to their supplier manual or the contract, and copy into Quality clauses & notes anything else they ask for.

  6. Fill in the contact details and the payment terms.

  7. Click Save.

The customer appears in the list and can now be chosen in quotes and orders. Then add their contacts on the record.

#The customer record

Click a customer to open their record on the right. It has the tabs Summary, Contacts, Parts, Quotes, Orders, Invoices, Requirements, Approved sources, Complaints, Documents and Changes (each one only if your profile can see that section). If they do not all fit, the tab row scrolls.

The «Summary» tab of Propulsión Avanzada del Norte, an engine Tier 1 that requires everything. 12345678
Figure 79. The «Summary» tab of Propulsión Avanzada del Norte, an engine Tier 1 that requires everything.
  1. 1
    The customer's code and type; below, the name, legal name, city and sector. A defence customer shows its shield here and an inactive one, the «Inactive» label.
  2. 2
    Edit opens the form with all their details.
  3. 3
    The tabs: contacts, parts, quotes, orders, invoices, requirements, approved sources, complaints, attached documents and the record's change log.
  4. 4
    Their figures: parts on file, backlog (ordered parts not yet shipped) and its value, 12-month OTD and receivables.
  5. 5
    Their quality requirements: the ones they require in green (also whether they only accept subcontractors from their list). Below, their clauses and notes.
  6. 6
    Details & terms: legal name, payment terms and method, website and the date of their last order.
  7. 7
    Tax details: country, tax ID, VAT number and how their invoices are issued (here, domestic, with the company VAT rate).
  8. 8
    Contact details: the main contact, email, phone and address.

#Tax details and VAT number

The Tax details card says how sales to the customer are invoiced, and their country decides it:

Customer's country Their invoices What it requires
Spain Domestic, with the company VAT rate (21 %) Their tax ID (CIF)
Another EU country Intra-Community supplies, exempt from VAT (art. 25 of the Spanish VAT Act): they go to the SII, form 349 and Intrastat Their VAT number, with the country prefix, checked in VIES
Outside the EU Exports, exempt from VAT (art. 21) The export declaration for the goods

The VAT number (NIF-IVA) is the intra-EU VAT identification number: the national number with its country prefix in front (FR, PT, DE…; Greece uses EL). It is checked in VIES (VAT Information Exchange System), the EU register of intra-EU traders. Without a valid VAT number, the supply cannot be exempt.

Linha Técnica MRO (Lisbon): their VAT number lacks the Portuguese prefix. 12345
Figure 80. Linha Técnica MRO (Lisbon): their VAT number lacks the Portuguese prefix.
  1. 1
    The warning: the VAT number is missing the country prefix (PT) and the tax agency accepts their invoices in the SII with errors.
  2. 2
    Fix: PT509876543 fixes it in one click (with «Edit customers»): it saves the VAT number with its prefix.
  3. 3
    The country, with the EU badge if it is another country of the Union.
  4. 4
    The VAT number, in amber while it lacks the prefix.
  5. 5
    Its invoices: intra-Community, exempt from VAT, and which returns they go into.
How to fix the VAT number of an EU customer
  1. Open the customer: if their VAT number lacks the prefix, the warning at the top says so (their delivery notes and invoices flag it too).

  2. Click Fix: PT509876543 (the button suggests the number with their country prefix) or the Edit pencil if the number itself is different.

  3. If an invoice has already been sent to the Tax Agency with the wrong data, retry its submission from Tax: it will go as an amendment (see Invoices).

The warning disappears and later invoices will go through cleanly to the SII, form 349 and Intrastat.

#Contacts

Contacts lists the customer's people you deal with: purchasing, quality, engineering… One of them is the main one (the star): it is the one shown in the record's summary. On one of the customer's quotes, when you edit its details, you choose which contact it is addressed to.

The «Contacts» tab. 12
Figure 81. The «Contacts» tab.
  1. 1
    New contact opens the form.
  2. 2
    Each person with their job title, email and phone. The main one has the star and its label. Click one to change it.
Adding a contact (not saved). 123
Figure 82. Adding a contact (not saved).
  1. 1
    Name (required) and job title.
  2. 2
    Email and phone (only with permission to see contact details).
  3. 3
    Main: the contact shown in the customer's summary.

#Parts, quotes, orders and invoices

The other tabs gather everything the customer has in Aeromec. Each row opens its record.

The «Parts» tab: the customer's references that Aeromec makes. 123
Figure 83. The «Parts» tab: the customer's references that Aeromec makes.
  1. 1
    Each part with its drawing and revision, the current routing with its status, and the WOs in progress.
  2. 2
    The part's status: production, in development, FAI pending or superseded.
  3. 3
    A new part: in development and with its routing sent to the customer for approval.
The «Orders» tab. 1
Figure 84. The «Orders» tab.
  1. 1
    Each order with the customer reference (their purchase order number, PO), the date and how much has shipped; on the right, its status and value. Most recent first.
The «Invoices» tab, with their payment status. 12
Figure 85. The «Invoices» tab, with their payment status.
  1. 1
    Each invoice with its date, the delivery note it invoices, its payment status and the total including VAT.
  2. 2
    Overdue: its due date has passed without being paid in full. Open it to record the payment.

The Quotes tab works the same way: each quote with its number, subject, date and the customer's request reference (RFQ), its status and its amount. All three show up to the 60 most recent documents; to look further back, use the corresponding section with its search box.

Documents holds the customer's files (their supplier quality manual, clauses, contracts…): upload them with Upload documents or by dragging them onto the window; PDFs and images can be viewed without leaving Aeromec. Changes shows who changed the record and what (with the audit permission).

How to see what a customer owes and chase it
  1. In the list, sort by Receivable (those with something overdue in red).

  2. Open the customer: the band shows their receivables.

  3. Go to the Invoices tab: overdue ones carry the Overdue label.

  4. Click the invoice to open it and, when they pay, record the payment (see Invoices). The person to call is under Contact details.

#Requirements and approved sources

Every aerospace customer has its supplier quality manual (in the demo, Aerointegra Systems' QR-14, Aeroestructuras Bética's RQ-200, Halcón Defensa Sistemas' PQA-110 or Nordaero Composites' NC-Q-03). Its clauses are kept on the customer's Requirements tab, one per requirement (REQ-…), with what it requires, its reference (the clause: «QR-14 §3.2») and the document it comes from, which can be in Documentation as an external document.

From there they apply on their own:

  • The contract review of every quote and order from the customer brings them in to be checked before committing (see The contract review).
  • Those flowed down to suppliers go on every purchase order related to their parts (the material or the outside-processing operation), according to the purchase type, and appear on its PDF (see Purchasing).

A programme's requirements (for example, the rate agreed in the long-term agreement) are in its record, in Programmes, and a part's in its own; all of them together, with the company's, in Management system → Requirements.

The «Requirements» tab of Aerointegra Systems: three clauses of its QR-14. 12345
Figure 86. The «Requirements» tab of Aerointegra Systems: three clauses of its QR-14.
  1. 1
    The Requirements tab (with the Management system section).
  2. 2
    How many requirements the customer has; the ⓘ explains where they come from and where they go.
  3. 3
    New requirement adds another clause (with «Edit requirements»).
  4. 4
    Each requirement: its code and title and, below, what it requires. Click it to open its record.
  5. 5
    Its category (FAI, traceability, special processes…) and the customer clause it comes from.
The record of a customer requirement: REQ-014, which is flowed down to outside processing. 123456
Figure 87. The record of a customer requirement: REQ-014, which is flowed down to outside processing.
  1. 1
    The code, the category and whose it is: Customer. Below, the title and the customer.
  2. 2
    Edit requirement (with «Edit requirements»).
  3. 3
    What is required: the text of the clause.
  4. 4
    The reference: the clause of their manual (QR-14 §6.4).
  5. 5
    The document it comes from (the customer's manual, in Documentation).
  6. 6
    To suppliers: which purchases it is flowed down to (here, outside processing). If it is not flowed down, it says so.

The Approved sources tab holds the subcontractors the customer accepts for each special process (anodising, passivation, heat treatment, non-destructive testing, shot peening…), with the reference of their list and its validity. If the customer only accepts those on its list (the switch in its quality requirements), a purchase of an outside-processing operation for their parts from a supplier not on it for that process cannot be sent.

Aerointegra Systems' approved sources (QR-14, annex B): one subcontractor per process, one with its scope expired. 1234
Figure 88. Aerointegra Systems' approved sources (QR-14, annex B): one subcontractor per process, one with its scope expired.
  1. 1
    Whether the customer only accepts those on its list (or any approved supplier with the process in its scope will do). The ⓘ explains it.
  2. 2
    Add approved source (with «Approve suppliers»). Click a row to change it.
  3. 3
    Each source: the supplier, the process it is accepted for, the customer's list, its validity and the supplier's approval status in Aeromec.
  4. 4
    In red, a source that cannot be used: the supplier's scope for that process is not in force (here, its shot-peening Nadcap has expired).

#Complaints and satisfaction

The Complaints tab gathers the customer's formal complaints (about quality, delivery or documentation), each with its number (RCL-…), the customer's reference, the date, what happened and its status. Click one to open it with its containment and response deadlines, its NCR and its CAPA; they are managed in Nonconformances.

Aeroestructuras Bética's complaints. 12
Figure 89. Aeroestructuras Bética's complaints.
  1. 1
    New complaint for this customer (with «Edit quality»).
  2. 2
    Each complaint: number, type and the customer's reference; below, the date and what happened; on the right, its status.

What the customer thinks of Aeromec (their surveys, their scorecards —the rating the customer gives its suppliers, with their OTD and PPM— and meetings) is recorded in Management system → Satisfaction, against what our data says (OTD, PPM and customer NCRs over the last 12 months).

#Editing, deactivating or deleting a customer

With the Edit pencil on the record you can change any detail, the requirements included. To stop a customer appearing when creating quotes and orders without losing their history, switch off Active and save: you will find them under the Inactive filter.

Delete only appears on the form of a customer with no parts and no orders. As soon as there is history, deactivate them.

#What each profile sees

The database hides what your profile must not see: contact details, amounts and defence customers. This is how Lucía, from the engineering office, sees the same record as before:

The record as seen by the Engineering office: no contact details or amounts, and no quotes, orders or invoices tabs. 123
Figure 90. The record as seen by the Engineering office: no contact details or amounts, and no quotes, orders or invoices tabs.
  1. 1
    Only the tabs for the sections in her profile: Contacts, Parts, Requirements, Approved sources and Documents. She has no edit pencil either.
  2. 2
    The band, without the backlog value or the receivables: her profile cannot see prices.
  3. 3
    Contact details with a padlock: «Hidden by your access profile».
The list as seen by Marta (Sales): with prices, but without the defence customers or their filter. 123
Figure 91. The list as seen by Marta (Sales): with prices, but without the defence customers or their filter.
  1. 1
    Eight active customers: the two defence ones do not appear for her, neither in the list nor in the figures.
  2. 2
    She does not have the Defence filter either.
  3. 3
    She sees the backlog and receivables in euros because her profile can see prices.

#Tips

Sales

Programmes

The aircraft, engines and systems you manufacture for (AR-90, TF-38…): their customers, the parts each unit carries, the build rate and the demand it creates, the “what if the rate goes to…?” simulator, the milestones, the reviews with the customer and their actions, and the long-term price agreement.

Who uses it: Sales and planning (programme managers); management, quality and the rest, read-onlyAccess: «Programmes» section; to create them and manage rate, milestones, reviews and agreements, «Edit programmes»; the backlog and prices, «See prices»; defence programmes, «Defence data»

In aerospace you don't manufacture part by part but by programme: a customer's aircraft, engine or system (the AR-90, a 90-seat regional aircraft integrated by Aerointegra Systems; the TF-38, a turbofan from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte…). The customer announces the rate at which it will build (aircraft or engines per month) and reviews with each supplier how its programme is going: on-time deliveries, quality, risks and the upcoming milestones.

In Programmes each one brings together:

  • its customers and the role of each: the integrator (who assembles the aircraft, the OEM) and the Tier 1s (who build the assemblies and buy the parts from you);
  • its parts and how many each aircraft carries: the shipset. With the rate, it gives how many parts the customer will order each month, even before they have been ordered;
  • the rate plan, the 12-month demand and the simulator that tells you whether the plant can cope with a rate increase;
  • its orders, work orders, NCRs and FAIs, and its 12-month indicators (OTD, PPM, scrap, invoiced, margin);
  • the milestones, the programme reviews with their actions and the long-term agreement (LTA) on prices.

Each order line from a customer of the programme is assigned to the programme automatically if the part belongs to it, and its work order inherits it: in Work orders, Sales orders, Nonconformances, FAI, shipments and invoices, the Programme button shows just one programme's records.

  1. 1ProgrammeCustomers, parts and how many each aircraft carries (shipset).
  2. 2RateAircraft per month and its changes: the 12-month parts demand.
  3. 3What if…?Load on each machine at another rate, and the bottleneck.
  4. 4ForecastsWhat the rate requires and has not been ordered, to MRP so you buy in time.
  5. 5ReviewWith the customer: status, agreements and actions with an owner.
A programme, from the rate the customer announces to the shop floor.

#The programme list

Sales → Programmes: the eight demo programmes. 12345678
Figure 92. Sales → Programmes: the eight demo programmes.
  1. 1
    Active programmes, those with a planned rate increase, the backlog (with «See prices»), the late milestones and the open actions.
  2. 2
    Search by code, name, manufacturer or customer.
  3. 3
    New programme (with «Edit programmes»).
  4. 4
    Filters: active, in series, development and ramp-up, spares, with late milestones, defence and all.
  5. 5
    Each programme with its type and customers. The shield marks the defence ones.
  6. 6
    Today's rate and, below it, the next change («→ 5 aircraft/month from…»).
  7. 7
    12-month OTD (in red, below the company target) and quality: PPM and open NCRs.
  8. 8
    The next milestone and its date; the amber row has late milestones (TF-38).

The programme phase goes from development and industrialisation to ramp-up (rate increasing), series, spares (the aircraft is no longer built, but spare parts must still be supplied) and end of programme. The backlog is the order lines still to be delivered; the OTD (on-time delivery), the deliveries made on time; the PPM, the defective parts per million delivered.

#A programme record

The AR-90 record: its summary. 1234567
Figure 93. The AR-90 record: its summary.
  1. 1
    Code, type, phase and rate; below, its customers and the programme manager.
  2. 2
    Edit the programme (with «Edit programmes»).
  3. 3
    Rate, parts and value in the backlog, OTD, PPM and the amount invoiced over 12 months.
  4. 4
    The warnings: an upcoming rate increase, late milestones, a long-term agreement about to expire or pending FAIs.
  5. 5
    The 12-month indicators: OTD with its deliveries, PPM, scrap, open NCRs, pending FAIs, open work orders with their hours, invoiced and margin.
  6. 6
    The programme's customers with their role (integrator, Tier 1) and their contact.
  7. 7
    The upcoming milestones.

The tabs: Parts (the shipset), Rate & demand, Orders (pending lines and the latest delivered), Production (open work orders and the latest finished), Quality (NCRs and FAIs of its parts), Milestones, Reviews, Long-term agreement, Requirements (the programme's own, which the contract review checks and which, if they are flowed down, go to suppliers with every purchase) and Documents.

#Parts and shipset

AR-90 → Parts: how many each aircraft carries. 1234
Figure 94. AR-90 → Parts: how many each aircraft carries.
  1. 1
    Add part to the programme with its shipset.
  2. 2
    Each part: how many each aircraft carries (shipset) and how many the rate requires per month; its routing, its FAI, the backlog and the work orders in progress.
  3. 3
    AMP-1015, the wing-to-fuselage fitting: 3 per aircraft, 12 a month at 4 aircraft.
  4. 4
    Edit: the shipset, the customer and the status of the part in the programme (industrialisation, series, spares, obsolete).

#Rate and demand

AR-90 → Rate & demand: the rate plan, the forecasts for MRP and the 12-month demand. 12345
Figure 95. AR-90 → Rate & demand: the rate plan, the forecasts for MRP and the 12-month demand.
  1. 1
    The rate plan: each row applies from the 1st of its month until the next change (the selected one is today's).
  2. 2
    New rate: the month it applies from, the aircraft per month and why it changes.
  3. 3
    The parts the rate requires over the next 6 months that have not yet been ordered.
  4. 4
    Generate forecasts: passes them to MRP (they replace the programme's previous ones).
  5. 5
    The demand for each month: what the rate requires (forecast) against what has already been ordered. From January, at 5 aircraft, it rises and there are no orders yet.
How to buy the material for a rate increase in time
  1. In Rate & demand, check the rate plan against what the customer has announced (or add it with New rate).

  2. Look in Forecasts for MRP at how many parts the rate requires over 6 months that have not yet been ordered, and press Generate forecasts.

  3. In MRP, calculate with forecasts: it proposes the raw material (titanium and forgings have lead times of months) and the work orders.

Long-lead material is ordered before the customer's order arrives. Each time you generate, the programme's forecasts are replaced by the new ones (they carry «Programme …»).

#The rate simulator: can the plant cope?

Before committing to a rate increase, the simulator tells you whether the plant can cope: choose a rate and you will see the load on each machine against its capacity, now and at that rate, and the highest rate the programme can reach with the machines you have.

What if AR-90 goes to 6 aircraft a month? (nothing is saved: the simulator does not change the plan). 1234
Figure 96. What if AR-90 goes to 6 aircraft a month? (nothing is saved: the simulator does not change the plan).
  1. 1
    The rate you want to try (slide it).
  2. 2
    The rate the programme can reach with current capacity and which machine is the bottleneck.
  3. 3
    The hours per week the chosen rate adds and whether any machine goes over 100 %.
  4. 4
    Each machine: today's steady-state hours + the hours added, over its weekly capacity, and the % now → at the chosen rate. The light bar is what is added.

#Milestones

TF-38 → Milestones: planned against actual. 123
Figure 97. TF-38 → Milestones: planned against actual.
  1. 1
    New milestone: FAI, qualification, first delivery, rate change, programme review, audit or other, with its owner.
  2. 2
    Each milestone with its type, the planned date, the actual date and the owner; its status comes from the two dates.
  3. 3
    A late milestone: the planned date has passed without it being met.
Status When
Met It has an actual date, no later than the planned one
Met late The actual date is later than the planned one
Late The planned date has passed and there is no actual date
Upcoming Due within the next 30 days
Pending Later

To meet a milestone, open it and enter its actual date.

#Programme reviews and their actions

The customer reviews its programme with each supplier (every quarter, in the demo): how deliveries and quality are going, the backlog and the rate, and what needs to be done. Reviews keeps the minutes of each one and its actions.

AR-90 → Reviews: the July review with Aerointegra. 12345
Figure 98. AR-90 → Reviews: the July review with Aerointegra.
  1. 1
    New review: it comes with the programme status already written (OTD, quality, backlog, rate) for you to complete.
  2. 2
    Date, type (with the customer or internal) and attendees.
  3. 3
    The status and the agreements.
  4. 4
    New action: a task with an owner and a deadline arising from the review.
  5. 5
    Each action (ACC-…) with its owner, deadline, result and status: open, in progress, done or verified.

Programme actions are the same as those of the quality system: they also appear in Management system → Actions, together with those from risks, audits and the management review. An action still open after its deadline shows as overdue.

#The long-term agreement

AR-90 → Long-term agreement: the three-year LTA with Aerointegra. 12345
Figure 99. AR-90 → Long-term agreement: the three-year LTA with Aerointegra.
  1. 1
    New agreement: reference, customer, validity and terms.
  2. 2
    The reference, the customer and the validity; on the right, its status (current, expiring soon, expired).
  3. 3
    The terms: price review, raw material, penalties…
  4. 4
    Add price: part, year, agreed price and committed quantity.
  5. 5
    Each part and year: agreed price, committed quantity, ordered quantity and the consumption (in amber, above the committed quantity).

The long-term agreement (LTA) sets with the customer the price of each part per year and the quantity it commits to order. Aeromec compares the committed quantity with what has been ordered (the consumption) and warns if orders come in at a price different from the agreed one (more than 2 % off). An agreement that expires within 60 days shows as expiring soon (TF-38's) and warns on the programme record so that you prepare its renewal.

#Setting up a programme

New programme (not saved). 12345
Figure 100. New programme (not saved).
  1. 1
    Code (AR-90) and name of the programme.
  2. 2
    The type (aircraft, engine, helicopter, UAV…) and the unit the rate counts: aircraft, engines, systems… per month.
  3. 3
    The phase, the manufacturer and the programme manager.
  4. 4
    Classification: a defence one makes all its parts defence ones (only with «Defence data»); and whether it is export-controlled.
  5. 5
    The programme's own requirements (clauses, specifications), in addition to those in the Requirements tab.
How to set up a new programme
  1. Press New programme and enter its code, name, type, unit, phase and programme manager.

  2. On the record, Add customer: the integrator and the Tier 1s, with their role and their contact.

  3. In Parts, Add part with its shipset (how many each unit carries).

  4. In Rate & demand, the rate plan: from which month, how many units per month.

  5. The milestones you know (FAI, first delivery, rate changes) and, if there is one, the long-term agreement.

Orders for those parts from its customers are assigned to the programme automatically, and the demand, the simulator and the forecasts already work.

Sales

Quotes

The answer to each request for quotation (RFQ) from a customer, with prices by quantity break. The suggested price comes from the routing's cost breakdown even if your profile cannot see costs. The signed contract review before committing, versions, PDF and, when the customer accepts, the sales order with its scheduled deliveries.

Who uses it: Sales and managementAccess: «Quotes» section; to create and change, «Edit quotes»; to review the contract, «Review contracts»; to win them, «Edit sales orders» as well

When a customer wants to buy a part, they send a request for quotation or RFQ: which parts, in what quantities, by when and with what requirements. The answer is prepared in Quotes.

An Aeromec quote has one line per part and, on each line, several quantity breaks with their unit price: the more parts, the lower the price, because machine set-up and programming are spread over more units. The price for each break is suggested by the cost breakdown of the part's routing (its cost broken down into material, machine hours, outside processing and overheads) plus the company's target margin, so the salesperson can quote sensibly even if their profile cannot see costs or margins.

Before you commit to the customer, the quote goes through the contract review: with its requirements in front of you, you check that what the customer asks for can be delivered (drawing, key characteristics, special processes, capacity, lead time, material, documentation…) and you sign it. Without it, the quote cannot be sent or won.

When the customer accepts, the quote becomes a sales order with its scheduled deliveries, without retyping anything.

  1. 1DraftParts and quantity prices, with the price suggested by the cost breakdown.
  2. 2Contract reviewApplicable requirements, checks and outcome, signed.
  3. 3SentTo the customer, with the PDF. Its validity starts counting.
  4. 4WonThe sales order is created with its scheduled deliveries.
  5. 5OrderNow in Sales orders, ready to manufacture.
The path of a quote that is won. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The quote list

The list of open quotes, as management sees it (with margins). 123456789
Figure 101. The list of open quotes, as management sees it (with margins).
  1. 1
    Open quotes: how many are in draft or sent, and their reference amount.
  2. 2
    Win rate over the last 12 months: won over decided.
  3. 3
    Average customer response: how many days they take to decide.
  4. 4
    Expiring this week: sent quotes whose validity ends within 7 days or has already ended (in red if any has expired without being marked).
  5. 5
    Quoted margin: the average margin of the open quotes (only with permission to see margins).
  6. 6
    The filters, with their counts (see the table below). There are more to the right: Defence and All.
  7. 7
    New quote opens the form to create one.
  8. 8
    Each quote with its number, the subject and the New part label if it includes a part not yet in production; then the customer, the RFQ and the contact, the date and validity, the status, the lines, the amount and the margin.
  9. 9
    The status: a sent quote shows how many days it has been awaiting an answer.
Filter What it shows
Open Drafts and sent quotes: what is still in play (the default)
Awaiting answer Those sent to the customer
Drafts Those not yet sent: unanswered RFQs
Expire within 7 days Sent quotes whose validity ends soon or has already ended
With new parts Open quotes that include a part in development or with its FAI pending
Won · Lost Won quotes; those rejected by the customer and expired ones (those superseded by a new version do not count)
Defence · All Defence quotes (only with «Defence data») and the full history

In the Date · validity column, a sent quote says when it expires («expires in 22 days»), a draft when the answer is due («answer before…») and a decided one, when it was decided. A sent quote whose validity has passed without an answer shows its row in red and the status Validity expired: call the customer or mark it as expired.

#The life cycle of a quote

Status What it means What you can do
Draft Being prepared; parts and prices can only be changed in draft Add parts and breaks, edit the details, review the contract and, with the review signed, send it or win it; mark it as lost, make a new version or delete it
Sent Sent to the customer; its validity is counting Win it (→ sales order), mark it as lost or expired, go back to draft or make a new version
Won The customer has accepted it: it has its sales order View the order, download the PDF
Lost The customer does not accept it; the reason is kept Make a new version
Expired Its validity passed without an answer Go back to draft or make a new version
Superseded Closed because a new version was made; it does not count as lost Consult it

#Preparing a quote

A quote starts with New quote (here or under Create in the top bar). First you fill in the request details; on saving, its record opens in draft so you can add the parts.

The «New quote» form with the details of an RFQ (not saved). 12345678
Figure 102. The «New quote» form with the details of an RFQ (not saved).
  1. 1
    Customer (required): only active ones are listed.
  2. 2
    Subject (required): what is being quoted, as the customer will read it.
  3. 3
    RFQ reference: the customer's request number, so they recognise it.
  4. 4
    Quote date: today, unless you change it.
  5. 5
    Answer before: the deadline set by the customer.
  6. 6
    Validity in days from sending (the company's by default).
  7. 7
    Lead time in weeks from the order; each part can have its own.
  8. 8
    Terms and conditions printed on the PDF (the company's by default) and, below, internal notes the customer does not see.

Then, on the record, Add part adds each of the customer's parts in the RFQ (the picker only shows their parts) with an optional description for the quote (scope, treatments, paperwork…), its lead time and notes. When you save it, the quantity prices dialog opens straight away.

Quantity price breaks, as Marta (Sales) sees them: the suggested price without seeing costs or margins. 123456
Figure 103. Quantity price breaks, as Marta (Sales) sees them: the suggested price without seeing costs or margins.
  1. 1
    Each break: a quantity of parts…
  2. 2
    …and its unit price. Below, the suggested price for that quantity.
  3. 3
    Removes a break.
  4. 4
    A new break of 150 parts, added with Add break.
  5. 5
    Suggest prices fills each break with the cost breakdown target price for that quantity. You can then adjust it by hand.
  6. 6
    Save replaces the line's breaks.

The first time it opens on a line without prices, Aeromec proposes four breaks around the part's standard batch (half, one, two and four batches) and fills them with the suggested price. With permission to see margins, each break also shows, live, the margin of the price you type (amber or red if it falls below target).

How to prepare a quote
  1. Click New quote, choose the customer, type the subject and the RFQ reference, and check validity, lead time and terms. Click Save.

  2. On the record, click Add part, choose the part and save.

  3. In the prices dialog, adjust the breaks to the quantities the customer asks for (Add break or ⊖ to remove one) and click Suggest prices.

  4. Adjust the prices if needed (for example, to round them or match a previous quote) and click Save.

  5. Repeat for each part. To change the prices later, click the line's Quantity prices icon; to change the part or its lead time, Edit line.

The quote stays in draft with all its parts and prices, ready to send.

#The quote record

Click a quote to open its record. It has the tabs Lines and prices, Summary, Contract review, Versions, Documents and Changes.

A sent quote with a new part whose routing the customer has not yet approved. 12345678
Figure 104. A sent quote with a new part whose routing the customer has not yet approved.
  1. 1
    The number, the status (sent N days ago) and the Contract reviewed label (or Contract not reviewed); below, the subject, the customer, the RFQ and the contact.
  2. 2
    Opens the customer record.
  3. 3
    The main action for the status: Send to customer in draft, Win → order once sent, View order if it was won.
  4. 4
    More options (⋮): PDF, mark as lost or expired, back to draft, new version…
  5. 5
    Warning: a part without an approved routing; its cost is an estimate.
  6. 6
    The part (opens its record) with the New part label; below, drawing and revision, lead time and the status of its routing (opens the routing).
  7. 7
    Cost breakdown: the breakdown of the part's cost (only with permission to see costs).
  8. 8
    The breaks: quantity, unit price, amount and, with the right permissions, the unit cost and the margin of each one.

In draft, each line also has the Quantity prices and Edit line icons, and at the top the Add part button. A line without breaks warns «No prices: add at least one quantity break», and the quote cannot be sent until every part has a price.

The «Summary» tab. 1234
Figure 105. The «Summary» tab.
  1. 1
    The figures: lines, amount of the first break, cost and margin (depending on your permissions) and lead time.
  2. 2
    Quote details: customer, RFQ, contact, owner, date, deadline, validity and valid until.
  3. 3
    Follow-up: when it was prepared and by whom, when it was sent and to whom, and the customer's decision (or when it expires).
  4. 4
    The terms and conditions printed on the PDF.
The ⋮ menu of a sent quote. 12345
Figure 106. The ⋮ menu of a sent quote.
  1. 1
    Quote PDF: the document for the customer.
  2. 2
    Mark as lost, with the reason.
  3. 3
    Mark as expired: its validity passed without an answer.
  4. 4
    Back to draft to change it.
  5. 5
    New version: a copy as a draft.

The quote PDF carries the company and customer details, the subject, the RFQ and the lead time, a section per part with its drawing and revision and the table of breaks (quantity, unit price and amount), the terms and the validity footer. While the quote is a draft, the PDF carries the «DRAFT» watermark. It can only be generated with permission to see prices.

#The contract review

Before you commit to the customer (sending them the quote or accepting their order) you have to check that what they ask for can be delivered. This is the contract review, and it is done on the quote's Contract review tab: with the applicable requirements in front of you, you answer a checklist, decide the outcome and sign it with your password.

The requirements come on their own: the customer's (the clauses of their quality manual, such as Nordaero Composites' NC-Q-03 or Aerointegra Systems' QR-14; they are kept in the customer record, see Customers), those of the programmes of its parts (see Programmes), those of each part and the company's, which apply to all.

The «Contract review» tab of a draft quote for Nordaero Composites that has not yet been reviewed, as Marta (Sales) sees it. 1234567
Figure 107. The «Contract review» tab of a draft quote for Nordaero Composites that has not yet been reviewed, as Marta (Sales) sees it.
  1. 1
    In the header, Contract not reviewed (in amber). Once the review is signed it says Contract reviewed.
  2. 2
    The warning: without the signed and accepted review, the quote cannot be sent or won.
  3. 3
    Review the contract opens the review (with the «Review contracts» permission).
  4. 4
    Applicable requirements: how many there are today and, in order, the customer's, its programmes', its parts' and the company's.
  5. 5
    A customer requirement: its code and title, whose it is and what it requires. Click it to open its record.
  6. 6
    Its category (changes, delivery, quality…) and the clause it comes from: NC-Q-03 §3.5.
  7. 7
    The company ones: quality system, right of access, record retention, counterfeit parts… They apply to every quote.

If you click Send to customer or Win → order on a draft quote without a signed review, Aeromec does not send it: it warns you and offers to do the review there and then. If your profile does not have «Review contracts», it only tells you it is missing.

Sending a quote that has not been reviewed: Aeromec asks for the contract review first (it is not sent). 12
Figure 108. Sending a quote that has not been reviewed: Aeromec asks for the contract review first (it is not sent).
  1. 1
    What is missing: reviewing the applicable requirements, capacity, lead time and risks.
  2. 2
    Review the contract opens the review; once it is signed with an accepted outcome, the quote can be sent.

The review opens in a dialog with three parts:

  1. The applicable requirements today, with their clause. When you sign, they are kept with the review as they stood: if they change later, it is reviewed again and the history is kept.
  2. The checks (table below): answer each one Yes, No or N/A. Mark the rest as «yes» answers all the remaining ones at once.
  3. The outcome, the identified risks (tight lead time, hard-to-source material, new process…) and the conditions or remarks.

Sign the review asks for your password (see Electronic signature).

Check What is checked
Customer requirements Their quality clauses and those of the programme and the part are understood and can be met.
Drawing and revision We have the drawing and specification at the current revision, without ambiguities.
Key characteristics Key and critical characteristics are identified and can be controlled.
Special processes Treatments and tests can be done by a customer-approved supplier.
Capacity and lead time There is machine capacity and the requested lead time is achievable.
Material The specified material can be bought with its certificate in time.
Delivery documentation The CoC, FAI, certificates and reports the customer asks for.
Legal and export Legal, defence and export control requirements.
Risks Technical, schedule and supply risks are identified and acceptable.

On a sales order there is one more check: Differences from the quote (see Sales orders).

Outcome When What it allows
Accepted Everything «yes» or «N/A» Sending and winning the quote
Accepted with conditions Some check answered «no», resolved with the customer; the conditions are mandatory Sending and winning the quote
Not accepted It cannot be met; the reason is mandatory Nothing: the quote cannot be sent or won
A signed contract review with the outcome «accepted with conditions», on a quote already won from Talleres Aeronáuticos del Ebro. 123456
Figure 109. A signed contract review with the outcome «accepted with conditions», on a quote already won from Talleres Aeronáuticos del Ebro.
  1. 1
    Contract reviewed: in green if it was accepted, in amber with conditions.
  2. 2
    The outcome, how many checks were answered «no» and who signed it and when.
  3. 3
    The conditions: what was agreed with the customer to accept it.
  4. 4
    The checks, each with its answer: ✓ yes, ✗ no, ⊖ not applicable.
  5. 5
    The one answered no: the requested lead time was not achievable and another one was agreed.
  6. 6
    The requirements that applied when it was signed, with their clause: they stay with the review even if they change later.
How to review the contract of a quote
  1. Open the draft quote and go to the Contract review tab (or click Send to customer and, in the warning, Review the contract).

  2. Click Review the contract and read the applicable requirements: the customer's, its programmes' and parts', and the company's.

  3. Answer each check: Yes, No or N/A. If needed, ask the engineering office (drawing, processes), planning (capacity and lead time) and purchasing (material).

  4. Choose the outcome. With any check answered «no», it can only be Accepted with conditions (write which) or Not accepted (write the reason).

  5. Note the identified risks, if any, and click Sign the review. Type your password and click Sign.

The review is signed on the tab and the header says Contract reviewed: the quote can now be sent and, when the customer accepts it, the sales order starts already reviewed.

If the requirements or the quote change after it is signed (another quantity, another lead time), click Review again: a new review is signed and the previous ones stay below, under Previous reviews. A signed review cannot be changed or deleted.

#Sending the quote

With the contract review signed, Send to customer asks for confirmation: the quote becomes Sent with today's date and its validity starts counting. You send the email to the customer, with the PDF attached, yourself.

How to send a quote
  1. Open the draft quote and check that every part has a price.

  2. Check that the header says Contract reviewed; if not, do the contract review first.

  3. Under More options (⋮), click Quote PDF and download the document.

  4. Click Send to customer and Confirm.

  5. Email the PDF to the buyer, quoting their RFQ reference.

The quote becomes Sent: it appears under Awaiting answer and on the Dashboard, and its validity starts counting.
Marking a quote as lost (not saved). 1
Figure 110. Marking a quote as lost (not saved).
  1. 1
    The reason (required): price, lead time, the customer makes it in-house… It helps to analyse why quotes are lost.

If the customer says no, mark it as lost with the reason: More options (⋮) → Mark as lost. If they do not answer and it expires, expired. If they ask for a change (another price, quantity or lead time), do not edit it: make a new version (and review its contract before sending it).

#Winning the quote and creating the order

When the customer's purchase order arrives, open the quote and click Win → order. The dialog proposes one delivery per part, with the first break quantity and today's date plus its lead time; adjust it to what the customer's order says.

Winning a two-part quote: the first part split into two deliveries of 15 (not saved). 1234567
Figure 111. Winning a two-part quote: the first part split into two deliveries of 15 (not saved).
  1. 1
    The customer's PO number: it appears on the delivery note, the CoC and the invoice.
  2. 2
    Each part of the quote…
  3. 3
    …with the applied price: that of the break matching the part's total quantity (here 30, adding up both deliveries).
  4. 4
    Each scheduled delivery: quantity and date (click the date to change it).
  5. 5
    Add delivery splits the part into another delivery, four weeks after the previous one.
  6. 6
    The order total (excluding VAT).
  7. 7
    Create order creates it and opens it.
How to win a quote
  1. Filter Awaiting answer and open the quote the customer has accepted.

  2. Click Win → order.

  3. Type the customer's PO number.

  4. For each part, enter the quantity and date of each delivery. If the customer asks for staggered deliveries, use Add delivery.

  5. Check the applied price and the total, and click Create order.

The sales order is created with one line per delivery, the quote becomes Won and linked to it, and the order record opens (see Sales orders).

#Versions of a quote

If the customer asks for changes after it has been sent, More options → New version copies the quote, with its parts and prices, into a new draft with the same number and a version suffix (…-V2). The previous one becomes Superseded: it is not lost and does not count as lost in the win rate. The new version needs its own contract review before it is sent.

The «Versions» tab of a quote in its second version. 123
Figure 112. The «Versions» tab of a quote in its second version.
  1. 1
    The number carries the version.
  2. 2
    Version 1, superseded, with the reason for the change. Click to open it.
  3. 3
    The current version (the one you have open), with its status and amount.

#What each profile sees

The salesperson quotes with the suggested price without seeing costs or margins: the database works out the target price and returns only the price. This is how Marta sees the draft quote from before:

A draft quote as seen by Marta (Sales): prices yes, costs and margins no. 1234
Figure 113. A draft quote as seen by Marta (Sales): prices yes, costs and margins no.
  1. 1
    In draft, the main action is Send to customer.
  2. 2
    Add part: only in draft.
  3. 3
    Quantity prices and Edit line. She has no cost breakdown button.
  4. 4
    The breaks with quantity, price and amount only: no unit cost or margin.

#Tips

Sales

Sales orders

Each customer order with its scheduled deliveries (part, quantity and required date), the WO serving each one, what has shipped and whether it arrived on time, with delays and risks in plain sight before they count against OTD, and its contract review (without it, its WOs cannot be released).

Who uses it: Sales, planning, management and administrationAccess: «Sales orders» section; to create and change, «Edit sales orders»; to review the contract, «Review contracts»

A sales order (PV-…) is the commitment to deliver some parts on some dates. In Aeromec each order line is a scheduled delivery: one part, one quantity and the required date set by the customer. The same part can have several deliveries (for example, 150 parts in two deliveries of 75, a month apart), as in the scheduled blanket orders common in aerospace.

The required date is what OTD (On-Time Delivery) is measured against, the first thing customers look at when rating a supplier. That is why the section puts what matters each day in plain sight: which deliveries are already late, which are at risk because their work order (WO) finishes too close to the date, and which do not have a WO yet.

Almost every order is born when a quote is won or when a cXML order is imported from a customer who buys through SAP Business Network; orders can also be created by hand. Before manufacturing, each order needs its signed contract review (its own or that of the quote it comes from): without it, its WOs cannot be released.

  1. 1Quote wonOr cXML order imported, or created by hand.
  2. 2OrderOne line per scheduled delivery, with its required date.
  3. 3Contract reviewThe order's or its quote's, signed.
  4. 4WOEach delivery is served by a WO (or from stock).
  5. 5ShippingDelivery note with its CoC: this is where on-time is decided.
  6. 6InvoiceFrom the delivery note.
  7. 7ClosedWhen everything has shipped.
The life of an order.

#The order list

The list opens with the open orders that still have something to ship, sorted by their next delivery: the most urgent at the top.

The list of open orders: those with late deliveries in red at the top. 12345678910
Figure 114. The list of open orders: those with late deliveries in red at the top.
  1. 1
    Open orders with parts to ship.
  2. 2
    Open backlog: what has been ordered and not yet shipped, in euros (in parts if your profile cannot see prices).
  3. 3
    Late deliveries: their date has passed and parts are still missing (green if there are none).
  4. 4
    OTD 12 months and how many deliveries have been evaluated.
  5. 5
    The search box finds by number, customer PO, customer or part code.
  6. 6
    The filters (see the table below).
  7. 7
    New order to create one by hand. To its left, Programme shows only the orders of one programme (AR-90, TF-38…).
  8. 8
    Next delivery still open: in red with the deliveries that are late, in amber if it is within the next 7 days.
  9. 9
    Shipped: pending, partial or shipped, the parts shipped out of those ordered and the progress bar.
  10. 10
    WOs: how many of the order's work orders are in progress.
Filter What it shows
Open Open orders with parts still to ship (the default)
Late Open orders with a delivery whose date has passed
Due in 7 days Open orders whose next delivery falls between today and a week from now
Contract not reviewed Open orders without a signed contract review (nor their quote's): their WOs cannot be released
Shipped, not closed Fully shipped but still open: close them
Defence Orders for defence customers or parts (only with «Defence data»)
Closed & cancelled · All The history

Each row shows the order number with the customer PO (their purchase order number); the customer with its code, the programme of its parts (see Programmes) and the quote it comes from; the order date; the next delivery; what has shipped; the WOs; and the value with what is still open. Rows of orders with late deliveries are shaded in red.

The Programme button leaves in the list only the orders of one programme, and the figures at the top (backlog, late deliveries, OTD) become those of that programme. Go back to All programmes to clear it.

#Finding the delays

The «Late» filter: the orders that are already costing OTD. 1234
Figure 115. The «Late» filter: the orders that are already costing OTD.
  1. 1
    The Late filter.
  2. 2
    The date of the late delivery and how many of the order's deliveries are late.
  3. 3
    How much of the order has already shipped.
  4. 4
    The WOs serving it: check whether any is still in progress or whether the part is already in the warehouse.
How to tackle this week's delays
  1. Click Late: these are the deliveries that already count as late in OTD.

  2. Open each order and look in Lines & deliveries for the WO serving the late delivery.

  3. If the WO is finished and there are finished goods in the warehouse, prepare the shipment with New shipment.

  4. If the WO is still in progress, open it and ask planning to bring it forward in its machine's queue. Give the customer a realistic date.

  5. Then click Due in 7 days and check that the WO for each of this week's deliveries finishes in time.

#The order record

Click an order to open its record. It has the tabs Summary, Lines & deliveries, Shipments, WOs, Contract review, Documents and Changes.

The summary of an order with a delivery at risk. 12345678910
Figure 116. The summary of an order with a delivery at risk.
  1. 1
    The number and the customer PO; next to them, the status (open, closed or cancelled) and how much has shipped (pending, partial or shipped). Below, the customer, the date and the quote it comes from.
  2. 2
    New shipment: prepares the delivery note for what is open (with permission to ship). If everything has shipped, the button is Close order.
  3. 3
    More options (⋮): add a delivery, edit, create a missing WO, close or cancel the order.
  4. 4
    The figures: deliveries, parts, shipped, order OTD and value.
  5. 5
    The warnings: late deliveries (red), deliveries at risk (amber) or without a WO; and, once everything has shipped, that it can be closed.
  6. 6
    Order details: customer, PO, date, quote (click to open it), status and when it was recorded.
  7. 7
    Service & OTD: how many deliveries arrived on time, late or have not been evaluated yet, against the target.
  8. 8
    Upcoming deliveries: what is left to ship, with its date, how long to go and the WO serving it with its status. Those at risk in amber.
  9. 9
    Order backlog: open parts and value, next and last delivery and WOs in progress.
  10. 10
    Terms & requirements: the customer's quality requirements (FAI, CoC, 3.1…) and the terms agreed for this order.

#Lines & deliveries

The Lines & deliveries tab groups the deliveries by part. This is where you see, delivery by delivery, what has shipped, what is missing, with which WO and whether it arrived on time.

The deliveries of a partly shipped order: one late with its WO still in progress; the other, shipped on time. 1234567
Figure 117. The deliveries of a partly shipped order: one late with its WO still in progress; the other, shipped on time.
  1. 1
    Add delivery: a new line (part, quantity and required date).
  2. 2
    The part (opens its record), with its programme (AR-90…), its drawing and revision, the finished goods available in the warehouse and what is in production. If the customer requires FAI and the part does not have it approved, it carries the FAI pending label.
  3. 3
    Parts shipped out of those ordered across all its deliveries.
  4. 4
    Each delivery: required date (or when it shipped), quantity, shipped and open.
  5. 5
    The status (pending, partial or shipped, with the days late or At risk) and On time: Yes, No or a dash if not evaluated yet.
  6. 6
    The serving WO with its status and planned end (in amber if it finishes after the required date). Click to open it; if there is none, Create WO.
  7. 7
    The value and unit price; the pencil changes the delivery.
The «Shipments» tab. 12
Figure 118. The «Shipments» tab.
  1. 1
    New shipment for what is open.
  2. 2
    Each delivery note with its date, parts, certificate of conformity (CoC), invoice and carrier, its status and value.
The «WOs» tab. 12
Figure 119. The «WOs» tab.
  1. 1
    Each WO of the order: part and quantity, the operation it is at and where, its planned end against the required date, days late or the risk, and open NCRs.
  2. 2
    Its status and progress: percentage and operations completed.

#The order's contract review

Before manufacturing you must have checked that what the customer asks for can be delivered: that is the contract review (EN 9100 8.2.3), with the applicable requirements, the checklist and the outcome, signed. An order is covered by either of two:

  • Its quote's: if the order was born by winning a quote whose review was signed and accepted, it is already reviewed.
  • Its own: that of an order created by hand or imported via cXML (they do not come from a quote), or of one that changes something from its quote (another quantity, another lead time, another drawing revision). It has one more check: Differences from the quote.

While it has neither, the order carries the Contract not reviewed label and its WOs cannot be released to the shop floor (see Work orders). How the review is done, what is checked and what outcome it has is explained in The contract review under Quotes: on an order it is the same.

An order created without a quote and not yet reviewed (in the demo, the one from Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne). 123
Figure 120. An order created without a quote and not yet reviewed (in the demo, the one from Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne).
  1. 1
    In the header, Contract not reviewed (only while the order is open).
  2. 2
    The summary's warning: without the order's review (nor its quote's), its WOs cannot be released.
  3. 3
    Review the contract does it from here (with the «Review contracts» permission).
The «Contract review» tab of an Aerointegra Systems order that was reviewed on its quote. 12345
Figure 121. The «Contract review» tab of an Aerointegra Systems order that was reviewed on its quote.
  1. 1
    Reviewed on its quote: the order is covered by the signed review of the quote it comes from.
  2. 2
    Review the contract: if the order changes something from the quote, the order itself is reviewed (and then its own review prevails).
  3. 3
    The outcome of the review and who signed it and when.
  4. 4
    The checks with their answer: ✓ yes, ✗ no, ⊖ not applicable.
  5. 5
    The requirements that applied, each with its clause: the customer's (its QR-14), the programme's (the rate in the AR-90 long-term agreement), its parts' if any and the company's.
How to review the contract of an order without a quote
  1. Filter Contract not reviewed and open the order.

  2. Click Review the contract in the summary's warning (or on the Contract review tab).

  3. Read the applicable requirements and answer each check, including Differences from the quote («N/A» if there is no quote).

  4. Choose the outcome (with any check answered «no», with conditions or not accepted, and write why), note the risks and click Sign the review.

  5. Type your password and click Sign (see Electronic signature).

The order leaves the filter and the label disappears: planning can now release its WOs.

#Creating an order by hand

If the order does not come from a quote or through cXML, click New order. The header is created first; when you save it, the record opens on Lines & deliveries so you can add each delivery.

The header of a new order (not saved). 1234
Figure 122. The header of a new order (not saved).
  1. 1
    Customer (required).
  2. 2
    Customer PO: their purchase order number. It appears on the delivery note, the CoC and the invoice.
  3. 3
    Order date.
  4. 4
    Terms agreed for this order: Incoterm, packing, paperwork, late-delivery penalties…
A new delivery (not saved). 1234
Figure 123. A new delivery (not saved).
  1. 1
    Part: only the customer's.
  2. 2
    Quantity for this delivery.
  3. 3
    Required date set by the customer: OTD is measured against it.
  4. 4
    Unit price: if you leave it blank, the part's selling price.
How to create an order by hand
  1. Click New order, choose the customer and type their PO (their order number) and the date. Click Save.

  2. On the record, click Add delivery: choose the part, the quantity and the required date. Save.

  3. Repeat for each delivery; if a part is delivered in several instalments, one line per delivery.

  4. If a delivery has to be manufactured, create its WO from the warning in the summary or from the line (Create WO).

The order joins the backlog, the MRP and OTD tracking.

A delivery that has partly shipped cannot go below what has shipped, and one with a WO or with something shipped cannot be deleted.

Create WO: when a delivery has no WO and the part is not served from stock, the summary warns about it («deliveries with no WO serving them and not enough stock») with the Create WO button, which creates a planned WO for that delivery. It is also on the line itself and under More options. It needs permission to edit work orders (see Work orders).

#Closing, cancelling or reopening an order

When every part has shipped, the summary says «All parts have shipped: you can close the order» and the main button becomes Close order. Shipped orders not yet closed are gathered under the Shipped, not closed filter.

A fully shipped order that is still open. 12
Figure 124. A fully shipped order that is still open.
  1. 1
    The main button is Close order.
  2. 2
    The warning, with its button to close it.
Closing an order with open parts: Aeromec warns you of the consequences. 1
Figure 125. Closing an order with open parts: Aeromec warns you of the consequences.
  1. 1
    What is open leaves the backlog and the MRP. Linked WOs are not cancelled automatically.
  • Close order: the order is no longer open. If parts were left, they leave the backlog and material planning (MRP); linked WOs are not cancelled automatically: review them.
  • Cancel order (only if nothing has shipped): the customer cancels it. It leaves the backlog, the MRP and OTD.
  • Reopen order: a closed or cancelled order returns to the backlog with whatever is open.

A closed or cancelled order accepts no changes or shipments unless it is reopened.

#What each profile sees

The list as seen by Sergio (Administration): he consults the orders with their values, without the defence ones and without being able to create them. 123
Figure 126. The list as seen by Sergio (Administration): he consults the orders with their values, without the defence ones and without being able to create them.
  1. 1
    He sees the values because his profile can see prices, but without the defence orders: the backlog is smaller than management's.
  2. 2
    He does not have the Defence filter.
  3. 3
    Nor the New order button: he does not have «Edit sales orders». He can export the list, though.

#Tips

Sales

Integrations

Electronic exchange with customers who buy through SAP Business Network (Ariba): import their cXML orders, answer with the confirmation, the ship notice (ASN) and the invoice, and simulate the network responses and the remittance. It is an offline demo: the XML is real, but nothing goes out to the network.

Who uses it: Sales, administration and managementAccess: «Integrations» section; each document also needs the permission for its action (edit sales orders, invoice, collect)

Some large customers do not send their orders by email but through a procurement network: in aerospace, above all SAP Business Network (formerly Ariba Network). The order arrives as a cXML document and the supplier answers the same way: it confirms the order, notifies each shipment and sends the invoice. That way the customer receives the data straight into their system, without retyping anything.

Integrations shows and manages that whole exchange: the customers with an integration (trading partners), the inbox of inbound and outbound messages, and the tools to import an order and generate each response.

In this version it is an offline demo: cXML documents are really read and generated (they are valid against the cXML 1.2.071 standard), but they do not go out to the network; the network responses are simulated with a button. In production, a service would send and receive the messages over HTTPS.

  1. 1cXML orderThe customer's OrderRequest arrives: it is read and its warnings reviewed.
  2. 2Aeromec sales orderOne line per delivery, with the customer's requirements. Before manufacturing, its contract review.
  3. 3ConfirmationThe planned dates, delivery by delivery.
  4. 4Ship notice (ASN)From the shipped delivery note: batch, serial numbers, heat, 3.1 and the CoC.
  5. 5cXML invoiceThe transmission of the invoice, referencing the order and the ASN.
  6. 6RemittanceThe customer pays: the payment is recorded.
The complete exchange with an integrated customer.

#The network, the acronyms and the partner

At the top, a card explains what the integration consists of, gives access to the explanation of each acronym and shows the trading partner: the customer with whom documents are exchanged electronically and what was agreed with them.

The Integrations header: the network, the acronyms and the demo partner. 1234567
Figure 127. The Integrations header: the network, the acronyms and the demo partner.
  1. 1
    The section's ⓘ: what the inbox is, a complete example of the exchange and what to do with issues.
  2. 2
    Offline demo: nothing goes out to the network.
  3. 3
    The acronyms, each with its ⓘ: cXML, AN-ID, payloadID, ASN and the network response codes.
  4. 4
    The partner: the customer (click to open their record), with the environment (test or production) and the platform.
  5. 5
    The AN-IDs of the customer and of Aeromec, the posting URL (offline in the demo) and the shared secret, which is never stored: only its name in the secrets vault.
  6. 6
    The agreed documents with this customer: only those can be exchanged.
  7. 7
    Edit the partner.
Acronym What it is
cXML commerce XML, the document format of SAP Business Network: purchase order (OrderRequest), confirmation (ConfirmationRequest), ship notice (ShipNoticeRequest), invoice (InvoiceDetailRequest) and remittance (PaymentRemittanceRequest)
AN-ID A company's account number on the network: AN followed by 11 digits; the test account ends in -T. Each document says who it is from and who it is for: if the sender is not the partner's, it is rejected
payloadID The unique identifier of each document. If the network resends the same order, it arrives with the same payloadID and is not processed twice
ASN Advance Ship Notice, the electronic shipping notice: what is shipped, for which order and delivery, with which batch, serial numbers and certificates, before the truck arrives
Response The code with which the network answers each document: 200 accepted, 201 accepted for forwarding (the final status comes later), 401 sender not recognised, 406 document not acceptable (it has to be corrected), 500 temporary error (it is retried)
The ⓘ for the cXML acronym. 12
Figure 128. The ⓘ for the cXML acronym.
  1. 1
    Each acronym has its ⓘ.
  2. 2
    What it is, how it works with an example and what to do. Close it with Esc.

#The message inbox

Below the header is the inbox: every document that has come in and gone out, the most recent first. In the demo data it starts empty; it fills up when you import the sample order and generate documents.

The indicators, the actions and the inbox (empty in the demo data). 12345678
Figure 129. The indicators, the actions and the inbox (empty in the demo data).
  1. 1
    Messages in the inbox and orders received from the network.
  2. 2
    To send: generated documents that have not gone out yet (or are back in the queue after a temporary error).
  3. 3
    Awaiting status: accepted for forwarding (201), waiting for the buyer's decision.
  4. 4
    With issues: rejected (406, 401) or with a temporary error (500) and not yet resolved. In red if there are any.
  5. 5
    Generate document: the confirmation of an order, the ASN of a delivery note, the invoice or the simulated remittance.
  6. 6
    Import cXML order: read an order sent by the customer.
  7. 7
    The filters: inbound, outbound, to send, awaiting status, with issues, accepted and processed, and discarded.
  8. 8
    The columns: message type with its cXML document and payloadID, the reference and the Aeromec document, the customer, the status, the response code, the attempts and the date.

Each message goes through these statuses:

Status What it means
Received An order that has come in and been read, waiting to be turned into an Aeromec sales order
Processed A received order that is already an Aeromec sales order
Generated, not sent Outbound document prepared, not yet gone out
Sent It has gone out and is waiting for the network's response
Pending with buyer The network accepted it for forwarding (201) and the customer's decision is still to come
Accepted The network or the buyer has accepted it (200)
Rejected Not acceptable (406) or sender not recognised (401): it has to be corrected
Error, will retry Temporary network error (500): it will be sent again as is
Discarded Discarded by hand with a reason, or replaced by a corrected document

Rows with issues are shaded in red. Click a message to open its record.

#Importing a cXML order

Import cXML order opens a panel where you paste the OrderRequest document the customer has sent. To try it out, Load the sample loads a test order from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte, with its dates shifted to today and a new payloadID.

The import panel with the sample order loaded. 1234567
Figure 130. The import panel with the sample order loaded.
  1. 1
    The document type (OrderRequest) and the cXML version; below, the partner it is expected from.
  2. 2
    Load the sample: a fictitious order with two parts. Its ⓘ explains what it contains and which warnings will appear.
  3. 3
    Clear the text.
  4. 4
    The payloadID, which identifies this transmission, and the date and time.
  5. 5
    From and To: the AN-IDs of the customer and of Aeromec. They have to be the partner's.
  6. 6
    The order header: its number (orderID), date and type. Further down, the lines with their deliveries and requirements.
  7. 7
    Read the order: checks the sender and turns it into Aeromec lines and deliveries.

When you click Read the order, the panel shows the reading, which is for reviewing the order before accepting it:

  • A band with the customer PO, its date, the lines, the deliveries and the amount.
  • Reading warnings: what the order does not meet against what was agreed. In red, what blocks the order (unknown item, sender who is not the partner, an order change); in amber, what must be reviewed (a price different from the latest quote, a drawing revision that is not the current one); in blue, information.
  • The order header (type and version, from whom and to whom, where to deliver, whom to bill, comments).
  • The order quality requirements read from the document itself: CoC, 3.1 certificate of the heat, serial number per part and batch in the ship notice. They prevail over the customer record.
  • One card per line: the matched part (by its code, by the customer's reference or by the drawing), the revision ordered against the current one, the ordered price against the reference price, the unit and each delivery with its quantity and date.

At the bottom, Create sales order creates it (with one line per delivery) and opens it; Discard rejects it with a reason; Back to the XML lets you correct the text.

How to import a cXML order
  1. Click Import cXML order.

  2. Paste the OrderRequest document received from the customer (or click Load the sample to try it out).

  3. Click Read the order and review the warnings: red ones block the order; amber ones must be resolved with the customer (price, drawing revision).

  4. Check the quality requirements and the deliveries of each line.

  5. If everything adds up, click Create sales order. If not, Discard it with the reason, or correct the XML with Back to the XML.

The sales order is created with one line per scheduled delivery and its record opens. The message stays in the inbox as Processed. As it does not come from a quote, the order starts without a contract review: it must be done before its work orders are released (see Sales orders).

#Generating the confirmation, the ASN or the invoice

Generate document opens a menu with what can be sent to the customer. Each option shows the list of the partner's documents to choose from; when you choose one, its cXML is generated, it stays in the inbox as Generated, not sent and its record opens.

The «Generate document» menu. 1234
Figure 131. The «Generate document» menu.
  1. 1
    Confirmation of an open order from the partner.
  2. 2
    ASN for a delivery note already shipped.
  3. 3
    cXML invoice for an issued invoice.
  4. 4
    Simulated remittance: as if the customer paid an outstanding invoice.
Choosing the delivery note the ASN is generated from. 12
Figure 132. Choosing the delivery note the ASN is generated from.
  1. 1
    Search for the delivery note.
  2. 2
    Each shipped delivery note with the customer PO, date, parts, its CoC and the material heats. If its ASN has already been generated, it says so.
Document Where it comes from What it carries
Confirmation (ConfirmationRequest) An open order from the partner (those that came through the network first) For each delivery, the quantity and the committed date: the planned end of its WO plus the shipping margin; without a WO, the requested date. If it matches the requested one it is an accept; if it changes, a detail
Ship notice (ShipNoticeRequest, ASN) A delivery note already shipped One line per delivery with the produced batch, one serial number per part, the material heat and 3.1 certificate, and the CoC as a reference and as an attached PDF
cXML invoice (InvoiceDetailRequest) An issued invoice (not advance invoices) The reference to the customer's order and to the ASN, serial numbers and batch per line, the tax base, VAT and total. The legal invoice is still Aeromec's: the cXML is its transmission
Remittance (PaymentRemittanceRequest) An invoice with an amount outstanding Simulates the customer's payment arriving from the network and records the payment on the invoice (bank transfer, with the remittance number)

The confirmation can also be generated from the integrated customer's order record: the cloud icon in its header, only visible if the customer has the confirmation among its agreed documents.

Confirming a Propulsión Avanzada del Norte order from its record (not generated). 12
Figure 133. Confirming a Propulsión Avanzada del Norte order from its record (not generated).
  1. 1
    What is confirmed: the planned dates (WO end + shipping margin; without a WO, the requested date). What is confirmed is stored on each order line.
  2. 2
    Generates the ConfirmationRequest, which stays in the inbox unsent.

#The message record

When you click a message in the inbox (or generate one) its record opens. In the header, the direction (inbound or outbound) and the cXML document type, its status and the customer. The tabs:

  • Summary: the document (direction, type, payloadID, reference, the Aeromec order, delivery note or invoice it belongs to, customer, network and environment, dates, who did it and size); the network response (HTTP code, cXML code, text and next retry); the attachments (the CoC PDF in an ASN, which can be viewed) and the history of everything that has happened to it: generated, responses, retries, replaced, discarded.
  • Order reading (on a received order): the same reading as when it was imported, with its warnings.
  • Content (on generated documents): the confirmed deliveries with the requested and the confirmed date, the ASN lines with WO, batch, heat, certificate and serial numbers, the invoice lines or the recorded payment.
  • XML: the document as is, with colours, to copy or download as .xml. The shared secret shows as ********: it is added when sending and never stored.

On outbound documents, Simulate response acts as both the sending and the network response, and Retry resolves issues. Under More options (⋮) you open the Aeromec order, delivery note or invoice, the customer, or discard the message with a reason.

Simulate response What happens
200 · OK The message becomes Accepted
201 · Accepted, forwarded It becomes Pending with buyer; then their decision is simulated: StatusUpdate accepted or rejected
406 · Not acceptable It becomes Rejected. Retry generates the document again with today's data and a new payloadID; the rejected one is discarded as «replaced»
500 · Temporary error It becomes Error, will retry. Retry puts it back in the queue with the same payloadID: if the network already had it, it recognises it and does not duplicate it
How to try out the complete exchange
  1. Import the sample order (Import cXML order → Load the sample → Read the order) and click Create sales order.

  2. On the record of the order created, click the cloud icon to generate the confirmation; on its record, Simulate response → 200.

  3. When there is a shipped delivery note for that customer, Generate document → Ship notice (ASN). Try Simulate response → 406 and then Retry: another document comes out with a new payloadID.

  4. With the invoice issued (administration profile), generate the cXML invoice and simulate the remittance: the payment is recorded on the invoice.

#Configuring the partner

Editing the trading partner (not saved). 12345
Figure 134. Editing the trading partner (not saved).
  1. 1
    The AN-IDs of the customer and of Aeromec, given by the supplier account on the network.
  2. 2
    Environment: test (-T) or production.
  3. 3
    Active: unticked, nothing is imported or generated for this customer.
  4. 4
    Posting URL and name of the shared secret (in the secrets vault, never in the database).
  5. 5
    The agreed documents: order, confirmation, ASN, invoice, remittance and document status.

With a real customer, the scope (which documents), the AN-IDs and the tests are agreed with their purchasing team following their integration guide. If there is no partner, the header offers Create the demo partner.

#What each profile sees

Integrations needs the Integrations section, and each document also needs the permission for its action. With the demo profiles:

Profile Import and read Create the order Confirmation ASN Invoice and remittance
System administrator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Management Yes No No Yes No
Sales Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Administration (finance) Yes No No Yes Yes
Sergio's «Generate document» menu (Administration): without the order confirmation. 12
Figure 135. Sergio's «Generate document» menu (Administration): without the order confirmation.
  1. 1
    The ASN can be generated by anyone who can see delivery notes.
  2. 2
    The cXML invoice and the remittance: he has permission to invoice and collect, and can see prices.

#Tips

Engineering

Items

The catalogue of everything that is made, bought or used in the shop: the customer's parts with their drawing, revision and revision history, raw materials, semi-finished items, tools, machine spare parts, consumables and fixtures, with their stock, how MRP replenishes them, their material, their cost breakdown and where each one is used. This is where critical parts are flagged, fixtures are validated and verified, each item's shelf life and preservation are set, and the requirements that apply to each part are shown.

Who uses it: Engineering (new items and changes), sales (new parts, without costs), purchasing (price lists), quality and the shop floor manager (fixture verification) and every other area for referenceAccess: «Items» section; to create or change items, «Edit items»; to record a fixture verification, «Edit quality» or «Edit centres & people»; to see values and price lists, «See costs»; for the selling price, «See prices»; for defence parts, «Defence data»

Items holds the master data for everything that goes through the shop. Each item has a unique code (AMP-1015, MP-TI-P040, HE-FR-010…) and is one of these types:

Type What it is Demo example
Part What you make for the customer, according to their drawing and that drawing's revision. It is what carries a routing, a cost breakdown and work orders. AMP-1015 · Herraje de unión ala-fuselaje
Raw material The material you buy to machine: bar, plate or sheet of a given alloy and specification. MP-TI-P040 · Placa Ti-6Al-4V e=40
Semi-finished Material already prepared (roughed, squared, solution-treated) that a part is made from. SE-TI-001 · Tocho Ti-6Al-4V desbastado
Tool and consumable Cutters, inserts, cutting fluid… that the part uses up and that the cost breakdown spreads per part. HE-FR-010 · Fresa integral Ø10
Fixture The dedicated workholding for a part, with its life in parts and its signed validation and periodic verification. UT-001 · Utillaje de amarre 5 ejes

Some trade terms used in this chapter:

  • Drawing and drawing revision: the customer's drawing that defines the part (AIS-5775575-201) and its revision letter (A, B, C…). When the customer changes the drawing the revision goes up, and the first part made to the new revision needs an FAI (First Article Inspection per EN 9102 / AS9102: the first part is fully measured against the drawing before series production). For a part already in production, the revision is changed through a change request (Changes) and each WO keeps the revision it was released with (see Configuration).
  • Critical part: one whose failure would compromise the safety of the aircraft (a structural joint, the landing gear). It is released with extra checks. Its key characteristics (KC) are the drawing dimensions the customer flags as critical.
  • Blank (gross weight) and part (net weight): the weight of the piece of material cut for each part and the weight of the finished part. The difference goes into chips.
  • Material yield: how much of the purchased material ends up in the part (net weight ÷ gross weight).
  • MRP (Material Requirements Planning): the requirements calculation that says what has to be bought or made, and when. It reads each item's MRP settings: whether it is made to order or made to stock, the safety stock (the minimum that must be free), the minimum lot, the order multiple and the lead time.

#The item list

When you open it you see the parts sorted by code. At the top, four indicators; below, the search box, the type filters and the table.

The item list with the «Parts» filter: indicators, search box, filters and the table. 12345678
Figure 136. The item list with the «Parts» filter: indicators, search box, filters and the table.
  1. 1
    The catalogue indicators: parts in the catalogue (excluding obsolete ones), items below their safety stock, items with stock in quarantine and the value of all the stock. Each ⓘ explains how it is calculated.
  2. 2
    The search box finds by code, description, drawing, customer, alloy, material code, material specification or CN code.
  3. 3
    The filters, with how many items each one holds: by type, those below safety stock, parts in development or with FAI pending, defence items and obsolete or inactive ones. Scroll the row to see the last ones.
  4. 4
    Export CSV downloads what you see (with the filter and search applied) to open it in a spreadsheet.
  5. 5
    New item opens the form for a new item: first it asks for the type.
  6. 6
    Each row is an item: code and description (the icon shows the type; purple with a shield if it is defence), customer, drawing with its revision and the part's status. Click the row to open its record.
  7. 7
    Stock available and, below it, what is reserved for WOs and what is in quarantine. In amber if free stock is below safety stock (the row is tinted too).
  8. 8
    Routing: the letter of the current routing revision and its status. «No routing», in amber, if the part has none yet.

Header indicators:

Indicator What it counts
Parts in catalogue Parts that are not obsolete.
Below safety stock Items whose free stock (available − reserved) is below their safety stock. These are the ones MRP will propose replenishing.
With stock in quarantine Items with a received lot awaiting receiving inspection or held by Quality.
Stock value What all the stock is worth at each item's average price. Only with the «See costs» permission.

Filters: Parts, Raw materials, Semi-finished, Tools & consumables, Fixtures, Below safety stock, In development or FAI pending (parts not yet in series production), Defence (only if your profile sees defence data) and Obsolete & inactive. Filters combine with the search box.

The columns change meaning with the type: for a raw material, the customer is replaced by the alloy and form, the drawing by the material specification and the status by the replenishment policy.

The «Raw materials» filter: alloy and form, specification, replenishment policy and stock of each material. 123456
Figure 137. The «Raw materials» filter: alloy and form, specification, replenishment policy and stock of each material.
  1. 1
    The Raw materials filter keeps only the materials bought for machining.
  2. 2
    In the Customer · material column, the alloy and the form (Al 7075-T6 · Bar, Ti-6Al-4V · Plate…).
  3. 3
    In Drawing · spec, the material specification (AMS 4911, AMS 4154…): the specification the drawing calls for, certified by the mill's 3.1 certificate.
  4. 4
    In Status, the replenishment policy: «Make to stock» (MRP keeps the safety stock) or «Make to order» (only bought against requirements).
  5. 5
    In amber, free stock is below safety stock (in the screenshot, the 15-5PH bar).
  6. 6
    Below the available stock, what is reserved for WOs already released: it is not free for others.

#A part's record

Clicking an item opens its record on the right. A part's record brings together its identification, its stock, the material it is made from, how MRP replenishes it, the settings used to work out its cost, the status of its FAI and what Intrastat needs; in the tabs, its routings, its cost breakdown, its components, its requirements, its configuration (the drawing revisions), its documents and the change history.

The record of part AMP-1015, Summary tab. 1234567
Figure 138. The record of part AMP-1015, Summary tab.
  1. 1
    Type and code, the part's status (In development, FAI pending, Production or Obsolete) and the Critical part tag if it is one (hover over it to see why); below, description, customer and drawing with its revision. A defence part also carries the purple badge.
  2. 2
    Edit opens the same form as for a new item, with all the part's data.
  3. 3
    The tabs: Summary, Routings & costing, Cost breakdown, Components, Requirements, Configuration, Documents and Changes (scroll the row to see the last ones). The number says how many rows each one has.
  4. 4
    The part's stock: available, reserved, free, in quarantine and in production (parts of released WOs not finished yet).
  5. 5
    Identification: customer (opens their record), drawing number, current drawing revision, criticality (standard, major or critical) and, if critical, why; the classification (civil or defence) and how it is preserved and handled.
  6. 6
    Material: the primary raw material (opens its record) and its specification, the blank and part weights, the material yield, the cutting cost per part and the special processes and non-destructive tests the drawing calls for.
  7. 7
    Alternatives: how many alternative raw materials the customer approved in the current routing. The link opens the routing on its Material tab.
The lower part of the Summary: replenishment, FAI, costing settings and foreign trade. 12345
Figure 139. The lower part of the Summary: replenishment, FAI, costing settings and foreign trade.
  1. 1
    MRP settings: replenishment policy, safety stock, minimum lot, order multiple and lead time. Its ⓘ (like each card's) explains with an example how MRP rounds the quantity (minimum lot and multiple) and when to order (need date − lead time).
  2. 2
    FAI: whether there is an approved FAI for the current drawing revision. If there is not, the first WO carries the FAI operation and its parts cannot ship until Quality releases it.
  3. 3
    Costing settings: standard lot, expected scrap and, if the part has its own, its own overheads and target margin (if not, «default» and the company's).
  4. 4
    The part's reference selling price (only with the «See prices» permission).
  5. 5
    Foreign trade · Intrastat: the CN code, the country of origin and the net mass per part, what Intrastat needs when the part is sold to another EU country.

#Critical parts

A part's criticality says how much control it needs: standard, major or critical. A critical part is one whose failure would compromise the safety of the aircraft (a wing-to-fuselage structural fitting, a landing gear pin) or one the customer declares as having critical characteristics. It is set in the part's form (Edit), with the reason:

Criticality, reason and drawing revision in the AMP-1015 form (not saved). 123
Figure 140. Criticality, reason and drawing revision in the AMP-1015 form (not saved).
  1. 1
    The current drawing revision. For a part already in production it is not changed here: it is changed through a change request, which records its impact, its approval and the history (see Configuration).
  2. 2
    Criticality: standard, major or critical. Below it, what being critical means.
  3. 3
    Why it is critical: the reason (flight-safety part, functional surface…). It appears on the record and when you hover over the red tag.

What changes when a part is critical:

  • Reinforced release: it only ships from a WO with a conforming final inspection. If that is missing, Aeromec will not let it ship (see Shipping), and the certificate of conformity (CoC) states which items are critical parts and that they were released this way.
  • Its key characteristics (KC) are flagged in the routing's control plan (Routings & costing) and tracked with the control chart in Inspection & FAI › Capability, where the characteristic also carries the red «Critical part» tag: the chart warns that the process has shifted even while parts are still within tolerance.
  • The customer requirement that calls for it (for example, controlling the KCs with SPC) appears on the part's Requirements tab.

#The part's routings and cost breakdown

The Routings & costing tab lists every revision of the part's routing, newest first. A routing is the sequence of operations used to make the part; every change is a new revision that the customer has to approve if they require it. Everything you can do with routings is explained in Routings & costing.

The three revisions of the AMP-1015 routing: C awaiting the customer, B current and A superseded. 12345
Figure 141. The three revisions of the AMP-1015 routing: C awaiting the customer, B current and A superseded.
  1. 1
    The tab shows how many revisions the routing has.
  2. 2
    A revision sent to the customer: how many days it has been waiting and what changes in it.
  3. 3
    The approved revision, the one in force today: when and by whom it was approved. WOs are released with it.
  4. 4
    A superseded revision: it was replaced when the next one was approved. WOs released with it keep it.
  5. 5
    The unit cost of each revision, at the standard lot (with the «See costs» permission). Click a row to open the routing.

If the part has no routing, or if the latest revision is approved and no other is under way, the tab offers New routing or New revision at the top. It does not appear in the screenshot because revision C is awaiting the customer: only one revision can be in preparation at a time.

The Cost breakdown tab works out the planned cost per part with the current routing, with the quantity simulator and the saved versions. It is the same one explained in Routings & costing.

#Components

Components are the tools, consumables and semi-finished items each part uses up, besides its raw material: the cost breakdown spreads them per part.

The components of AMP-1015: the cutting fluid and the solid carbide cutter each part uses up. 123
Figure 142. The components of AMP-1015: the cutting fluid and the solid carbide cutter each part uses up.
  1. 1
    Add component picks a semi-finished item, a tool or a consumable and its quantity per part.
  2. 2
    Each component with its type and its quantity per part (in the screenshot, 0.044 cutters per part: one cutter lasts about 23 parts). Click the row to change the quantity or remove it.
  3. 3
    What each component adds to the cost per part (with the «See costs» permission).

#The part's requirements

The Requirements tab brings together everything that has to be met when making this part: the company's requirements, its customer's (taken from their quality clauses), its programmes' and the part's own (key characteristics, tests, material). They are what the contract review checks before committing to a quote or an order (see Quotes), and the ones flowed down to suppliers go on each purchase order.

The requirements that apply to AMP-1015: Aerointegra's, the AR-90 programme's, its own and the company's. 123456
Figure 143. The requirements that apply to AMP-1015: Aerointegra's, the AR-90 programme's, its own and the company's.
  1. 1
    How many requirements apply to the part. Its ⓘ explains where each one comes from.
  2. 2
    New requirement adds one specific to the part (with «Edit requirements»). Customer requirements are added in the customer's record and programme requirements in the programme's.
  3. 3
    A customer requirement: code and title, whose it is and what it requires. On the right, its category and the clause of the customer document it comes from (QR-14 §3.2). Click the row to open it.
  4. 4
    A requirement of the programme (AR-90) the part belongs to.
  5. 5
    A requirement of the part: here, controlling its key characteristics with statistical process control (SPC).
  6. 6
    The company ones, which apply to every part (those flowed down to suppliers, with the standard that calls for them).

How customer requirements and their approved sources are set up is explained in Customers.

#Configuration: the drawing revisions

The Configuration tab is the part's history over time: each drawing revision with the date it took effect, the change request that brought it in, how many WOs have been made to it and how many parts of that revision have been shipped. Below, the part's change requests, approved or in progress.

The configuration of AMP-1015: revision A current and the change request to B under evaluation. 12345
Figure 144. The configuration of AMP-1015: revision A current and the change request to B under evaluation.
  1. 1
    Drawing revisions. Its ⓘ (on the right) explains what is frozen on each WO.
  2. 2
    New change opens a change request for this part (with «Manage changes»).
  3. 3
    Each revision: drawing and letter, when it took effect and the change request that brought it in; the current one in green.
  4. 4
    How many WOs have been released to that revision and how many of its parts have shipped: who is affected if a problem turns up in it.
  5. 5
    The part's change requests with their type, the revisions (A → B) and their status. Click one to open it in Changes.

How the revision moves:

  • When a WO is released, the current drawing revision is frozen on it (Work orders) and passed on to its lots, the traceability of each serial number and the shipment's CoC: you always know which revision each part was made to.
  • When a drawing change request is implemented, the part moves to the new revision (the FAI card asks for a new FAI) and WOs already released keep theirs. While any remain, the tab warns: «N released work orders are built to a revision older than the current one».
  • Change requests (impact, customer approval, signature and implementation) are explained in Changes.

#The part's documents

The Documents tab holds the customer's drawing with its revision, the 3D model, photos and anything else you need. What you upload here is then shown by the WO (Documents tab, «Part drawings») and by the shop-floor terminal next to the operation.

The documents of AMP-1015: the photo of the part and the customer's drawing ballooned for the FAI. 1234
Figure 145. The documents of AMP-1015: the photo of the part and the customer's drawing ballooned for the FAI.
  1. 1
    Upload documents picks files from your computer (you can also drag them onto the window): PDF, images, CNC programs, Office, CAD or zip, up to 20 MB each.
  2. 2
    The photo of the part: it is the one shown on the cards in the Planning queues.
  3. 3
    The drawing with its type, revision, size, who uploaded it and when, and a note.
  4. 4
    View opens it inside the app, Download saves it and ⋮ lets you change its details or delete it.

The last tab, Changes, shows who changed the record and what (each field with its value before and after). Only those with the «See the change audit log» permission see it.

#A raw material's record

The record of a bought item has the same layout, with three differences: the stock shows what is on order (purchases in progress) instead of what is in production, the Valuation card says what the stock is valued at, and the tabs are Suppliers and Where used.

The record of the 40 mm titanium plate, below its safety stock. 1234567
Figure 146. The record of the 40 mm titanium plate, below its safety stock.
  1. 1
    Type and code, description, alloy and form.
  2. 2
    The tabs of a bought item: Suppliers (with their price lists) and Where used.
  3. 3
    The stock, with what is in quarantine (received and awaiting receiving inspection) and what is on order from purchases in progress.
  4. 4
    The warning that free stock is below safety stock. MRP will propose a purchase.
  5. 5
    Identification: alloy, form, size (thickness or diameter) and material specification.
  6. 6
    It is made to stock: MRP keeps the safety stock and buys with the minimum lot, order multiple and lead time of the preferred supplier.
  7. 7
    Valuation: weighted average price, last purchase price and stock value (only with «See costs»).
The suppliers of the 40 mm plate with their price. 1234
Figure 147. The suppliers of the 40 mm plate with their price.
  1. 1
    Add supplier adds another price: supplier, price, lead time, minimum lot, their reference and whether it is the preferred one.
  2. 2
    Each supplier with their reference, lead time and minimum lot; the star marks the preferred one, which MRP uses when proposing purchases.
  3. 3
    Their approval status (approved, conditional, suspended…), from the supplier's record.
  4. 4
    The price in the price list. Click the row to change it (with «Edit items» or «Edit purchasing», and always with «See costs»).

Where used answers «what is affected if I change this material or stop buying it?»: the parts and semi-finished items that use it as raw material (with the kilos per part), those that use it up as a component and, if it is a customer-approved alternative material in some routing, those parts too, with the routing revisions that accept it.

Where the 50 mm plate is used: it is an approved alternative material in the routings of two parts. 123
Figure 148. Where the 50 mm plate is used: it is an approved alternative material in the routings of two parts.
  1. 1
    The tab shows how many parts use it.
  2. 2
    A part that accepts it as an alternative material: in which revisions of its routing and with how many kilos per part. Click the row to open the routing on its Material tab.
  3. 3
    Approved if any of those revisions has been approved by the customer; Not approved if it cannot be used yet.

#Fixtures: validation and verification

A fixture is the workholding or check gauge made for a part (UT-001, UT-002…). It is created as one more item, of type Fixture, with its life in parts and how many months between verifications, and is assigned to the routing operations that use it (Routings & costing). Before series use it is validated, and afterwards it is verified periodically (with the master part on the coordinate measuring machine, the flatness of the supports, the position of the locators…). Every validation and every verification is signed.

Fixture UT-002, with its verification overdue: work order OF-2026-0201 for AMP-1018 cannot be released. 123456
Figure 149. Fixture UT-002, with its verification overdue: work order OF-2026-0201 for AMP-1018 cannot be released.
  1. 1
    In the header, the red tag if the fixture is not fit for use: «Verification overdue», «On trial» (not validated) or «Blocked».
  2. 2
    Identification: code and life in parts (the cost breakdown spreads its cost over them).
  3. 3
    Record verification: the validation, the periodic verification or the one after a repair, with a signature.
  4. 4
    The warning: until it is verified, the WOs that use it cannot be released.
  5. 5
    Status (on trial, validated or blocked; if the verification is overdue, it says so), next verification (in red if already past) and how many months between them.
  6. 6
    The history: each validation or verification with its date, what was checked and who signed it; with a green mark if it was fit or a red one if not.

Only its verification changes a fixture's status: a fit one leaves it validated until the next one (date + the months in Verify every); an unfit one blocks it. Nobody can change it by hand from Edit.

«Record verification» for UT-002 (not saved or signed). 1234
Figure 150. «Record verification» for UT-002 (not saved or signed).
  1. 1
    Type: validation (the first one, before series use), periodic or after a repair.
  2. 2
    Fit: switch it off if the fixture fails; it will be blocked.
  3. 3
    What was checked (required): the method and the result.
  4. 4
    Save asks for your signature: the verification is signed and can no longer be changed.
How to verify a fixture
  1. Open the fixture (Fixtures filter in the list) and click Record verification.

  2. Choose the Type, leave Fit on if it passes the verification and describe the method and the result in What was checked.

  3. Click Save and sign with your password (see The electronic signature).

«Verification recorded and signed» appears. The fixture becomes «Validated» with its next verification date, and the WOs that use it can now be released.

#Shelf life and preservation

Some items expire: cutting fluids, greases, adhesives, some materials. For consumables, raw materials and spare parts you can set their shelf life in days; and for any item, how it is preserved and handled (temperature, packaging, no stacking…), for whoever stores, picks or packs it.

Cutting fluid CO-TA-020: one year of shelf life and its storage conditions. 12
Figure 151. Cutting fluid CO-TA-020: one year of shelf life and its storage conditions.
  1. 1
    Shelf life: the number of days it lasts from receipt.
  2. 2
    Preservation and handling: how it has to be stored and handled.

With a shelf life, each incoming lot gets its expiry date (receipt date + shelf life), shown on the lot in Warehouse. An expired lot cannot be consumed or shipped: Aeromec prevents it. If expired lots remain in stock, the item's record warns in red («N expired lots in stock») so they can be removed or checked.

#Adding a new item

New item (or Create in the top bar, from any screen) first asks for the type, and the form asks only for what that type needs: a part, its customer, its drawing, its criticality and its material; a raw material, its alloy, its form, its size and its specification; a fixture, its life in parts and how many months between verifications; a consumable, a raw material or a spare part, its shelf life in days. All of them accept their preservation and handling conditions.

«What kind of item?», the first step when adding an item. 123
Figure 152. «What kind of item?», the first step when adding an item.
  1. 1
    Type to filter the list, or click the type directly.
  2. 2
    Part: what is made for the customer.
  3. 3
    Raw material, semi-finished, tool, consumable, spare part (for the machines) or fixture: what is bought or used.
New item · Part: identification and material (not saved). 12345678
Figure 153. New item · Part: identification and material (not saved).
  1. 1
    Code and description (required).
  2. 2
    Customer, with a search box. A part always belongs to a customer.
  3. 3
    Status: a new part starts «In development». It moves on its own to «FAI pending» or «Production» when its routing and its FAI are approved.
  4. 4
    The customer's drawing number and drawing revision.
  5. 5
    Criticality (standard, major or critical) and, next to it, why it is critical (see Critical parts).
  6. 6
    Classification: civil or defence.
  7. 7
    Export control: a defence or dual-use part. Only those with «Defence data» will see it.
  8. 8
    Material: the primary raw material, its specification, the gross (blank) and net (part) weights and the cutting cost per part.
The lower part: special processes, preservation, MRP, costing and foreign trade (not saved). 12345678
Figure 154. The lower part: special processes, preservation, MRP, costing and foreign trade (not saved).
  1. 1
    Special processes and non-destructive testing (NDT) called for by the drawing: tick the ones it needs.
  2. 2
    Preservation and handling: how the part is stored, packed and handled (for a consumable, a raw material or a spare part, its shelf life also appears above it).
  3. 3
    MRP settings: unit, policy (for a part, usually «Make to order»), safety stock, minimum lot, multiple and lead time.
  4. 4
    Costing settings: expected scrap and standard lot.
  5. 5
    Own overheads and own target margin: leave them empty to use the company's (the default value is shown below).
  6. 6
    Reference selling price (only with «See prices»).
  7. 7
    Foreign trade · Intrastat: the 8-digit CN code (spaces are accepted, 8807 30 00) and the country of origin (blank, Spain).
  8. 8
    Active: an inactive item no longer appears in pickers.
How to add a new part
  1. Click New item and choose Part.

  2. Type the Code and the Description and choose the Customer.

  3. Type the Drawing number and the Drawing revision, and choose the Criticality; if it is critical, fill in Why it is critical. If it is a defence or dual-use part, turn on Export control.

  4. Under Material, choose the Raw material and type its specification, the Gross weight (blank) and the Net weight (part). Tick the drawing's Special processes and Non-destructive testing (NDT).

  5. Scroll down to MRP settings and Costing settings: check the policy, the Expected scrap and the Standard costing lot; leave your own overheads and margin empty if the company's apply.

  6. If the part is going to be sold to a customer in another EU country, fill in its CN code (TARIC) under Foreign trade · Intrastat (for example, 88073000, aircraft parts).

  7. Click Save.

The part appears in the list «In development» and with «No routing». The next step is to create its routing in Routings & costing (or from the record's Routings & costing tab).

An item can only be deleted (from Edit) if it is not used in another item, has no routings and has no stock. If it is no longer used but has history, deactivate it with Active or, if it is a part, set it to «Obsolete».

#A part's life cycle

Aeromec moves a part's status as its routing and its FAI progress:

  1. 1New partThe part is born In development, with its drawing and its material.
  2. 2Routing approvedWhen its routing is approved it moves to FAI pending if the customer requires FAI and there is no approved one for the drawing revision.
  3. 3First WOIt is released with the FAI operation active: its parts cannot ship until it is released.
  4. 4FAI releasedQuality measures the first part and releases the FAI: the part moves to Production.
If the customer does not require FAI, the part moves to Production as soon as its routing is approved.

#What changes with the profile

Each profile sees items according to its permissions. Costs it cannot see do not appear (or show a padlock), and the tabs of sections it has no access to are not shown. This is how Marta, from sales, sees the same part:

The AMP-1015 record seen by the Sales profile: no costs, no routings and no cost breakdown. 1234
Figure 155. The AMP-1015 record seen by the Sales profile: no costs, no routings and no cost breakdown.
  1. 1
    No Routings & costing or Cost breakdown (she has no access to that section) and no Changes (she lacks the audit permission); she does get Components, Requirements, Configuration and Documents.
  2. 2
    She can edit the part (she has «Edit items»): sales adds the new parts that come with quotes.
  3. 3
    Under Material the cutting cost is not shown; in the list she does not see the stock value.
  4. 4
    She does see the reference selling price (she has «See prices»).

In the list, Marta sees fewer parts (in the demo, 34 out of 40): defence parts (and those of defence customers) do not exist for anyone without the «Defence data» permission, neither in the list, nor in pickers, nor in search.

#Tips

Engineering

Routings & costing

How each part is made: every routing revision with its operations (and the special process of subcontracted ones), its control plan, its material and the alternative materials the customer accepts, its approval cycle (internal or by the customer) with electronic signature and the comparison between revisions. The routing gives the cost breakdown: the planned cost per part for any quantity, with a simulator, saved versions and the comparison with the actual cost of closed work orders.

Who uses it: Engineering (prepares the routings), management (records the customer's approval) and planning, shop floor and quality for referenceAccess: «Routings & costing» section; to create and change routings and send them to the customer (signed), «Edit routings»; to record the customer's approval (signed) or rejection, «Approve routings»; for the cost breakdown, «See costs» (the target price, also «See prices»)

A part's routing (or process sheet) is the sequence of operations used to make it: cut the blank, mill the first face on the 5-axis centre, deburr, send it to a supplier for the penetrant test, measure on the coordinate measuring machine… Each operation says which machine (or supplier) does it, how long it takes to set up the machine and to make each part, with which CNC program and fixture, and what is measured in it: that is the control plan.

In aerospace the routing is not changed lightly: many customers require approving it before production, and any change (another machine, another program, another material) is a new revision (A, B, C…) that goes through their approval again. Aeromec keeps every revision of each part, knows which one is current (the one in force today) and does not let you release a WO on a routing the customer has not approved if they require it.

The routing gives the cost breakdown: the breakdown of the planned cost of making a part (material, tools, machine hours, labour, outside processing, fixture, scrap and overheads) and the target price that leaves the margin the company wants.

Other trade terms in this chapter:

  • Set-up: the time to clamp, load the program and make the first good part; it is paid once per lot.
  • Time per part (cycle): how long the machine takes to make each part.
  • Characteristic and balloon: each dimension or requirement on the drawing that is measured, with the balloon number it carries on the drawing. KCs (key characteristics) are the ones the customer flags as critical (see Critical parts).
  • Alternative material: another raw material the customer accepts for the part if the primary one is short (another plate size, another form, another alloy with its approved deviation).
  • Special process: a process whose result cannot be fully verified by measuring the part afterwards (heat treatment, anodising, shot peening, non-destructive testing or NDT…). It is done by a supplier approved for that process, often with its Nadcap accreditation (the aerospace industry's accreditation programme for special processes).

#The routing list

The list has one row per routing revision. When you open it you see the current ones (one per part), with their status, their operations, who approved them and their cost.

Routings & costing with the «Current» filter. 12345678
Figure 156. Routings & costing with the «Current» filter.
  1. 1
    The indicators: current approved routings, revisions awaiting customer approval (with the days the oldest one has been waiting), routings rejected by the customer and parts without an approved routing.
  2. 2
    The search box finds by part, drawing, customer or revision.
  3. 3
    The filters with their count: current, awaiting customer, in preparation (draft or internal review), rejected, superseded and all.
  4. 4
    Export CSV downloads the revisions you see.
  5. 5
    New routing creates a part's first revision (or the next one, if it already has one).
  6. 6
    The revision letter (in a filled square if it is the current one) and its status.
  7. 7
    Approval: who approved it at the customer, when and with which reference, or «Internal approval» if the customer does not require it.
  8. 8
    The cost breakdown's unit cost at the part's standard lot and the target price (depending on your profile); on the right, how many WOs have been released with the revision.
Filter What it shows
Current The revision in force today for each part: the latest approved one or, if the part has none approved yet, the one under way.
Awaiting customer Revisions sent to the customer waiting for their answer.
In preparation Revisions in draft or internal review.
Rejected Those the customer has not accepted, with the reason.
Superseded · All revisions The history.

That is why the Current filter may count a few more than the Current routings indicator: the indicator only counts approved ones; parts whose current revision is not approved yet show up in Parts without approved routing.

The «Awaiting customer» filter: the revisions waiting for the customer's answer. 12345
Figure 157. The «Awaiting customer» filter: the revisions waiting for the customer's answer.
  1. 1
    Awaiting customer: the list of what to chase with each customer's supplier quality team.
  2. 2
    An unfilled letter is a revision that is not the current one: here, AMP-1015 rev. C, while rev. B is still used for production.
  3. 3
    Sent N days ago, in amber…
  4. 4
    …and in red, with the row highlighted, after 14 days.
  5. 5
    The shield marks defence parts: only those with the «Defence data» permission see them.

#The life cycle of a revision

Every revision goes through these statuses, shown as a coloured label in the list and in the record:

  1. 1DraftEngineering writes the operations, the control plan and the materials.
  2. 2Internal reviewSomeone else reviews it before it leaves the company.
  3. 3Sent to customerThe reviewer signs it («Reviewed») when sending it. It awaits the customer's answer and can no longer be touched.
  4. 4ApprovedWith the customer's approver and reference, and the signature («Approved») of whoever records it. It becomes current and the previous one is superseded.
If the customer rejects the revision, it becomes «Rejected» with the reason and is editable again to fix it. If the customer does not require routing approval, it is approved internally from internal review, also with a signature.
Status What it means Can it be edited?
Draft (grey) Being prepared. Yes
Internal review Prepared, waiting for review by someone else in engineering. Yes
Sent to customer (amber) Waiting for the customer's approval. No
Approved (green) Approved by the customer (or internally). The latest approved one is the current one. No
Rejected (red) The customer does not accept it; the reason is recorded. Yes, to fix it
Superseded Replaced by a later approved revision. No

#The routing record: operations

Clicking a revision opens its record. The header shows the part and the revision, its status and whether it is the current one; the tabs bring together the operations, the control plan, the material, the cost breakdown, the approval, the comparison, the signatures, the documents and the changes. It opens on Operations.

AMP-1015 rev. B, Operations tab: nine operations, one outside operation and the FAI one. 12345678
Figure 158. AMP-1015 rev. B, Operations tab: nine operations, one outside operation and the FAI one.
  1. 1
    Part and revision, its status and the Current tag if it is the one in force today. Below, the customer and the drawing.
  2. 2
    Opens the part's record. There are no other actions here because the revision is approved and another one (C) is awaiting the customer.
  3. 3
    The tabs, with their number of operations, characteristics, materials and documents. In Signatures, who signed the sending to the customer and the approval.
  4. 4
    If the revision is not editable, it says so here (with a padlock). In an editable one, this notice has the Add operation button.
  5. 5
    What changes in this revision: what was written when it was created. It is what has to be explained to the customer.
  6. 6
    Each operation: number (in steps of 10, so others can be inserted), type icon, description, work centre, set-up per lot and time per part, and how many characteristics are measured in it. Click it to expand it.
  7. 7
    An outside (subcontracted) operation, in purple: the supplier, their lead time in days, its special process (here, NDT) and their cost per part with the minimum lot charge.
  8. 8
    The FAI operation (in amber): it is only performed on the first WO of a new part, after a revision change or with an alternative material that calls for it; on other WOs it is skipped.
Operation 20 expanded: what the operator will see on the shop-floor terminal. 123456
Figure 159. Operation 20 expanded: what the operator will see on the shop-floor terminal.
  1. 1
    The operation: work centre, set-up and time per part. Click again to collapse it.
  2. 2
    The CNC program to load on the machine.
  3. 3
    Fixture (the dedicated workholding, with its code) and tooling.
  4. 4
    The operation's documents (the drawing and its revision).
  5. 5
    Instructions for the operator.
  6. 6
    The characteristics measured in this operation, with their balloon, KC if it is key, nominal and tolerance, gauge and frequency.

#Control plan

The Control plan tab gathers every characteristic that is measured, grouped by operation. It is the basis for WO inspections, for the FAI and for the shop-floor terminal, which shows the operator what to measure and with what.

The control plan of AMP-1015 rev. B: seven characteristics in three operations. 123456
Figure 160. The control plan of AMP-1015 rev. B: seven characteristics in three operations.
  1. 1
    The operation in which it is measured.
  2. 2
    The drawing's balloon number, the characteristic and the KC tag if it is a key characteristic.
  3. 3
    Nominal and tolerance: 10 (+0 / +0.015) mm is accepted between 10.000 and 10.015 mm.
  4. 4
    The gauge used to measure it and the frequency: 100%, first and last of the lot, one in N or a sample per lot (with its size in brackets).
  5. 5
    Attribute characteristics (a thread, a finish) have no dimension: they are checked «go / no-go» with a gauge.
  6. 6
    The ⓘ explains how the limits are worked out and what happens with a measurement outside them.

#Material: primary and alternatives

The Material tab says what the part is made from: the primary material (the one on the item's record) and the alternative materials the customer has approved in this revision of the routing, in case the primary one is short. An alternative may be another size (the 50 mm plate instead of the 40 mm one), another form (plate instead of bar) or another alloy with its approved deviation.

Material of AMP-1015 rev. B: the 40 mm plate as primary and the 50 mm one as approved alternative. 12345678
Figure 161. Material of AMP-1015 rev. B: the 40 mm plate as primary and the 50 mm one as approved alternative.
  1. 1
    What the alternatives are worth depending on the revision's status: in an approved one they are already used; in one sent to the customer, not yet; in an editable one, they are approved with it.
  2. 2
    The ⓘ explains the calculation with this very example.
  3. 3
    The primary material: code (opens its record), specification, form and size.
  4. 4
    Kg per part (the blank), material yield (part ÷ blank) and material cost per part.
  5. 5
    Each alternative with its priority (1 is tried first), Approved or Not approved and, if it has it, Partial FAI on first use.
  6. 6
    The same figures with the difference against the primary: here, 1.9 kg more per part, lower yield and higher cost.
  7. 7
    Free stock of each material and in how many WOs the alternative has already been used.
  8. 8
    The customer's approval (the revision's or its own deviation reference) and the reason.

How alternatives are used:

  • When releasing a WO, Aeromec proposes the primary material if its free stock covers the whole WO; otherwise, the first approved alternative that covers it, by priority. Whoever releases it can choose another approved one (see Work orders).
  • A WO is made from a single material, so as not to mix specifications in one lot.
  • The first WO made with an alternative flagged «partial FAI» opens a partial FAI (AS9102 calls for a partial FAI on a material change) if the customer requires FAI.
  • MRP takes them into account too: before proposing to buy the primary material, it uses an approved alternative that is already in stock (or already on order). It does not propose buying alternatives.
  • The shipment's certificate of conformity (CoC) states which material the part was made from and with which approval.
Material of AMP-1005 rev. C, in draft: the alternative is not approved yet. 1234
Figure 162. Material of AMP-1005 rev. C, in draft: the alternative is not approved yet.
  1. 1
    In an editable revision, the notice reminds you that alternatives are approved with it…
  2. 2
    …and has Add alternative.
  3. 3
    Not approved: it will apply once the customer approves the revision.
  4. 4
    The pencil (or clicking the card) opens the alternative to change or remove it.
The «Add alternative» form (not saved). 1234567
Figure 163. The «Add alternative» form (not saved).
  1. 1
    Alternative raw material: any except the primary one (a part is not valid).
  2. 2
    Gross weight per part of this material's blank; below, the primary one's for reference.
  3. 3
    Priority: 1 is the first one tried if the primary is short.
  4. 4
    Cutting cost: empty, the primary one's (only with «See costs»).
  5. 5
    Partial FAI the first time it is used: if the customer requires FAI, the first WO made from this material opens one.
  6. 6
    Own approval reference: a specific deviation from the customer. If empty, the revision's approval applies.
  7. 7
    Reason: why it is accepted (another size, another form…).
How to add an alternative material
  1. Open an editable revision of the routing (draft, internal review or rejected). If the current one is approved, first create the next revision with New revision.

  2. Go to the Material tab and click Add alternative.

  3. Choose the Raw material and type the Gross weight per part of its blank and the Priority.

  4. Leave Partial FAI the first time it is used on if the material change calls for it, type the Own approval reference if the customer has issued a specific deviation, and the Reason.

  5. Click Save and send the revision to the customer as usual.

The alternative shows «Not approved» until the customer approves the revision; from then on WO release and MRP can use it.

#The cost breakdown

The Cost breakdown tab works out the planned cost of making a part with this routing revision, for the quantity you choose, and the target price. It is recalculated live with each material's last purchase price and each machine's current rate. It also opens from the item's record and from the lines of a quote.

The cost breakdown of AMP-1015 rev. B for a lot of 10 parts. 12345678
Figure 164. The cost breakdown of AMP-1015 rev. B for a lot of 10 parts.
  1. 1
    Lot quantity: type one and press Enter…
  2. 2
    …or pick one of the shortcuts: 1, 5, 25, 100 and the part's standard lot.
  3. 3
    Save version freezes this cost breakdown with a note.
  4. 4
    The key figures: total cost per part, target price and margin (depending on your profile), machine hours per part and lot total.
  5. 5
    Material: kilos, code and €/kg; below, each alternative in the routing with its cost per part and the difference.
  6. 6
    Tools and consumables, machine, labour, outside processing and fixture amortisation: each item with its amount per part, the lot total, a share bar and its ⓘ with the calculation.
  7. 7
    Direct cost, expected scrap, overheads and total cost; at the end, the margin and the target price.
  8. 8
    The simulator: the unit cost for several quantities, with the target price line and how much each one drops against a single part.

The quantity simulator shows why cost falls with the lot size: each operation's set-up and the minimum charges for treatments are spread over more parts. Use it to quote with quantity price breaks: beyond a certain quantity the curve flattens and further price cuts no longer pay off.

Further down, the cost breakdown compares the planned figure with the actual one and keeps versions:

Cost per operation, theoretical vs actual for closed WOs, and saved versions. 123
Figure 165. Cost per operation, theoretical vs actual for closed WOs, and saved versions.
  1. 1
    Cost per operation: hours per part, machine, labour, outside cost and total for each operation. It shows which operation weighs most.
  2. 2
    Theoretical vs actual: the part's latest closed WOs with their actual cost per good part, the theoretical cost of each and the variance in colour; above, the average variance. Click one to open the WO.
  3. 3
    Saved versions: each snapshot of the cost breakdown with its note, date, author, lot and revision, and how much it has changed against today's calculation for the same quantity.
«Save version» with its note (not saved). 1
Figure 166. «Save version» with its note (not saved).
  1. 1
    A note saying what it was saved for. The version is saved with the lot you were looking at.
How to work out a part's cost for a quantity
  1. Open the part's current routing (or the revision you want to cost) and go to the Cost breakdown tab.

  2. Click a quantity shortcut or type the Lot quantity and press Enter.

  3. Read the Total cost and the Target price, and check in the breakdown which item weighs most.

  4. Compare quantities in the Quantity simulator to scale a quote's prices.

  5. If you are going to quote, click Save version, type a note and Save.

#Customer approval

The Approval tab follows the revision's cycle. The action that applies in each status appears as the main button in the header; the others, in the ⋮ menu.

AMP-1023 rev. A, sent to Propulsión Avanzada del Norte and waiting for their answer. 1234567
Figure 167. AMP-1023 rev. A, sent to Propulsión Avanzada del Norte and waiting for their answer.
  1. 1
    Record approval: the action for this status (with the «Approve routings» permission).
  2. 2
    In the ⋮ menu, Record rejection.
  3. 3
    How many days it has been with the customer (in red after 14).
  4. 4
    The history: created, internally reviewed and sent to the customer, with date, time and author.
  5. 5
    The steps still to come, in grey («Pending»).
  6. 6
    Customer requirements: whether they require routing approval, whether the revision requires an FAI on its first WO, the previous revision and the description.
  7. 7
    The part's revisions («View» is the one you have open; here there is only one): click another to open it.
«Record approval» (not saved). 123
Figure 168. «Record approval» (not saved).
  1. 1
    What happens on approval: this revision becomes current and the previous one superseded; WOs already released keep theirs.
  2. 2
    Who approves it at the customer (required).
  3. 3
    Their approval reference: it will appear in the list and on the WO travellers. Save then asks for your signature.
«Record rejection» (not saved). 1
Figure 169. «Record rejection» (not saved).
  1. 1
    The reason given by the customer (required). It will show in the list and in the record, and the revision will become editable again.

Sending the revision to the customer and recording their approval are signed. Clicking Send to customer (or Save in «Record approval», or Approve (internal)) opens the signature dialog:

Lucía, from engineering, signs the sending of AMP-1008 rev. B to the customer (not signed). 12345
Figure 170. Lucía, from engineering, signs the sending of AMP-1008 rev. B to the customer (not signed).
  1. 1
    The meaning of the signature: «Reviewed» when sending the revision to the customer; «Approved» when recording their approval.
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the part, the revision and the action (when approving, also who approves for the customer and their reference).
  3. 3
    Who signs, with their job title and their inspection stamp (no stamp is needed to sign a routing).
  4. 4
    Your password, the one you log in to Aeromec with: the database checks it and it is not stored.
  5. 5
    Sign carries out the action. Cancel leaves it as it was.
How to take a revision through to customer approval
  1. In a draft revision, complete the operations, the control plan and the material, and click Send to internal review.

  2. The reviewer clicks Send to customer and signs with their password (or Back to draft in the ⋮ menu if something needs fixing). If the customer does not require routing approval, Approve (internal) appears instead, which is also signed.

  3. Send the routing to the customer through the usual channel (portal, email) and wait for their answer: the revision shows under Awaiting customer.

  4. When they answer, open the revision and click Record approval: type who approves it and their reference, click Save and sign. If they reject it, ⋮ menu › Record rejection with the reason.

Once approved, the revision becomes current, the previous approved one is superseded and the WOs released from now on will use the new one. If the part was in development, it moves to «FAI pending» or «Production». The signatures are kept on the routing's Signatures tab.
AMP-1021 rev. B, rejected by the customer with its reason. 1234
Figure 171. AMP-1021 rev. B, rejected by the customer with its reason.
  1. 1
    The rejection reason, as given by the customer.
  2. 2
    In the history, the Rejected step in red, with the date and the reason.
  3. 3
    A rejected revision becomes editable again: fix the operations and click Send to internal review. In the ⋮ menu, Back to draft, Edit routing details and Delete this revision.
  4. 4
    The previous revision: production carries on with it in the meantime.

#Creating a new revision and editing operations

An approved routing is not touched: to change something, the next revision is created. New revision appears as a button in the header of the latest approved revision when no other one is under way (also on the Routings & costing tab of the item's record). New routing, in the list, first asks for the part.

«New revision» from AMP-1019 rev. A (not saved). 12
Figure 172. «New revision» from AMP-1019 rev. A (not saved).
  1. 1
    Which letter it will have and which revision it copies the operations, control plan and alternative materials from. The previous one stays current until the new one is approved.
  2. 2
    What changes in this revision (required): what will have to be explained to the customer.
The actions of a draft revision. 12
Figure 173. The actions of a draft revision.
  1. 1
    Edit routing details: the description and «What changes in this revision».
  2. 2
    Delete this revision: only an editable revision (draft, internal review or rejected) with which no WO has been released.
AMP-1005 rev. C in draft: the operations can be changed. 12345
Figure 174. AMP-1005 rev. C in draft: the operations can be changed.
  1. 1
    A draft revision.
  2. 2
    Its main action: Send to internal review (it needs at least one operation).
  3. 3
    The editable revision notice…
  4. 4
    …with Add operation.
  5. 5
    Each operation's pencil edits it (or deletes it). Inside the expanded operation, Add characteristic adds one to the control plan.
«Edit operation» for operation 20 of AMP-1005 rev. C (not saved). 12345
Figure 175. «Edit operation» for operation 20 of AMP-1005 rev. C (not saved).
  1. 1
    Operation number (in steps of 10) and type (cutting, machining, treatment, subcontracting, inspection, fitting, marking, assembly, packing).
  2. 2
    Description of the operation, as the operator will see it.
  3. 3
    For an internal operation: work centre, set-up per lot and time per part in minutes…
  4. 4
    …and fixture, CNC program and tooling.
  5. 5
    For an external operation: the supplier, the special process it performs (see below), its lead time in days and, with «See costs», the cost per part and the minimum charge per lot.

In an outside operation, besides the supplier, its lead time and its cost, you state the special process it performs (anodising, heat treatment, shot peening, NDT…). It is not decoration: when the purchase order for that subcontracting is sent, Aeromec checks that the supplier has that process within its current approved scope (for example, an unexpired Nadcap) and, if the part's customer has its own approved supplier list, that the supplier is on it. If not, the purchase order is not sent (see Suppliers).

A subcontracted anodising operation in AMP-1005 rev. C: supplier, special process, lead time and cost (not saved). 123
Figure 176. A subcontracted anodising operation in AMP-1005 rev. C: supplier, special process, lead time and cost (not saved).
  1. 1
    The supplier that performs the operation.
  2. 2
    The operation's special process: the supplier must have it within its current approved scope (and on the customer's list, if required) for the purchase order to be sent to them.
  3. 3
    The lead time in days and, with «See costs», the cost per part and the minimum lot charge.

#Compare revisions

Compare revisions shows what changes between this revision and another of the same part (by default, the previous one): it is what you have to tell the customer when sending them a new revision, and what decides whether a partial or full FAI is needed.

AMP-1015: what changed from rev. A to rev. B. 123456
Figure 177. AMP-1015: what changed from rev. A to rev. B.
  1. 1
    Choose which revision to compare with.
  2. 2
    The summary: operations added, removed and changed, and the time per part, unit cost and control plan characteristics, before → after.
  3. 3
    How much time and cost change (in green if they go down).
  4. 4
    Material changes: alternatives added (green), removed (red) or changed (amber), with the kilos per part.
  5. 5
    Each changed operation, with what changes struck through and its new value next to it; added ones show in green and removed ones in red.
  6. 6
    The ⓘ reminds you what is compared and why it matters to the customer.

#Routing documents

The routing's Documents tab holds its own documents and those of each operation: the CNC programs, the instructions, photos of the set-up… The WO shows them on its Documents tab and the shop-floor terminal, next to the operation being worked on.

The CNC programs for operations 20 and 30 of AMP-1015 rev. B. 123
Figure 178. The CNC programs for operations 20 and 30 of AMP-1015 rev. B.
  1. 1
    Upload documents asks what to attach them to: the routing or one of its operations.
  2. 2
    Documents are grouped by operation.
  3. 3
    A CNC program: type, revision, size, who uploaded it and its note (program and work centre). View shows it as text inside the app.

#What changes with the profile

The cost breakdown shows costs, so only profiles with «See costs» see it. This is how Antonio, the shop floor manager, sees the material of AMP-1015: without the Cost breakdown tab, without costs and without actions in the header (he has neither «Edit routings» nor «Approve routings»).

The Material tab seen by the shop floor manager: no costs. 12
Figure 179. The Material tab seen by the shop floor manager: no costs.
  1. 1
    No Cost breakdown tab (he does not have «See costs») and no Changes tab (he does not have the audit permission).
  2. 2
    He sees the kilos, the yield and the stock, but not the cost per part of each material.

And this is how Lucía, from engineering, sees the cost breakdown: with every cost, but without target price or margin (she has neither «See prices» nor «See margins»). She can save versions.

The cost breakdown seen by engineering: costs yes, target price no. 12
Figure 180. The cost breakdown seen by engineering: costs yes, target price no.
  1. 1
    Total cost, hours and lot total, without target price or margin. They do not appear in the breakdown, the simulator or the routing list either.
  2. 2
    She can save versions (she has «Edit routings»).

#Tips

Engineering

Changes

Product change requests —a new customer drawing (ECN), a change of process, material, supplier, CNC program, tooling or specification— with their calculated impact, signed approval and implementation; and each part's configuration: which drawing revision was manufactured in each work order.

Who uses it: Engineering (records and manages) and Quality or Management (approve); the rest, read-onlyAccess: «Changes» section; to record, evaluate and implement, «Manage changes»; to approve or reject, «Approve changes»

A change to a part that is already in production is never just changing a letter on the drawing: there are work orders running with the previous revision, parts in stock, committed deliveries, a routing and a CNC program to redo and, very often, an FAI to repeat. In Changes each change is recorded as a request (CAM-…), its impact is evaluated with today's data, someone with authority approves or rejects it with a signature, and it is implemented on the agreed date, keeping its history.

Change types: drawing (the customer's ECN, engineering change notice: a new drawing revision), process, material, supplier, CNC program, tooling, specification and documentation. The origin can be the customer, internal or a supplier.

In addition, each part has its configuration: the drawing revision is frozen in each work order when it is released and passes to its lots, to traceability and to the CoC, so you always know which revision each part was made to.

  1. 1DraftWhat changes, why, the part and the new revision.
  2. 2EvaluationImpact on quotes, deliveries, work orders, stock, routings, tooling, purchases and FAI.
  3. 3ApprovedSigned (and with the customer's approval if it requires one). Its impact is kept.
  4. 4ImplementedThe part moves to the new revision from the effectivity date.
  5. 5ClosedWith the FAI done and the documentation up to date.
The life of a change request.

#The change list

Engineering → Changes, with the «All» filter. 1234567
Figure 181. Engineering → Changes, with the «All» filter.
  1. 1
    Changes open, under evaluation, approved to be implemented and implemented in 12 months.
  2. 2
    Search by number, part, title or customer reference (ECN).
  3. 3
    New change (with «Manage changes»).
  4. 4
    Filters: open, under evaluation, approved not implemented, closed and all.
  5. 5
    Aerointegra's ECN for AMP-1015: type, origin, customer reference and the revision step A → B.
  6. 6
    An internal tooling change for AMP-1018, in draft.
  7. 7
    The status: draft, under evaluation, approved, rejected, implemented, closed or cancelled.

#Recording a change

New change (not saved). 12345678
Figure 182. New change (not saved).
  1. 1
    The type (drawing, process, material…) and the origin (customer, internal, supplier).
  2. 2
    The affected part (mandatory for a drawing change) and, on the right, the customer's ECN reference.
  3. 3
    For a drawing change, the new revision being implemented.
  4. 4
    What changes and why.
  5. 5
    Whether it needs the customer's approval (frozen process, change of source or of special process) and, on the right, when and with what reference it was given.
  6. 6
    Whether it needs an FAI (full or partial) on the first work order with the change.
  7. 7
    The effectivity: immediate, from the next work order or from a date.
  8. 8
    What to do with the work orders already released: finish them with the previous revision, rework them to the new one or stop them until a decision is made.

A change can also be recorded from the part's record (Items → Configuration → New change): it comes with the part and its current revision already filled in. While it is in draft or under evaluation it can be edited (pencil on the record).

#The change record

CAM-2026-0006, Aerointegra's ECN for AMP-1015, under evaluation. 123456
Figure 183. CAM-2026-0006, Aerointegra's ECN for AMP-1015, under evaluation.
  1. 1
    Number, type, ECN, status and the revision step; below, the part and its customer.
  2. 2
    The action due: Evaluate impact, Approve, Implement or Close, depending on the status.
  3. 3
    The others: Recalculate impact, Reject (with reason and signature), Edit and Cancel.
  4. 4
    The details: date, type, origin, part, current and new revision, ECN, owner and who recorded it.
  5. 5
    What changes, why and the notes.
  6. 6
    Whether it needs the customer's approval and an FAI, the effectivity, what to do with the work orders already released and when the impact was evaluated.

The Signatures tab shows the signed approval or rejection (who, when and with which stamp) and checks that what was signed has not changed; Documents keeps the customer's ECN, the new drawing or the meeting minutes.

#The impact of the change

CAM-2026-0006 → Impact: what revision B of AMP-1015 affects. 12345678
Figure 184. CAM-2026-0006 → Impact: what revision B of AMP-1015 affects.
  1. 1
    Open quotes, pending deliveries, work orders and stock of the part.
  2. 2
    Saved when it was evaluated or approved (it goes into what is signed); in draft it is calculated when you open it.
  3. 3
    Open work orders with the revision they are made to: two in progress with A.
  4. 4
    The part's pending deliveries.
  5. 5
    The routings (C, sent to the customer) and, below, the open purchases.
  6. 6
    The stock by lot with its revision.
  7. 7
    The part's tooling.
  8. 8
    Whether it needs an FAI and the latest approved one (revision A).

#Approve or reject with a signature

A change under evaluation is approved or rejected by someone with «Approve changes» (Quality or Management), with their electronic signature: their Aeromec password and, if they have one, their inspection stamp. What is signed includes the evaluated impact.

Approving CAM-2026-0006: the electronic signature (not signed). 123456
Figure 185. Approving CAM-2026-0006: the electronic signature (not signed).
  1. 1
    The meaning of the signature: approved.
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the change, with its number and title.
  3. 3
    The signer, their job title and their inspection stamp with its scopes.
  4. 4
    The declaration of what signing means.
  5. 5
    Your password: the same one you log in with; the database checks it and it is not stored.
  6. 6
    Sign: the change is approved with the date, the time and the hash of its content.
How to approve a change
  1. Open the change under evaluation and go over the Impact tab (if days have passed, Recalculate impact in the ⋮ menu).

  2. If the change needs the customer's approval, record it first with the pencil (who, when and with what reference): without it, it cannot be approved.

  3. Press Approve, enter your password and Sign.

The change is approved and signed. To reject it, Reject in the ⋮ menu asks for the reason and the signature.

#Implementing the change

Implement (with «Manage changes») puts the change into effect, never before its effectivity date:

  • For a drawing change, the part moves to the new revision: work orders released from now on take it; those already released keep theirs (and what was decided is done with them: finish, rework or stop them). The part's drawing revision is no longer changed by hand on its record: it is changed with a change request.
  • For the others, work orders released from now on follow the new routing, program or process.
  • If it needs an FAI, the first work order with the change cannot be shipped without its approved FAI (full or partial) (Inspection & FAI).

Afterwards, Close the change when everything is done (FAI, documentation, tooling).

#A part's configuration

Items → AMP-1004 → Configuration: the drawing revisions and their changes. 1234
Figure 186. Items → AMP-1004 → Configuration: the drawing revisions and their changes.
  1. 1
    New change for this part.
  2. 2
    The current drawing revision (E), since when, the change that brought it and how many work orders and shipped parts there are of it.
  3. 3
    The previous revision (D) with its work orders.
  4. 4
    The part's changes: press one to open it.

The drawing revision is frozen in the work order when it is released (Work orders) and its lots inherit it: the traceability of a serial number and the shipment's CoC state which revision it was made to. If there are work orders released with a revision earlier than the current one, the configuration warns you («N released work orders are being made to an earlier revision»).

Production

Work orders

The order that takes a lot of parts through its routing in the shop, from planned to closed. Releasing it freezes the routing revision and the drawing revision, checks its fixtures and the contract review of its order, chooses the material (the primary one or an approved alternative), decides the FAI, reserves the raw material by lot and heat and generates the serial numbers; then it is followed operation by operation with the shop-floor time records, the material, quality and the actual cost against the cost breakdown.

Who uses it: Planning and the shop floor manager (create and release; the shop floor manager also closes), warehouse (picks the material), quality (raises NCRs) and management and engineering for referenceAccess: «Work orders» section; to create, edit and re-plan, «Edit work orders»; to release, «Release work orders»; to close, «Close work orders»; to pick the material, «Edit warehouse»; to see costs, «See costs»

A work order (WO) says which part has to be made, how many, by when and how: with which routing revision (the approved operations and control plan) and with which material. It is born planned, usually to serve a line of a customer order (or for stock, or proposed by MRP), and is released to the floor when it is decided to start it: from then on its operations join each machine's queue, operators log their time records on the shop-floor terminal and Aeromec keeps adding up hours, good and rejected parts, material issued and actual cost.

Some trade terms used in this chapter:

  • Release: send the WO to the floor. Releasing freezes the routing (the WO keeps the current revision even if another one is approved later) and also the drawing revision, chooses the material, decides whether an FAI is needed, reserves the raw material and generates the serial numbers.
  • FAI (First Article Inspection, EN 9102 / AS9102): the full inspection of the first part, required if the customer asks for it and the part is new, the drawing revision changes or an alternative material is used for the first time (partial FAI).
  • Heat: the melt a lot of material comes from; it is stated on its 3.1 certificate (EN 10204) and traced down to each part.
  • FIFO (first in, first out): material is reserved starting with the lots that arrived first.
  • Time record: each record from the shop-floor terminal (who, on which machine, on which operation, how long and how many parts).
  • NCR: a nonconformance. If it «blocks the WO», no operation proceeds until Quality decides what to do with the parts.
  1. 1PlannedIt is born from an order line, from MRP or for stock, with the current routing and planned backwards from the due date.
  2. 2ReleasedRouting and drawing revision frozen, material chosen and reserved, FAI decided, serials generated.
  3. 3In progressOperators carry out the operations from the terminal; each time record adds hours and parts.
  4. 4Finished and closedGood parts go into stores; on closing, the actual cost is frozen.
An NCR that blocks the WO leaves it «Blocked» until Quality decides the disposition of the parts.
Status What it means
Planned Created, with dates, but not released: it takes no material and does not appear on the terminal.
Released On the floor, with its material reserved; no operation has started yet.
In progress At least one operation has started.
Blocked Stopped by an NCR that blocks the WO.
Finished The last operation has finished: the good parts are in finished goods stores. It still has to be closed.
Closed Actual cost frozen: it accepts no more time records.
Cancelled Not made (only if it had no time records).

#The work order list

When you open it you see the WOs on the floor (released, in progress and blocked), sorted by due date. If the WO belongs to a programme (the aircraft or system the part is made for, see Programmes), its code appears below the customer, before the order.

Work orders with the «On the floor» filter. 12345678
Figure 187. Work orders with the «On the floor» filter.
  1. 1
    The indicators: WOs on the floor and the parts they add up to, late, at risk of delay, blocked by NCR, and the average cost variance of WOs closed in the last 90 days (depending on your profile). Each ⓘ explains its calculation.
  2. 2
    The search box: by WO number, part, drawing, customer, order, customer reference or material heat.
  3. 3
    The filters, with their count. Scroll the row to see the last ones.
  4. 4
    The Programme filter leaves only the WOs of one programme (AR-90, TF-38…). To its left, Export CSV; to its right, New WO, which creates an order for stock.
  5. 5
    WO number and part; P1 (urgent) or P2 (high) if it has priority, and the shield if it is defence. Click the row to open its record.
  6. 6
    The current operation with its machine; in purple if it is at an outside supplier. The pulsing green dot means someone is working on it right now.
  7. 7
    Due date and, below it, the days late (red), «At risk» (amber) or how long is left. To its left, the progress.
  8. 8
    Actual cost per part and its variance against the cost breakdown (with the «See costs» permission).
Filter What it shows
On the floor Released, in progress and blocked: the live shop load.
Late Unfinished, with the due date already passed.
At risk Still on time, but their plan ends after the due date or they have operations that should already have finished.
Blocked Stopped by an NCR that blocks the WO.
Planned Those waiting to be released.
FAI pending Live, with an FAI required and not yet approved: their parts cannot ship.
Finished, not closed Finished on the floor, waiting to be closed to freeze their cost.
Closed · Defence · All The history, defence WOs (only with that permission) and all of them.

In the Status column, the amber FAI tag warns that the WO needs an FAI that has not been approved yet. Rows of blocked WOs are tinted red and late ones a lighter red.

#Creating a WO

WOs are almost always created from the customer order (button on the order line, in Sales orders) or from MRP proposals (MRP › Generate). New WO creates a WO for stock (it can also be opened from Create in the top bar).

The «New WO» form (not saved). 1234
Figure 188. The «New WO» form (not saved).
  1. 1
    Part (or semi-finished item), with a search box. It must have a routing.
  2. 2
    Quantity of parts. From an order line, if you leave it empty, the pending quantity plus the part's expected scrap is used.
  3. 3
    Due date: the WO is planned backwards from it, minus the shipping margin.
  4. 4
    Priority: from P1 «Urgent» to P5 «Filler». It orders the queues when two operations compete for the same machine.
How to create a WO for stock
  1. Click New WO.

  2. Choose the Part and type the Quantity.

  3. Choose the Due date and the Priority.

  4. Click Save.

«WO created and planned» appears and its record opens: the WO is planned with the part's current routing and ready to release.

#Releasing a WO to the floor

With the Planned filter you see the WOs waiting. Open the one you want to release: its record shows the plan, the queue forecast and the planned material.

A planned WO, ready to release. 123456
Figure 189. A planned WO, ready to release.
  1. 1
    Number and part, Planned and what the machine queues forecast: on time, tight or late.
  2. 2
    Release to floor: the main action of a planned WO (with the «Release work orders» permission). In the ⋮ menu: edit, re-plan, flag for attention, see in the queues and cancel.
  3. 3
    Planning: planned start and end, due date and priority.
  4. 4
    Forecast (queues): when it will start and finish according to the order of each queue, its slack against the target and the position of each operation.
  5. 5
    The routing's theoretical hours for this quantity (the actual ones, once it starts).
  6. 6
    Part and routing: the drawing (its revision is filled in on release, with the one current at that moment), the routing revision it will be made with and the planned material (the primary one). The lot and the serials are also filled in on release.

When you click Release to floor Aeromec explains what is going to happen and lets you choose the material: the part's primary one or one of the approved alternatives in the routing, with what the WO needs of each and its free stock.

Releasing a planned WO: the primary material is short and the alternative approved in the routing comes selected (not released). 123456
Figure 190. Releasing a planned WO: the primary material is short and the alternative approved in the routing comes selected (not released).
  1. 1
    What happens on release: the routing revision is frozen, the FAI is decided, the chosen material is reserved by lot in arrival order and the serial numbers are generated.
  2. 2
    The ⓘ explains how what the WO needs and the free stock are calculated, with an example.
  3. 3
    The primary material: what the WO needs (kg per part × parts) and its free stock, in red because it does not cover the whole WO.
  4. 4
    An approved alternative in the routing, with its priority, its own blank, its free stock in green (it does cover it) and the customer's approval. It comes selected because it is the first one that covers the WO.
  5. 5
    The warning that this is its first use: releasing will open a partial FAI for the material change and the parts will not ship until it is released.
  6. 6
    Release to floor does it; Cancel closes without changing anything.
How to release a WO to the floor
  1. Filter Planned and open the WO.

  2. Check the Forecast (queues) and the planned material.

  3. Click Release to floor.

  4. Read what is going to happen and choose the material: keep the selected one or choose another approved one. Watch the free stock (green if it covers the WO) and the partial FAI warning.

  5. Click Release to floor.

The WO becomes «Released» with the current drawing revision frozen, its first operation joins its machine's queue and the record says «Made from …» (with the «Approved alternative» tag if it is one). If there is something to warn about, a summary appears: FAI required (full or partial), alternative material, insufficient material or routing updated to a newly approved revision.

When a WO cannot be released. Before releasing, Aeromec checks that everything the WO needs is in order. If something fails, the WO stays planned and the reason is shown:

Reason What happens What to do
Contract review missing A WO serving an order cannot be released if neither the order nor its quote has a signed contract review. When you click Release to floor, Aeromec asks «Contract review missing»: with the «Review contracts» permission you can do it there and then; without it, it warns you and does not release. Do the contract review (see Quotes) and release again.
Fixture not fit for use An operation in the routing uses a fixture that is not validated, blocked or has an overdue verification: «The work order uses tooling that is not validated or overdue (tooling record → Record verification)». In the demo, OF-2026-0201 for AMP-1018 cannot be released because fixture UT-002 has an overdue verification. Verify the fixture and sign (see Fixtures); then release.
Routing not approved The customer requires routing approval and the current revision is not approved («Request approval in Routings»). If the part has no routing, it cannot be released either. Take the revision through the customer's approval (Routings & costing).

#The WO record: summary

The record of a running WO tells you at a glance how it is going: the warnings that need attention, the key figures, the plan against the queue forecast, the hours, the origin and what it is made from.

Summary of an in-progress WO, late. 12345678
Figure 191. Summary of an in-progress WO, late.
  1. 1
    The status and what needs attention: days late or «At risk», the FAI status, the priority, the queue forecast and the attention or defence tag.
  2. 2
    Customer, drawing and its revision (the one frozen on release), the routing revision it is made with and the quantity.
  3. 3
    The main action depending on the status: Release to floor, Pick material, Close WO or, if there is none, Traveller.
  4. 4
    The other actions, in the ⋮ menu.
  5. 5
    The tabs: Summary, Operations, Time records, Material and serials, Quality, Costs, Documents and Changes.
  6. 6
    The warnings: delay or risk, WO blocked by an NCR (with a link to it), FAI pending (with a link to the FAI) or the attention note.
  7. 7
    The key figures: quantity, good, rejected, progress and due date.
  8. 8
    Forecast (queues): the start and end the queues forecast, the target (due date − shipping margin), the slack and where each pending operation is.
The lower part of the Summary: hours, origin, and part and routing. 12345
Figure 192. The lower part of the Summary: hours, origin, and part and routing.
  1. 1
    Theoretical against actual hours, with a bar that marks 100% (in red above 110%).
  2. 2
    The routing revision frozen on release, with its status: it opens the routing.
  3. 3
    Made from: the material it was released with (with the «Approved alternative» tag if it is one; hover to see the customer's approval).
  4. 4
    The material lot and its heat, and how many serial numbers it has.
  5. 5
    Origin: the customer, the programme (opens its record), the customer order (opens the order), the ordered quantity, the required date and, with «See prices», the line price.

#WO actions

The ⋮ menu of an in-progress WO. 123456
Figure 193. The ⋮ menu of an in-progress WO.
  1. 1
    Edit WO: priority and notes (and, while it is planned, quantity and due date: changing them re-plans it automatically).
  2. 2
    Re-plan backwards from the due date or forwards from today.
  3. 3
    Flag for attention: a flag with a note that shows in the queues, in the weekly report and in the record.
  4. 4
    See in the queues: opens Planning › Machine queues, by WO.
  5. 5
    Traceability: the WO's full history (material, operations, operators, inspections, shipments).
  6. 6
    Raise NCR (Quality): a nonconformance already linked to the WO and the part.
«Re-plan»: backwards or forwards. 12
Figure 194. «Re-plan»: backwards or forwards.
  1. 1
    Backwards: each operation as late as possible to deliver on time.
  2. 2
    Forwards: each operation as soon as possible; it shows the end date that can really be reached.
«Attention flag» with its note (not saved). 1
Figure 195. «Attention flag» with its note (not saved).
  1. 1
    The note: it will show in the queues, in the weekly report and in the WO record until the flag is removed.

The traveller (Traveller) is the landscape PDF that travels with the parts through the shop: part, drawing and revision, the routing with who approved it and their reference, customer, order, lot and heat; the operations to sign off (good, rejected, operator, date); the control plan with key characteristics marked ◆; the serial numbers and the release and quality sign-off signatures. It carries the «DEFENCE» or «FAI» mark when applicable and the footer «Controlled document. Print only the current revision.». It opens in the browser's print dialog, from where you print or save it.

The manufacturing record (Record (PDF), in the ⋮ menu of a released or finished work order) is the work order's complete record to keep it or send it to a customer or an auditor: the part with the drawing revision it was made to, the routing and who approved it, the order; the material with its heat, its validated 3.1 certificate and its signed receiving inspection; each operation with its machine or its supplier (and the special process), the CNC program and its validation, the tooling and its verification; each work log with who, when and how much and whether they held the qualification the machine requires; each inspection with its measurements and the gauge, with the calibration in force on the measuring date; the FAI, the NCRs, the scrap, the serial numbers, the lots produced, the shipments with their CoC, the documents with their SHA-256 fingerprint and every signature, each with its status («Intact»: the record is today exactly what was signed). With «See costs», also the actual cost against the standard.

#Operations

The Operations tab follows the WO operation by operation: at the top, a chart with each operation's plan against today and the due date; below, each operation with its machine or supplier, its dates, its hours and its parts.

Operations of an in-progress WO with a pending rework. 123456
Figure 196. Operations of an in-progress WO with a pending rework.
  1. 1
    The routing revision it is made with (the one frozen on release).
  2. 2
    The chart: one bar per operation with its plan, in the colour of its status (lighter if still pending; with a purple border, outside operations), the blue today line and the red due date line. A bar to the right of the red line means a certain delay.
  3. 3
    A finished operation carries a tick.
  4. 4
    The operation's actual / theoretical hours; in red above 110%. Next to them, good and rejected parts.
  5. 5
    A rework operation: it comes from an NCR disposition (opens the NCR). Above it, its forecast in the queues: when it will start and finish, its position in the queue and whether it is on time.
  6. 6
    Each operation's status: pending, queued, in progress, paused, finished, blocked or skipped. Click the operation to expand it.
Further down, in another in-progress WO: a subcontracted operation with its purchase order, the skipped FAI operation and the operation in progress. 123
Figure 197. Further down, in another in-progress WO: a subcontracted operation with its purchase order, the skipped FAI operation and the operation in progress.
  1. 1
    An outside operation: the supplier in purple and the subcontracting purchase order, with its status and its due date (opens the order).
  2. 2
    The FAI operation, skipped: this part already had an approved FAI for the drawing revision.
  3. 3
    The operation in progress: who is working on it now, since when and on which type of record.

Click an operation to expand it: it shows its set-up and time per part, the CNC program, the control plan characteristics, the actual start and end, the instructions, its time records and the incidents logged on it (a broken tool, a breakdown…) with their solution.

An expanded operation in a planned WO: what the routing says and its queue forecast. 12
Figure 198. An expanded operation in a planned WO: what the routing says and its queue forecast.
  1. 1
    The operation's forecast in the queues: when it will start and finish, its position in its machine's queue and whether it is on time, tight or late.
  2. 2
    The operation detail: set-up and time per part, control plan characteristics and instructions (and the CNC program, if the operation has one). In an operation with work done, also its actual start and end, its time records and its incidents.

#Time records

The Time records tab gathers everything logged on the shop-floor terminal for this WO: at the top, each person's hours; below, each time record.

The time records of an in-progress WO. 123456
Figure 199. The time records of an in-progress WO.
  1. 1
    The logged hours and, in bars, the five people who have worked most on the WO. Its ⓘ explains the hours and the efficiency.
  2. 2
    An open record (green play icon): someone is working now; it counts up to this moment («running»).
  3. 3
    A set-up record (the spanner): clamping, loading the program and getting the first part out.
  4. 4
    Each record: operation, person and machine, start and end, type (set-up, run, rework), good and rejected parts and the rejection cause.
  5. 5
    The record's efficiency: green from 95%, amber from 80%, red below.
  6. 6
    The record's hours and its machine and labour cost (depending on your profile). If the person had another task at the same time, the hours booked to them show below.

#Material and serials

The Material and serials tab says which material was reserved and issued for the WO, from which lot and which heat, and which serial number each part has: the basis of traceability.

The material and serial numbers of an in-progress WO. 123
Figure 200. The material and serial numbers of an in-progress WO.
  1. 1
    Reserved material on release: lot and heat, how much was reserved and how much has been issued, its locations and the reservation status (active, issued or cancelled). Click it to open the lot.
  2. 2
    Issues and receipts: the material issued by lot, with its amount (depending on your profile), and the finished goods receipt into stores when it finishes.
  3. 3
    The serial numbers, one per part, with their status (in process, finished, rejected, shipped). Click one to see its full traceability.

While the WO is released and its reservation active, the warehouse issues the material with Pick material, the main action in the header: the reserved material is issued to the WO and the reservation becomes issued. If it is not picked beforehand, the material is issued automatically when the first operation starts on the terminal.

A released WO with its active reservation, ready for material picking. 123
Figure 201. A released WO with its active reservation, ready for material picking.
  1. 1
    Pick material (with the «Edit warehouse» permission): issues the reserved material to the WO.
  2. 2
    The reservation is active: the material is set aside for this WO, but still in its location.
  3. 3
    If the customer does not work by serial number, traceability is by WO and heat.

#Quality

The Quality tab gathers the WO's FAI, its NCRs and its inspections, and at the top the scrap (parts discarded). Each row opens its record in Inspection & FAI or in Nonconformances.

Quality of the WO for the new part AMP-1012: the FAI in progress, an inspection and a scrapped part. 1234
Figure 202. Quality of the WO for the new part AMP-1012: the FAI in progress, an inspection and a scrapped part.
  1. 1
    The FAI status also shows in the header.
  2. 2
    Scrap: scrapped parts, their cost (depending on your profile) and, for each one, date, operation, machine, cause and person.
  3. 3
    The FAI: its number, the reason (new part, revision change, alternative material), how many of the plan's characteristics have been measured, the inspector and its status.
  4. 4
    Each WO inspection with its type, operation, date, inspector, measurements and result.

If an NCR blocks the WO, the Summary says so at the top and links to it. No operation can proceed, not even from the terminal, until Quality decides the disposition of the parts (rework, concession, scrap or return); if it is rework, a rework operation is added to the WO.

A WO blocked by a nonconformance. 1234
Figure 203. A WO blocked by a nonconformance.
  1. 1
    Blocked (NCR) in the header (and in red in the list).
  2. 2
    The warning: which NCR blocks it and why.
  3. 3
    Click the NCR to open it: there Quality decides the disposition and the WO is unblocked.
  4. 4
    The WO's rejected parts, including those affected by the NCR.

#Costs: actual against cost breakdown

The Costs tab compares the WO's actual cost with the cost breakdown's theoretical cost for the same quantity, item by item, and works out the actual margin against the order price. Only profiles with «See costs» see it.

Costs of a closed AMP-1015 WO. 123456
Figure 204. Costs of a closed AMP-1015 WO.
  1. 1
    Theoretical per part (cost breakdown ÷ parts released), actual per good part, variance and, depending on your profile, the price and the actual margin.
  2. 2
    How many parts were released and how many good ones came out.
  3. 3
    Each item: material, machine hours, labour and subcontracting, and the manufacturing cost: theoretical, actual and variance, in green, amber or red (more than 5% above).
  4. 4
    The bars: grey for theoretical and coloured for actual. You can see at a glance which item explains the variance (here, machine hours).
  5. 5
    The actual scrap (already included in material and hours) against the scrap expected in the cost breakdown.
  6. 6
    Actual margin (with «See margins»): price, actual cost per part and overheads, and the margin in colour against the target.
In a WO that has not finished, the theoretical cost is pro-rated by progress. 1
Figure 205. In a WO that has not finished, the theoretical cost is pro-rated by progress.
  1. 1
    Until the WO finishes, the theoretical cost is pro-rated by progress to compare what has been spent with what should have been spent so far.

#Finishing, closing and cancelling

When the operator finishes the last operation on the terminal, the WO becomes Finished on its own and its good parts go into finished goods stores (in a PT- lot for the WO); leftover serials are marked rejected. From there, Shipments sends them to the customer (if the WO has an unreleased FAI, its parts do not ship).

Then it has to be closed: Close WO freezes the actual cost and moves it into the comparison with the cost breakdown. A planned or released WO that has no time records yet can be cancelled from the ⋮ menu, with a reason.

«Close WO» on a finished WO (not confirmed). 12
Figure 206. «Close WO» on a finished WO (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    What happens on closing: the actual cost is frozen and no more time records can be logged.
  2. 2
    Close WO does it (with the «Close work orders» permission).
«Cancel WO» on a planned WO (not saved). 12
Figure 207. «Cancel WO» on a planned WO (not saved).
  1. 1
    Only if it has no time records yet: its material reservations and serial numbers are released.
  2. 2
    The reason for the cancellation (required).
How to close a finished WO
  1. Filter Finished, not closed and open the WO.

  2. Check the Costs tab: actual against the cost breakdown and the margin.

  3. Click Close WO and confirm.

«WO closed: cost frozen» appears. The WO moves to Closed and its cost enters the list's average variance and the part's cost breakdown comparison.

#Documents and changes

Besides its own documents, the WO's Documents tab brings together the part drawings and the documents of the routing and of each operation (the CNC programs): everything needed to make it, in one place. Those of the part and the routing are read-only here; they are changed in their own record.

A WO's documents: the part drawing and the CNC programs of its operations. 1234
Figure 208. A WO's documents: the part drawing and the CNC programs of its operations.
  1. 1
    Upload documents to the WO (or drag them onto the window): photos, reports, anything specific to this WO.
  2. 2
    Part drawings: the customer's drawing with its revision.
  3. 3
    The documents of each routing operation: here, their CNC programs.
  4. 4
    View inside the app (a CNC program, as text) or download.

The Changes tab (with the «See the change audit log» permission) shows who changed the WO and what: releases, status changes, dates, priority, quantity… Click a change to see each field with its value before and after.

The detail of a change: the release of a WO. 12
Figure 209. The detail of a change: the release of a WO.
  1. 1
    Which record changed, when and who did it.
  2. 2
    Each field with its value before (struck through) and after.

#What changes with the profile

Antonio, the shop floor manager, releases, re-plans and closes WOs, but does not see costs or prices: the list has no cost column and no variance indicator, and the record has no Costs tab.

The same WO seen by the shop floor manager. 123
Figure 210. The same WO seen by the shop floor manager.
  1. 1
    No Costs tab (he does not have «See costs») and no Changes tab (he does not have the audit permission).
  2. 2
    The same actions as planning: edit, re-plan, flag for attention, see in the queues… and close finished WOs.
  3. 3
    Under Origin the order line price does not appear.

#Tips

Production

Planning

Decides the order in which work is done on each machine and tells you in time whether you will make it: machine queues with an hour-by-hour finite-capacity forecast, load map, WO Gantt, work calendar, and delays and risks.

Who uses it: Planning and shop supervisor (management, read-only)Access: «Planning» section; to order the queues and re-plan, «Edit work orders»; for the work calendar, «Edit calendar»

Planning is where you decide what goes first on each machine and see, in good time, whether the work orders (WOs) will meet their due dates. Each work order is made in operations (the steps of its routing: sawing, milling, deburring, inspection…), and each operation waits its turn in the queue of its machine. Aeromec calculates the forecast of those queues hour by hour and at finite capacity: a machine only works the hours of its shift pattern (with its shifts, its holidays and its stoppages) and an operation does not start until the previous one of its work order has finished. So every operation shows as On time, Tight or Late before the delay happens.

The section has five views, chosen with the buttons at the top:

View What it is for
Load by machine The load map: how many hours each machine has each week against its capacity.
WO Gantt Each work order over time: its target plan against what the queues forecast.
Machine queues The heart of the section: the order of the operations on each machine, with their forecast.
Work calendar Holidays, closures, stoppages, maintenance and special shifts for the plant or a machine.
Delays and risks The work orders that are late or will not make it, with the reason, and the order deliveries at stake.
  1. 1Release the WOWhen it is released, its first operation joins the queue of its machine.
  2. 2Order the queuesPlanning decides what goes first on each machine and sees the forecast.
  3. 3Shop-floor terminalThe operator sees the queue in that same order and opens their time records.
  4. 4MonitorThe shop supervisor sees what each machine is doing right now.
From the released work order to the machine: the order you set in the queues is the one the operator sees on the terminal.

#The Planning screen

At the top, four indicators sum up the state of the shop; below them, the buttons for the five views. Aeromec remembers the last view you used.

Planning with the «Load by machine» view: indicators, views and the load map. 123456
Figure 211. Planning with the «Load by machine» view: indicators, views and the load map.
  1. 1
    Load next 2 weeks: planned hours ÷ capacity of all machines this week and next, in % and in hours.
  2. 2
    Machines above 100%: how many exceed their capacity in any of the next 4 weeks, and which ones.
  3. 3
    Bottleneck: the most loaded machine over the next 4 weeks, the one that sets the pace of the whole shop.
  4. 4
    WOs late · at risk: those already past their due date and those that will not make it with the current plan. Click it to go to Delays and risks.
  5. 5
    The section's five views. The selected one is highlighted.
  6. 6
    Refresh reloads the data (the queues also refresh themselves every 30 seconds).

#Machine queues

In Machine queues you see the pending operations of each machine in the order they will be done. Planning decides that order, and it is the same one the operator sees on the shop-floor terminal: the first in the queue is the next one they will get. New operations join at the end, by their work order's priority and date.

There are two ways of looking at the queues: By operation (one machine's queue, operation by operation) and By WO (each work order with all its operations on its machines). Both can be shown as cards (with a picture of the part) or as rows (a table).

The F5-01 queue, by operation and as cards. 12345678
Figure 212. The F5-01 queue, by operation and as cards.
  1. 1
    By operation (one machine's queue) or By WO (each work order with its operations on all its machines).
  2. 2
    Cards (with a picture of the part) or Rows (a table with more columns).
  3. 3
    The view refreshes itself every 30 seconds and warns you if another user has changed a queue.
  4. 4
    The machines panel: each with its occupation over the next 2 weeks (green up to 85%, amber up to 100%, red above), its queued operations and when the last one ends. The green triangle means someone is working on it now. Click one to see its queue.
  5. 5
    The machine's header: type, working days, shift start, hours per day and shifts; on the right, its load over the next 14 days as bars (days without shifts in grey or in the colour of their calendar exception; hover to see the reason).
  6. 6
    On machine: what is being made right now, according to the time record open on the terminal (work order, operation, part, operator, since when, good parts and expected end). If nobody is working on it, «Machine idle».
  7. 7
    The queue: how many operations it has, their hours, when the last one ends («queue ends») and how many come out late.
  8. 8
    Print queue (weekly sheet) prints the week's work sheet as a PDF; Re-sort the queue (to its right) sorts it in one go.

Each card is an operation in the queue. It is designed to be read at a glance: what it is, when it will be done and whether it will be on time.

The first two operations in the F5-01 queue: one flagged for attention and one blocked by a nonconformance. 123456789
Figure 213. The first two operations in the F5-01 queue: one flagged for attention and one blocked by a nonconformance.
  1. 1
    The handle: drag the card by it to move it to another position in the queue.
  2. 2
    Its position in the queue (1 = next).
  3. 3
    The picture of the part: tap it to see it full size. The corner with the compass opens the drawing. If the part has no picture, the drawing thumbnail is shown.
  4. 4
    The work order, the operation (number and description) and, below, the part, the customer, the quantity and the good parts so far.
  5. 5
    The schedule status (On time, Tight or Late) with its slack in days, the material status and the flags: Attention, Blocked (NCR), FAI, rework, defence, priority P1 or P2.
  6. 6
    Hours left, expected start and end (hour by hour), target (when it should finish according to the plan) and the work order's due date.
  7. 7
    The attention note for the shop and the last change: who moved or flagged the operation, when and what they did.
  8. 8
    Move up and Move down one position, and the ⋮ menu with «Move to top», «Move to…», «Flag for attention…» and «Open WO». Click the card to open the work order record.
  9. 9
    Why it is waiting: here, «Blocked: the forecast leaves it for when the machine has nothing else» (its work order is held by an NCR). See the list below.

The schedule status of each operation compares its expected end with its target:

Status Slack What it means
On time (green) 3 days or more It has room to spare.
Tight (amber) 0 to 2 days It will make it, but it can absorb little disruption: do not put it behind another without checking its slack.
Late (red) negative With the current order it will finish after its target: bring it forward, move it to the twin machine or extend the shift.

Below the data, each card explains why it is waiting, if that is the case:

  • «Waiting for op 30 on F3-02 (expected end …)»: it cannot start until its previous operation on another machine finishes (or comes back from the supplier).
  • «Brought forward: the ones ahead are still waiting for their previous operation»: the machine does not sit idle; it does this operation first because the ones ahead are not ready.
  • «Blocked: the forecast leaves it for when the machine has nothing else»: its work order is held by a nonconformance (NCR) and Quality has not yet decided what to do with the parts.

#Changing the order of a queue

With the «Edit work orders» permission you can change the order of any queue. Everything is recalculated at once (the expected dates and the schedule status of every operation in that queue and of those that depend on them) and the change is logged as the operation's last change.

How to change the order of a queue
  1. Open Machine queues and choose the machine in the panel on the left.

  2. Drag the card by its handle (the six dots on the left) and drop it in the position you want.

  3. On a touch screen, or if you prefer not to drag, use the Move up and Move down arrows, or the ⋮ menu → Move to top.

  4. Watch how the expected dates and the schedule status of the others change: if any turns Late, it may not be worth it.

«Queue updated» appears. The operator will see the new order on the terminal the next time they look at that machine.
An operation's ⋮ menu. 1234
Figure 214. An operation's ⋮ menu.
  1. 1
    Move to top: moves it to the first position in its queue.
  2. 2
    Move to…: to another position or to another machine that can do it.
  3. 3
    Flag for attention… with a note for the shop.
  4. 4
    Open WO: its full record.
«Move to…» for an operation (not saved). 123
Figure 215. «Move to…» for an operation (not saved).
  1. 1
    The machine: its own and those that can do the operation, with their queued operations and their occupation over the next 2 weeks.
  2. 2
    The position in the destination queue (1 = next; empty = at the end).
  3. 3
    Move moves it; the forecast of both queues is recalculated.
How to move an operation to another machine
  1. In Machine queues → By operation, press and hold the operation's card for a moment until it lifts off.

  2. Drag it onto the destination machine in the panel on the left: if that machine can do it, it lights up with «Drop here». Drop it.

  3. Or, in the card's ⋮ menu, choose Move to…, pick the Machine and, if you like, the Position in the queue, and click Move.

«Operation moved to F5-02» appears (for example). The operation joins the other machine's queue and the terminal will offer it to whoever works on that machine.

The attention flag makes sure an operation does not go unnoticed: it shows in the queues, on the weekly sheet and in the work order record until someone removes it.

Flagging an operation for attention (not saved). 12
Figure 216. Flagging an operation for attention (not saved).
  1. 1
    Sets or removes the work order's attention flag.
  2. 2
    The note: new material, customer wants it earlier, new fixture…
«Re-sort the queue»: sorts the whole queue in one go. 12
Figure 217. «Re-sort the queue»: sorts the whole queue in one go.
  1. 1
    By work order priority and target start date.
  2. 2
    By work order due date (then priority).

#The queue as rows

With Rows, the queue becomes a table with every column, handy for reviewing many operations on a large screen. It scrolls sideways if it does not fit.

The F5-01 queue as rows (on a wide screen). 123456
Figure 218. The F5-01 queue as rows (on a wide screen).
  1. 1
    The position; to its left, the handle to drag the row.
  2. 2
    The thumbnail of the part's drawing: click it to open it.
  3. 3
    The work order, the operation, the part and the customer.
  4. 4
    The work order quantity; in brackets, the good parts this operation has made so far.
  5. 5
    Hours left and expected start and end (in red if it comes out late). Scroll the table to the right to see target, due date, slack, schedule status, FAI, material, priority, waiting for, last change and the arrows.
  6. 6
    Each row is an operation; the coloured edge on the left is its schedule status (green, amber or red). Click it to open the work order.

#The queues by work order

By WO shows the same information from the point of view of each order: all its operations, where each one is and when the work order will finish. It answers «when will this work order be done?» and lets you bring a work order forward on all its machines at once. Work orders on a machine come first, then by when their next operation starts.

The queues seen by work order, as cards. 12345678
Figure 219. The queues seen by work order, as cards.
  1. 1
    Filters the work orders that have an operation on a machine.
  2. 2
    Only late or tight: the work orders that will not make it or are cutting it fine. To the right, how many work orders are shown.
  3. 3
    With «Edit work orders», drag a work order by its handle ahead of another to bring it forward.
  4. 4
    The picture of the part (its corner opens the drawing).
  5. 5
    The work order, its schedule status and its slack (and the attention, blocked, not released or defence flags).
  6. 6
    Part, customer, parts and priority; below, the work order's due date, target and expected end.
  7. 7
    Its operations, each with its machine: ✓ done, ▶ on the machine with its end, queued with its position («#11 in queue») and its end, or at the supplier with the date it comes back. Hover to see the description and the times.
  8. 8
    The ⋮ menu: «Bring forward on all its machines», «Flag for attention…» and «Open WO».
How to bring a work order forward
  1. In Machine queues, switch to By WO (with Only late or tight you will find it sooner).

  2. Drag the work order by its handle and drop it ahead of another one: on every machine they share, its operations go ahead of the other work order's (nothing changes on the other machines).

  3. Or, in its ⋮ menu, choose Bring forward on all its machines: its operations become the first in each queue, behind whatever is on the machine.

For example, «OF-2026-0185 now ahead of OF-2026-0183 on 2 machines» appears. Its expected end and its schedule status are recalculated straight away.

#The weekly sheet as a PDF

The printer button of each queue (Print queue (weekly sheet)) produces that machine's weekly work sheet as a landscape PDF, to pin up next to it or hand out at the start of the week:

  • The week (the current one or, at the weekend, the one starting on Monday) and when it was printed.
  • The machine with its shift pattern, what is on the machine and a summary of the week (operations, hours and 2-week load).
  • The queue in order: the operations starting that week with their position, work order, operation, part, quantity, hours, expected start and end, target and schedule status; a notes column (attention, waiting, blocked, FAI) and a «Done / sign» column. The ones flagged for attention are highlighted.
  • The signatures of the shop supervisor and the operator.

It is a snapshot of the order at print time: if you change the queue afterwards, the shop-floor terminal rules.

#The load map

Load by machine draws a heat map: one row per machine and one column per week, with the percentage of its capacity that is taken. The stronger the colour, the heavier the load; in red, above 100%.

The load map in «Scheduled (queue)» mode over 8 weeks. 12345678
Figure 220. The load map in «Scheduled (queue)» mode over 8 weeks.
  1. 1
    The map's three modes: Scheduled (queue), Need date and Target plan (see the table below).
  2. 2
    How many weeks are shown: 4, 8 or 12.
  3. 3
    The current week, with the blue border. Each column shows its week number and its Monday.
  4. 4
    Each machine with its working days and its daily capacity («M-S · 13.6 h/day» on F5-02, which works Saturdays).
  5. 5
    Each cell: the % of that week's capacity that is taken. Hover to see the hours and the operations; click it to see which operations fill it.
  6. 6
    Queue: the hours and operations each machine has pending.
  7. 7
    Queue end: when the last one will finish. That of the most loaded machine sets the lead time of everything that goes through it.
  8. 8
    Whole plant: the sum of all machines; below, the colour legend.
Mode What each cell counts How to read it
Scheduled (queue) The hours the machine's queue will work that week following its order and its calendar, against the capacity it has left from now. It never goes above 100%: what does not fit moves to the next week. A row full for many weeks in a row is the bottleneck.
Need date The pending hours of the operations that must be finished that week (overdue ones count in this week), against its capacity. Above 100% (red) there is not enough time with the current capacity: move operations to the twin machine, schedule a Saturday or talk to the customer.
Target plan The hours of the backward plan (from the due date) spread over its working days. It also shows the two past weeks with the actual hours from the time records. Use it to compare what was planned with what was done.

Below the map are the Whole plant row and the colour legend (50-85%, 85-100% and above 100%), and further down the Whole-shop hours per week chart against capacity: if the bars drop well below it 3 or 4 weeks out, the order book is thin and it is time to push quotes.

«Need date» mode: in red, what there is not enough time for with the current capacity. 12
Figure 221. «Need date» mode: in red, what there is not enough time for with the current capacity.
  1. 1
    Need date mode, active.
  2. 2
    The machines piling up work that must be finished soon: cells above 100% show in red.
Clicking a cell (AJ-01, in the first week with shifts): the operations that fill it. 123
Figure 222. Clicking a cell (AJ-01, in the first week with shifts): the operations that fill it.
  1. 1
    The machine and the week (with its dates).
  2. 2
    Its load with the level («Has room», «Almost full», «Overloaded») and the hours against those available.
  3. 3
    Each operation: work order, part, customer, hours it adds to that week (out of those it has left), target and schedule status. Click it to open its work order.

#The WO Gantt

The Gantt draws every live work order (planned, released, in progress or blocked) over time. Each row has two things: the target (the backward plan from the due date, as an outline) and what the queues forecast (coloured strips, one per operation). It opens centred on today.

The Gantt of live work orders: target, forecast and due date. 123456789
Figure 223. The Gantt of live work orders: target, forecast and due date.
  1. 1
    Filters the work orders with an operation on a machine.
  2. 2
    Leaves only those late or at risk.
  3. 3
    The zoom: out, normal and in.
  4. 4
    The legend and, with «Edit work orders», the reminder that you can drag the bars.
  5. 5
    Each work order with its part, its customer and its quantity. The red icon is a late work order; the amber one, at risk. Click it to open its record.
  6. 6
    The blue line is today; weekends are shaded.
  7. 7
    The outline is the target (the backward plan from the due date) with the vertical mark at its end; here, with a red border because the work order finishes late.
  8. 8
    The strips are what the queues forecast, one per operation: green, amber or red according to their schedule status; purple if the operation is at a supplier.
  9. 9
    The diamond is the due date (red if the work order will be late).

How to read a row: if the forecast strips go past the vertical target mark or the due-date diamond, the work order will be late (the outline gets a red border and the diamond turns red). Hover over a bar to see its dates: target, forecast with its slack, due date and current operation.

How to re-plan a work order with the Gantt
  1. With the «Edit work orders» permission, drag the work order's outline to the left (bring forward) or to the right (delay). While you drag, a label shows how many days («+3 d»).

  2. When you let go, Aeromec asks «Delay OF-… by N working days» (or «Bring … forward»). Click Re-plan.

«WO re-planned» appears: the target plan of its pending operations moves by those working days, skipping holidays and weekends; finished operations do not move.

#The work calendar

The work calendar says which days the plant or a machine does not work, or works a different shift. With it, the queue forecast and the load map know, for example, that EDM-01 will be in maintenance for two days or that F5-01 will work a Saturday. The same list shows the public holidays with their scope (national, regional for Andalusia, local for La Rinconada or company). It is edited by the shop supervisor, Planning and Management.

The work calendar with Antonio, shop supervisor. 12345678
Figure 224. The work calendar with Antonio, shop supervisor.
  1. 1
    New exception: a closure, a stoppage, maintenance or a special shift.
  2. 2
    The next exception, highlighted, and how long until it.
  3. 3
    Filter by scope: everything, only what affects the whole plant or one machine's.
  4. 4
    Show past days (by default only what is coming is shown) and show or hide the Holidays.
  5. 5
    A holiday, with its scope and the padlock: holidays are changed in Settings.
  6. 6
    A machine exception spanning several consecutive days, as a single group: dates, reason, shift and who scheduled it. On the right, the machine and the type. Click it to change it.
  7. 7
    A special shift: the shift hours and the capacity they give (8 h × 85% = 6.8 h).
  8. 8
    The bin removes the exception: those days go back to their usual shift.
Type What for Scope
Closure The plant does not open (holidays, bridge days). Whole plant only.
Stoppage The machine is not available: a planned repair, a move… A machine or the whole plant.
Maintenance Preventive maintenance or scheduled service. A machine or the whole plant.
Special shift A different shift is worked: a catch-up Saturday, half a day… Enter the hours. A machine or the whole plant.

With 0 hours, that day is not worked; with a special shift, the hours you enter (capacity applies the efficiency).

The «New exception» form: maintenance on T-01 (not saved). 123456
Figure 225. The «New exception» form: maintenance on T-01 (not saved).
  1. 1
    From and To: one day or a range (one exception per day is created). Empty «To» = the same day.
  2. 2
    The scope: the whole plant or a machine.
  3. 3
    The type: closure, stoppage, maintenance or special shift, each with its explanation.
  4. 4
    The shift hours for that day: 0 = no work.
  5. 5
    The reason, which everyone will see in the calendar and in the queue header.
  6. 6
    Save creates it; the forecast and the load map take it into account straight away.
How to schedule a working Saturday on a machine
  1. In Work calendar, click New exception.

  2. Enter the Saturday's date in From (leave To empty).

  3. In Scope, choose the machine (for example, F5-01).

  4. In Type, choose Special shift and enter the Shift hours (8 for one shift).

  5. Write the Reason («Catch-up Saturday…») and click Save.

The exception appears in the list. In the queues, F5-01 counts on those hours on the Saturday: the expected dates in its queue move earlier and its schedule status improves.
How to schedule maintenance on a machine
  1. Click New exception and enter the dates in From and To (for example, two consecutive days).

  2. In Scope, the machine; in Type, Maintenance, with 0 Shift hours.

  3. Write the Reason and click Save.

On those days the machine has no capacity: the forecast skips them and what was expected on them is delayed. If there was already an exception that day for that scope, Aeromec flags the repeated days.

#Delays and risks

Delays and risks gathers what needs attention, each with its reason: the work orders already late, those that will be late and the order deliveries at stake (the ones that will bring down the OTD, the on-time delivery percentage).

Delays and risks: late work orders, work orders at risk and deliveries at stake. 123456
Figure 226. Delays and risks: late work orders, work orders at risk and deliveries at stake.
  1. 1
    Late WOs: their due date has already passed. Those with the most days late, at the top.
  2. 2
    Each work order with its part and customer, its due date, the operation it is on and the reason: days late, «plan ends on …, after the due date», «N operations should have finished» or «Blocked». Click it to open its record.
  3. 3
    Re-plan from today recalculates its operations forwards from today, to see the real date it can make.
  4. 4
    WOs at risk: they have not passed their due date yet, but will not make it with the current plan.
  5. 5
    A work order blocked by a nonconformance is not re-planned: first Quality has to decide what to do with its parts.
  6. 6
    Order deliveries at stake: order lines whose due date has passed or that their work order will not reach, with what is pending, the work order serving them and its end. Click one to open the order.

#What each profile sees

Javier (Management) sees the queues but cannot change them. 12
Figure 227. Javier (Management) sees the queues but cannot change them.
  1. 1
    Without «Edit work orders» there is no handle to drag…
  2. 2
    …no arrows to move up or down, and the ⋮ menu only has Open WO.

Production

Shop-floor terminal

The tablet next to the machines: each operator identifies with their badge or PIN, sees the queue of their machines and a notice of their qualifications that are expiring, opens and closes their time records, declares good and rejected parts, reports incidents, looks up the drawing, the program (current revisions only) and the control plan, does the machine's start-of-shift check, records tool changes, and takes and returns their measuring gauges.

Who uses it: Shop-floor operators and shop supervisorAccess: «Shop-floor terminal» section and «Book on the shop floor»; besides, each person needs their PIN, to be qualified on the machine (People) and, if the machine requires it, to hold its qualification in force (Competence & training)

The shop-floor terminal is the screen used by whoever works on the machines, usually a tablet mounted in each area of the shop. From it, each operator books their work with time records: a record logs a stretch of work on a machine and an operation of a work order (WO), with the start time, the end time and the parts that came out. There are set-up records (getting the machine ready: fixtures, tools, program, first part), production records and rework records (correcting parts that a nonconformance sent back for rework). Time is counted automatically, between the moment you press the start button and the finish one.

With those records Aeromec knows how each work order is going, how many actual hours it has taken and what it costs, the rejected parts (the scrap) and the OEE (overall equipment effectiveness). The same tablet is the gauge loan kiosk.

With the shop-floor operator profile, the application opens straight into the terminal, full screen and with no menu (kiosk mode): there is nowhere else to go.

  1. 1Identify yourselfYour badge or your name, and your 4-digit PIN.
  2. 2Choose machine and operationThe first in the queue is the one to do.
  3. 3Set upSet-up record; when finished, «Set-up done».
  4. 4RunThe clock is running; drawing, program and control plan at hand.
  5. 5FinishDeclare good and rejected parts: the operation moves on to the next machine.
A time record, from start to finish. Every step is booked under your name with your PIN.

#Identifying yourself: Who are you?

When the terminal opens, Who are you? appears, with a card for each person who uses it. You come first and highlighted if the tablet is signed in with your account.

The terminal on a tablet: «Who are you?». 12345
Figure 228. The terminal on a tablet: «Who are you?».
  1. 1
    Help (or F1) with the terminal guides, and the language.
  2. 2
    The account the tablet is signed in with; its menu has Sign out.
  3. 3
    Search your name or swipe your badge through the reader: with the badge you do not need to touch anything, your PIN opens.
  4. 4
    Each person: initials, name, employee code, shift, the machines they are qualified on and, in the blue circle, how many gauges they have on loan. Tap yours.
  5. 5
    Anyone who does not work on machines (warehouse, inspection…) is shown as Gauges only: they come in just to take and return gauges.
The PIN keypad, with two digits entered. 123
Figure 229. The PIN keypad, with two digits entered.
  1. 1
    Who you are identifying and, below, one circle per digit: they fill in as you type.
  2. 2
    The keypad: large keys for your finger (the computer keyboard works too). With the fourth digit, you are in.
  3. 3
    The ✕ cancels and the arrow deletes the last digit.

How to identify yourself

  1. Swipe your badge through the tablet's reader, or tap your name (or search for it at the top).
  2. Type your 4-digit PIN. With the fourth digit you enter your workstation.

In the demo everyone's PIN is 1234; in the shop, each person has their own, which is changed in People. The badge carries a barcode that is also printed from People.

If the PIN is wrong, «Wrong PIN» appears and you go back to the list.

#Your workstation: your machines and their queue

Once in, you see your workstation: on the left, your machines and the queue of the selected one; on the right, your gauges and your day. On entering, the first of your machines that has work and is free is selected automatically.

Rafael's workstation on the tablet, with F3-01 selected. 123456789
Figure 230. Rafael's workstation on the tablet, with F3-01 selected.
  1. 1
    Who you are, your shift and how many machines you are qualified on.
  2. 2
    Gauges (n): the ones you have on loan (in amber if any is due soon).
  3. 3
    Switch operator: you leave and the tablet goes back to «Who are you?». The circular arrow to its left refreshes the screen.
  4. 4
    Your machines, with their status in colour: idle (grey), running (green), set-up (blue), stopped (red) or maintenance; who is using it and how many operations it has queued. The checklist icon: its start-of-shift check is missing. Tap one to see its queue.
  5. 5
    The machine's maintenance notices: the pending start-of-shift check and its scheduled or ongoing maintenance (see below).
  6. 6
    The machine's queue, in the order Planning decides. Each operation with its work order (and P1/P2, FAI, rework, paused or days late), the operation, the part, the parts made, the theoretical set-up and cycle times, the CNC program and the due date. The first one, with the blue border, is the one to do. Above it, Change tool; below, the upcoming operations that will reach the machine.
  7. 7
    Set up opens a set-up record; Run, a production record (if the machine is already set up).
  8. 8
    My gauges: what you have on loan, with its calibration, and the buttons to take and return.
  9. 9
    Your day: your hours, good and rejected parts today.

If the machine you choose is not available, the terminal tells you and does not let you start on it:

A stopped machine. 123
Figure 231. A stopped machine.
  1. 1
    F3-02, in red: stopped.
  2. 2
    The maintenance order that the breakdown opened.
  3. 3
    The notice says why it is stopped (the incident or the reason the shop supervisor entered). The buttons are disabled.
A machine someone else is using. 12
Figure 232. A machine someone else is using.
  1. 1
    T-01, in blue: in set-up by a colleague.
  2. 2
    Who is using it and with which work order: until they close their record, nobody else can start on it.

#Your qualifications

Some machines require a qualification in force (the 5-axis one on F5-01 and F5-02, for example; it is shown in Work centres). When you identify yourself, the terminal warns you at the top about your qualifications that expire in the next 30 days (in amber) and those that have already expired or been withdrawn (in red), with the machines you cannot work on until they are renewed. With an expired one, the machine still appears in your list, but when you tap Set up, Run or Resume the terminal does not let you start.

David's 5-axis qualification has expired (the terminal on a wider screen). 12
Figure 233. David's 5-axis qualification has expired (the terminal on a wider screen).
  1. 1
    In red: the expired qualification, since when, and the machines he cannot work on until it is renewed.
  2. 2
    F5-01 (and F5-02, to its right) is still in his list, but he cannot start on it.
Laura's same qualification expires soon. 1
Figure 234. Laura's same qualification expires soon.
  1. 1
    In amber: it expires in less than 30 days. She can work, but must renew it in time.

If you get the notice, tell your supervisor: the qualification is renewed with a training session or an assessment in Competence & training, and your qualifications are shown in the Competences tab in People.

#Starting an operation

The F5-01 queue: the first operation, with the blue border, is the one to do. 12
Figure 235. The F5-01 queue: the first operation, with the blue border, is the one to do.
  1. 1
    Set up opens a set-up record for the operation.
  2. 2
    Run, a production record, if the machine is already set up. A paused operation (someone started it and left it half-done) only has Resume: it carries on where it stopped.
How to start an operation
  1. In Your machines, tap the machine you are going to work on.

  2. In its queue, choose the operation (usually the first, the one with the blue border) and tap Set up if the machine needs setting up, or Run if it is already set up. On a paused operation, Resume; on a rework one, Rework.

  3. If the operation's control plan asks for a gauge you do not have on loan, the terminal asks you (see below).

«Time record started: OF-… · operation» appears and the screen switches to your work in progress, with the clock running.
Before starting: the control plan asks for a gauge that Rafael does not have (not confirmed). 123
Figure 236. Before starting: the control plan asks for a gauge that Rafael does not have (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    What the operation is measured with, and that you have none on loan.
  2. 2
    Continue without: you start anyway (you will use the machine's own gauge or a shared one).
  3. 3
    Take a gauge opens the loan with the ones suitable for this operation; then you start.

#Your work in progress

With a record open, the screen focuses on it. In the screenshot, a colleague is setting up an operation on T-01 (the terminal is the same for everyone: each person signs in with their PIN).

Work in progress: a set-up on T-01. 12345678910
Figure 237. Work in progress: a set-up on T-01.
  1. 1
    The record type in colour (blue, set-up; green, production or rework) and the machine.
  2. 2
    The clock: how long the record has been open.
  3. 3
    The work order and the part, the operation you are doing and the part's name.
  4. 4
    The parts made in the operation against those of the work order and the theoretical set-up time (or cycle time per part, in production): your reference.
  5. 5
    Pause: closes the record declaring what was done; the operation is paused so you or someone else can carry on.
  6. 6
    Set-up done (in production, Finish operation): the big green button.
  7. 7
    Change tool: records the cutter or insert you change (see below).
  8. 8
    Start another task at the same time, if you tend another machine while this one is running.
  9. 9
    Incident: tells the shop supervisor about a breakdown, a broken tool, missing material…
  10. 10
    On the right, the operation's instructions: drawing, CNC program and control plan.

What each button does when you finish:

Button When What happens
Set-up done When you finish setting up Closes the set-up record (usually with 0 parts, or the first one if already approved) and immediately opens the production record, on the same machine and operation.
Pause You move to something else, the shift ends, something is missing Closes the record declaring the parts made in it (can be 0). The operation is paused: you or a colleague will continue it with Resume. Pausing a set-up just closes it.
Finish operation You have made all the parts of the operation You declare good and rejected parts. The operation is finished and the next one joins the queue of its machine (or goes to the supplier). If it was the last one, the work order finishes and its good parts go into the warehouse.
«Set-up done» (not confirmed). 12
Figure 238. «Set-up done» (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    What will happen on confirming: the set-up closes and production starts.
  2. 2
    Confirm closes the set-up and opens the production record.
«Finish operation» with one rejected part (not confirmed). 12345
Figure 239. «Finish operation» with one rejected part (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    Good: suggests the parts still to make. Change the figure with − and +, «+5», «+10» or «Set to 0».
  2. 2
    Rejected: each one you add is taken off the good ones.
  3. 3
    With any rejects, the cause is mandatory.
  4. 4
    The reminder: red tag and to the segregation area; Quality decides.
  5. 5
    Confirm closes the record and finishes the operation.
How to finish an operation
  1. With the operation in production, tap Finish operation.

  2. Check the good parts the terminal suggests (those still needed to complete the operation) and correct them if necessary.

  3. If a part has come out wrong, add it under Rejected with + (the good count goes down at the same time) and choose why it was rejected: program error, tool wear, defective material, operator error, machine failure, out of tolerance, fixture error, handling damage, outside process or other.

  4. If you like, write a note and tap Confirm.

«Operation finished» appears. The work order's next operation joins its machine's queue, each rejected part is booked as scrap with its cost and Quality will decide what to do with it.

#Several tasks at once

If you tend two or three machines (for example, setting up the next machine while one runs a long cycle), you can have a task open on each without closing the previous one. How many at once is decided by the company in Settings (with 1, the terminal works one at a time and this button does not appear).

«Start another task at the same time»: below, your other machines and their queue. 123
Figure 240. «Start another task at the same time»: below, your other machines and their queue.
  1. 1
    The button changes to Hide the queue.
  2. 2
    Choose the other machine. You cannot start another task on the one where you already have one: one machine, one record.
  3. 3
    And start the operation as usual: Set up, Run or Resume. The first task keeps counting.

With two or more tasks open, Your open tasks (2 of 3) appears at the top: one card per task with its machine, its clock and its operation. Tap one to show it large so you can pause or finish it; the selected one shows its instructions on the right. Below the record type, the card reminds you how your time counts («Your time is split between the 2 open tasks: each one adds 1/2 while they stay open»). When you reach the maximum, the terminal asks you to pause or finish one before starting another.

#Instructions, drawing and CNC program

While you work, the right-hand column has everything about the operation, taken from the part's approved routing: the CNC program (the machine's numerical control program), the instructions, the documents and the control plan (which dimensions to measure, with what and how often).

The operation instructions on the tablet. 12345
Figure 241. The operation instructions on the tablet.
  1. 1
    The part's drawing with its revision: tap it to open it full screen.
  2. 2
    The operation's CNC program (and, if there are any, the instructions with photos and the work order's documents).
  3. 3
    The control plan: each characteristic with its balloon number on the drawing, the nominal size and its tolerance, the gauge and the frequency. Key characteristics (those affecting function or safety) have their balloon in amber.
  4. 4
    Gauges for this operation: «you have it (INS-…)» if you already carry one of the type the plan asks for, or «You need: …» with the Take button.
  5. 5
    Gauges you can use: those of the type the plan asks for, with their calibration (green in date, amber if due soon); the hand marks the one you have. Crossed-out ones are overdue or out of service: the database will not accept measurements with them.
The operation's CNC program, opened on the tablet. 1234
Figure 242. The operation's CNC program, opened on the tablet.
  1. 1
    The document: name, what it belongs to (part, routing revision and operation), type, revision, size, who uploaded it and when.
  2. 2
    The program, line by line: tools, origin, stock and operations, to check it before setting up. PDFs and images (the drawing, photos) are shown the same way, full screen.
  3. 3
    Its SHA-256 fingerprint: it guarantees it is exactly the file that was uploaded.
  4. 4
    Download and close.

Only current documents reach the machine: when a new revision of a drawing or a program is issued, the previous one is marked obsolete and disappears from the terminal (it is kept, but can no longer be used by mistake). A new CNC program starts on trial until its programmer validates it with their signature after a conforming first part (Documentation). Until then, its button has an amber border and the On trial label, and a notice below it says that the first part is made with the programmer present and fully measured before continuing.

#Reporting an incident

Reporting an incident (not sent). 1234
Figure 243. Reporting an incident (not sent).
  1. 1
    It is logged on the machine (and on the operation, if you have a record open) and the shop supervisor sees it at once.
  2. 2
    The type, as large buttons: broken tool, material shortage, machine down, program error, quality issue, fixture or other.
  3. 3
    What is happening?, in a few words.
  4. 4
    Report sends it.
How to report an incident
  1. Tap Incident at the top (on a phone, below the big buttons).

  2. Choose the type and say what is happening in What is happening?.

  3. Tap Report.

«Incident logged: the shop supervisor will see it on the monitor» appears. A machine down, a broken tool or a fixture problem turn the machine red (stopped) on the Shop-floor monitor until someone resolves it.

#Start-of-shift check and tool change

At the start of the shift, each machine asks for its start-of-shift check (autonomous maintenance): its cards show a checklist icon and, when you choose the machine, the notice with Do the check appears. Below it, the machine's maintenance is also announced: scheduled (the day it will stop), in progress or pending. A machine in maintenance does not let you start operations.

F3-01's start-of-shift check, with one item not OK (not sent). 12345
Figure 244. F3-01's start-of-shift check, with one item not OK (not sent).
  1. 1
    The check items for that machine (Maintenance sets them in its plan).
  2. 2
    Each one, OK or Not OK.
  3. 3
    If something is not OK, what is wrong (for a measurement, its value).
  4. 4
    With something not OK, Maintenance is notified.
  5. 5
    Send and notify (or All OK) once they are all marked.

The check is recorded with who did it, when and on which shift (one per machine and shift). If something is not OK, Aeromec opens a notice to Maintenance: a work order with what you have seen, which the maintenance manager sees in Maintenance.

When you change a cutting tool (a cutter, a drill, a tap, an insert), record it with Change tool: it is in the machine's queue and, with an operation running, below the big buttons.

Tool change on F3-01 (not recorded). 123
Figure 245. Tool change on F3-01 (not recorded).
  1. 1
    The tools fitted on that machine, with how many are left in the warehouse.
  2. 2
    The reason: wear, breakage, quality (size or finish) or program change.
  3. 3
    Record change.

When you record it, one is taken from the warehouse and the time the previous one lasted is kept in machine minutes: that way Maintenance knows the actual life of each tool and when to order before they run out. If the system showed none left, the change is recorded anyway and the Warehouse checks it: the terminal never blocks you because of that.

#Your day

«Your day» with an open record. 12
Figure 246. «Your day» with an open record.
  1. 1
    The hours you have done today (those booked to you), and your good and rejected parts.
  2. 2
    Each of today's records: work order and operation, machine, type, start time (and end time) and parts; on the right, its hours. The open one has the green icon and counts until now.

Your day adds up your records today (the open one counts until now) and lists them with their work order, operation, machine, type, times and parts. With several tasks at once and the proportional rule, each record adds your share of the time and the time it spent on the machine is shown below («of 2 h on machine»); those that overlapped with another task say «at the same time as another task». If something does not add up (a record you forgot to close), tell the shop supervisor.

#Taking and returning gauges

The terminal is also the gauge loan kiosk (callipers, micrometers, dial indicators, plug and thread gauges): with the same identification and the same PIN you take a gauge from the cabinet and the system records who has it, since when and for which operation. Bench instruments (the coordinate measuring machine, the profile projector, the hardness tester) are used where they are and are not lent.

«My gauges» on Rafael's workstation. 123
Figure 247. «My gauges» on Rafael's workstation.
  1. 1
    Each gauge you have: code and name, range, since when you have had it and until when its calibration is in date (amber if it is due in less than 30 days; red, «Return it»). Tap it to return it.
  2. 2
    Take a gauge.
  3. 3
    Return.
«Take a gauge» for an operation on F5-02. 12345
Figure 248. «Take a gauge» for an operation on F5-02.
  1. 1
    Scan the gauge's label with the reader: it is selected automatically.
  2. 2
    Or type its code or its serial number (exact) and press Enter; it also filters the list by name.
  3. 3
    For this operation: the types the operation's control plan asks for and the gauges of those types.
  4. 4
    Each gauge with its range, its cabinet and whether it is available (green, with its due date), someone else has it (blue) or it cannot be taken (red, with the reason). «ENAC» if its calibration requires it.
  5. 5
    When you choose one, its summary appears at the bottom with the Take INS-… button (or Hand it to me).
A colleague has INS-012: «Hand it to me». 123
Figure 249. A colleague has INS-012: «Hand it to me».
  1. 1
    The gauge: who has it and since when (in blue).
  2. 2
    What will happen: their loan is closed and yours is opened.
  3. 3
    Hand it to me, without going through Quality.
INS-003 is overdue for calibration: it cannot be taken. 123
Figure 250. INS-003 is overdue for calibration: it cannot be taken.
  1. 1
    The gauge, in red, with the reason.
  2. 2
    Cannot be taken: here, its calibration is overdue.
  3. 3
    The button stays disabled.
How to take a gauge
  1. On your workstation, tap Take a gauge (or scan the gauge's label directly on the workstation).

  2. Scan it, type its code or tap it in the For this operation or On your machines list (Show the rest shows the others).

  3. If it is available, tap Take INS-…; if a colleague has it, Hand it to me.

«INS-… is yours until you return it» appears (or «… is now yours»). It shows in My gauges and in the operation's control plan, as «you have it».
Returning a damaged gauge (not confirmed). 12345
Figure 251. Returning a damaged gauge (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    Scan the one you are returning or tap it in the list. You can also return one someone else has (when you scan it, the terminal asks you).
  2. 2
    The selected one, marked.
  3. 3
    Remarks for Quality: low battery, broken case…
  4. 4
    It is damaged or out of calibration: you must explain what is wrong with it.
  5. 5
    Return (with remarks) closes the loan.
How to return a gauge
  1. Tap Return in My gauges (or tap the gauge in the list, or scan it on the workstation).

  2. Choose the one you are returning, if you have several.

  3. If it has been dropped or reads oddly, turn on It is damaged or out of calibration and explain what is wrong in Remarks.

  4. Tap Return.

«INS-… returned. Thanks!» appears. If you marked it damaged: «Quality has been notified of the damage»; a gauge incident opens that shows on the Monitor and in Quality, and nobody can take it until Quality has checked it.

#Who uses the terminal

Antonio (shop supervisor) enters the terminal from the sidebar and leaves with «Leave terminal». 1
Figure 252. Antonio (shop supervisor) enters the terminal from the sidebar and leaves with «Leave terminal».
  1. 1
    Leave terminal: back to the rest of the application (only if the profile has other sections).

Production

Shop-floor monitor

The shop's andon: what each machine is doing right now, who is working on it and since when, the parts made this shift and the open incidents to resolve; with a full-screen mode for a shop-floor TV.

Who uses it: Shop supervisor and Planning (management, read-only)Access: «Shop-floor monitor» section; to resolve incidents, «Edit work orders» or «Book on the shop floor»

The Shop-floor monitor is the shop's andon: a board with one card per machine, painted in the colour of its status right now (running, set-up, stopped, idle or maintenance). It lets you see at a glance which machines are working, which are waiting for an operator and which are stopped, and resolve the incidents that operators report from the shop-floor terminal. It refreshes itself every 30 seconds and can be switched to full screen on a shop-floor TV.

Everything you see comes from the time records open on the terminal: a machine is running or in set-up because someone has a record open on it, and stops being so when they close it.

  1. 1The operatorOpens a time record or reports an incident on the terminal.
  2. 2The monitorThe machine changes colour and the incident appears below.
  3. 3The shop supervisorResolves the incident and writes down what was done.
  4. 4PlanningIf the stoppage will take long, re-plans in the queues.
From the alert at the machine to the fix.

#The monitor screen

The Shop-floor monitor with Antonio, shop supervisor. 12345678
Figure 253. The Shop-floor monitor with Antonio, shop supervisor.
  1. 1
    How many machines are in each status, in its colour: running, set-up, stopped, idle and maintenance.
  2. 2
    The time and when it was last refreshed (it refreshes itself every 30 seconds).
  3. 3
    Full screen for a shop-floor TV.
  4. 4
    Machines working: running or in set-up, out of those available (not counting the ones in maintenance).
  5. 5
    Good parts this shift: those declared in the time records closed since the shift started.
  6. 6
    Rejected today on all machines.
  7. 7
    Open incidents: those reported from the terminal that nobody has resolved yet (the list is at the bottom of the page).
  8. 8
    One card per machine, in the colour of its status. Click it to open the work order it is running or, if it has none, the machine's record.

#How to read each card

The first two rows of machines: running, without an operator, stopped and in set-up. 1234567
Figure 254. The first two rows of machines: running, without an operator, stopped and in set-up.
  1. 1
    The header with the machine type, its code and its status: filled with colour if it is working or stopped.
  2. 2
    What it is doing: the work order (with the defence badge if it is one), the part and the operation.
  3. 3
    Who is working on it and since when the record has been open.
  4. 4
    The footer: good parts this shift, rejects today (if any), hours worked today and how many operations it has queued (in amber if more than 5).
  5. 5
    Idle with queued work: «Work queued, no operator». This is the first loss to tackle: there is work and nobody at the machine.
  6. 6
    Stopped, with a thick border: the reason (the incident or what the shop supervisor entered) and since when.
  7. 7
    Set-up: someone is getting it ready for an operation.
Status Colour When
Running Green There is an open production or rework record.
Set-up Blue There is an open set-up record.
Stopped Red The machine is flagged as stopped in Work centres, or has an open machine down, broken tool or fixture incident.
Idle Grey Nobody has a record open on it. If it has queued operations it says «Work queued, no operator»; otherwise, «No work queued».
Maintenance Amber It is flagged as in maintenance (with its reason). It does not count as available.

#Resolving incidents

At the bottom of the page are the open incidents: those operators report from the terminal (a breakdown, a broken tool, missing material…) and the gauges returned damaged. They stay open until someone records what was done.

The open incidents, at the bottom of the monitor. 123
Figure 255. The open incidents, at the bottom of the monitor.
  1. 1
    How many incidents are open.
  2. 2
    Each incident: the machine and the type (with its icon), what the person who reported it said, since when, who and, if they had a record open, the work order and operation.
  3. 3
    Resolve closes it with the solution.
Resolving an incident (not saved). 123
Figure 256. Resolving an incident (not saved).
  1. 1
    The incident: machine, type and what the operator said.
  2. 2
    What was done? to fix it.
  3. 3
    Resolve closes it.

How to resolve an incident

  1. Scroll down to Open incidents and click Resolve on the one you want to close.
  2. In What was done?, write the solution («Lubrication pressure switch replaced; machine tested»).
  3. Click Resolve.

«Incident resolved» appears: it is closed with the solution, the time and who resolved it, and if it had stopped the machine, the andon no longer shows it as stopped.

A damaged gauge incident is reviewed by Quality in Gauges: until then, nobody can take that gauge at the terminal.

#Full screen for the shop-floor TV

The monitor in full screen, in dark mode, for a shop-floor TV. 123
Figure 257. The monitor in full screen, in dark mode, for a shop-floor TV.
  1. 1
    No menu or sidebar: the logo, the statuses, the time and the indicators.
  2. 2
    Bigger cards and text, in dark mode, and no actions (incidents are not resolved from here).
  3. 3
    This button (or the Esc key) leaves full screen.

The monitor adapts to the width of the screen: from one column of cards on a phone to five on a very wide screen.

#What each profile sees

Javier (Management) sees the incidents but does not resolve them. 1
Figure 258. Javier (Management) sees the incidents but does not resolve them.
  1. 1
    Without «Edit work orders» or «Book on the shop floor», Resolve does not appear.

Production

Maintenance

Maintenance of the machines and the auxiliary equipment: preventive plans, statutory inspections and geometric verifications; work orders (for breakdowns reported from the terminal, from the plans and the ones you open by hand) scheduled in the slot that pushes out the least load; corrective actions; replenishment of cutters, tools and spare parts based on actual usage and forecast load; and the MTBF, MTTR and availability KPIs.

Who uses it: Maintenance manager and shop supervisor; for reference, management, planning, quality and purchasingAccess: «Maintenance» section; to create, schedule and close orders, edit plans, equipment and actions and order spare parts, «Edit maintenance»; costs, with «See costs»

Maintenance looks after everything the machines need to keep producing: each piece of equipment (the shop's 13 machines and the auxiliary equipment that does not produce but without which the shop stops: the compressor, the overhead crane, the air conditioning of the metrology room, the central coolant system, fire protection and the electrical switchboard) with its maintenance plans and its history, and the work done on it, with its cost.

A plan says what is done, how often and for how long it stops the machine:

  • Preventive: lubrication, filters, backlash, coolant… every so many days or every so many machine hours (whichever comes first). Hours are not entered by hand: they come from the time records of the shop-floor terminal, so each machine's hour meter knows how much it has really worked.
  • Statutory: the inspections required by law (pressure equipment, lifting equipment, fire protection, electrical installation), usually carried out by an authorised company.
  • Verification: the geometric verification of the machine (ISO 230: positioning, straightness, squareness, circularity with the ballbar), which tells you whether it is still machining within tolerance.
  • Autonomous: the start-of-shift check the operator does on the terminal (levels, pressure, alarms, guards, emergency stop button).

The work is organised in work orders (OT): those from the plans, those for the breakdowns the operator reports from the terminal and those you open yourself. Each one is scheduled on the day that takes the least load away from the machine, it is carried out (tasks, measurements and spare parts from the warehouse) and it is closed: the machine goes back to producing and its history is kept.

The section has six views: Work orders, Equipment, Schedule, Actions, Tools & spares (replenishment) and KPIs.

  1. 1PlanEvery N days or N machine hours, with its tasks, measurements and spare parts.
  2. 2BreakdownThe operator reports it on the terminal: an urgent order is opened.
  3. 3ScheduleThe day that pushes out the least load; the stop goes into the calendar and the queues.
  4. 4Carry outTasks, measurements with limits and spare parts taken from the warehouse.
  5. 5CloseSolution, cause or result, hours and cost: the machine goes back to producing.
  6. 6Corrective actionWhatever was found wrong is corrected and verified; if it affects parts, an NCR.
The maintenance cycle of a machine.

#The work orders

Maintenance → Work orders: the open ones, with the urgent ones at the top. 1234567
Figure 259. Maintenance → Work orders: the open ones, with the urgent ones at the top.
  1. 1
    The six views of the section (Aeromec remembers the last one).
  2. 2
    Open, urgent (a machine down), in progress and overdue orders, and the cost this month (with «See costs»).
  3. 3
    Generate plan orders: creates the orders for the plans that are due.
  4. 4
    New work order: a breakdown, a check or an improvement outside the plan.
  5. 5
    The filters: open, urgent, in progress, overdue, scheduled, breakdowns, preventive, operator notices and closed (swipe to see them all).
  6. 6
    The breakdown the operator reported from the terminal this morning: in red, urgent and counting downtime hours.
  7. 7
    Downtime: how long the machine has been (or was) down because of the order; then the cost and the status.

Each row shows the number (OT-…) and the title, the type (preventive, corrective, statutory, verification or improvement) and its origin (from plan, breakdown from the terminal, operator notice, finding or manual); the equipment; when (the due date or the scheduled one; «due» in amber if it has no day yet); the owner and who does it (in-house or a contractor); the downtime hours; the cost and the status:

Status What it means
Pending Created, with no day: it needs scheduling
Scheduled It has a day; if it stops the machine, the stop is already in the machine's calendar
In progress Being done: the machine is in maintenance (or down, if it is a breakdown)
Closed Done, with its solution, its hours and its cost
Cancelled Not done (with the reason)

Priority goes from urgent (a machine down) to low; an urgent or overdue order shows in red.

#Dealing with a breakdown

When an operator reports a machine down on the terminal (Shop-floor terminal, Incident), Aeromec automatically opens an urgent corrective order for that machine (if it already has an open breakdown, it does not open another one). The machine shows as down on the Shop-floor monitor and in the Planning queues until the order is closed.

The record of the F3-02 breakdown, just as it arrives from the terminal. 12345678
Figure 260. The record of the F3-02 breakdown, just as it arrives from the terminal.
  1. 1
    The number, type, status and priority; below, the equipment and the origin.
  2. 2
    The work order PDF for the technician: tasks with tick boxes, measurements with their limits, spare parts and signature.
  3. 3
    Opens the equipment record.
  4. 4
    Schedule: choose the day (see below).
  5. 5
    Start: the order goes to in progress in your name and the machine to down (or to maintenance, for preventive work).
  6. 6
    Raised, due, start, end and the downtime hours (for a breakdown, since it was reported).
  7. 7
    Who reported it from the terminal and when.
  8. 8
    What the operator wrote.
How to deal with a breakdown
  1. Open the urgent order (at the top of the list, in red) and click Start when you get to the machine.

  2. In Tasks, note what you check; in Spare parts, what you use from the warehouse.

  3. Click Close order and write the solution and the cause (wear, lubrication, electrical, electronics, hydraulic, pneumatic, mechanical, cooling, software, misuse or other) and your hours.

The terminal incident is resolved, the machine goes back to running (on the Monitor, the terminal and the queues) and the breakdown counts towards the KPIs: downtime hours (MTTR) and causes.

#Carrying out and closing an order

Orders from a plan come with their tasks and their planned spare parts. Tick them off as you go: that way anyone can see how it is going and the work order PDF comes out with what has been done.

The tasks of EDM-01's half-yearly preventive maintenance, in progress. 12345
Figure 261. The tasks of EDM-01's half-yearly preventive maintenance, in progress.
  1. 1
    How many are done out of how many.
  2. 2
    Warning of measurements out of limits.
  3. 3
    A done task: its box ticked and, on the right, whether it was OK.
  4. 4
    A task marked not OK, with its note: a corrective action comes from here.
  5. 5
    A measurement with its limits: type the value; out of limits it shows in red and counts as not OK.
Closing the order (not saved). 1234
Figure 262. Closing the order (not saved).
  1. 1
    Solution: what has been done (required for a breakdown).
  2. 2
    Technician hours: valued at the company's labour cost.
  3. 3
    Whether the machine goes back to running (untick it if it stays down waiting for something).
  4. 4
    Close order.

Depending on the type, closing asks for more: for a breakdown, the cause; for a statutory inspection or a verification, the result (Pass, Pass with remarks or Fail); and for an order done by an outside company, its cost (with «See costs»). In Spare parts, each spare part you add is taken from warehouse stock at its cost (and goes back if you remove it while the order is open); Actions gathers the corrective actions opened from the order and Documents, the service company's report, the inspection certificate or the photos.

#Scheduling a stop in the best slot

Stopping a machine to maintain it takes hours away from its WOs. Schedule shows, for each day of the next three weeks, how much work would be delayed and suggests the best one.

Scheduling F3-01's monthly preventive maintenance (not saved). 123456
Figure 263. Scheduling F3-01's monthly preventive maintenance (not saved).
  1. 1
    The stop hours (the plan's; you can change them).
  2. 2
    A day with a full queue: stopping the machine would push out that work.
  3. 3
    The best slot: the working day that pushes out the least load (and the earliest). It comes preselected.
  4. 4
    Weekends and holidays: they push out nothing, but they would mean overtime for the technician.
  5. 5
    Unschedule: the order goes back to pending and its stop is removed from the calendar.
  6. 6
    Schedule on the chosen day.

#The equipment

Maintenance → Equipment: the machines and the auxiliary equipment. 123456
Figure 264. Maintenance → Equipment: the machines and the auxiliary equipment.
  1. 1
    Equipment, down or in maintenance and, over the last 12 months, availability, MTBF and MTTR.
  2. 2
    New equipment: an auxiliary item (machines are equipment from the moment they are created in Work centres).
  3. 3
    Filters: down, with overdue preventive, machines, auxiliary, critical, with an open work order or with open actions.
  4. 4
    F3-02, down because of the breakdown. The letter is its criticality: A (without it production stops), B or C.
  5. 5
    The next maintenance from its plans and its open order.
  6. 6
    The machine's hour meter (the hours from its time records); then breakdowns, MTBF, availability and 12-month cost.
F3-01's record: its summary. 12345678
Figure 265. F3-01's record: its summary.
  1. 1
    Code, type, criticality and status; below, manufacturer, model and serial no.
  2. 2
    The maintenance log as a PDF: the record, the plans and the whole history, for an audit.
  3. 3
    Its work centre (capacity, calendar, people).
  4. 4
    The impact of its last failed verification (see below).
  5. 5
    New work order for this equipment.
  6. 6
    Hour meter, use over 30 days, and 12-month availability, MTBF and MTTR.
  7. 7
    Breakdowns, downtime and running hours, preventive work done, cost, shift check compliance and last verification.
  8. 8
    What is next for each plan, with its order.

The other tabs: Plans (each plan with its frequency, the last time and the next; New plan, and Create order to bring one forward), History (all its orders, with their cost), Actions (its corrective actions), Tools (the tool changes from the terminal, with the actual life of each tool) and Documents (manual, diagrams, inspection certificates). Auxiliary equipment has its own status; a machine's is that of its work centre.

#The schedule: what is due and when

Maintenance → Schedule: the overdue ones and what is due each month. 12345
Figure 266. Maintenance → Schedule: the overdue ones and what is due each month.
  1. 1
    Machines only (without the auxiliary equipment).
  2. 2
    Generate plan orders: those for the next 14 days and the overdue ones that do not have an order yet.
  3. 3
    How many maintenance tasks are overdue and how many fall in each of the next 12 months; click a month to go to it.
  4. 4
    The overdue ones: they were already due. Schedule them as soon as possible.
  5. 5
    Each one with its frequency, who does it, the stop and its order (if it has one).

#A failed verification

If a geometric verification fails, the machine has been machining out of tolerance for an unknown length of time. When you close it with that result, Aeromec offers to show its impact and to open the corrective action. The impact is also in the equipment record (the shield button).

The impact of F3-01's failed verification after a collision (with Quality: «Open NCR»). 12345
Figure 267. The impact of F3-01's failed verification after a collision (with Quality: «Open NCR»).
  1. 1
    The period: from the last passed verification to the failed one.
  2. 2
    The WOs, the operations, the good parts and the serials already shipped.
  3. 3
    What to do: measure a sample from each WO before accepting anything.
  4. 4
    Each machined operation: WO, part, customer, good parts, serials, who and when. Click it to open the WO.
  5. 5
    Open NCR: the nonconformance for that WO, already filled in (with «Edit quality»).

#Corrective actions

A corrective action (MC-…) is what is done to correct something that has been found wrong: in an inspection, in a verification, in a recurring breakdown, in the operator's check or in an audit. It has an owner, a due date and, once done, a check of its effectiveness.

The corrective action for EDM-01's diamond guide, open. 12345
Figure 268. The corrective action for EDM-01's diamond guide, open.
  1. 1
    The number and the status; below, the finding, the equipment and its origin.
  2. 2
    Date, due date, severity and when it was done.
  3. 3
    The finding, the action, the owner, the order where it was found and the one that carries it out.
  4. 4
    The effectiveness check: how it was confirmed that it works, whether it was effective, when and by whom.
  5. 5
    Mark as done and, later, Check effectiveness.
How to handle a corrective action
  1. Create it from the order where the problem was found (Actions tab) or with New corrective action: finding, action, severity, owner and due date.

  2. If work is needed on the machine, Create the order to carry it out (it stays linked).

  3. When it is done, Mark as done.

  4. After a while, Check effectiveness: how it was checked and whether it was effective. If it was not, the action goes back to in progress.

The action is verified. If the finding affects (or may have affected) the product, Quality turns it into a CAPA with Escalate to CAPA (Nonconformances).

#Tools and spare parts: never run out

The cutters, drills, taps and inserts of the CNC machines wear out every day, and a missing spare part leaves a machine down. The Tools & spares view keeps an eye on the replenishment of cutting tools, spare parts and consumables (oils, grease, EDM wire, coolant) using two figures: actual usage and the machines' forecast load.

Maintenance → Tools & spares, filtered «To order». 1234567
Figure 269. Maintenance → Tools & spares, filtered «To order».
  1. 1
    How many need ordering and how many are out of stock, the tool changes over 90 days, the tool spend and the amount to order (amounts with «See costs»).
  2. 2
    Order what is missing: the purchase orders in one click.
  3. 3
    Filters by status (to order, out of stock, watch) and by type: cutting tools, spare parts, lubricants and consumables.
  4. 4
    Coverage: how many days the stock will last at the current rate of usage.
  5. 5
    Reorder point: below it, you must order so that it arrives in time.
  6. 6
    Actual life of the tool (from the changes on the terminal) against the reference life.
  7. 7
    A tap for titanium: with the load on F5-01 and F5-02, it has to be ordered now.
Order what is missing (without creating the orders). 123
Figure 270. Order what is missing (without creating the orders).
  1. 1
    Draft purchase orders are created: Purchasing reviews them and sends them.
  2. 2
    Each item with its supplier, its stock and the suggested quantity (you can change it).
  3. 3
    Create orders: one per supplier, with its price list and its lead time.

Click an item to see its usage and its changes, and to adjust its reference life (machine minutes), the machines or equipment it is fitted on (this is what the terminal offers when a tool is changed) and its safety stock: with a safety stock, MRP also replenishes it. Spare parts orders are posted to the other supplies account, like tool orders (Purchasing).

#The KPIs

Maintenance → KPIs: the last 12 months. 1234567
Figure 271. Maintenance → KPIs: the last 12 months.
  1. 1
    Availability: the time the machines were able to work over the total (excluding breakdowns).
  2. 2
    MTBF: running hours between breakdowns. The higher, the better.
  3. 3
    MTTR: mean time to repair. The lower, the better.
  4. 4
    Preventive compliance: the ones done on time over the ones done.
  5. 5
    % of hours on preventive against corrective: planned work against unplanned work.
  6. 6
    Cost of maintenance and of tools (with «See costs»).
  7. 7
    The causes of breakdowns (Pareto) and, on the right, the tools used most.

#Maintenance in the rest of Aeromec

  • Shop-floor terminal: each machine's start-of-shift check (an anomaly opens a notice to Maintenance) and the tool change (the tool is taken from the warehouse and its actual life is recorded); the operator sees the scheduled or in-progress maintenance of their machine, and a machine in maintenance does not allow operations to be started.
  • Planning: a scheduled stop takes capacity away from the machine in its calendar and the queues take it into account.
  • Shop-floor monitor: the machines that are down or in maintenance.
  • Dashboard: the Maintenance block (machines down, urgent breakdowns, overdue plans, actions past due, tools to order, availability, MTBF and MTTR).
  • Work centres: the Maintenance button opens the machine's equipment record.
  • Purchasing: orders of type spare parts; Items: the spare part type, tool life and which machines each tool is fitted on.
  • Claude: «What maintenance is due this week?», «schedule F3-01's preventive maintenance in the best slot», «order the cutters we are missing».

Quality

Inspection & FAI

Receiving, in-process and final inspections with their measurements characteristic by characteristic and their electronic signature, the first article inspection (FAI) to EN 9102 / AS9102 with its forms and its signed release, the capability of each process (Cp/Cpk) with its control chart, the inspection stamps with the integrity check of everything signed, and foreign object (FOD) prevention.

Who uses it: Quality and inspection; read-only, engineering and shop-floor managerAccess: «Inspection & FAI» section; to record inspections, «Edit quality» (and an inspection stamp with the right scope); to approve or reject an FAI, «Release FAI», the qualification on the person's record and a stamp with FAI scope; to issue and withdraw stamps, «Manage stamps»

Inspection & FAI holds everything that is measured in the shop and the decision taken on it. There are five views:

  • Inspections: every inspection recorded —receiving of material, in-process on a work order operation and final before shipping— with its measurements, its result and the signature of whoever performed it.
  • FAI (first article): the first article inspection (FAI) of every new part, every new revision of its drawing or every change that affects it, with the forms of the EN 9102 / AS9102 standard and the signature that releases the part for series production.
  • Capability Cp/Cpk: using all the measurements of a characteristic, whether the process makes it within tolerance with margin to spare or is drifting towards a limit, and its control chart.
  • Stamps & signatures: each person's inspection stamps (what they may sign) and the check that nothing signed has changed.
  • FOD: foreign object prevention (Foreign Object Debris/Damage): the shop areas and their inspections.

Measurements are taken against the routing's control plan: the list of drawing characteristics to be checked at each operation, each with its balloon number (the number it carries on the drawing), its nominal value and tolerances, and the type of gauge used to measure it (see Routings & costing). Aeromec compares each value with its limits as you type and, since every measurement stores the gauge it was taken with, it does not accept measurements with an overdue or out-of-service gauge (see Gauges).

Whatever inspects or releases product is signed: recording an inspection, releasing or rejecting a lot at receiving and approving or rejecting an FAI ask for your password and an inspection stamp with that scope (The electronic signature). Signed records can no longer be changed or deleted: a mistake is corrected with a reason and another signature.

#Where inspection happens: from receiving to shipping

  1. 1ReceiptReceived material waits in quarantine until Quality validates its 3.1 certificate, the heat and, where needed, the hardness, and releases it with their signature.
  2. 2In-processOn operations with a control plan, their characteristics are measured with an in-date gauge, and signed.
  3. 3FAIThe first piece of a new part, a new drawing revision or a change that affects it is measured (EN 9102 / AS9102) and released with a signature.
  4. 4FinalThe final inspection of the lot before shipping it; for a critical part, essential for it to ship.
  5. 5ShippingThe delivery note and the certificate of conformity (CoC) are only issued if the part's FAI is approved.
Inspections throughout the life of a part. Each one is kept on the work order, on the lot and in the serial number traceability.

#The inspection list

Inspection & FAI, Inspections view: KPIs, filters and the latest inspections recorded. 12345678
Figure 272. Inspection & FAI, Inspections view: KPIs, filters and the latest inspections recorded.
  1. 1
    The five views of the section: Inspections, FAI (first article), Capability Cp/Cpk, Stamps & signatures and FOD. Aeromec remembers the last one you used.
  2. 2
    Inspections in 30 days and First-pass yield (the share of production inspections accepted in the last 90 days).
  3. 3
    Lots in quarantine: received material waiting for its receiving inspection. In amber if there is any.
  4. 4
    Characteristics with Cpk < 1.33 out of all those analysed. Click it to go to the capability view.
  5. 5
    Search by part, work order, lot, heat, supplier or inspector.
  6. 6
    Record inspection opens the measurement record of an operation (shown further down).
  7. 7
    The filters: last 30 days, pending, non-conforming, one per type (receiving, in-process, final and FAI) and all.
  8. 8
    A pending receiving inspection: the lot with its heat and its supplier, with no inspector yet. Open it to inspect it.

Each row is an inspection: the type and date (the icon in green, amber or red depending on the result), the part with its customer, the work order and operation (or, for receiving, the lot and its heat with the supplier and the goods receipt), the inspector, how many measurements it has —and how many out of tolerance, in red— and the result. Rejected ones are shown with the row highlighted in red. Defence parts carry the shield and are only visible to whoever has the «Defence data» permission.

Type What is inspected Where it comes from
Receiving A raw material lot: 3.1 certificate, heat, identification and, where applicable, hardness When a purchase is received (it stays pending)
In-process The control plan characteristics of a work order operation Record inspection, here or from the work order
Final The finished lot before shipping it Record inspection, choosing the «Final» type
FAI The first piece, 100% of the drawing characteristics The work order's FAI operation (see below)

The result is Pending (receiving not yet inspected), Accepted or Rejected (some measurement out of tolerance or a rejected lot).

For a critical part (one that affects aircraft safety, see Items) the final inspection is not optional: its parts only ship from a work order with a conforming final inspection, and the CoC says so.

#Recording an inspection with measurements

Record inspection starts by choosing the operation being inspected: it lists the operations of released, in-progress or blocked work orders that have a control plan. Then the record opens with all its characteristics.

Choosing the operation to inspect, searching for part AMP-1004. 12
Figure 273. Choosing the operation to inspect, searching for part AMP-1004.
  1. 1
    Search by work order, by part or by the operation description.
  2. 2
    Each operation: work order, number and description; below, the part, the machine, the operation status and how many characteristics its control plan has.
Record inspection for a milling operation: two parts measured, one within tolerance and the other out (not recorded). 12345678
Figure 274. Record inspection for a milling operation: two parts measured, one within tolerance and the other out (not recorded).
  1. 1
    The work order, the operation and the part you are inspecting. The ⓘ explains how a measurement is judged.
  2. 2
    The type: in-process, final or FAI (on the work order's FAI operation it comes preset).
  3. 3
    The inspector is you: whoever records the inspection signs it.
  4. 4
    Parts to measure (1 to 10): one column of measurements per part.
  5. 5
    Each control plan characteristic: its balloon on the drawing (key ones in amber), what it is and its tolerance (nominal ± tolerance, or its limits).
  6. 6
    The gauge: the first in-date one of the type the plan asks for; open the list to choose another.
  7. 7
    Within tolerance, the measurement turns green with a ✓…
  8. 8
    …and out of tolerance, red with a ✗, as soon as you type it.

When you open the gauge list of a characteristic you get those of the type its control plan asks for (for a length, calipers). Each one shows its calibration status:

  • with a green ✓, in date: it can be used to measure;
  • struck through with a padlock, overdue, not calibrated or out of service: you can pick it, but the measurement will be rejected.

In the demo, caliper INS-003 is overdue for calibration (and someone on the shop floor also has it on loan: see Gauges).

With INS-003 selected, the warning that the measurement will be rejected. 12
Figure 275. With INS-003 selected, the warning that the measurement will be rejected.
  1. 1
    If you choose an overdue or out-of-service gauge, it is struck through with a padlock…
  2. 2
    …and Aeromec warns in red: the measurement will be rejected. If you still click Record, the database refuses it.
How to record an in-process inspection
  1. In Inspections, click Record inspection (also from the top bar: Create → Record inspection).

  2. Search for the work order or the part and choose the operation you are inspecting.

  3. Check the type and how many parts you are going to measure (the inspector is you).

  4. For each characteristic, check the gauge (in date) and type each part's measurement. For attribute characteristics (go / no-go, such as a thread with its plug gauge) tick OK or NOK per part.

  5. Click Record: the signature dialog opens. Type your password and click Sign.

The inspection record opens with its measurements and its signature. If any is out of tolerance, the message says so in red and the inspection is «Rejected»: raise the NCR from its record. If you cancel the signature, nothing is saved.

When you click Record, Aeromec asks for your electronic signature before saving anything. The dialog shows what you are signing (the inspection type, the work order, the operation and the part), the meaning of the signature —«Performed»: you declare that you carried out the inspection and that what you record is true and complete— and the inspection stamp you sign with.

To sign you need a current stamp with the scope of what you sign: «In-process» for an in-process inspection, «Final» for a final one, «FAI» for the first article and «Receiving» to release a received lot (see Stamps & signatures). If you do not have it, the dialog says so and does not let you sign; nor does it if the qualification granting that scope has expired (Competence & training).

The signature stays bound to the inspection with the date and time, your stamp and the fingerprint of its content. How it works (the password, the lock after five failures, what is stored), in The electronic signature.

Signing an in-process inspection: the dialog that appears when you click Record (not signed). 123456
Figure 276. Signing an in-process inspection: the dialog that appears when you click Record (not signed).
  1. 1
    The meaning of the signature: «Performed».
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the inspection type, the work order and operation, and the part.
  3. 3
    Who signs and their inspection stamp, with everything it may sign.
  4. 4
    What you declare by signing.
  5. 5
    Your password, the one you sign in with. The database checks it and it is not stored.
  6. 6
    Sign saves the inspection with the signature; Cancel saves nothing.

#The inspection record

Record of a rejected in-process inspection: one of the parts out of tolerance. 123456
Figure 277. Record of a rejected in-process inspection: one of the parts out of tolerance.
  1. 1
    The type, the date and the result; below, the part, the work order and operation, and the inspector.
  2. 2
    Raise NCR (in red) appears when there are measurements out of tolerance: it opens the nonconformance already linked to the work order and the operation.
  3. 3
    The tabs: the inspection, its signatures and its documents (the CMM report, photos…).
  4. 4
    The figures: measurements, characteristics, non-conforming and parts inspected.
  5. 5
    The part and the work order (click them to open them), the inspector and the notes.
  6. 6
    Each characteristic with its balloon and tolerance, and the measurements part by part: green for accepted and red for those that are not. On the right, the gauge.

If you hover over a measurement, Aeromec tells you which part it belongs to (and its serial number, if it has one) and which gauge it was measured with. Inspection measurements also appear in the serial number traceability (Traceability) and, on the work order, in its quality tab (Work orders).

The Signatures tab shows who signed the inspection, with which stamp and when, and whether its content is still exactly what was signed (The Signatures tab). A signed inspection cannot be edited or deleted: if a measurement was entered wrongly, Correct (on that tab) asks for the right value, the reason and another signature, and the previous value stays in the history.

#Receiving inspection: releasing a quarantined lot

When the warehouse receives a raw material purchase (Purchasing), each lot goes into quarantine and a pending receiving inspection appears here. Meanwhile the lot cannot be reserved or used on any work order. Quality checks the 3.1 certificate against the material specification, the lot identification and, where applicable, the hardness, and then releases or rejects it.

A pending receiving inspection: a titanium plate with its heat and its certificate. 12345
Figure 278. A pending receiving inspection: a titanium plate with its heat and its certificate.
  1. 1
    Receiving, with its date and the Pending status; below, the material and the lot.
  2. 2
    Inspect opens the decision on the lot.
  3. 3
    The tabs: the inspection, its signatures (when it is released or rejected) and its documents.
  4. 4
    The lot with its heat (click it to open it in Warehouse) and, below, the supplier's 3.1 certificate number.
  5. 5
    What is checked at receiving and what happens to the lot depending on the result.

For raw material, Inspect validates the 3.1 certificate point by point: six checks, each answered Yes, No or N/A:

Check What to look at
Material and specification The alloy, specification, condition and dimensions are those of the order
Heat The one on the certificate is the one marked on the material
Chemical composition Within the specification
Mechanical properties Tensile strength, yield strength, elongation and hardness within the specification
Manufacturer's signature Signed by its authorised inspection representative
Traceable origin Issued by the manufacturer or by an authorised distributor, unaltered

Below, the measured hardness if you check it (for example, 36 HRC), whether the lot is accepted and some notes (an illegible marking, a certificate that has been requested again…). A lot is not released with any «No» on the certificate; and if the origin is not traceable, Aeromec warns in red: when it is rejected, the NCR is raised as a suspected counterfeit, which is not granted a concession, reworked or returned (see Purchasing and Nonconformances). For material that is not raw material, the certificate is accepted or not with a single tick box.

How to release (or reject) a received lot
  1. In Inspections, filter Pending (the Lots in quarantine KPI tells you how many there are) and open the receiving inspection.

  2. Have the lot's 3.1 certificate to hand (the scanned one is in the lot's documents): the heat must match the material's and the composition and properties must be within its standard.

  3. Click Inspect. Answer each certificate check, enter the Measured hardness if you measure it and decide Lot accepted.

  4. Click Save and sign with your password.

If accepted, the lot becomes available and can be reserved for work orders. If not, it stays blocked in the warehouse and a supplier NCR is raised to return or claim it (see Nonconformances). The inspection is signed as released or rejected.

#FAI: first article inspection (EN 9102 / AS9102)

The FAI (First Article Inspection) is the complete, documented verification of the first part made with the final process: every drawing characteristic is measured, the certificates for the material, the special processes (heat treatments, anodising…) and the tests are gathered, and someone qualified signs it. Until then the part is not considered «in series» and the database does not allow it to be shipped. The governing standard is EN 9102 (the European one; it is equivalent to the American AS9102, which is how many customers and the FAI labels refer to it).

Aeromec opens the FAI when the work order is released (Work orders) if the customer requires it and the part needs it; the work order then carries an FAI operation. The FAI records its reason, one of those covered by EN 9102:

Reason When FAI
New part The part's first work order Full
Drawing revision change The first work order at a new drawing revision (an implemented drawing change, see Changes) Full
Process change The routing changes Full
Not built for 2 years The part has not been made for two years Full
Alternative material (partial FAI) The first use of an alternative material approved on the routing Partial
Manufacturing process change, Location or machine change, New or modified tooling, New or modified CNC program, Special process supplier change A change that may affect the part Full or partial, depending on what it affects
After a corrective action After correcting the cause of a nonconformance Full or partial

A partial (or delta) FAI does not repeat everything: it focuses on what the change affects (for example, the material and the characteristics that depend on it), form 1 states so and which characteristics it covers are recorded. A full FAI, on the other hand, cannot be approved while any drawing characteristic is still unmeasured.

The FAI view with the open FAIs: one for a drawing revision change and another for a new part. 12345678
Figure 280. The FAI view with the open FAIs: one for a drawing revision change and another for a new part.
  1. 1
    Open FAIs: pending or in progress. Each one has shipping of its part blocked.
  2. 2
    Average days to release: from opening to approval, for approved FAIs.
  3. 3
    FAIs approved first time: approved without any rejection.
  4. 4
    Programme: shows only the FAIs of a programme's parts (AR-90, TF-38…; see Programmes).
  5. 5
    The filters: open (on entry), approved, rejected, defence (with that permission) and all.
  6. 6
    Each FAI with its number, its reason and the date; the part with its drawing and revision, the customer and the programme; the work order and the routing revision.
  7. 7
    Characteristics measured against those in the plan, with a progress bar (and the non-conforming ones in red).
  8. 8
    The status: pending (nothing measured), in progress, approved or rejected.
The FAI of new part AMP-1012 (Bulkhead frame), in progress: form 1, release and EN 9102 data. 123456789
Figure 281. The FAI of new part AMP-1012 (Bulkhead frame), in progress: form 1, release and EN 9102 data.
  1. 1
    The FAI number, its status and its reason; below, the part, the drawing with its revision, the customer, the work order and the programme.
  2. 2
    Record FAI measurements (the ruler): opens the measurement record on the work order's FAI operation.
  3. 3
    FAI report PDF: the forms in a landscape report for the customer.
  4. 4
    Reject FAI (asks for the reason) and Approve FAI: only with «Release FAI», and both are signed.
  5. 5
    The tabs: the three forms (2 and 3 with their count), the signatures and the documents.
  6. 6
    The messages: while the FAI is not approved, shipping of this part is blocked; and how many drawing characteristics are still to be measured.
  7. 7
    Form 1: part number, part name, drawing and revision, the manufacturing organisation, the supplier code at the customer and the FAI type (full or partial).
  8. 8
    Release: reason, work order, routing revision, inspector and, once signed, who released it and when.
  9. 9
    EN 9102 data: the customer reference (their FAI or approval number), when the customer approved it and, for a partial FAI, which characteristics it covers. The pencil edits them while the FAI is open.
Form 2 of an approved FAI: the material, a special process and a test, each with its supplier and certificate. 1234
Figure 282. Form 2 of an approved FAI: the material, a special process and a test, each with its supplier and certificate.
  1. 1
    The Form 2 tab, with how many rows it has.
  2. 2
    The material with its specification, the supplier and the heat's 3.1 certificate.
  3. 3
    Each special process (anodising, heat treatment, passivation…) with the supplier that did it and its certificate.
  4. 4
    The tests (here, penetrant inspection) and their result, accepted or not.
Form 3 of the AMP-1012 FAI: the drawing characteristics, with the measurements taken so far. 123456
Figure 283. Form 3 of the AMP-1012 FAI: the drawing characteristics, with the measurements taken so far.
  1. 1
    The tab shows how many characteristics are measured out of those in the plan (for a full FAI, EN 9102 requires 100%).
  2. 2
    The warning about those still to be measured (and, if any, the measurements out of tolerance, in red).
  3. 3
    The balloon of each characteristic on the drawing: key ones (affecting function or safety) in amber.
  4. 4
    The operation and the characteristic and its requirement (nominal and limits, or «attribute» for go / no-go).
  5. 5
    The measured result (in green or red) and the gauge it was measured with.
  6. 6
    ✓ accepted, ✗ rejected and an empty circle if not measured yet.
How to complete and approve an FAI
  1. In FAI (first article), with the Open filter, open the FAI.

  2. Check form 1: the drawing and its revision must be those on the customer's order. Enter in EN 9102 data the customer reference (their FAI or approval number), the date they approved it if they already have and, for a partial FAI, which characteristics it covers: they are edited while the FAI is open and signed with the release.

  3. Check in form 2 that the material and each special process and test are there with their certificate (the certificates are in the Documents tab).

  4. Click the ruler Record FAI measurements, measure the missing characteristics (the type already comes as FAI) and sign; repeat until form 3 is complete.

  5. If everything conforms, click Approve FAI, confirm and sign («Released», with a stamp of FAI scope). If something does not, Reject FAI with the reason and sign: the process will have to be corrected and the FAI repeated.

  6. Produce the FAI report PDF to send it to the customer.

With the FAI approved, the part goes into series production at that drawing revision: following work orders carry no FAI and their parts can be shipped. The PDF shows «APPROVED» with the inspector, the signature of whoever released it and the fingerprint of the signed record.

When you click Approve FAI on a full FAI that still has drawing characteristics not measured, Aeromec stops: it tells you how many are missing, because EN 9102 requires 100% (and the database does not let it be approved either). With everything measured, it asks for confirmation and the signature. A partial FAI only needs what the change affects.

The FAI report PDF gathers the header (number, date, reason, part, customer, work order and routing revision) and forms 2 and 3 as tables, with key characteristics highlighted, the APPROVED, REJECTED or IN PROGRESS stamp and the signatures of the inspector and of whoever released it, with the fingerprint of the signed record at the foot. The browser's print dialog opens, from which you print it or save it as a PDF.

Approving the full FAI of AMP-1012 with characteristics not measured: Aeromec says how many are missing and does not approve it. 12
Figure 284. Approving the full FAI of AMP-1012 with characteristics not measured: Aeromec says how many are missing and does not approve it.
  1. 1
    Approve FAI…
  2. 2
    …on a full FAI with characteristics not measured, it says how many are missing (EN 9102: 100%) and goes no further.
The Signatures tab of an approved FAI: the release signed by Quality with its stamp, and the record intact. 1234
Figure 285. The Signatures tab of an approved FAI: the release signed by Quality with its stamp, and the record intact.
  1. 1
    The FAI's Signatures tab.
  2. 2
    Intact: the content is exactly what was signed; the fingerprint chain and how long it must be retained.
  3. 3
    The signature: «Released», who, with which stamp, when, and the fingerprint of the content.
  4. 4
    Correct a detail of the signed FAI, with a reason and another signature.

As with inspections, a signed FAI can no longer be edited: the Signatures tab shows the release (or the rejection) with its stamp and its fingerprint, and Correct changes the drawing revision with a reason and another signature (measurements are corrected on the FAI inspection). More in The Signatures tab.

The same FAI seen by engineering (Lucía): she can consult it and produce the PDF, but not measure or release it. 1
Figure 286. The same FAI seen by engineering (Lucía): she can consult it and produce the PDF, but not measure or release it.
  1. 1
    Without «Edit quality» the ruler to record measurements does not appear, and without «Release FAI» neither do Reject nor Approve FAI: only the PDF is left.

#Process capability: Cp and Cpk

The Capability Cp/Cpk view takes all the measurements of each control plan characteristic (at least 5) and works out whether the process makes it within tolerance and with margin to spare. Two figures sum it up:

  • Cp tells you whether the process spread fits within the tolerance: how many times the process width (6 σ) fits into the tolerance width.
  • Cpk says the same taking into account how centred it is: it is measured from the mean to the nearest limit. If Cp is good and Cpk is not, the process is off-centre and correcting the offset on the machine is enough.
Cpk Reading
≥ 1.33 Capable (green): what aerospace customers usually require on key characteristics
1 – 1.33 Marginal (amber): watch the trend and tool wear
< 1 Not capable (red): the process makes parts out of tolerance; it needs a corrective action or 100% inspection
Capability Cp/Cpk view: characteristics from lowest to highest Cpk. 1234567
Figure 287. Capability Cp/Cpk view: characteristics from lowest to highest Cpk.
  1. 1
    Characteristics analysed (those with 5 or more measurements), the share that are capable and how many are not capable.
  2. 2
    Key characteristics not capable: key characteristics with Cpk below 1.33. They are the priority.
  3. 3
    The filters by capability (not capable, marginal, capable), the key characteristics, the defence ones and all.
  4. 4
    Each characteristic: its balloon, what it is, the part, the routing revision and the operation; next to it, its specification.
  5. 5
    n: how many measurements; their mean and their spread (σ, the standard deviation).
  6. 6
    Cp and Cpk, in red, amber or green according to the criterion above.
  7. 7
    Out: how many measurements have been out of tolerance.
The capability of the hole centre distance of AMP-1030, a key characteristic of a critical part: figures and histogram. 123
Figure 288. The capability of the hole centre distance of AMP-1030, a key characteristic of a critical part: figures and histogram.
  1. 1
    The part, the routing revision and the balloon, with its Cpk and, if it is one, Critical part; below, the characteristic and its specification.
  2. 2
    The figures: n, mean, σ, Cp and Cpk.
  3. 3
    The histogram: how many measurements fall in each band, with the lower and upper limits (LSL and USL, in red) and the nominal. A narrow, centred bell between the two red lines is a capable process; if it touches or crosses a line, it is not.

#Control chart of key characteristics

Cpk tells you whether the process fits within the tolerance; the control chart tells you whether the process is still the same as before. It is the EN 9103 tool for key characteristics (those flagged by the drawing or the customer because they affect function or safety, with the balloon in amber), and above all for those of critical parts.

Below the histogram, the characteristic's record draws the individuals chart (I-MR): each point is a measurement, in the order it was taken (the last 60). The centre line is the mean and the two orange ones are the control limits (UCL, upper, and LCL, lower), which come from how much each part varies from the previous one (the moving range). The dashed red lines are the drawing tolerance. The chart flags a signal (the Western Electric rules):

  • a point outside the control limits;
  • 7 points in a row on the same side of the mean;
  • 6 points in a row rising or falling.

A signal means the process has changed —a tool wearing, a zero that has shifted, another heat— even though the parts are still within tolerance: it is time to act, before the NCR. With no signals, the chart says In control.

The control chart of key characteristic 91 of AMP-1030 (main landing gear pin, critical part): in control, but with a Cpk below 1. 123456
Figure 289. The control chart of key characteristic 91 of AMP-1030 (main landing gear pin, critical part): in control, but with a Cpk below 1.
  1. 1
    Critical part: its failure affects aircraft safety (see Items).
  2. 2
    The control chart and, on the right, whether it is in control or how many signals it has.
  3. 3
    The measurements in order: the mean (grey), the control limits (orange) and the tolerance (dashed red). A point that triggers a signal is shown in red and, below, which rule it breaks and at which points.
  4. 4
    The mean (x̄), the UCL and LCL limits, Cp and Cpk with the part-to-part variation and Pp and Ppk with the overall variation.
  5. 5
    Values over time: each measurement in date order against the tolerance limits and the nominal; in red, those that fell outside. A trend towards a limit is usually tool wear.
  6. 6
    How to read the Cpk and what to do in each case.

In the example, the characteristic is in control (no signals) and yet its Cpk is below 1: the process is stable, but its natural variation no longer fits comfortably within the tolerance (the control limits lie outside the tolerance limits). It is not fixed by adjusting the machine part by part, but by changing the process (another machining strategy, another fixture) or by inspecting 100% in the meantime. Conversely, a capable process with a signal calls for a look at what has changed.

#Stamps & signatures

An inspection stamp is a person's authority to accept product: its number (the one that used to be stamped on paper, such as AM-Q01) and its scope, that is, what it may sign. The Stamps & signatures view is the register of all the company's stamps:

Scope What it may sign
Receiving Releasing or rejecting a received lot
In-process An in-process inspection
Final A final inspection
FAI An FAI inspection and approving or rejecting an FAI
MRB (nonconformities) Deciding the disposition of an NCR (see Nonconformances)
CoC (shipping) Shipping with the certificate of conformity (see Shipments)
Calibration Recording a calibration (see Gauges)

Each person holds at most one current stamp. A number is never reused: a lost stamp, or that of someone who changes job, is withdrawn with its date and reason and another one is issued. Neither a stamp's number nor its holder change, a withdrawn one can no longer be touched and none are deleted: that way every old signature still says which stamp it was made with.

Stamps & signatures: the current stamps, with their scope and the signatures made with each one. 123456
Figure 290. Stamps & signatures: the current stamps, with their scope and the signatures made with each one.
  1. 1
    The Stamps & signatures view.
  2. 2
    Current stamps, stamp holders and signatures in the last 30 days.
  3. 3
    Integrity: checks that no signed record has changed (see below).
  4. 4
    New stamp: number, holder, from when and scope (with «Manage stamps»).
  5. 5
    The filters: current, withdrawn and all.
  6. 6
    Each stamp: its number and holder; its scope, from when it is valid (and, if withdrawn, when), how many signatures have been made with it and the last one, and its status. Click it to change its scope or withdraw it.

Clicking a stamp opens its form: the scope (tick what it may sign), some notes and, while it is current, Withdraw with the date and the reason (lost, change of job, qualification ended…). From that date it is no longer valid for signing, but the signatures made with it are kept.

To give authority to someone new, New stamp asks for the number (it cannot repeat one already used), the holder, from when and the scope. Signing does not depend on the «Manage stamps» permission: everyone signs with their own password and stamp; that permission is only for keeping this register. Bear in mind that, besides the stamp, the person needs the current qualification to sign with that scope (Competence & training).

Stamp AM-Q03 of Rocío Molina: its scope and its withdrawal (not saved). 1234
Figure 291. Stamp AM-Q03 of Rocío Molina: its scope and its withdrawal (not saved).
  1. 1
    The stamp's number and holder: they do not change.
  2. 2
    The scope: what may be signed with it.
  3. 3
    Withdraw: the date from which it is no longer valid…
  4. 4
    …and the reason, mandatory.

Check integrity goes through all the signed records in Aeromec —inspections, FAIs, NCRs, CAPAs, calibrations, routings, CoCs, documents, audits, changes…— and compares their content today with the fingerprint stored when they were signed. The result is shown by record type: how many there are, how many are signed, how many are intact (their content is what was signed), altered (something changed without using «Correct»: only possible by editing the database by hand) and being edited (back to draft, like a routing rejected by the customer). Do it before an audit: it is the evidence that the electronic records have not been tampered with.

The integrity check of all signed records. 123
Figure 292. The integrity check of all signed records.
  1. 1
    When it was checked.
  2. 2
    The result: in green if everything is intact; in red, how many records are altered and, below the table, which ones and what changed.
  3. 3
    By record type: how many there are, how many are signed, intact, altered and being edited.

#FOD: foreign object prevention

FOD (Foreign Object Debris, or the damage it causes, Foreign Object Damage) is anything that should not be in a part or an aircraft: a chip, a screw, a forgotten spanner, a rag. In aviation it can destroy an engine, so the shop organises its areas and inspects them regularly. The FOD view keeps that control:

  • each area (the 5-axis centres, the fitting bench, metrology…) with its machines, its level —Critical, Controlled or General—, its controls (tool shadow board with inventory, closed boxes, covers on openings) and every how many days it is inspected;
  • the inspections of each area, with the shift, who did it, the result (No findings or With findings), the objects found and the actions.

An area not inspected on time is shown in red, with Inspection overdue. In the demo, the fitting and marking bench has gone several days without its weekly inspection.

The FOD view: the shop areas with their level, their last inspection and the findings; the fitting bench, overdue. 12345
Figure 293. The FOD view: the shop areas with their level, their last inspection and the findings; the fitting bench, overdue.
  1. 1
    Areas, overdue inspections, findings and objects found in the last 90 days.
  2. 2
    New area (with «Edit quality»).
  3. 3
    The filters: the active areas and those with the inspection overdue.
  4. 4
    An overdue area, in red: its last inspection is older than its frequency.
  5. 5
    Before it, the level and frequency; here, the last inspection with its result (or «Inspection overdue») and, on the right, the findings in 90 days.
The fitting bench FOD area: its controls and its inspections, one with findings. 1234
Figure 294. The fitting bench FOD area: its controls and its inspections, one with findings.
  1. 1
    Code, level and the inspection overdue warning; below, its machines, the frequency and the person responsible.
  2. 2
    Record inspection.
  3. 3
    The area's controls.
  4. 4
    An inspection with findings: what was found, the action and, on the right, how many objects.
Recording the FOD inspection of the fitting bench (not saved). 123
Figure 295. Recording the FOD inspection of the fitting bench (not saved).
  1. 1
    The date, the shift and the inspector (you).
  2. 2
    The result: no findings or with findings, and how many objects were found.
  3. 3
    The findings (mandatory if there are any) and the actions.
How to record an FOD inspection
  1. In FOD, filter Inspection overdue (or open the area that is due) and click the area.

  2. Walk the area with its controls: the tool shadow board complete, boxes closed, nothing loose on the machines or the parts.

  3. Click Record inspection, check the date, the shift and the inspector, and choose the result.

  4. If there are findings, say how many objects you found, what they were and where, and what was done. Click Save.

The area is no longer overdue until its next inspection and the findings count in the 90-day indicators.

#What each profile sees

Quality

Nonconformances

Internal, supplier and customer non-conformances (NCRs) with the EN 9131 data: what happened, on which part, work order or lot, what the MRB decides to do with the parts (rework, repair, use as is with the customer's concession, scrap with its mutilation, or return) with its signature, the product already shipped that may be affected and the notification to each customer; the corrective action in 8D with the EN 9136 root cause analysis; customer complaints with their deadlines; and the shop's quality KPIs: OTD, PPM, scrap, COPQ, rework and ageing, with their Paretos.

Who uses it: Quality; read-only, management (which also approves concessions)Access: «Nonconformances» section; to raise NCRs, CAPAs and complaints, «Edit quality»; to decide the disposition, «Disposition NCs» and an inspection stamp with the MRB scope; to record the customer's response to a concession or a repair, «Approve concession»

A non-conformance is any part or material that does not meet what was ordered: a dimension out of tolerance, a 3.1 certificate out of specification, an illegible marking, parts the customer rejects. Each one is documented in an NCR (Non-Conformance Report) stating what happened, how many parts, where (part, work order and operation, lot and heat, supplier or customer), who detected it and what is decided to do with them.

There are three origins:

Origin What it is Where it usually comes from
Internal Something detected inside the shop An inspection with measurements out of tolerance, the work order, a gauge found unfit
Supplier Material or subcontracted work that arrives wrong The receiving inspection of a lot (rejecting it raises one automatically), a heat treatment or an anodising
Customer Parts the customer rejects or complains about A complaint; or parts already shipped for which a concession is requested

The section has four views: Non-conformances, Corrective actions (CAPA) —those that remove the cause so that it does not happen again—, customer Complaints and Quality KPIs.

What decides about the product is signed with your password (The electronic signature): the disposition (with an inspection stamp with the MRB scope), the customer's response to a concession, closing and voiding an NCR, the mutilation of scrap, closing a CAPA and closing a complaint. What is signed no longer changes: it is corrected with a reason and another signature in the Signatures tab of the record (The Signatures tab).

#The life cycle of a nonconformance

  1. 1DetectionAn inspection, the terminal, a lot's receiving inspection or a customer complaint.
  2. 2NCR raisedWhat, how many parts and where, with the EN 9131 data. If needed, it blocks the work order: no operation progresses on the shop floor.
  3. 3Disposition (MRB)Rework, repair, use as is, scrap or return, signed. The work order is unblocked.
  4. 4ClosureOnce what was decided is done (with the customer's response or the scrap mutilated), the NCR is closed with a signature.
  5. 5CAPA 8DThe corrective action analyses the root cause (EN 9136), removes it and verifies that it does not recur.
From detection to corrective action. The NCR contains the problem; the CAPA stops it coming back.

#The NCR list

Nonconformances: the open NCRs, with the one blocking its work order highlighted in red. 12345678910
Figure 296. Nonconformances: the open NCRs, with the one blocking its work order highlighted in red.
  1. 1
    The four views: Non-conformances, Corrective actions (CAPA), Complaints and Quality KPIs.
  2. 2
    Open NCRs: internal, supplier and customer NCRs not yet closed.
  3. 3
    Average age of the open ones: amber over 30 days and red over 60.
  4. 4
    Waiting for customer: concessions requested that have not been answered yet.
  5. 5
    NCR cost over the last 12 months (only with «See costs»).
  6. 6
    Raise NCR records a new non-conformance; Programme keeps only those of one programme (AR-90, TF-38…; see Programmes).
  7. 7
    The filters: open (on entry), no disposition, concession pending, those blocking a WO, by origin, closed and all.
  8. 8
    An NCR that blocks its work order: the row in red and the ⊘ icon next to the status. It is the first one to resolve.
  9. 9
    The disposition and, if a concession was requested, where it stands.
  10. 10
    The age, the status and the cost of each NCR.

Each row shows the NCR number with its date (the icon tells the origin: the machine, internal; the lorry, supplier; the building, customer), the description with the part, the work order, the lot and the heat and the supplier or the customer, the affected parts, the disposition, the age (days open), the status and the cost. The search finds by number, part, work order, lot, heat, supplier or customer.

Status What it means
Open Just recorded: the parts are segregated awaiting a decision
Under review It is being studied, a rework or a repair is under way or the scrap still has to be mutilated
Awaiting customer A concession or a repair has been requested from the customer and their answer is awaited
Closed Resolved: the closing date is kept
Void It was raised by mistake (it stays recorded all the same)

#Raising an NCR

An NCR is raised with Raise NCR on the list (or under Create in the top bar), but it is usually raised from where it is detected, because then it comes already linked to everything:

  • from the record of an inspection with measurements out of tolerance (the red Raise NCR icon, see Inspection & FAI): with the work order, the operation and the part;
  • from the work order (Work orders), with Raise NCR in its menu;
  • from a lot's receiving inspection: rejecting it raises the supplier NCR automatically;
  • from the impact of a failed gauge (Gauges), with the description already written.
Raising an NCR from a rejected inspection: the work order, the part and the operation come preset (not saved). 123456
Figure 297. Raising an NCR from a rejected inspection: the work order, the part and the operation come preset (not saved).
  1. 1
    The origin: internal, supplier or customer.
  2. 2
    The work order operation where it was detected (it appears when raised from a work order or an inspection).
  3. 3
    The description: what was found, on which characteristic and with what value. Measurable facts.
  4. 4
    The affected parts and the cause (tool wear, program error, defective material…).
  5. 5
    The owner responsible for resolving it (defaults to you). Whoever detects it is recorded automatically.
  6. 6
    Block the WO: no operation of the work order can proceed on the shop floor until the disposition is decided.
How to raise an NCR from an inspection
  1. In Inspection & FAI, open the rejected inspection and click the red Raise NCR icon.

  2. Check the origin and the operation; write the description with the characteristic and the value (for example, «Bore Ø 10.020; max. 10.015»).

  3. Enter the affected parts and the cause if you already know it.

  4. If not a single part more should be made until a decision is taken, turn on Block the WO.

  5. Click Save.

  6. In the record that opens, complete the EN 9131 data (the pencil on its card): the characteristic, the requirement, what was found, where it was detected and the drawing revision.

Aeromec shows «NCR raised» and opens its record. If it blocks the work order, the work order and its active operation become «Blocked» and do not proceed on the shop floor until the disposition is decided.

#The NCR record

The record has four tabs: Summary, Scrap (the parts scrapped by this NCR, with their cost), Signatures (the disposition, the customer's response and the closure, signed) and Documents (photos, reports, the customer's complaint…). In the summary, besides what happened and where, come the non-conformance data per EN 9131:

Data What is entered Example
Characteristic The drawing characteristic, with its balloon Balloon 7 · main bore Ø
Requirement (specified) What the drawing or the specification requires Ø42.000 +0.025/0
Found (measured or observed) What was measured or seen (in red) Ø42.031 to Ø42.041 on 3 parts (CMM)
Detection point Receiving, in-process, final inspection, at the customer, audit or other Final inspection
Drawing revision The revision it was made to C

They are filled in while the NCR has no disposition (when raising it or with the pencil on its card) and, with the disposition, they are signed together with the MRB that decided: afterwards they can only be corrected with a reason and a signature. In the demo, NC-2026-0016 (a dimension out of tolerance that blocks its work order) has them complete.

The record of NC-2026-0016, internal, which blocks its work order: still without disposition and with its EN 9131 data. 123456789
Figure 298. The record of NC-2026-0016, internal, which blocks its work order: still without disposition and with its EN 9131 data.
  1. 1
    The number and the origin, the status, the disposition and, in red, that it blocks the WO. Below, the description, the part, the work order, the customer and the date.
  2. 2
    Decide disposition: the main action while there is no disposition (with «Disposition NCs»).
  3. 3
    The ⋮ menu: edit the NCR, create its corrective action (if it has none), request the supplier's one (SCAR) or void it if it was raised by mistake.
  4. 4
    The tabs: Summary, Scrap, Signatures and Documents.
  5. 5
    The warning: the parts remain segregated until it is decided what to do with them.
  6. 6
    The figures: affected parts, cost, age and disposition.
  7. 7
    What happened: description, cause, who detected it, the owner and the date. Below, the step-by-step tracking.
  8. 8
    Where: the part, the work order with its operation, the programme, the lot and the heat, the supplier or the customer and, if any, the serial numbers. Click them to open them.
  9. 9
    The EN 9131 data: characteristic, requirement, what was found (in red), where it was detected and the drawing revision. The pencil edits them until the disposition. Further down, the linked corrective action.

#Deciding the disposition

The disposition decides what is done with the nonconforming parts. It is taken by the MRB (Material Review Board, the nonconforming product board: usually Quality, Engineering and, if the contract requires it, the customer's representative) and signed by whoever has the «Disposition NCs» permission and an inspection stamp with the MRB scope. The options depend on the NCR: rework needs a work order and return, a lot or a supplier.

Disposition What Aeromec does The NCR
Rework Adds a rework operation («Rework · NC-…») to the work order on the machine you choose (by default, the fitting bench), with the instructions: the part meets the drawing again Goes to «Under review» until you close it
Repair Asks the customer to approve the repair procedure (the part will be usable, but not fully meet the drawing); once approved, it adds the «Repair · NC-…» operation to the work order with the procedure «Awaiting customer» and, once approved, «Under review»
Use as is (concession) Asks the customer to accept the parts as is (a concession or deviation) «Awaiting customer»
Scrap Records the scrap of the parts with its cost (what has been built up to the operation) «Under review» until its mutilation is recorded; then it is closed
Return to supplier Takes the blocked or quarantined lot out of the warehouse as a return It is closed

In any of these cases, if the NCR blocked the work order, the work order is unblocked (unless another open NCR also blocks it): it goes back to «In progress» and its blocked operations, back to the queue.

In the dialog you choose the disposition (only those that fit that NCR are shown), enter the MRB that decides it and, for a repair, the procedure (mandatory: the one the customer is asked to approve, for example one from their repair manual). For a rework you choose the machine of the new operation. The instructions stay with the NCR and, in a rework, are what the operator sees at the terminal.

When you click Save Aeromec asks for your signature with the meaning «Dispositioned (MRB)»: the MRB, the repair and the EN 9131 data are signed with the disposition (The electronic signature).

Until it is decided, the NCR is «Not dispositioned» and shows in the No disposition filter.

Deciding the disposition of NC-2026-0016: repair with its procedure, awaiting the customer's approval (not saved). 12345
Figure 299. Deciding the disposition of NC-2026-0016: repair with its procedure, awaiting the customer's approval (not saved).
  1. 1
    The disposition: rework, repair, use as is, scrap or (for supplier or lot NCRs) return; below, what it involves.
  2. 2
    The MRB: who decides.
  3. 3
    The repair procedure: mandatory for a repair; it is what the customer will approve and what the shop will do.
  4. 4
    Rework only: the machine for the new operation; left empty, the bench.
  5. 5
    Save asks for your signature; then it is applied and the work order is unblocked.
How to unblock a work order stopped by an NCR
  1. In Nonconformances, filter Blocking a WO and open the NCR.

  2. Read what happened and the EN 9131 data, and look at the work order and the part under Where. If needed, check the inspection measurements.

  3. Click Decide disposition and choose the Disposition; enter the MRB. For a rework, choose the machine (or leave it empty for the fitting bench) and write the instructions; for a repair, the procedure.

  4. Click Save and sign with your password.

Aeromec says «Disposition recorded» (or «Concession requested from the customer», for a repair or a use as is). The work order leaves «Blocked (NCR)» and, for a rework, has a new operation in the queue of the chosen machine. The NCR stays open until you close it.
An NCR with the rework already decided: the main action becomes «Close NCR». 12
Figure 300. An NCR with the rework already decided: the main action becomes «Close NCR».
  1. 1
    With the disposition already taken (here, rework)…
  2. 2
    …once the rework is done and inspected, Close NCR.

#Customer concession

A concession (or deviation) means asking the customer to accept the parts as they are even though they do not meet the drawing, because the defect does not affect their function: a 0.6 chamfer instead of 0.5, a slightly smaller radius, a roughness a little above the limit. Only the customer can approve it; until they answer, those parts cannot be shipped and stay set aside.

In the demo, the customer NCR from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte (AMP-1021, Brida de escape de APU) has a concession requested and is awaiting an answer.

The customer NCR with the concession requested from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte. 12345
Figure 301. The customer NCR with the concession requested from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte.
  1. 1
    Origin customer, status Awaiting customer and disposition Concession.
  2. 2
    Who it was requested from and how long ago: those parts stay set aside until they answer.
  3. 3
    The affected serial numbers (in customer NCRs, the parts shipped to them).
  4. 4
    The follow-up: NCR raised, disposition, concession requested, customer answer and closure, each step with its date and who.
  5. 5
    Under Documents, the complaint or the concession request sent to the customer.

The customer's response is recorded by whoever has «Approve concession» (by default, Management): in the NCR record Concession approved appears and, in the ⋮ menu, Concession rejected. Both are signed («Approved» or «Rejected»).

  • Approved: with the customer's reference (their concession or deviation number) and their comments. For a use as is, the NCR is closed and the parts can be shipped; for a repair, the work order gets the «Repair · NC-…» operation on the fitting bench with the approved procedure, and the NCR stays «Under review» until it is done and you close it.
  • Rejected: with the customer's comments (mandatory). The NCR goes back to «Under review» without disposition: another one has to be decided (rework or scrap).

Quality, which does not have that permission, sees the NCR but not those buttons.

Javier (Management) records that the customer approves the concession (not saved). 12
Figure 302. Javier (Management) records that the customer approves the concession (not saved).
  1. 1
    The concession reference at the customer (required when approving).
  2. 2
    Whatever the customer says: conditions, parts it applies to…
How to request a concession (or a repair) and record the response
  1. In the NCR, click Decide disposition, choose Use as is (concession) (or Repair, with its procedure), enter the MRB and explain in Instructions what is asked of the customer. Save and sign.

  2. Send the request to the customer through the usual channel and upload it to the NCR's Documents.

  3. When the customer answers, whoever has «Approve concession» opens the NCR and clicks Concession approved (with the customer's reference) or, in the ⋮ menu, Concession rejected (with their comments), and signs.

With the use as is approved, the NCR is closed and the tracking shows the response with its reference; with the repair approved, the work order has its repair operation. Rejected, it goes back to «Under review» without disposition to decide another.

#Scrap: the signed mutilation

A part that is scrapped must be left unusable so that nobody can use it again or sell it as good: it is mutilated by cutting it through the nonconforming characteristic, drilling it, crushing it, melting it or marking it «SCRAP», if possible with a witness. That is why a scrap NCR is not closed when it is decided: it stays «Under review» with the warning that the mutilation is missing, and the record's main action becomes Record mutilation: how many parts, how they were mutilated, the witness and some notes. It is signed («Performed») and, only then, Close NCR appears.

In an NCR for suspected counterfeit, mutilation is mandatory.

#Affected shipped product and escape notification

When a non-conformance is found late, parts with the same defect may already have gone out: it is an escape. The Affected shipped product card of the NCR works it out by itself:

  • the shipments of the same work order (or only of its serial numbers, if the NCR has them);
  • if the defect is in the material (an NCR on a lot), the shipments of every work order that consumed that lot, like forward traceability (Traceability).

For each customer it says how many parts and on which delivery notes, and carries Prepare notification: the escape notification (AVE-…), with the text for the customer (what happened, which parts and what we ask of them: hold them, return them, inspect them), its shipments and serial numbers and the letter as a PDF. It is marked as sent and, when the customer answers, their acknowledgement is recorded with their reference. If no part has gone out, the card says so and nobody needs to be notified.

In the demo, NC-2026-0011 (anodising thickness out of specification on a subcontracted job) is a scrap already mutilated and closed whose parts from the same work order reached Aerointegra Systems: the notification has been sent and acknowledged.

NC-2026-0011, an anodising scrap: its signed mutilation and the affected shipped product, with the notification to Aerointegra acknowledged. 12345
Figure 303. NC-2026-0011, an anodising scrap: its signed mutilation and the affected shipped product, with the notification to Aerointegra acknowledged.
  1. 1
    The NCR, closed, with a scrap disposition.
  2. 2
    The mutilation: how (here, cutting), how many parts, who did it and the witness.
  3. 3
    Affected shipped product: for each customer, how many parts in how many shipments…
  4. 4
    …the status of their notification (to send, sent or acknowledged) and View notification (or Prepare notification, if it has none yet).
  5. 5
    The corrective action for the cause.
The escape notification of NC-2026-0011 to Aerointegra Systems: the text, the sending, the acknowledgement and the affected parts. 123456
Figure 304. The escape notification of NC-2026-0011 to Aerointegra Systems: the text, the sending, the acknowledgement and the affected parts.
  1. 1
    The notification number (AVE-…), its NCR and its status; below, the customer and how many parts.
  2. 2
    The letter for the customer as a PDF.
  3. 3
    The text: what happened and what is asked of them. While it is still to be sent it can be edited, and it is marked as sent.
  4. 4
    Sent: when and by whom.
  5. 5
    Acknowledged: when the customer answered and their reference.
  6. 6
    Each delivery note with its date, the work order, the units and the serial numbers.
How to notify a customer of an escape
  1. In the NCR, scroll down to Affected shipped product and click Prepare notification on the customer.

  2. Review the text Aeromec proposes and edit it: what happened, which parts and what you ask of them.

  3. Produce the letter as a PDF and send it to the customer through their usual channel; then click Mark as sent.

  4. When the customer answers, click Record customer acknowledgement and enter their reference.

The notification is acknowledged, with its text, its shipments and serial numbers frozen as they were sent.

#Corrective actions (CAPA) in 8D

The NCR contains the problem; the CAPA (Corrective And Preventive Action) removes its cause so that it does not happen again. Aeromec documents it with the 8D method (eight disciplines), the one aerospace customers ask for in their complaints:

Step What is written
D1 · Team Who works on the problem (quality, shop floor, engineering…)
D2 · Problem What, where, when and how much: measurable facts
D3 · Containment What has already been done to protect the customer (segregate, 100% check…)
D4 · Root cause Why it happened and why it was not detected, with the chosen method (5 whys or Ishikawa, the fishbone diagram of the 6Ms: machine, method, material, manpower, measurement and milieu)
D5-D6 · Corrective action The action that removes the cause and when it is implemented
D7 · Prevention How it is avoided on similar parts and processes (routings, control plans, training)
D8 · Verification and closure The evidence that it works (no recurrence over the period) and whether it was effective

A CAPA is created with New corrective action in its view (from an NCR, a complaint, an audit or an improvement), from the ⋮ menu of an NCR or from a complaint (Open its CAPA), and they are then linked. Several NCRs with the same cause can share one CAPA. Those from an audit finding are opened in Management system.

The Corrective actions (CAPA) view: the open ones, with the one past its target date in red. 12345
Figure 305. The Corrective actions (CAPA) view: the open ones, with the one past its target date in red.
  1. 1
    Open CAPAs, those that are overdue and the share effective when verified.
  2. 2
    New corrective action: title, origin, method, owner, target date and the problem (D2).
  3. 3
    The filters: open, overdue, by status and all.
  4. 4
    Each CAPA: number and date, the title, its origin, the analysis method and the NCRs that gave rise to it.
  5. 5
    The owner and the target date (in red if it has passed without closing it).

The status moves forward by itself as the steps are completed: Open → In progress (when D1 to D4 are written) → Verifying effectiveness (when D5-D6 are completed with the implementation date) → Closed (when the D8 verification is signed as effective). The record has four tabs: 8 disciplines problem solving (8D), Analysis (EN 9136), Signatures and Documents.

CAPA AC-2026-0006 in 8D, with every step written except the verification (D8). 1234567
Figure 306. CAPA AC-2026-0006 in 8D, with every step written except the verification (D8).
  1. 1
    The number, the origin and the status (and «Overdue» if the target date has passed); below, the title, the owner and the target date.
  2. 2
    The Analysis (EN 9136) tab: the root cause analysis (you can see it further down).
  3. 3
    The ⓘ summarises the 8D method and the customer's usual deadlines.
  4. 4
    Each discipline in its block: the code turns green once it is written. Click a block to complete it.
  5. 5
    The D4, the root cause, with the analysis method below.
  6. 6
    The pending D8: «Pending: tap to complete».
  7. 7
    The linked NCRs of this CAPA: click them to open them.

The Analysis (EN 9136) tab documents the root cause analysis as required by EN 9136, the standard aerospace customers use to judge an 8D response. It has four blocks, each with its pencil while the CAPA is open:

Block What is written
Problem description (5W2H) What, where, when, who, how much, how and why it matters: the seven questions that bound the problem with facts
Possible causes (Ishikawa, 6M) The candidate causes for each «M»: manpower, method, machine, material, measurement and environment
5 whys The chain of whys, from what is seen to the root cause (the last one, highlighted)
Root cause, escape and system Why it was not detected (the escape point), the systemic cause (what in the system allowed it), the human factors, the extension to other products and processes and the lessons learned

When the CAPA is closed, the analysis is signed with it. In the demo, AC-2026-0006 (dimensions out of tolerance in critical bores) has it almost complete.

The EN 9136 analysis of AC-2026-0006: 5W2H, Ishikawa by the 6Ms, the 5 whys and the root cause with its escape point. 123456
Figure 307. The EN 9136 analysis of AC-2026-0006: 5W2H, Ishikawa by the 6Ms, the 5 whys and the root cause with its escape point.
  1. 1
    The Analysis (EN 9136) tab.
  2. 2
    The problem in 5W2H: what, where, when, who, how much, how and why it matters.
  3. 3
    The possible causes by the 6Ms (the Ishikawa diagram); «—» where there is none.
  4. 4
    The 5 whys, down to the root cause (highlighted).
  5. 5
    Why it was not detected, the systemic cause, the human factors, the extension to other machines or parts and the lessons.
  6. 6
    The pencil of each block edits it while the CAPA is open.

The D8 closes the CAPA. You record what has been checked (for example, «30 work orders without the dimension out of tolerance recurring»), the verification date and whether the action was effective, and you sign.

  • Effective: the CAPA is closed (signature «Closed») and its 8D and its EN 9136 analysis are signed.
  • Not effective: the root cause was not the real one; the verification is signed («Verified») and the CAPA goes back to In progress to rethink the action from D4 with more data.
Completing the D8 of a CAPA (not saved). 123
Figure 308. Completing the D8 of a CAPA (not saved).
  1. 1
    The verification: the evidence that it works.
  2. 2
    The verification date.
  3. 3
    Action effective: yes, if it has not recurred during the period.
How to work through an 8D CAPA
  1. From the NCR, ⋮ menu → New corrective action (or in Corrective actions (CAPA) → New corrective action). Enter the title, the method (5 Whys or Ishikawa), the owner and the target date (by default, 30 days ahead).

  2. Complete D1 (team), D2 (problem) and D3 (containment) as soon as it is opened: the customer usually asks for containment within 24-48 hours.

  3. Analyse the cause in the Analysis (EN 9136) tab (5W2H, Ishikawa, 5 whys, why it was not detected and the systemic cause) and summarise the root cause in D4.

  4. Write the action in D5-D6 with its implementation date, and the prevention in D7 (the extension to other products and processes).

  5. Once the verification period is over, complete D8 with the evidence, mark whether it was effective and sign.

If effective, the CAPA is closed and signed with its analysis; the associated NCRs show it in their record and the «Effective when verified» indicator is updated. If not effective, it goes back to «In progress».

#Customer complaints

A complaint is what the customer tells us has gone wrong: parts that do not conform, a delay, missing documentation, damaged packaging, poor service. It is not always a product non-conformance (a delay is not), but it always has two deadlines:

  • containment: what is done straight away to protect the customer (hold, check the stock and what is in progress); usually, by the next day;
  • the full response, with the cause analysis and the corrective action (the 8D): usually, within 30 days.

The Complaints view holds them all, with their type (quality, delivery, documentation, packaging, service or other), their severity (critical, major or minor), the customer's reference and the deadlines. From each one you open its customer NCR and its CAPA, record the containment and the response, and Quality closes it with its signature. They also show in the Complaints tab of the customer record (Customers), where they are added.

The Complaints view: the open ones, with Tecnologías Aeroespaciales Atlántico's one overdue. 123456
Figure 309. The Complaints view: the open ones, with Tecnologías Aeroespaciales Atlántico's one overdue.
  1. 1
    The Complaints view.
  2. 2
    Open, those with an overdue deadline, those of the last 12 months and the average days to respond.
  3. 3
    New complaint: customer, type, severity, reference, description and the deadlines (they default to tomorrow and 30 days).
  4. 4
    The filters: open (on entry), overdue, closed and all.
  5. 5
    Each complaint: number, customer and description; the type and the severity; the customer's reference and, below, its NCR.
  6. 6
    The response deadline (in red if it is due or overdue) and the status: open, contained, responded or closed.
Tecnologías Aeroespaciales Atlántico's complaint about a delay: the containment is overdue. 12345
Figure 310. Tecnologías Aeroespaciales Atlántico's complaint about a delay: the containment is overdue.
  1. 1
    Number, type and customer's reference; the status, the severity and, in red, Containment overdue (or how many days are left to respond).
  2. 2
    The action due: Record containment; then Record response and Close complaint (with a signature).
  3. 3
    The ⋮ menu: record the response, Open its NCR (customer) and Open its CAPA (already linked), edit it or cancel it with the reason.
  4. 4
    What they complain about: date, part, quantity, serial numbers, delivery note and the containment and response deadlines, the overdue one in red.
  5. 5
    Its NCR and its CAPA, once it has them: click them to open them.
How to handle a complaint
  1. In the customer record → Complaints → New complaint (or in the Complaints view): the type, the severity, their reference, what they complain about and, if any, the part, the quantity, the serial numbers and the delivery note.

  2. Before the containment deadline, click Record containment and write what has been done (parts held, stock checked…).

  3. If it is a product problem, ⋮ menu → Open its NCR and Open its CAPA; solve the CAPA in 8D with its analysis.

  4. Before the response deadline, click Record response with what is sent to the customer.

  5. When the customer accepts it, click Close complaint and sign.

The complaint is closed and signed, with its NCR and its CAPA linked; it counts in the average days to respond and in customer satisfaction (see Management system).

#Quality KPIs

The Quality KPIs view sums up twelve months of delivery and quality, each figure against its target (the OTD, PPM and scrap targets are set in Settings). Every ⓘ explains the calculation with an example.

Quality KPIs: the six figures for the last 12 months and the monthly charts. 123456789
Figure 311. Quality KPIs: the six figures for the last 12 months and the monthly charts.
  1. 1
    OTD (On-Time Delivery): deliveries shipped on time, with ✓ or ✗ against the target.
  2. 2
    Customer PPM: parts rejected by customers per million shipped.
  3. 3
    Scrap: share of parts scrapped over parts made.
  4. 4
    COPQ (Cost Of Poor Quality): what not getting it right first time costs, and what share of sales it represents.
  5. 5
    Rework hours booked on the shop floor.
  6. 6
    Average age of the open NCRs and how many there are.
  7. 7
    OTD by month against the target (the green line); the current month highlighted.
  8. 8
    Scrap by month against its target.
  9. 9
    COPQ by month, split into scrap, rework and claims.
Further down, the scrap Pareto charts by cause and by part and the age of the open NCRs. 1234
Figure 312. Further down, the scrap Pareto charts by cause and by part and the age of the open NCRs.
  1. 1
    The scrap Pareto by cause: causes from largest to smallest, with the cumulative % and their cost.
  2. 2
    The red bars add up to 80%: they are the few causes to act on first (the 80/20 rule). The grey ones, the rest.
  3. 3
    The same analysis by part: which part numbers account for most scrap and what it costs.
  4. 4
    Open NCRs by age: up to 30 days, 31 to 60, 61 to 90 and over 90.

#What each profile sees

An NCR for a defence customer (Halcón Defensa Sistemas): Quality sees it because it has «Defence data». 1
Figure 313. An NCR for a defence customer (Halcón Defensa Sistemas): Quality sees it because it has «Defence data».
  1. 1
    The shield marks what is defence: whoever does not have «Defence data» does not see this row, nor is it counted in the KPIs.

Quality

Gauges

Measuring and test equipment with its signed calibration (measured value against its criteria, result and a warning if ENAC is required and the laboratory is not accredited), the calibration calendar, loans —who has each gauge and since when—, the serial number, the status and the cabinet of each one, barcode labels and the impact of a gauge found unfit.

Who uses it: Quality and metrology; read-only, management and shop-floor managerAccess: «Gauges» section; to record calibrations (with an inspection stamp with the «Calibration» scope) and loans at the office, «Edit quality»; to add or edit gauges, «Edit quality» or «Edit centres & people»

Gauges holds all the shop's measuring and test equipment: calipers, micrometers, dial indicators and height gauges, the coordinate measuring machine (CMM), the profile projector, roughness and hardness testers, gauge blocks and fixed gauges (plain and thread plug gauges and ring gauges, which say «go / no-go»). For each one, Aeromec knows:

  • whether it is calibrated and in date: its last calibration, its certificate and when the next one is due;
  • where it is: its cabinet and drawer, its whereabouts (in use, at the lab, under repair, missing) and, if someone has taken it, who has it and since when;
  • what has been measured with it: the inspections and operations it was used on.

The underlying rule: an overdue, uncalibrated or out-of-service gauge is blocked. Measurements with it are not accepted (Inspection & FAI) and the shop-floor terminal does not lend it (Shop-floor terminal). The database enforces it, not just the screen.

The section has three views: Gauges (the list), Loans and Calendar.

#The life of a gauge

  1. 1Set-up and labelUnique code, serial number, cabinet, interval and acceptance criterion. The Code128 label carries the code.
  2. 2LoanAt the terminal it is taken by scanning the label and returned; the office sees everything.
  3. 3MeasurementEvery inspection measurement stores the gauge it was taken with.
  4. 4CalibrationBefore it falls due, off to the lab; when it comes back the certificate and the measured value are recorded.
  5. 5FailOut of service and a review of what was measured with it since the last passing calibration, with «Open NCR».
A gauge, from set-up to a failed calibration.

#The gauge list

Gauges: calibration KPIs, the loans strip, filters and the list showing who has each one. 12345678
Figure 314. Gauges: calibration KPIs, the loans strip, filters and the list showing who has each one.
  1. 1
    The three views: Gauges, Loans and Calendar (Aeromec remembers the last one).
  2. 2
    Active gauges, overdue ones (blocked), those due within 30 days and those out of service.
  3. 3
    Calibration cost over the last 12 months (with «See costs»).
  4. 4
    The loans strip: how many are out now, how many have been out over 7 days and how many are overdue on the shop floor. See loans opens that view.
  5. 5
    The labels mode: tick gauges and print their barcode labels.
  6. 6
    The filters: by calibration status, by loan and whereabouts, those requiring ENAC and by family (swipe to see them all).
  7. 7
    INS-003, overdue: the row in red, the next calibration «overdue by…» and the Overdue status. On top of that, someone on the shop floor has it.
  8. 8
    On loan to: who has it now and since when. Then the interval, the last and next calibration, the status and the uses in 30 days.

Each row shows the gauge's code and name with its make, range, resolution and serial number; its location (cabinet and drawer) and the work centre it is assigned to; who it is on loan to; the calibration interval; the last one (with its certificate) and the next one (amber if due within 30 days, red if already overdue); the status and how many times it has been used to measure in the last 30 days. Click a row to open its record.

Status What it means Can it be used to measure?
In date Calibration valid Yes
Due soon Due within 30 days: time to send it to the lab Yes, until it falls due
Overdue The next calibration date has passed No (blocked)
Not calibrated It has no calibration on record No (blocked)
Out of service Flagged by hand: damaged, lost or failed No (blocked)

Besides the status, a second tag tells you if it is away from its place (whereabouts: At the lab, Under repair or Missing) or Under review because it was returned damaged. None of them is lent.

Searching for «MET-ARM», the gauges kept in the metrology cabinets: plug and ring gauges with their serial numbers. 123456
Figure 315. Searching for «MET-ARM», the gauges kept in the metrology cabinets: plug and ring gauges with their serial numbers.
  1. 1
    The search box finds by code, name, make, serial number, location, work centre, type or the person who has it.
  2. 2
    Under the name, the make, the range (for a fixed gauge, the size and its tolerance) and the manufacturer's serial number.
  3. 3
    The location: machine cabinet and drawer (MET-ARM-F5-01-1 = F5-01 cabinet, drawer 1).
  4. 4
    Missing: in date, but not in its place. It is not lent until it turns up and is checked.
  5. 5
    ENAC: its calibration must be done by an accredited laboratory.
  6. 6
    Under review: it was returned damaged and nobody can take it until Quality checks it.

#The gauge record

The record has four tabs: Summary, Loans (who has had it), History (its calibrations) and Documents (its calibration certificates, the manual…).

The record of caliper INS-003: overdue and, on top of that, in someone's hands on the shop floor. 12345678
Figure 316. The record of caliper INS-003: overdue and, on top of that, in someone's hands on the shop floor.
  1. 1
    The code and the type, with its status; below, the name, make, range, resolution and serial number.
  2. 2
    Prints its barcode label.
  3. 3
    Record calibration (with «Edit quality») and, next to it, edit the gauge details.
  4. 4
    The figures: last and next calibration, days left (or how many it has been overdue), interval and uses in 30 days.
  5. 5
    The block warning: since when it has been overdue and that it cannot be used to measure. With a link to record the calibration.
  6. 6
    Who has it and since when (amber after 7 days).
  7. 7
    Identification: code, type, make, serial number, range and resolution, cabinet and drawer, work centre, whereabouts, whether it is lent and whether it requires ENAC.
  8. 8
    Calibration: last certificate, result, laboratory, dates, interval and cost of the last one.
The record of thread plug gauge INS-027: it requires ENAC and its last calibration was done by a non-accredited laboratory. 123456
Figure 317. The record of thread plug gauge INS-027: it requires ENAC and its last calibration was done by a non-accredited laboratory.
  1. 1
    The manufacturer's serial number (S/N), also on the label and in the search.
  2. 2
    The warning: it requires ENAC and the last calibration was done by a non-accredited laboratory; it has to be repeated at an accredited one.
  3. 3
    The location in the metrology store: cabinet and drawer.
  4. 4
    The acceptance criterion: the range within which the laboratory's measurement must fall for it to pass.
  5. 5
    The laboratory, in red because it is not accredited for a gauge that requires ENAC.
  6. 6
    The measured value at the last calibration and its uncertainty.

Further down in the Summary, the Use in measurements card tells you whether the gauge is available for measuring or blocked, how many measurements have been taken with it in 30 days and how many loans it has had. A gauge that is never used may not need one more calibration; one that is used a lot wears faster and deserves a shorter interval.

The History tab of INS-027: its calibrations on a timeline. 12345
Figure 318. The History tab of INS-027: its calibrations on a timeline.
  1. 1
    The History tab, with how many calibrations it has.
  2. 2
    Record calibration from here too.
  3. 3
    The timeline: one dot per calibration coloured by its result (pass, pass after adjustment, fail), the today mark and, hollow, the next one. A gap longer than the interval is a period overdue.
  4. 4
    The cost of all its calibrations (with «See costs»).
  5. 5
    Each calibration: date and certificate, laboratory («laboratory without ENAC» if it was required and it is not), measured value, next one and notes; on the right, the result and the cost. Click it to correct it (with a reason and a signature, because it is signed).

#Recording a calibration

When a gauge comes back from the lab its calibration is recorded with the data on the certificate. If the gauge has an acceptance criterion, just type the measured value: Aeromec proposes the result (within the criterion, pass; outside, fail) and explains it in a green or red message. «Pass after adjustment» is chosen by hand when the lab had to adjust it. If the gauge requires ENAC and the chosen lab is not accredited (ISO/IEC 17025), it warns you too: the certificate may not be accepted by the customer.

Recording the calibration of INS-027 with a measured value of 4.4962: Aeromec proposes «Fail» and warns about the lab without ENAC (not saved). 1234567
Figure 319. Recording the calibration of INS-027 with a measured value of 4.4962: Aeromec proposes «Fail» and warns about the lab without ENAC (not saved).
  1. 1
    The calibration date (today) and the next one: date + interval, which you can change.
  2. 2
    The measured value from the certificate, with the acceptance criterion below.
  3. 3
    The result, proposed as you type the value: here Fail.
  4. 4
    The uncertainty and the certificate no., copied from the certificate.
  5. 5
    The laboratory (the last one that calibrated it comes preset) and, next to it, the cost.
  6. 6
    The value is outside the criterion: fail. After saving you will see what was measured with it since the last passing calibration.
  7. 7
    The ENAC warning: the selected lab is not accredited.
How to record a calibration
  1. Open the gauge (from the list, the calendar or the search box in the top bar) and click Record calibration.

  2. Check the calibration date; the next one is worked out from the interval.

  3. Type the measured value and the uncertainty from the certificate and check the result Aeromec proposes (change it to «Pass after adjustment» if the lab adjusted it).

  4. Type the certificate no. and choose the laboratory; if the ENAC warning appears, check whether that certificate is valid for the customer.

  5. Click Save, sign with your password and upload the scanned certificate to Documents.

The calibration is recorded and signed. If it passes, the gauge is in date again (and, if it was out of service, Aeromec offers to put it back in service). If it is «Fail», it offers to take it out of service and opens the impact: what was measured with it.

When you click Save, Aeromec asks for your electronic signature: the dialog says what you are signing (the gauge, the date of the calibration and its result) with the meaning «Performed». To sign you need an inspection stamp in force with the Calibration scope (Stamps & signatures) and the qualification that enables it in force (Competence & training); otherwise the dialog does not let you continue. If you cancel the signature, the calibration is not saved.

How signing works, in The electronic signature.

The signature of INS-027's calibration (not signed). 1234
Figure 320. The signature of INS-027's calibration (not signed).
  1. 1
    The meaning: «Performed».
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the gauge, the date of the calibration and the result.
  3. 3
    Your inspection stamp: it has to include Calibration.
  4. 4
    Your password.

A signed calibration cannot be edited or deleted: clicking it in the History opens Correct a signed record, the same form with one more field, the reason for the correction, which is mandatory. When you save, Aeromec asks for another signature («Corrected») and the previous value stays in the change history. The cost can be changed without signing: it is not part of what was signed.

Correcting INS-027's latest calibration, which is signed: the reason and another signature are needed (not saved). 1234
Figure 321. Correcting INS-027's latest calibration, which is signed: the reason and another signature are needed (not saved).
  1. 1
    Correct a signed record: the calibration and its gauge.
  2. 2
    The same calibration data: change only what is wrong.
  3. 3
    The reason for the correction (mandatory): it is kept with the signature.
  4. 4
    Save asks for the «Corrected» signature.

#Impact of a failed gauge

A gauge that fails calibration may have accepted parts that were not good. The standard requires assessing what was measured with it since its last passing calibration (AS9100, 7.1.5.2). When a «Fail» calibration is saved, Aeromec:

  1. offers to take it out of service, so that nobody measures with it or takes it at the terminal;
  2. opens the impact of a failed gauge, which can also be opened later from the red icon on its record while its last calibration is «Fail».

The impact gathers, from the last passing calibration until today:

Block What it shows
Figures WOs measured with it, serials of those WOs, how many are already shipped and operations while on loan
WOs measured with it Each work order with its part, how many measurements, its serials (and how many shipped), the dates and the customer
Operations done by whoever had it on loan The operations whose plan requires that gauge type done by whoever had it on loan: person, machine, hours and good parts
Loans in the period Who had it, when and on which machine

Each work order and each operation has Open NCR, which opens the nonconformance with the work order and operation filled in and the description already written («Measured with INS-… (its name), which FAILED its calibration: measurements since … not assured. Repeat with a passing gauge.»). Decide for each one whether the measurements still hold (repeating them with a passing gauge) and raise the NCR where they cannot be assured; if any serials have been shipped, the customer may need to be told. Defence work orders are not shown to anyone without «Defence data» (the impact says how many are hidden).

#Calibration calendar

The calendar: the blocked ones at the top, in red, and the calibrations of the coming months. 123456
Figure 322. The calendar: the blocked ones at the top, in red, and the calibrations of the coming months.
  1. 1
    New gauge, from here too.
  2. 2
    Blocked: overdue, not calibrated and out of service. Click it to jump to them.
  3. 3
    One box per month for the next 12 with how many calibrations fall due (the current month outlined; amber if any falls due within 30 days). Click one to jump to that month.
  4. 4
    Overdue & out of service: they cannot be used until calibrated or repaired. First, those overdue the longest.
  5. 5
    Each gauge with the planned date, its type and location, how long is left (or how long it has been overdue) and its status. Click it to open its record.
  6. 6
    Then, month by month: those due this month and the following ones.
How to plan lab shipments
  1. Open Calendar. Look at the Blocked box: those can no longer be used; send them first.

  2. Check the current month and the next: those due within 30 days show in amber («Due soon»). An external lab usually takes one or two weeks.

  3. If many of the same type coincide in a month, bring some forward so the shop floor is never left without one.

  4. When you send them, change their whereabouts to «At the lab» (edit button on the record): that way nobody looks for it in the cabinet and it is not lent. When it comes back, record the calibration and set it back to «In use».

#Loans: who has each gauge

Gauges are lent at the shop-floor terminal: the operator, identified with their card or their name and PIN, takes a gauge by scanning its label (or choosing it from those their operation requires), returns it when finished —saying whether it is damaged— or hands it to a colleague («Hand it to me»). The terminal does not lend an overdue, uncalibrated, failed, out-of-service, off-site or under-review gauge, and if someone else already has it, it can only change hands with «Hand it to me» (see Shop-floor terminal). The Loans view brings all of that together for Quality, and lets you record at the office whatever did not go through the terminal.

The Loans view: the gauges someone has right now, with the overdue one at the top in red. 12345678
Figure 323. The Loans view: the gauges someone has right now, with the overdue one at the top in red.
  1. 1
    On loan now: open loans, from the terminal or the office.
  2. 2
    On loan > 7 days: they are normally returned at the end of the shift.
  3. 3
    On loan and overdue: gauges that should no longer be used and are still on the shop floor.
  4. 4
    Loans in 30 days: how much each gauge is really used.
  5. 5
    New loan records at the office a loan that is open or already returned.
  6. 6
    The filters: currently out (on entry), over 7 days, with an overdue gauge, today, last 30 days, damaged or with remarks, recorded at the office, cancelled and all.
  7. 7
    Each loan: the gauge, the person with their shift, when it was lent and the return («Not returned · …» in amber if over 7 days).
  8. 8
    The machine and the work order and operation it was used on, and the status: out, overdue, returned, returned damaged, with remarks or cancelled.
The loan of INS-003, overdue, which Laura has had on the shop floor for days. 123456
Figure 324. The loan of INS-003, overdue, which Laura has had on the shop floor for days.
  1. 1
    The warning: have it returned now and send it for calibration.
  2. 2
    The person, when it was lent, the return (or the days it has been out) and the machine.
  3. 3
    The work order and operation it was taken for (the one chosen on the terminal) and the part.
  4. 4
    Where it was recorded: shop-floor terminal or office (and by whom).
  5. 5
    View gauge opens its record; Cancel loan, one recorded by mistake (asks for the reason and nothing is deleted).
  6. 6
    Record return from the office.
Recording at the office the return of INS-003 (not saved). 123
Figure 325. Recording at the office the return of INS-003 (not saved).
  1. 1
    The date and time of the return (by default, now).
  2. 2
    The remarks: what condition it comes back in.
  3. 3
    It is damaged or out of calibration: opens a review for Quality (you have to explain what is wrong).
New loan from the office (not saved). 123
Figure 326. New loan from the office (not saved).
  1. 1
    The gauge (those that are lent, with who has them or why they cannot be lent) and the person.
  2. 2
    When it was lent.
  3. 3
    If it has already been returned, the return date and time: that is how a past loan is recorded. Empty, they have it now.
How to recover an overdue gauge that is still on the shop floor
  1. In Loans (or with See loans from the strip on the list), filter With an overdue gauge.

  2. Click the loan: you will see who has it, since when and on which machine and work order they used it.

  3. Ask for it back. If they bring it to the office, click Record return, check the date and time and note the condition it comes back in.

  4. Send it for calibration: open its record with View gauge and change its whereabouts to «At the lab».

The loan is returned (with who recorded the return) and the gauge is free, in its cabinet or at the lab. While it is overdue nobody can take it again at the terminal.
The Loans tab of a thread plug gauge: its usage and every loan, the last one returned damaged. 1234
Figure 327. The Loans tab of a thread plug gauge: its usage and every loan, the last one returned damaged.
  1. 1
    The Loans tab on the record, with how many it has had.
  2. 2
    New loan for this gauge (if someone has it, instead you see who and Record return).
  3. 3
    Loan usage: loans, different people, time on loan and loans in 30 days.
  4. 4
    Each loan, newest first: person and time, return and duration, machine, work order and the remarks. This one came back damaged.

#Gauge returned damaged: reviewing it

When someone returns a gauge marking it as damaged (at the terminal or at the office), a review is opened for Quality: the gauge shows Under review, appears under the Under review (damaged) filter and on the Shop-floor monitor, and nobody can take it until it is reviewed. In the demo, thread plug gauge INS-024 was returned damaged today.

Thread plug gauge INS-024, returned damaged: under review. 123
Figure 328. Thread plug gauge INS-024, returned damaged: under review.
  1. 1
    The Under review status, next to the calibration status.
  2. 2
    What is wrong with it (what the person returning it wrote) and when. Nobody can take it until it is reviewed.
  3. 3
    Review closes the review.

When reviewing it you decide what happens to it:

  • It is fine: back in use, and it can be lent again;
  • To be repaired: its whereabouts change to «under repair» and it is not lent;
  • Out of service: it is blocked for measuring and for lending.

And you write what was found when checking it (for example, «checked with the master ring: the NO-GO side is worn»). If the doubt is whether it measures correctly, send it for calibration and record the calibration.

Reviewing the damaged gauge (not saved). 12
Figure 329. Reviewing the damaged gauge (not saved).
  1. 1
    What happens to it.
  2. 2
    What was found.

#Setting up a gauge: serial number, whereabouts, fixed gauges and cabinets

New gauge (on the list or the calendar) and the Edit pencil on the record open the same form. What is worth knowing about each field:

  • Code: the one on the barcode label; unique (e.g. INS-037). The serial number is the manufacturer's: it can also be scanned at the terminal.
  • Gauge type: decides its family in the filters and which control plan characteristics it can measure. Fixed gauges have their own types: plain plug and thread plug gauges (for holes and internal threads), plain ring and thread ring gauges (for shafts and external threads) and spline gauges.
  • Location (cabinet and drawer): a location in the metrology store: the measuring room or each machine's cabinet with its drawers (MET-ARM-F5-02-2 = F5-02 cabinet, drawer 2). It is where inspectors and auditors will look for it.
  • Whereabouts: where it physically is: in use, at the lab, under repair or missing. Unless «in use» it is not lent.
  • Lent at the terminal: turn it off for gauges always used where they are (CMM, projector, bench hardness tester).
  • Interval in days (365 = yearly), ENAC calibration required and the acceptance criterion (minimum and maximum of the value measured at calibration: the permissible error or the go-side size of a fixed gauge).
  • Out of service (damaged, lost or failed: blocked even if in date) and Active (retired gauges are left out of the calendar and cannot be used, but keep their history).
Edit gauge (INS-027), the top part: identification and location (not saved). 123456
Figure 330. Edit gauge (INS-027), the top part: identification and location (not saved).
  1. 1
    The code, unique: the one on the label.
  2. 2
    The type (here, thread plug gauge).
  3. 3
    The manufacturer's serial number.
  4. 4
    The cabinet and drawer in the metrology store.
  5. 5
    The whereabouts: in use, at the lab, under repair or missing.
  6. 6
    Whether it is lent at the terminal.
The same form further down: calibration and status. 1234
Figure 331. The same form further down: calibration and status.
  1. 1
    The interval in days: the next calibration is proposed with it.
  2. 2
    ENAC calibration required: enables the non-accredited lab warning.
  3. 3
    The acceptance criterion, minimum and maximum: with it, the measured value proposes the result.
  4. 4
    Out of service and Active (retire it without losing its history).

#Barcode labels (Code128)

Each gauge carries its code on a Code128 barcode label, which the terminal scanner reads to take it or return it. The label shows the company name and «Metrology» at the top, the bars, the code in large print and, below, the name, the range and the serial number. They are printed one at a time from the record (barcode icon) or several at once from the list.

The list in labels mode, with two plug gauges ticked. 1234
Figure 332. The list in labels mode, with two plug gauges ticked.
  1. 1
    Tick visible ones: all those left by the filter or search; next to it, how many you have ticked.
  2. 2
    Tap a row (or its box) to tick or untick it.
  3. 3
    Labels (2) prints the ticked ones.
  4. 4
    The ✕ leaves labels mode.

When printing you choose the label height (2 to 5 cm; the width adjusts) and the layout: on an A4 sheet (5 to 2 labels per row, depending on the size) or one per page for a label printer. The browser's print dialog opens.

People's cards for identifying themselves at the terminal are printed the same way from People.

Printing a gauge's label. 123
Figure 333. Printing a gauge's label.
  1. 1
    The label height and its final size.
  2. 2
    A4 sheet or one per page.
  3. 3
    Print opens the print dialog.

#What each profile sees

The record of INS-027 seen by the shop-floor manager: he can edit the gauge, but not record calibrations. 1
Figure 334. The record of INS-027 seen by the shop-floor manager: he can edit the gauge, but not record calibrations.
  1. 1
    Antonio (shop-floor manager) has «Edit centres & people»: he can edit the gauge (whereabouts, cabinet…), but without «Edit quality» Record calibration does not appear.

Quality system

Management system

The company's quality management system: objectives with their calculated indicator, risks and opportunities with their heat map, the audit programme with its findings and signed closure, the management review, customer satisfaction, the processes, the context, the requirements and every improvement action.

Who uses it: Quality and management (they run it); the other profiles and the external auditor, read-onlyAccess: «Management system» section; to edit it, «Edit the management system»; to approve the management review, «Approve the management review»

A company certified to EN 9100 (the quality standard for aviation, space and defence, which extends ISO 9001) has to show that it plans, measures and improves its system: which objectives it sets and whether it meets them, which risks it has and what it does about them, what the audits say and what management does with all of it. Management system holds all of that, with indicators calculated automatically from Aeromec's data (OTD, PPM, scrap, suppliers, CAPAs…), with no separate spreadsheets.

The section has nine views: Objectives, Risks, Audits, Management review, Satisfaction, Processes, Context, Requirements and Actions. Closing an audit and approving the management review minutes are signed electronically and cannot change afterwards.

  1. 1ContextExternal and internal issues and interested parties.
  2. 2RisksProbability × impact, treatment and actions.
  3. 3ObjectivesTarget and value calculated from the data, month by month.
  4. 4AuditsFindings, CAPAs and signed closure.
  5. 5ReviewManagement reviews the inputs and decides; signed minutes.
  6. 6ActionsWith an owner and a deadline, until their effectiveness is verified.
The system's improvement cycle (plan, do, check, act).

#Objectives

Management system → Objectives for the year. 1234567
Figure 335. Management system → Objectives for the year.
  1. 1
    The section's nine views (hover over an icon to see its name).
  2. 2
    Objectives for the year, those that are met, those at risk and those not met.
  3. 3
    New objective (with «Edit the management system»).
  4. 4
    Filters: this year's, those not met or at risk, and all.
  5. 5
    Each objective with its number, its process and its indicator.
  6. 6
    The target, the year's value and the last month's, calculated from the data.
  7. 7
    The status: met, at risk or not met; and the owner.

An objective's indicator can be one that Aeromec calculates automatically —OTD (on-time delivery), customer PPM, scrap, supplier OTD, customer satisfaction, effective CAPAs, customer NCRs, actions closed on time and audit programme completed— or a manual one, with a measurement entered every month (in the demo, training hours per person).

The OTD objective: not met. 123456
Figure 336. The OTD objective: not met.
  1. 1
    Number, objective and status; below, the process, the owner and the indicator.
  2. 2
    Target, the year's value, last month and status.
  3. 3
    The month-by-month trend against the target.
  4. 4
    The plan to achieve it: what will be done, with what resources, by whom and when.
  5. 5
    How the indicator is calculated.
  6. 6
    The open actions to achieve it; New action adds another.

#Risks and opportunities

Management system → Risks: the heat map and the list. 1234567
Figure 337. Management system → Risks: the heat map and the list.
  1. 1
    Risks open, critical · high, opportunities and those with an overdue review.
  2. 2
    The heat map: each cell counts the open risks with that probability (bottom to top) and impact (left to right).
  3. 3
    The red cell for probability 4 × impact 5: the single titanium supplier. Press a cell to open its risk.
  4. 4
    New risk or opportunity.
  5. 5
    Filters: open, high and critical, operational, opportunities, review overdue, closed and all.
  6. 6
    The level (probability × impact) and the residual level, what remains once the actions are done.
  7. 7
    The treatment (accept, mitigate, transfer, avoid or exploit) with its open actions, the owner with the next review, and the status.
The risk of the single titanium plate supplier. 123456
Figure 338. The risk of the single titanium plate supplier.
  1. 1
    Number, type (risk or opportunity), scope (system or operational), status and level; below, the category, the process and the owner.
  2. 2
    Mark as reviewed: the assessment still holds; the next review, in 6 months.
  3. 3
    Probability, impact, level and residual.
  4. 4
    The risk: description, cause, consequence, the context issue it comes from and the programme, if it belongs to one.
  5. 5
    The treatment, the existing controls, the owner and the reviews.
  6. 6
    The treatment actions (here, qualifying a second supplier).

System risks (business, environment, people) and operational ones (production, a supplier or a programme: in the demo, the saturation of F5-01 with the AR-90 rate increase) go in the same list; those of defence programmes are only visible with «Defence data». Opportunities are handled the same way, with the exploit treatment.

#Audits

Management system → Audits: the year's programme. 1234567
Figure 339. Management system → Audits: the year's programme.
  1. 1
    Internal audits done this year out of those planned, those late, the open findings and those in the next 30 days.
  2. 2
    New audit: internal, certification, by a customer or at a supplier.
  3. 3
    Filters: the year's programme, upcoming, with open findings, internal, external and all.
  4. 4
    The AENOR surveillance audit: closed, with its minor nonconformities.
  5. 5
    The findings: major and minor NCs, observations and how many are still open.
  6. 6
    An internal audit in progress.
  7. 7
    A late one: planned, with its date already past.

An audit goes from planned to in progress (Start) and to closed. It has its scope, the clauses of the standard and the processes audited, the lead auditor (external or from another area: auditors do not audit their own work) and, for external ones, the body, the customer or the supplier. Those of defence customers are only visible with «Defence data».

The internal programmes audit, in progress → Findings. 12345
Figure 340. The internal programmes audit, in progress → Findings.
  1. 1
    New finding: major or minor NC, observation, opportunity for improvement or strength, with the clause, the process, the evidence, the owner and the deadline.
  2. 2
    Close the audit with the conclusion and the signature.
  3. 3
    A finding: type, clause of the standard, process, status, what was found and the evidence.
  4. 4
    Open CAPA: the corrective action (8D) with the finding as the problem (Nonconformances).
  5. 5
    An opportunity for improvement (strengths and opportunities do not open a CAPA).
How to close an audit
  1. With the audit in progress, record each finding with New finding and, for nonconformities, Open CAPA.

  2. Press Close the audit and write the conclusion: the conformity and effectiveness of what was audited.

  3. Press Close & sign, enter your password in the electronic signature and Sign.

The audit is closed and signed: the report with its findings no longer changes (the Signatures tab checks it). Findings are still closed when their correction is done.
Close the audit (not signed). 123
Figure 341. Close the audit (not signed).
  1. 1
    The audit being closed.
  2. 2
    The conclusion: it forms part of the signed report.
  3. 3
    Close & sign: asks for your electronic signature (meaning «closed»).

#Management review

At least once a year management reviews the whole system and decides what to change. In Management review each review (RD-…) has its inputs —calculated automatically from the period's data— and its outputs, the decisions.

The July management review, approved by Elena: its inputs. 12345
Figure 342. The July management review, approved by Elena: its inputs.
  1. 1
    Number, date, status (draft or approved) and the period it covers.
  2. 2
    Outputs: conclusions, opportunities for improvement, changes to the system and resource needs. Signatures: the signed approval.
  3. 3
    The period's OTD, PPM, scrap, supplier OTD and satisfaction.
  4. 4
    The inputs: actions from the previous review, satisfaction, nonconformities and CAPAs…
  5. 5
    …changes in the context, the objectives, audits, suppliers, risks and resources.
How to prepare and approve the management review
  1. Press New review: it starts in draft with the period's inputs calculated (from the previous review up to today).

  2. Before the meeting, Refresh inputs recalculates them with today's data.

  3. In the meeting, Edit minutes: conclusions on the suitability and effectiveness of the system, improvements, changes and resources. Decisions with an owner and a deadline, as actions.

  4. Management presses Approve and signs.

The minutes are approved and signed: they no longer change. Their actions are followed up in Actions and feed into the next review.

#Customer satisfaction

Management system → Satisfaction: what customers say against what our data say. 1234567
Figure 343. Management system → Satisfaction: what customers say against what our data say.
  1. 1
    Average 12-month satisfaction, customers rated and complaints (customer NCRs).
  2. 2
    New rating: a survey, a scorecard, a meeting, a complaint or a compliment.
  3. 3
    Filters: with ratings, below 4 and all.
  4. 4
    The 12-month score (in amber, below 4) and the date of the latest rating.
  5. 5
    The customer's latest scorecard: its grade and the OTD and PPM it measures.
  6. 6
    Our data for 12 months: OTD, PPM and complaints.
  7. 7
    Aerointegra: its scorecard gives a slightly different OTD from ours because it counts deliveries at its goods-in.

The score is the average of the marks from 1 to 5 (quality, delivery, service, price and communication). A scorecard is the assessment a customer makes of its suppliers (with its own OTD and PPM and a grade A, B, C…): comparing it with our data reveals differences to clear up with the customer. Ratings can also be seen on each customer record.

#Processes and context

Management system → Processes: the process map. 12345
Figure 344. Management system → Processes: the process map.
  1. 1
    Strategic, operational and support processes.
  2. 2
    Each process with its owner. Press one to see its purpose, inputs, outputs, resources and the Aeromec sections where it is carried out.
  3. 3
    The procedure that describes it (Documentation) and the clauses of the standard.
  4. 4
    Its objectives (how many are met) and its risks (the level of the worst one).
  5. 5
    The latest audit, the next one and the open findings.

Context holds the external issues (the ramp-up of the civil programmes, titanium lead times, export control in defence…) and internal ones (dependence on the 5-axis centres, succession in CNC programming…), with their effect (positive, negative or neutral) and their monitoring, and the interested parties (customers, authorities, suppliers, people) with what they expect of the company. Each issue can give rise to risks or opportunities and is reviewed in the management review.

#Requirements

Management system → Requirements. 123456
Figure 345. Management system → Requirements.
  1. 1
    Active requirements, those of customers and programmes, those flowed down to suppliers and the customer documents they come from.
  2. 2
    New requirement.
  3. 3
    Filters by scope (company, customer, programme, part), those flowed down and the inactive ones.
  4. 4
    Each requirement (REQ-…) with what it requires.
  5. 5
    Whose it is (the company, a customer, a programme or a part), its category and its reference (the clause: QR-14 §3.2).
  6. 6
    Whether it is flowed down to suppliers and to which types of purchase.

Requirements apply automatically: the contract review of a quote or an order brings in those of the company, the customer, its programmes and its parts; and those flowed down go into each purchase order (by purchase type) when it is sent, and are frozen in it. Those of a customer, programme or part can also be seen and added on its record (Requirements tab).

#Actions

Management system → Actions: all of them, from programmes and from the system. 1234
Figure 346. Management system → Actions: all of them, from programmes and from the system.
  1. 1
    Actions open, overdue and done, to be verified.
  2. 2
    Filters: open, overdue, mine, to verify, from the system, from programmes and all.
  3. 3
    Each action (ACC-…) with its origin: a risk, an audit, an objective, the management review or a programme review.
  4. 4
    The owner, the deadline (in red, overdue) and the status.

An action goes from open to in progress, done (with its result) and verified (stating how its effectiveness was checked and whether it was effective). Its owner can take it to “done” even without managing the system; verifying it belongs to Quality or Management.

Quality system

Documentation

The quality system documentation: the master list (manual, policy, procedures, work instructions and forms) and the external documents (standards and customer clauses), each with its current revision approved with a signature, its periodic review and the read confirmation from those who need to know it.

Who uses it: Quality and engineering (maintain it), management (approves); everyone, to read what concerns themAccess: «Documentation» section; to create documents and revisions, «Edit documentation»; to approve, «Approve documents»

The quality system relies on documents: the quality manual, the policy, the procedures (PG-…), the work instructions (IT-…) and the forms (FR-…), plus the external documents: standards (EN 9100, ISO 9001, EN 10204…) and the customers' quality clauses (Aerointegra's QR-14, Bética's RQ-200…). The standard requires that only the current revision is used at each workstation, that every change is reviewed and approved by an authorised person, and that whoever needs to know a document has read it.

In Documentation each document has its current revision (with its PDF), its history of revisions with their signatures, its owner, its periodic review and its distribution: the profiles whose people must confirm they have read it. The section has four views: Master list, External, To read and Revisions in progress.

  1. 1DraftThe author prepares the new revision and uploads its file.
  2. 2Under reviewSomeone other than the author reviews and signs it.
  3. 3ApprovedManagement or Quality approves it with a signature: it becomes current.
  4. 4ObsoleteThe previous one stops being valid the same day.
  5. 5ReadEach person in the distribution confirms they have read it.
The life of a document revision.

#The master list

Documentation → Master list, with Lucía (engineering). 12345678
Figure 347. Documentation → Master list, with Lucía (engineering).
  1. 1
    The four views: master list, external, to read and revisions in progress.
  2. 2
    Documents current, revisions in progress, with an overdue periodic review, pending reads of everyone and what you have to read.
  3. 3
    New document: it starts with revision A in draft (with «Edit documentation»).
  4. 4
    Filters: current, with a revision in progress, periodic review overdue, to read, manual and procedures, instructions and forms, obsolete (scroll to see them all).
  5. 5
    The current revision and since when; the owner.
  6. 6
    When the periodic review is due (in red, overdue).
  7. 7
    How many people in its distribution have confirmed they have read the current revision.
  8. 8
    A current document with a new revision in draft (rev. D): C remains valid until D is approved.

#A document record

PG-11, approved a few days ago: Lucía has not read it yet. 12345678
Figure 348. PG-11, approved a few days ago: Lucía has not read it yet.
  1. 1
    Code, type, status and current revision; below, the EN 9100 clause it implements and its owner.
  2. 2
    Open the document: the PDF of the current revision.
  3. 3
    I have read and understood: confirms your reading of this revision.
  4. 4
    Current revision, in force since, next review and read.
  5. 5
    The notice of what is due: read it, an overdue review, a revision in progress…
  6. 6
    The details: code, type, origin, EN 9100 clause, owner and how often it is reviewed.
  7. 7
    The distribution: the profiles whose people must read it.
  8. 8
    The current revision: who prepared, reviewed and approved it, since when it is valid, and its file.

The current document is not edited: to change its content you issue a new revision. The ⋮ menu (with «Edit documentation» or «Approve documents») has Edit details (owner, distribution, periodic review…), Still current (checked) —to record that it is still correct without changing it— and Withdraw (with a reason and a signature).

PG-11 → Revisions: D current and the earlier ones, obsolete. 123
Figure 349. PG-11 → Revisions: D current and the earlier ones, obsolete.
  1. 1
    The approved revision: what changed, who reviewed it and who approved it, with the date and time of each signature.
  2. 2
    Its PDF, bound to the signature: it cannot be changed or deleted.
  3. 3
    The earlier ones, obsolete since the next one was approved: they are kept for the history.
PG-11 → Reads: who has read revision D. 123
Figure 350. PG-11 → Reads: who has read revision D.
  1. 1
    How many people in the distribution have read it, out of how many.
  2. 2
    Those who have read it, with the date and time.
  3. 3
    Those who still have it pending, and since when.
How to confirm you have read a document
  1. Go to To read (or the notice on the Dashboard): the documents you need to read are there.

  2. Open it and press the PDF icon to read the current revision.

  3. Press I have read and understood.

Your reading is recorded with the date and time, and the document disappears from what you have to read.

#What you have to read

Documentation → To read: the two procedures approved this week. 123
Figure 351. Documentation → To read: the two procedures approved this week.
  1. 1
    How many documents you have to read.
  2. 2
    Mine or all pending reads of everyone (with «Edit documentation»: to chase them up).
  3. 3
    Each document with the revision to be read, the person and since when it has been in force.

#External documents

Documentation → External: standards and customer clauses. 123456
Figure 352. Documentation → External: standards and customer clauses.
  1. 1
    Those that must be checked to confirm they are still the issuer's current edition and have not been checked in time.
  2. 2
    New external document: a standard, a specification or a customer's clauses.
  3. 3
    From customers: their quality requirements.
  4. 4
    The issuer's edition and when it was registered.
  5. 5
    When it is due to be checked that it is still current.
  6. 6
    Bética's RQ-200: it should have been checked and it has not been.

You don't issue a revision of an external document: you register the issuer's new edition when it comes out (it goes through approval just like an internal one) or, if it is still the same, you record it with Still current (checked). A customer's clauses are the source of its requirements, which the contract review checks and which are flowed down to suppliers.

#Preparing a new revision

PG-12, with its periodic review overdue. 1234
Figure 353. PG-12, with its periodic review overdue.
  1. 1
    New revision: the next letter (or the one you choose) and what changes; it starts in draft.
  2. 2
    More actions: edit details, still current (checked) and withdraw.
  3. 3
    The next review date has passed.
  4. 4
    The notice: check that it is still correct or issue a new revision.
How to issue a new revision of a document
  1. On the document record, press New revision and write what changes (the letter is filled in automatically).

  2. In the Documents tab, upload the file of the new revision (the PDF of the procedure).

  3. Press Send for review.

  4. Someone other than the author opens it and presses Review and sign; if something needs correcting, Reject with what has to change (it goes back to the author).

  5. Management or Quality presses Approve and signs.

The new revision is current from that day, the previous one becomes obsolete and the read is pending for the whole distribution.
Documentation → Revisions in progress. 1234
Figure 354. Documentation → Revisions in progress.
  1. 1
    Filters: all, to review, to approve and drafts and rejected.
  2. 2
    Revision D of IT-01 in draft: what changes and who is preparing it.
  3. 3
    The next step: upload the file, send for review, review (signature), approve (signature) or correct.
  4. 4
    PG-15, already reviewed by Lucía: awaiting approval with a signature.
Javier approves PG-15 rev. A: the electronic signature (not signed). 12345
Figure 355. Javier approves PG-15 rev. A: the electronic signature (not signed).
  1. 1
    The meaning of the signature: approved.
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the document and the revision.
  3. 3
    The signer (Javier, from Management).
  4. 4
    His password.
  5. 5
    Sign: revision A becomes current and its file is bound to the signature.

#CNC programs

The operations' CNC programs (on the routing record, Routings & costing) follow the same control: a new program is on trial until its programmer validates it with a signature after proving out the first part (with a current programming qualification, Competence & training), and the shop-floor terminal only shows the operator the current ones. A validated program is not changed: a new one is uploaded.

Quality system

Standard

The ISO 9001 and EN 9100 compliance matrix, clause by clause: what it requires, how Aeromec covers it, where it is, the evidence in the data and the tests that check it; and the validation of the software: the version in service with its tests, the backups with their verified restore and the dossier for the auditor.

Who uses it: Quality, management and the external auditor (in the demo, Teresa)Access: «Standard» section (read-only: nobody changes the matrix or the validation from the app)

In a certification audit the auditor goes through the standard clause by clause and asks for evidence: “show me how you control changes”, “where are the competence records?”. Standard gives that answer ready-made: the compliance matrix of ISO 9001:2015 and what EN 9100:2018 adds (the standard for aviation, space and defence), with what each clause requires, how Aeromec covers it, which section it is in (one click takes you there), how many records demonstrate it right now and which automated tests check it.

The Validation view answers the auditor's other question when software holds the quality records: how do you know it works properly and that data is not lost? With the version in service and the tests it passed, the backups verified by restoring them, and the integrity of the signed records.

#The compliance matrix

Standard → Compliance matrix, with Teresa (external auditor). 123456789
Figure 356. Standard → Compliance matrix, with Teresa (external auditor).
  1. 1
    The two views: compliance matrix and validation.
  2. 2
    Clauses, those covered by Aeromec, the shared ones, the organisation's ones (or not applicable) and those with EN 9100 requirements.
  3. 3
    Search by clause number, title or what it requires.
  4. 4
    Filters by coverage.
  5. 5
    EN 9100 additions: the clauses in which the aerospace standard requires more than ISO 9001.
  6. 6
    Each clause with its chapter; the EN 9100 tag means it has requirements from the aerospace standard.
  7. 7
    The coverage: covered by Aeromec, shared, the organisation's or not applicable.
  8. 8
    Where it is in Aeromec.
  9. 9
    The evidence: how many records there are right now (context issues, processes, management reviews…).
Coverage What it means
Covered by Aeromec The tool and the record are in the app: the clause is met by using it (risks, objectives, competence, control of changes, traceability, release, nonconformities…).
Shared Aeromec provides the tool and the evidence, but the decision or activity belongs to the organisation: context, policy, leadership, product safety, special processes…
Organization's The company decides and documents it (the scope of the system): Aeromec only keeps the document.
Not applicable Design and development (8.3): a shop that manufactures to the customer's drawing does not design the product.

#A clause record

Clause 8.5.6, control of changes. 123456
Figure 357. Clause 8.5.6, control of changes.
  1. 1
    The clause, its chapter, the coverage and the EN 9100 tag.
  2. 2
    What the standard requires, summarised for guidance (what counts is the text of the standard).
  3. 3
    How Aeromec covers it.
  4. 4
    Where it is: one click takes you to the section (and the view) that covers it.
  5. 5
    The evidence: the records that exist right now and demonstrate it (here, the change requests).
  6. 6
    The tests that check it on every deployment, and their result.
A shared clause: 8.1.3, product safety. 123
Figure 358. A shared clause: 8.1.3, product safety.
  1. 1
    What Aeromec provides: critical parts with their reinforced release, key characteristics with their statistical control, FOD prevention…
  2. 2
    When several sections cover it, one button for each.
  3. 3
    What the organisation does: what is left in the company's hands.
How to prepare the answer to an auditor
  1. In Compliance matrix, search for the clause being asked about (for example, «8.5.6» or «changes»).

  2. Read how Aeromec covers it and what the organisation does.

  3. Press the where it is button to show the auditor the section with the real records, and the evidence to give the figure.

  4. If they ask how you know the software does not let anyone bypass the control, the tests that check it and the Validation view.

#Validation of the software

Standard → Validation: the version in service and its tests. 123
Figure 359. Standard → Validation: the version in service and its tests.
  1. 1
    The version in service, the tests it passed, the latest backup and the latest verified restore.
  2. 2
    The version: number, code revision, latest database update, when it was deployed and where (the demo server or a local copy).
  3. 3
    The tests of this version: the smoke test (every database function) and, file by file, the security tests, with how many passed and the failures.

Every time a version is installed all the tests are run and recorded with it: the smoke test calls every database function and each security file simulates the session of each profile and checks what it can and cannot do (that Sales does not see costs, that a signed record does not change, that a work order cannot be released without the contract review…). A version with any failure says so in red.

Standard → Validation: the backups, integrity and the dossier. 123456
Figure 360. Standard → Validation: the backups, integrity and the dossier.
  1. 1
    The backups: when, what type and their size; the rows, tables and signed records they hold, their SHA-256 hash and, on the right, the result of restoring them.
  2. 2
    The integrity of the signed records in the latest backup.
  3. 3
    Check integrity of all of them, now (Inspection & FAI → Stamps & signatures, with the Quality section).
  4. 4
    The validation dossier for the auditor.
  5. 5
    Download the PDF.
  6. 6
    The previous versions, with their date and code revision.

The validation dossier is the document for the auditor: the validation approach, the controls, the electronic records and signature, the matrix with its evidence, the result of all the tests (each case in an appendix), the latest verified backup and what the company has to do to validate it in its own installation.

Logistics

Warehouse

Stock by item, lot, location and status (available, quarantine or blocked), lots with their heat, 3.1 certificate and expiry, the movement log, reservations and picking for work orders, cycle counts, the location map and customer property.

Who uses it: Warehouse; for reference, planning, quality, purchasing and managementAccess: «Warehouse» section; to transfer, change status, adjust, pick material and count stock, «Edit warehouse»; to release held material, «Edit quality» as well; customer property, «Edit warehouse» or «Edit quality»; values, «See costs»

The Warehouse is where you know, at any time, what material there is, which lot and heat it belongs to, where it is and whether it can be used. In an aerospace shop that is no detail: every bar or plate must be traceable from the mill's certificate to the part delivered, and material that has not yet passed its check must never reach a machine.

Aeromec keeps stock by item × lot × location × status. A single lot of titanium plate may be spread over two slots, with part of it available and part on hold. Everything that comes in, goes out or changes place or status does so through a movement, recorded with its date, its user and its document.

The section has seven views, chosen at the top: Stock, Lots, Movements, Reservations & picking, Cycle counts, Locations and Customer property (what customers leave with you). The one you choose is remembered for next time.

#How material moves

  1. 1ReceiptWhen a purchase is received, raw material comes in as a new lot, with its heat and 3.1 certificate, in the receiving area.
  2. 2QuarantineThe lot awaits its receiving inspection. It cannot be reserved or issued.
  3. 3InspectionQuality validates the 3.1 point by point and the hardness: conforming, the lot becomes available in its slot; nonconforming, it stays blocked.
  4. 4FIFO reservationWhen a work order is released, its material is set aside, oldest lot first.
  5. 5PickingThe warehouse picks the material and issues it to the shop floor: it leaves the lot with an «Issue to WO».
  6. 6Finished goodsThe work order's good parts come in as a finished-goods lot and leave on shipping, with their CoC.
The path of material through the warehouse. Click a step to go to its explanation.

The three stock statuses have the same colour throughout the app:

Status Colour What it means
Available Green It can be reserved for a work order and issued.
Quarantine Amber On hold: material just received awaiting its receiving inspection, or set aside by Quality while a doubt is cleared. MRP counts it as a future receipt, but nobody can use it.
Blocked Red Nonconforming: rejected at inspection, defective, expired or held by a nonconformance (NCR). It must leave the warehouse, returned to the supplier or scrapped, as Quality decides.

#The Stock view

Warehouse, Stock view: the indicators, the search box, the filters and each stock record. 12345678
Figure 361. Warehouse, Stock view: the indicators, the search box, the filters and each stock record.
  1. 1
    The warehouse's seven views. To their right, the ⓘ explains how stock moves, with an example. On a narrow screen, the row scrolls sideways.
  2. 2
    Stock value: what the stock in the list is worth, at weighted average price (WAP). Only with «See costs»; without it, this indicator counts the items in stock.
  3. 3
    Records in quarantine and Blocked stock: how many records are on hold or rejected. Clicking them filters the list.
  4. 4
    Reserved for WOs: how many work orders have material set aside that has not yet been issued to the shop floor.
  5. 5
    No movement > 180 days: the value (or number of records) idle for more than half a year: tied-up capital and the risk that a revision change makes it useless.
  6. 6
    The search box finds by item, lot, heat, 3.1 certificate number or location.
  7. 7
    The filters, with their counts: by type (raw material, finished goods, tools & consumables), by status (in quarantine, blocked), reserved, no movement and defence.
  8. 8
    Export CSV downloads the list you see, for Excel.

Each row is a stock record: one item, from one lot, at one location and in one status. The list footer adds up the records, the distinct items and the value of what is filtered. Clicking a column header sorts the list.

The «Raw material» filter: every bar and plate with its lot, heat and 3.1 certificate. 123456
Figure 362. The «Raw material» filter: every bar and plate with its lot, heat and 3.1 certificate.
  1. 1
    The item: code and description. The icon says whether it is raw material, finished goods or a tool.
  2. 2
    The lot and its heat; the 3.1 pill says the lot has its material certificate (hover for its number). For finished goods, the work order lot and the customer.
  3. 3
    The location: the slot (WAREHOUSE-AISLE-RACK-SLOT) and, below, the zone and the warehouse.
  4. 4
    The status: available, quarantine or blocked.
  5. 5
    Reserved: what is already committed to released work orders and not yet issued. Free = quantity − reserved.
  6. 6
    Idle: days since the lot's last movement.

#Quarantined and blocked material

The In quarantine filter keeps the material that cannot be used yet: what has arrived and awaits its receiving inspection, in which Quality checks the 3.1 certificate against the material specification, the heat marked on the bars and the hardness. Blocked keeps what was rejected: nonconforming material awaiting return to the supplier or scrap.

The «In quarantine» filter: a titanium plate just received waits in receiving for Quality to inspect it. 123
Figure 363. The «In quarantine» filter: a titanium plate just received waits in receiving for Quality to inspect it.
  1. 1
    The In quarantine filter. Next to it, Blocked keeps the rejected material.
  2. 2
    The row shaded amber: Ti-6Al-4V plate with its heat and 3.1, at location REC-01 (receiving) and in Quarantine status. Until Quality releases it, neither MRP nor reservations use it.
  3. 3
    The indicator counts the same as the filter: if something has been here for days, tell Quality, because it may be holding up a work order.

Clicking any row opens a dialog with what can be done with that stock. At the top, the lot, the heat, the location and the quantity; below, the actions.

The actions on a stock record: here, the Inconel 718 bar rejected at receiving. 123456
Figure 364. The actions on a stock record: here, the Inconel 718 bar rejected at receiving.
  1. 1
    Which stock it is: lot, heat, location (here CUA-01, the quarantine area) and quantity.
  2. 2
    Transfer to another location: moves part or all of it to another slot. A transfer movement is logged.
  3. 3
    Change status: available ↔ quarantine ↔ blocked, always with a reason.
  4. 4
    Adjust quantity: corrects the quantity after counting it (breakage, a receiving error), with a reason.
  5. 5
    Open lot record: its heat, its 3.1 certificate, the inspection, the movements and the work orders using it.
  6. 6
    Trace this heat: which work orders, parts and customers carry that heat (see Traceability). Open item, above, opens the item record.

#Transferring, changing status and adjusting

All three actions always ask for the quantity (with the All button for the whole record) and are logged as a movement under your user. The reason is required for status changes and adjustments: it is what an auditor will read.

Transferring a 4340 steel bar to another slot (not confirmed). 1234
Figure 365. Transferring a 4340 steel bar to another slot (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    The quantity moved; below, the maximum (what this record holds). All fills it in.
  2. 2
    The destination location: the drop-down shows which slots are free and how many items each holds.
  3. 3
    Back returns to the list of actions without changing anything.
  4. 4
    Transfer makes the movement. The lot, heat and status do not change: only the place.
Changing the status of the quarantined plate, with the administrator profile (not confirmed). 1234
Figure 366. Changing the status of the quarantined plate, with the administrator profile (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    The new status: here, since the stock is in quarantine, Available (release it) or Blocked (reject it).
  2. 2
    The quantity that changes: you can release or block just part of it.
  3. 3
    The reason, required: it is kept in the movement and in the lot history.
  4. 4
    Change status applies the change. Holding it (to quarantine or blocked) moves the material to the quarantine area; releasing it leaves it available in the same slot.
The same dialog as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: he can block, but not release. 12
Figure 367. The same dialog as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: he can block, but not release.
  1. 1
    Available is disabled: releasing held material also needs the Edit quality permission.
  2. 2
    The notice explains it: Quality releases it after inspecting it (in Inspection & FAI).
Adjusting the quantity of a stock record after counting it (not confirmed). 123
Figure 368. Adjusting the quantity of a stock record after counting it (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    What the system says is in this slot.
  2. 2
    The actual counted quantity: what is really there. The difference is adjusted with a movement.
  3. 3
    The reason (handling damage, receiving error…), required.
How to hold suspect material
  1. In Stock, search for the lot or the heat and click its row.

  2. Click Change status and choose Blocked (or Quarantine, if something just needs checking).

  3. Enter the quantity (or All) and write the reason: what was seen and who asked for it.

  4. Click Change status. If a nonconformance must be raised, do it in Nonconformances.

The material moves to the quarantine area, stops counting as available, and neither MRP nor reservations will use it until Quality releases it.

#Lots: heat and 3.1 certificate

A lot is each entry of material into the warehouse: every purchase receipt creates one, and every completed work order creates its own finished-goods lot (PT-OF-…). The lot is the unit of traceability: if a lot has a problem, you know exactly which parts carry it.

The heat is the mill's melt batch: all the metal from one heat has the same chemical composition. The 3.1 certificate (EN 10204, type 3.1) is the document signed by the mill's quality department, independent from production, with the actual test results for that heat: chemistry, mechanical properties and heat treatment. Several receipts may share a heat.

Warehouse, Lots view: each receipt with its heat, certificate, origin and how much is left. 12345
Figure 369. Warehouse, Lots view: each receipt with its heat, certificate, origin and how much is left.
  1. 1
    Lots in stock and Heats in stock: how many lots and how many different heats are in the warehouse now.
  2. 2
    Awaiting inspection and Rejected in store: lots in quarantine and rejected lots still holding stock.
  3. 3
    The filters: in stock (the default), by type, awaiting inspection, rejected, used up (the history), defence and all.
  4. 4
    Value of lots: what their stock on hand is worth (with «See costs»).
  5. 5
    The search box: by lot, heat, certificate, item, supplier or WO.
The columns of the Lots view: the most recent lots at the top. 12345
Figure 370. The columns of the Lots view: the most recent lots at the top.
  1. 1
    The heat and the 3.1 certificate number. Finished-goods lots show «Production lot».
  2. 2
    Where it comes from: the supplier and the receipt (REC-…), or the work order that made it.
  3. 3
    How much is left of what came in. The bar shows it by status: green available, amber quarantine, red blocked; grey has already left.
  4. 4
    Consumed: what was issued to the shop floor and to how many work orders.
  5. 5
    The receiving inspection result: accepted, pending or rejected.

Two more things a lot can carry:

  • Expiry. Items with a shelf life —adhesives, sealants, greases, cutting fluids: it is set on their record, see Items— give each lot its expiry date on receipt (receipt date + shelf life), shown on the Material & certificate card of its record. An expired lot is not issued or shipped: Aeromec does not let it go to a work order or onto a delivery note; hold it (blocked) until Quality decides.
  • Suspected counterfeit. If at receiving inspection the certificate's origin was not traceable (see Purchasing), the lot carries the red Suspected counterfeit pill on the list and on its record: it is not returned to the supplier; it is mutilated as scrap according to its NCR.

Finished goods lots also keep the drawing revision their work order was made to (frozen when it is released: see Changes); it goes to traceability and the CoC, and the impact of a drawing change counts the stock of each revision.

#The lot record

Click a lot (or Open lot record from a stock row) to open its record. It has the Summary, Where it is, Movements, WOs, Documents and, with the audit permission, Changes tabs.

Record of a raw material lot: accepted at receipt, already partly consumed and with reservations for upcoming work orders. 1234567
Figure 371. Record of a raw material lot: accepted at receipt, already partly consumed and with reservations for upcoming work orders.
  1. 1
    The lot code and its inspection result; below, the item and the line with its heat, certificate and supplier.
  2. 2
    Trace this heat leads to everything made from that heat. The icon to its left opens the item.
  3. 3
    The banner: what came in, the stock on hand left, what is reserved, what was consumed and by how many work orders.
  4. 4
    Material & certificate: item, type, heat, 3.1 number (the EN 10204 · 3.1 pill), receipt date and value on hand.
  5. 5
    Supplier & receipt: the supplier, the receipt (click it to open the order), the purchase order, the supplier delivery note, the quantity received and who received it.
  6. 6
    Receiving inspection: result, date, inspector and whether the 3.1 was checked. View opens the full inspection.
  7. 7
    Lot history: its story in a few lines: receipt, inspection, release, issues to the shop floor and what is left today.
Record of a lot rejected at receipt: the certificate chemistry did not meet the AMS specification. 1234
Figure 372. Record of a lot rejected at receipt: the certificate chemistry did not meet the AMS specification.
  1. 1
    Rejected status.
  2. 2
    The notice: the lot is blocked, pending return to the supplier or scrap. It cannot be used.
  3. 3
    The rejected inspection, with the 3.1 certificate marked as nonconforming, the measured hardness and the inspector's notes: why it was rejected.
  4. 4
    In the history, the receipt, the rejected inspection and the block in the quarantine area, with its reason.
The lot's «WOs» tab: which work orders it is reserved for and which have consumed it. 123
Figure 373. The lot's «WOs» tab: which work orders it is reserved for and which have consumed it.
  1. 1
    The WOs tab, with the number of work orders that have reserved or consumed it.
  2. 2
    Reserved for WOs: released work orders with material from this lot set aside, with the quantity and when they start.
  3. 3
    Consumed by: the work orders it has been issued to, with the part, the customer, the kilos and the date. Click one to open it.

The other tabs complete the story:

  • Where it is: the lot breakdown (available, quarantine, blocked and what has already left) and each location with its quantity, what is reserved and the days idle.
  • Movements: each of the lot's movements with its balance: the receipt, the release, each «Issue to WO», the transfers…
  • Documents: the scanned 3.1 certificate and the supplier delivery note attached at receipt, and any other document you upload (drag it onto the window).

#Movements

Warehouse, Movements view: the log of everything that came in, went out or changed place or status. 12345678
Figure 374. Warehouse, Movements view: the log of everything that came in, went out or changed place or status.
  1. 1
    How many movements, receipts in and issues out there are in the period.
  2. 2
    Adjustments & counts: the signed value of the corrections (+ surplus, − shortage). Few and small = a reliable warehouse.
  3. 3
    Material issued to WOs: the cost of the material sent to the shop floor in the period.
  4. 4
    The period: last 30 or 90 days, 12 months or all history.
  5. 5
    The filters by type: receipts in, issues out, receipt, issue to WO, production receipt, shipment, transfers & status changes, adjustments.
  6. 6
    The movement type, with its icon and colour.
  7. 7
    From → to: from which slot to which slot (and, for a status change, from which status to which).
  8. 8
    The quantity, in green with + when coming in and in red with − when going out; the document that caused it (work order, delivery note, receipt), which opens when clicked, and the user.

Movements are never deleted or edited: they are the evidence for traceability. If something is wrong, it is corrected with another movement (an adjustment, a transfer). The types you will see:

Type When it happens
Receipt When a purchase is received: the lot comes in (in quarantine if it is raw material).
Status change When releasing after inspection, blocking a rejection or holding something by hand.
Transfer When moving material from one slot to another.
Issue to WO When a work order's material is picked.
Production receipt When a work order's last operation is completed: good parts come in as finished goods.
Shipment When a delivery note ships: finished goods leave for the customer.
Adjustment · Cycle count · Scrap Manual corrections, closed counts and scrapped material.

#Reservations and picking

When a work order is released (in Work orders), Aeromec reserves the material it needs, lot by lot FIFO (first in, first out: oldest lot first), so nobody uses it for anything else. Picking means preparing that material and issuing it to the shop floor. The Reservations & picking view is the warehouse's work list.

Warehouse, Reservations & picking view: the material reserved for work orders starting soon. 1234567
Figure 375. Warehouse, Reservations & picking view: the material reserved for work orders starting soon.
  1. 1
    WOs to pick: work orders with reserved material not yet issued.
  2. 2
    Start within 2 days: the ones to pick first.
  3. 3
    Lines short of material: reservations whose lot no longer has enough available. Warn Purchasing or Planning.
  4. 4
    The filters: active, short of material, issued and cancelled.
  5. 5
    The work order and when it starts (amber if today or tomorrow); on the right, the item, the reserved lot and heat and where it is.
  6. 6
    What is reserved, what is issued (with its bar) and the lot available (red if it falls short).
  7. 7
    Pick issues that reservation's material to the shop floor.
Picking a work order's material: the lot, heat and slot it comes from (not confirmed). 123
Figure 376. Picking a work order's material: the lot, heat and slot it comes from (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    What will happen: the material leaves the warehouse with an Issue to WO movement and the reservation becomes issued.
  2. 2
    What is issued: quantity, item, lot, heat and the slot it comes from. If there is not enough, it warns what will remain pending.
  3. 3
    Issue to shop floor records the issue. From then on, every part of the work order knows which heat it comes from.
How to pick a work order's material
  1. In Reservations & picking, keep the Active filter. Start with the work orders that start soonest (amber).

  2. Read the row's lot, heat and slot, and go and fetch the material.

  3. Click Pick and check in the dialog that the lot and heat match what you have in your hand.

  4. Click Issue to shop floor and take the material to the machine.

The reservation moves to Issued, the lot's stock goes down and the work order is linked to that heat for good (see Traceability).

#Cycle counts

A cycle count counts the warehouse in parts (an aisle, a zone) throughout the year, instead of stopping everything for one annual stocktake: the warehouse never stops, counts are more accurate (fewer items each time) and errors are caught sooner. Expensive or fast-moving items are best counted more often.

Warehouse, Cycle counts view: open and closed counts. 12345
Figure 377. Warehouse, Cycle counts view: open and closed counts.
  1. 1
    Open counts, Lines to count and Differences found in them.
  2. 2
    Last count closed: how long since one was closed.
  3. 3
    New cycle count opens a count.
  4. 4
    Each count: number and date, warehouse and scope (whole warehouse or one aisle) and status.
  5. 5
    The progress: how many lines have been counted; to its right, the differences and the counter.
Opening a cycle count: you choose the warehouse and what to count (not confirmed). 12345
Figure 378. Opening a cycle count: you choose the warehouse and what to count (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    Opening it takes a snapshot of the expected stock in the chosen scope: one line per item, lot, location and status.
  2. 2
    The warehouse: raw material, finished goods, tools & consumables, or receiving, quarantine and shipping.
  3. 3
    What to count: the whole warehouse or one aisle.
  4. 4
    How many records and locations the count will cover, to estimate the time.
  5. 5
    Open count creates it, ready for counting.
An open cycle count, half counted. 1234567
Figure 379. An open cycle count, half counted.
  1. 1
    Close count: when you finish, adjusts each difference with a «Cycle count» movement.
  2. 2
    The count figures: lines, counted, to count, differences and their value, with the progress bar.
  3. 3
    How to count: type what there is at each location (Enter or leaving the field saves it); ✓✓ confirms it matches the expected quantity.
  4. 4
    The All, To count and With difference filters.
  5. 5
    The expected quantity (what the system says) and, to its right, the Counted field.
  6. 6
    A line not counted: enter the quantity or click the ✓✓ on its right if it matches.
  7. 7
    The difference (counted − expected) and its value, right away.
How to do a cycle count
  1. In Cycle counts, click New cycle count, choose the warehouse and the aisle, and click Open count.

  2. Go through the locations in order. On each line, type what you count and press Enter, or click ✓✓ if it matches the expected quantity.

  3. With the With difference filter, recount the large differences: a typo would become an adjustment.

  4. Click Close count and confirm.

Each difference creates a «Cycle count» movement and stock is left as counted. Lines not counted are left as they are.

#The location map

The Locations view draws each warehouse with its aisles, racks and slots, plus the special zones (receiving, quarantine, shipping and production). A slot code is WAREHOUSE-AISLE-RACK-SLOT: MP-A-02-1 is the raw material warehouse, aisle A, rack 02, slot 1 (the bottom one).

Warehouse, Locations view: the map of each warehouse and its occupancy. 123456
Figure 380. Warehouse, Locations view: the map of each warehouse and its occupancy.
  1. 1
    Active locations, Occupancy (slots holding something ÷ active slots) and Free slots.
  2. 2
    Held records: what is in quarantine or blocked, wherever it is.
  3. 3
    The legend: each slot's colour by how many stock records it holds, and amber or red if something is on hold.
  4. 4
    Each warehouse, with its ⓘ, its occupancy percentage and its bar (green, amber above 85%).
  5. 5
    Each aisle: racks (01, 02…) with their slots from bottom to top. Hover over a slot to see what is there and click it to act on that stock.
  6. 6
    The special zones: quarantine (CUA), shipping (EXP), production (PRO) and receiving (REC), with what they hold.

#Customer property

Customer property is everything a customer leaves with you that is not yours: material for its parts (a titanium bar for its programme), tooling and inspection fixtures, documentation (drawings and 3D models), equipment (gauges, returnable containers), software or data. It must be identified on receipt, checked to arrive in good condition, looked after while in the shop and, if it is damaged or lost, the customer notified and a record kept. The Customer property view is that register (PCL-…).

Warehouse, «Customer property» view: what customers have left in the shop, with its status. 123456
Figure 381. Warehouse, «Customer property» view: what customers have left in the shop, with its status.
  1. 1
    Its ⓘ explains what customer property is and what has to be done with it.
  2. 2
    The search box: by number, customer, description or customer reference.
  3. 3
    The filters: on site (stored, in use or damaged), with incident (damaged or lost) and all, including what was returned or consumed.
  4. 4
    Record property registers what arrives from a customer (with «Edit warehouse» or «Edit quality»). To its left, Export CSV.
  5. 5
    Each record: number and description, the customer and its reference, the type, the location with the date it arrived and the status. Here, a titanium bar from a defence customer, kept in its own area.
  6. 6
    Propulsión Avanzada del Norte's go / no-go gauge: Damaged and with the red Customer not yet notified pill. Click the row to open it.
The record of Propulsión Avanzada del Norte's damaged gauge (not saved). 123456
Figure 382. The record of Propulsión Avanzada del Norte's damaged gauge (not saved).
  1. 1
    The type (material, tooling, documentation, equipment, software or data), the description, the customer reference, the part it is for and the quantity.
  2. 2
    Received on and Verified on receipt: that it arrived complete and in good condition.
  3. 3
    Where it is: a warehouse slot, a metrology cabinet, the engineering server…
  4. 4
    The status: stored, in use, returned, consumed, damaged or lost.
  5. 5
    Incident: what happened. It is required if it is damaged or lost.
  6. 6
    Customer notified on: while it is empty, the list says Customer not yet notified. Next to it, Returned on.
What to do if something of a customer's is damaged or lost
  1. In Customer property, click the record.

  2. Change the Status to Damaged or Lost and describe what happened in Incident.

  3. Notify the customer (email, call, its portal) and enter the date in Customer notified on.

  4. Click Save. If it affects parts already made (a damaged inspection fixture), open an NCR in Nonconformances.

The record appears in the With incident filter and, with the notification date, no longer carries the «Customer not yet notified» pill.

#What each profile sees

José Luis's Stock view (Warehouse), without the «See costs» permission: no values. 123
Figure 383. José Luis's Stock view (Warehouse), without the «See costs» permission: no values.
  1. 1
    Instead of the stock value, Items in stock: how many different items have stock on hand.
  2. 2
    No movement counts records, not euros.
  3. 3
    The list has no Value column (and no value in the footer).

#Tips

Logistics

Traceability

From any part (by its serial number or its work order) to the drawing revision it was made to, its heat, its 3.1 certificate, its machines, operators, gauges, inspections and its shipment; and from a heat or a lot to every work order, part and customer that carries it.

Who uses it: Quality, warehouse, engineering office and managementAccess: «Traceability» section; defence parts, «Defence data»

Traceability links each part to everything involved in it: the metal's heat and its 3.1 certificate, the approved routing, the machines, the operators, the gauges it was measured with, the nonconformances and the certificate of conformity (CoC) it shipped with. It is required because an aircraft part may fly for thirty years: after a complaint or a notice from the mill you must be able to answer two questions within hours:

  • What is this part made of and how was it made? That is backward traceability: from the serial number (or the work order) to its origin.
  • Which parts carry this heat and who did we deliver them to? That is forward traceability: from the heat (or the lot) to the customers.

Aeromec needs nothing special to provide it: it comes from what is recorded as you work. Each receipt stores the lot's heat and certificate; each picking says which lot the work order consumed; each work log from the terminal says who worked on which operation and on which machine; each measurement stores the gauge; and each delivery note stores the work orders, lots and serial numbers that left.

#A part's chain

  1. 1Heat and 3.1The mill's melt and its material certificate, which arrive with the purchase.
  2. 2LotEach warehouse receipt, with its receipt record and its receiving inspection.
  3. 3WOThe work order that consumed the lot, with the routing approved by the customer.
  4. 4OperationsEach operation with its machine or supplier, its operators, dates and good and rejected parts.
  5. 5InspectionsWho measured, with which calibrated gauges and with what result; the FAI and the NCRs.
  6. 6Shipment and CoCThe delivery note, the certificate of conformity, the customer and the serial numbers.
The links Aeromec joins up for each part. Backward runs right to left; forward, left to right.

#Searching: serial number, work order, heat or lot

Traceability before searching: the search type, the field, the examples and the two directions. 1234567
Figure 384. Traceability before searching: the search type, the field, the examples and the two directions.
  1. 1
    The search type: Serial no. or WO (backward), Heat or Lot (forward).
  2. 2
    The field: type or paste the number (the example below changes with the type). Matches appear as you type.
  3. 3
    Trace runs the search (or press Enter).
  4. 4
    Try: real examples from today (a shipped serial, a closed work order and a heat already consumed). Your recent searches will appear below.
  5. 5
    Backward: the links you will see when searching for a serial or a work order.
  6. 6
    Forward: what you will see when searching for a heat or a lot.
  7. 7
    The ⓘ explains what traceability is, why it is required and how it runs, with an example.

You also get here from many other places: a heat's arrow on a lot record, the Trace this heat button in the Warehouse, the serial numbers on a delivery note in Shipments or the global search in the top bar (⌘K / Ctrl+K), which finds heats and serial numbers.

#Backward: the history of a part

Searching for a serial number (the one marked on the part and on the CoC) first shows a summary of its history in one sentence, with a counter for each thing; below, the traceability chain link by link. Searching for a work order gives the same for all its parts.

The summary of a shipped serial number (the «Try» example). 123456
Figure 385. The summary of a shipped serial number (the «Try» example).
  1. 1
    Recent: what you traced last, to go back with one click.
  2. 2
    The serial number, with the part, its description and the customer.
  3. 3
    Open the WO: the record of the work order that made it.
  4. 4
    The history in one sentence: work order, heat and supplier, operations, operators, measurements, delivery note and CoC.
  5. 5
    The counters: heats, operations, operators, measurements, rejected parts, FAI, NCRs and delivery notes. Green means fine, red means worth a look.
  6. 6
    Trace heat … forward: jumps to the forward search for this part's heat.
First link: the part and its work order, with the routing approved by the customer. 123456
Figure 386. First link: the part and its work order, with the routing approved by the customer.
  1. 1
    The serial number and its status: in production, in stock, shipped or rejected.
  2. 2
    The part (opens its record in Items) and its description.
  3. 3
    The drawing with the revision it was made to (the one frozen on the work order when it was released) and the dates it was made.
  4. 4
    The customer and, to its right, the work order (open it with a click) and the quantity.
  5. 5
    The work order's status.
  6. 6
    The routing it was made to and its approval: who approved it at the customer and with which reference, or «Internal approval» if the customer does not require it.

The drawing revision shown here is the work order's: Aeromec freezes it at release and passes it on to the lots it produces. If the part later moves to a new revision (an implemented customer drawing change, see Changes), the parts already made still state which revision they were made to, here, on the delivery note and on the certificate of conformity. It is the first thing the customer asks when a drawing changes: which parts they have of the previous revision.

Second link: the material, with its heat, its 3.1 certificate and its receipt. 123456
Figure 387. Second link: the material, with its heat, its 3.1 certificate and its receipt.
  1. 1
    Each lot the work order consumed (click it to open its record in the Warehouse), with its item.
  2. 2
    The result of its receiving inspection.
  3. 3
    The heat; the arrow traces it forward.
  4. 4
    The 3.1 certificate number; View 3.1 opens the scanned certificate (see below).
  5. 5
    The supplier and the receipt (number and date).
  6. 6
    The purchase order it came on.

If the work order consumed more than one lot, all of them are listed: its parts may come from any of them and, in an alert, all of them count. If the part was made from an alternative material approved in the routing, the link says so, with the customer's approval reference. And if a work order has no material recorded, the link warns in red: without picking there is no traceability.

Third link: each operation with its machine or supplier, its operators and its parts. 12345
Figure 388. Third link: each operation with its machine or supplier, its operators and its parts.
  1. 1
    How many operations the work order has.
  2. 2
    Each operation: number, description, type, machine, and the dates and times of its first and last work log.
  3. 3
    The operators who worked on it, taken from the shop-floor terminal work logs.
  4. 4
    Each operation's good parts and, in red, its rejected ones.
  5. 5
    An outside operation (special process, non-destructive testing…): instead of a machine, the supplier and the purchase order it was done on.
Fourth link: the work order's inspections, with their inspector and gauges. 1234
Figure 389. Fourth link: the work order's inspections, with their inspector and gauges.
  1. 1
    The total measurements recorded.
  2. 2
    Each inspection: type (in-process or final) and operation, date, inspector and number of measurements.
  3. 3
    The gauges it was measured with: only gauges within calibration are accepted. Click one to open its record.
  4. 4
    The inspection result.

If a gauge turned out to be out of calibration, its record in Gauges tells you which inspections —and therefore which parts— have to be reviewed. After the inspections come two more links:

  • FAI (first article inspection): the EN 9102 / AS9102 report that released the part, who released it and when; or the note that this work order did not need one because the part was already approved with the same drawing and routing revision.
  • Non-conformances (NCRs): every deviation on this work order, with the affected parts and their disposition (rework, customer concession, scrap or return).
Last link: the delivery note, the certificate of conformity and the serial numbers shipped together. 123456
Figure 390. Last link: the delivery note, the certificate of conformity and the serial numbers shipped together.
  1. 1
    The delivery note (open it in Shipments) and the date it left.
  2. 2
    The customer and the quantity.
  3. 3
    The certificate of conformity (CoC) issued on shipping…
  4. 4
    …and who signed it at shipment (with their electronic signature, see Shipments).
  5. 5
    The shipment's serial numbers; the one you searched for is highlighted. Click another to trace it.
  6. 6
    Show all … expands them all.
How to rebuild the history of a part
  1. Choose Serial no., type the number marked on the part (or the one on the customer's CoC) and click Trace.

  2. Read the summary: work order, heat, operations, operators, measurements, delivery note and CoC. Counters in red (rejects, NCRs) are the first thing to look at.

  3. Go down the chain: in Material, the heat and its certificate (View 3.1); in Operations, who and on which machine; in Inspections, with which gauges.

  4. If needed, follow the thread: the heat's arrow traces it forward and each link opens its record (work order, lot, order, delivery note, gauge).

You have the answer for the customer or the auditor on screen, and from each link you reach the documents behind it: the 3.1, the inspection, the delivery note and its CoC as PDF.

To put it in writing, Report for the auditor (PDF) (above the result) produces the traceability report: the sentence that sums up the chain (which material, how many operations and people, how many measurements and whether every gauge had its calibration in force when measuring, who it was shipped to and with which CoC) and, below, the full record of its work order: the material with its validated 3.1 and its signed receipt, each operation and each work log (with the person's qualification that day), each measurement with its gauge and its calibration, the FAI, the NCRs, the serial numbers, the shipments, the documents with their fingerprint and every signature with its integrity. Forward (a heat or a lot), the report holds the lots with their receipt, the work orders that consumed it and, for each one, its shipments and serial numbers: the list to notify each customer.

#Viewing the 3.1 certificate

View 3.1 opens the scanned material certificate attached when the purchase was received, without leaving the screen. Use it to check the heat, the specification and the test results there and then.

A heat's 3.1 certificate, opened from the traceability chain. 12345
Figure 391. A heat's 3.1 certificate, opened from the traceability chain.
  1. 1
    The document: name, lot, item, heat, type, size, who uploaded it and when.
  2. 2
    Open in a new tab, download or close.
  3. 3
    The certificate: mill, number, EN 10204 type 3.1, customer and order, heat and product.
  4. 4
    The heat's tests: chemistry against the specification limits (AMS…), tensile and hardness.
  5. 5
    The file's SHA-256 fingerprint: proof that the document has not changed since it was uploaded.

#Forward: where a heat has gone

Searching for a heat (the number on the 3.1 certificate) or a lot, Aeromec follows all its issues: the lots of that heat, the work orders that consumed them, the parts made, those shipped and the customers who hold them. It follows the chain up to three levels, in case a semi-finished part was made from that material and then consumed by another work order.

Forward: a heat with parts at three customers and work orders not yet closed. 123456
Figure 392. Forward: a heat with parts at three customers and work orders not yet closed.
  1. 1
    The heat searched for (or the lot).
  2. 2
    The summary in one sentence: how many lots it is in, how many work orders consumed it and how many parts have shipped to how many customers.
  3. 3
    The chain in figures: heats → lots → WOs → parts made → shipped → customers.
  4. 4
    If there were an alert: what would have to be done today if the mill reported an error in the certificate.
  5. 5
    Notify N customers: those holding shipped parts made from this material.
  6. 6
    Hold N WOs not yet closed: parts in production or in stock must not ship until it is cleared. If material from the heat is left, Block … in the warehouse appears too.
The heat's lots, the affected work orders with their serial numbers and the customers. 123456
Figure 393. The heat's lots, the affected work orders with their serial numbers and the customers.
  1. 1
    The heat's lots: supplier, certificate (View 3.1), receipt and on hand (or «Used up»).
  2. 2
    The WOs affected, with their ⓘ.
  3. 3
    Each work order: status, whether it is affected directly or via a semi-finished part, the part and the customer.
  4. 4
    Its serial numbers: the list you would give the customer.
  5. 5
    Shipped of what was made, with its bar; the arrow traces that work order backward.
  6. 6
    The customers with parts from this material.
How to respond to a material alert
  1. Choose Heat, type the heat number from the notice (the one on the 3.1 certificate) and click Trace.

  2. Read the If there were an alert box: which customers to notify, which material to block and which work orders to hold.

  3. First, what is in the plant: in the Warehouse, set the material left from the heat to Blocked, and hold the affected work orders not yet closed (with an NCR in Nonconformances if appropriate).

  4. Then, the customers: go down to WOs affected and copy, work order by work order, the serial numbers shipped to each customer.

  5. Raise an NCR to the material supplier.

You know which suspect parts there are, where they are and who to notify, with the list of serial numbers for each customer.

#What each profile sees

#Tips

Logistics

Shipments

Delivery notes to customers: they are prepared from the order, shipped with the signature of whoever releases the product after checking the FAI, finished-goods stock, the final inspection of critical parts and lot expiry, give each line its work order, lot and serial numbers, and issue the certificate of conformity (CoC) with every heat, 3.1 certificate and the drawing revision.

Who uses it: Warehouse and shipping; for reference, sales, quality and financeAccess: «Shipments» section; to create, ship and void delivery notes, «Ship» (and, to sign the shipment, an inspection stamp with the CoC scope); amounts, «See prices»; to invoice a delivery note, «Invoice»

Shipments is where the delivery notes for sales orders are prepared and shipped. The delivery note is prepared in advance (which parts from which deliveries go out, in how many packages and with which carrier) and, once the material is packed, it is shipped. When shipping, Aeromec does in one go what cannot go wrong in an aerospace shop:

  • It checks that there are finished goods for every line and that the part has an approved FAI if the customer requires it (FAI, First Article Inspection: the full inspection of the first part per EN 9102 / AS9102). Nothing leaves a work order whose FAI has not been released. If the part is critical, it only ships from a work order with its conforming final inspection, and no expired lot leaves the store.
  • It asks for the signature of whoever releases the product: their password and their inspection stamp with the CoC scope.
  • It takes the parts out of the finished-goods store, oldest lots first.
  • It assigns each line its work order, its lot and its serial numbers, which links the part to its heat and to the drawing revision it was made to.
  • It issues the certificate of conformity (CoC): the signed statement that the parts meet the order, the drawing and the specifications, with every heat and 3.1 certificate of the material.

#How an order ships

  1. 1Finished goodsWhen the last operation is completed, the work order's good parts go into the finished-goods store.
  2. 2Delivery note being preparedYou choose the order and what ships from each delivery. Stock does not move yet.
  3. 3ChecksEnough finished goods, approved FAI, critical parts inspected and nothing above what was ordered.
  4. 4Ship and signWith your signature the parts leave, each line takes its work order, lot and serials, and the CoC is issued.
  5. 5Delivery note and CoC as PDFThe documents that travel with the parts.
  6. 6InvoiceFinance invoices the delivery note.
The path of a delivery. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The delivery note list

Shipments: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the list of delivery notes. 12345678
Figure 394. Shipments: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the list of delivery notes.
  1. 1
    Being prepared: delivery notes created but not yet shipped; the parts are still in the warehouse.
  2. 2
    Delivery notes this month and Parts shipped this month: the delivery pace.
  3. 3
    Shipped, not invoiced: what has already left and has no invoice yet (its value, if you see prices). It is money still to invoice.
  4. 4
    The search box: by delivery note, customer, order, customer PO, CoC or invoice.
  5. 5
    The filters: being prepared, shipped today, this week, not invoiced, defence and void.
  6. 6
    New shipment prepares a delivery note. To its left, Programme (only the delivery notes of one programme) and Export CSV.
  7. 7
    Each delivery note: number and date, status, customer with the programme of its parts, order and customer PO, parts and lines.
  8. 8
    CoC: the number of the certificate issued, «Issued on shipping» or «No CoC» if the customer does not require it. To its right, the invoice and the amount.

The statuses of a delivery note:

Status What it means
Being prepared (amber) Created, with its lines and shipping details. The parts are still in the warehouse and the note can be changed or voided.
Shipped (green) The parts have left, each line has its work order, lot and serials, and the CoC has been issued. It can no longer be changed.
Void (grey) Voided before shipping: nothing left the warehouse and the order's open quantity did not change.

Delivery notes for defence parts carry the purple shield next to the customer and are only visible with the «Defence data» permission.

#Preparing a delivery note

New shipment (or Create in the top bar) first asks which order is shipping: orders with open parts are listed, those with late deliveries first (with the warning triangle). Type to search by order, customer or PO and choose one.

Preparing the delivery note for an order from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte (not created): one line does not have enough finished goods. 12345678
Figure 395. Preparing the delivery note for an order from Propulsión Avanzada del Norte (not created): one line does not have enough finished goods.
  1. 1
    The order, the customer and its PO.
  2. 2
    Customer requires: CoC, 3.1 certificate, serial number (S/N) and FAI. What it does not require is not shown.
  3. 3
    What ships: All open (the default), As per stock (what there is in finished goods) or None to go line by line.
  4. 4
    Each open delivery: part, date (and how long until then), open parts, the finished goods available and the work order serving it.
  5. 5
    The quantity shipping on this note; adjust it with − and +.
  6. 6
    In red, if there are not enough finished goods for everything entered: shipping would fail.
  7. 7
    Shipping: packages and carrier (or a recent one with one click).
  8. 8
    The total parts and lines, and Create delivery note, which leaves it being prepared.
With «As per stock», each delivery takes only the finished goods there are. 12
Figure 396. With «As per stock», each delivery takes only the finished goods there are.
  1. 1
    As per stock spreads the available finished goods across the deliveries, in date order.
  2. 2
    The line that fell short drops to what is available, and the warning disappears.

#The record of a delivery note being prepared

A delivery note being prepared, ready to ship. 12345678
Figure 397. A delivery note being prepared, ready to ship.
  1. 1
    The delivery note number and its status; the customer, the order, the customer PO and the date.
  2. 2
    The delivery note as PDF (a draft while being prepared), Ship and the ⋮ menu.
  3. 3
    The banner: lines, parts, packages, date and amount (with «See prices»).
  4. 4
    The notice: «Ready to ship» in green, or in red how many checks fail.
  5. 5
    Pre-shipment checks, worked out now: finished goods of each part (available against needed), approved FAI if the customer requires it, and nothing above what was ordered.
  6. 6
    Customer requirements: CoC, 3.1 certificate, serial number per part and FAI; those not required, in grey. Below, the customer's general purchasing requirements.
  7. 7
    Shipping: packages, weight, carrier, tracking no. and delivery address (blank = the customer's usual one). The pencil changes them.
  8. 8
    The CoC is issued on shipping, with its own number, and signed with their stamp by whoever ships.

Below, the Timeline (prepared → shipped → CoC issued → invoiced) and the Related documents (order, customer PO, customer and invoice). The Lines tab shows each delivery with its quantity; while being prepared, click it to change the quantity. Traceability explains that the work order, lot, heat and serials are assigned on shipping.

The ⋮ menu of a delivery note being prepared. 123
Figure 398. The ⋮ menu of a delivery note being prepared.
  1. 1
    Edit shipping details: packages, weight, carrier, tracking and address.
  2. 2
    View order and View customer open their records.
  3. 3
    Void delivery note: only while being prepared; nothing has left and the order's open quantity does not change.

#Ship

Shipping is releasing the product: whoever does it declares that the parts meet the requirements and that their documentation is complete. That is why Ship does not ask for a simple confirmation but for your electronic signature: your password and your inspection stamp with the CoC scope (see Electronic signature and the stamps in Inspection & FAI → Stamps & signatures). The signature is linked to the delivery note and its CoC.

Shipping a delivery note: the signature of José Luis (Warehouse) with his shipping stamp, not signed. 123456
Figure 399. Shipping a delivery note: the signature of José Luis (Warehouse) with his shipping stamp, not signed.
  1. 1
    The electronic signature with its meaning: Released.
  2. 2
    What you are signing: the delivery note and the customer, how many parts leave the finished-goods store (oldest lots first), that each line will get its work order, lot and serial numbers and that afterwards the delivery note can no longer be changed.
  3. 3
    Who signs, with their inspection stamp and its scope: shipping needs the CoC scope. Without it, the dialog says so and does not let you sign.
  4. 4
    What you declare by signing.
  5. 5
    Your password, the same one you use to log in to Aeromec.
  6. 6
    Sign does it all in one go and issues the CoC with your signature. Then it offers to print the delivery note and the CoC as PDF.
How to ship a delivery note with its CoC
  1. Filter Being prepared and open the delivery note that is packed.

  2. Look at the notice: if it shows in red, review the Pre-shipment checks (see the table below).

  3. Check the Shipping details (packages, carrier, tracking); the pencil changes them.

  4. Click Ship, check what you are going to sign, type your password and click Sign.

  5. In the «Delivery note … shipped» message, print the Certificate of conformity and the Delivery note as PDF so they travel with the parts.

The delivery note is Shipped, the parts have left the warehouse, each line has its work order, lot and serials, and the CoC has its number and your signature. If the customer works with SAP Business Network, the ship notice can now be generated (see Integrations).

If a check fails, the database rejects the shipment without moving anything and Aeromec explains why:

Message What happens What to do
Approved FAI missing The customer requires an approved first article inspection on the current drawing revision and some part lacks it. Quality releases the FAI in Inspection & FAI, or remove that line from the note.
Not enough stock There are not enough finished goods available for some line (quarantined or blocked stock does not count). Reduce the line quantity, or wait for its work order to finish and reach the store.
Quantity above the open quantity A line exceeds what is left of its delivery on the order. Adjust the quantity in the Lines tab.
It is a critical part: it only ships from a work order with its conforming final inspection The part is critical and the lot due to ship comes from a work order without a conforming final inspection. Quality performs that work order's final inspection in Inspection & FAI, or ship another work order of the part that already has it.
The lot has expired The finished-goods lot is past its expiry date (parts with a shelf life). Remove it and decide what to do with it; it cannot be shipped.
Signature Wrong password (after 5 failures signing is locked) or your stamp does not have the CoC scope. Re-enter the password or ask Quality to extend your stamp's scope; meanwhile, someone who has it ships.

#The shipped delivery note and its CoC

A shipped delivery note for Propulsión Avanzada del Norte, with its CoC, its requirements met and its invoice. 123456
Figure 400. A shipped delivery note for Propulsión Avanzada del Norte, with its CoC, its requirements met and its invoice.
  1. 1
    The delivery note with its CoC number, the Shipped status and the invoice if it has been invoiced.
  2. 2
    With a SAP Business Network customer, the cloud generates the ship notice (ASN). To its right, the delivery note and the CoC as PDF.
  3. 3
    Customer requirements, now checked: the CoC with its number, heats with certificate, as many serials as parts and the approved FAI. A requirement in red is a paperwork gap.
  4. 4
    The CoC: number, issue date and who signed it, with their stamp.
  5. 5
    Certificate of conformity and Delivery note: the two PDFs that travel with the parts.
  6. 6
    The Timeline: prepared, shipped (with carrier and tracking), CoC issued and invoiced.
The «Lines» tab of a shipped delivery note: each line with its work order, lot, heats, certificates and serials. 12345
Figure 401. The «Lines» tab of a shipped delivery note: each line with its work order, lot, heats, certificates and serials.
  1. 1
    The part (opens its record) and its drawing with the revision it was made to (the one the work order froze when it was released); on the right, this line's parts, the quantity ordered and the delivery date.
  2. 2
    The work order that made it and the finished-goods lot it came from.
  3. 3
    The heats and 3.1 certificates of all the material the work order consumed (here, two heats).
  4. 4
    The approved FAI behind it.
  5. 5
    The serial numbers: click one to see its full history.
The «Traceability» tab: each line's path, from material to customer. 12345
Figure 402. The «Traceability» tab: each line's path, from material to customer.
  1. 1
    The material: heats, item, 3.1 certificates and lot. Click it to trace the heat forward.
  2. 2
    The work order and its FAI; then the finished-goods lot, the delivery note with its CoC and the customer with its order.
  3. 3
    The line's serial numbers.
  4. 4
    Full WO traceability: the backward chain in Traceability.
  5. 5
    Where else the heat went: which other parts and customers received it.

The Signatures tab of a shipped delivery note shows the signature it was released with (who, with which stamp, when and with what meaning) and whether the record is still intact: what was signed (the lines, quantities, work orders, lots and serials) can no longer be changed or deleted. See The Signatures tab.

The «Signatures» tab of a shipped delivery note: the release signed with the stamp of whoever shipped it. 123
Figure 403. The «Signatures» tab of a shipped delivery note: the release signed with the stamp of whoever shipped it.
  1. 1
    Intact: the content of the delivery note is exactly what was signed.
  2. 2
    The record status, the hash chain and until when it must be retained.
  3. 3
    The signature: Released, who signed, with which stamp, when and the hash of what was signed.

The certificate of conformity PDF carries the declaration of conformity («the parts listed have been manufactured, inspected and tested in accordance with the order, the drawing and the applicable specifications at their current revision…»), the certified parts (part number P/N, drawing revision they were made to, quantity, work order, material, heat and 3.1 certificate, FAI and serial numbers), the Critical parts section if any are, the customer requirements applied and the signature of whoever released it, with their stamp and the date. The drawing revision is the one the work order froze when it was released, not the one current today: if the part has changed revision since, the CoC still states which one these parts were made to (see Items). The delivery note PDF lists the parts delivered, transport, the accompanying documents (the CoC, the heats' 3.1 certificates, the FAI) and space for the customer's receipt signature. Defence parts add the export control notice.

#Shipments outside Spain

When the customer is in another country, the delivery note also carries the Foreign trade block: the destination and the type of transaction (intra-Community, to the EU, or export, outside it), the Incoterm and the transport mode. Shipments to the EU are added to the Intrastat dispatches return for the month they leave (see Tax), with the invoice value and the net mass of the parts.

The Incoterm (ICC Incoterms 2020) is the delivery term agreed with the customer: who pays for transport and insurance and where the risk passes. FCA (Free Carrier: handed over to the customer's carrier) is usual for aerospace parts; there are also EXW (Ex Works: the customer collects), CPT and CIP (carriage, and with CIP also insurance, paid to destination) or DAP, DPU and DDP (delivered at destination; DDP with import duties paid). If the delivery note has none, the company defaults apply (Settings).

Preparing the delivery note for an order from Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne (Toulouse), without creating it. 1234
Figure 404. Preparing the delivery note for an order from Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne (Toulouse), without creating it.
  1. 1
    An order from a customer in France.
  2. 2
    The Foreign trade block, only for customers outside Spain, and the type of transaction: Intra-EU.
  3. 3
    Incoterm: blank, the company default (here, FCA). Use the one stated on the customer's order.
  4. 4
    Transport mode: the Intrastat code (3 road, 4 air, 1 sea…).
A delivery note shipped to Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne: the shipping data and its foreign trade. 123456
Figure 405. A delivery note shipped to Maintenance Aéronautique Garonne: the shipping data and its foreign trade.
  1. 1
    Destination: the customer's country and the type of transaction.
  2. 2
    The customer's VAT number. If it is missing, or lacks the country prefix, it is flagged here: fix it on the customer record before invoicing.
  3. 3
    Incoterm: FCA · Free Carrier.
  4. 4
    Transport mode: road.
  5. 5
    Intrastat: which return it goes into (the dispatches for the month it left).
  6. 6
    The pencil changes the Incoterm and the transport.

#What each profile sees

José Luis's list (Warehouse): he ships, but without prices. 123
Figure 406. José Luis's list (Warehouse): he ships, but without prices.
  1. 1
    Shipped, not invoiced counts delivery notes, not euros.
  2. 2
    He has Ship: he prepares, ships and voids delivery notes.
  3. 3
    Without See prices, the list has no Amount column (and the record has no amount in its banner).

#Tips

Supply

MRP

Material requirements planning: what to buy or make, how much and when, with the pegging that shows which work order or order each requirement comes from, the use of approved alternative materials, each item's coverage with its chart, the alerts and the generation of purchase orders and work orders.

Who uses it: Purchasing and planning; for reference, managementAccess: «MRP» section; to run it, «Run MRP»; to generate or dismiss proposals, «Generate orders»; amounts, «See costs»

MRP (Material Requirements Planning) answers one question: what must be bought or made, how much and when, to serve the orders without running out of material? For each item it walks the coming months day by day: it starts from the available stock, subtracts the demand (customer orders, forecasts —for spares and for programmes— and work order consumption) and adds what is already due in (open purchases, work orders in progress and material in quarantine). When the balance drops below the safety stock —the minimum buffer you always want to keep of each item— it proposes ordering or making what is missing, with the date it must be ordered by to arrive in time.

Each proposal keeps its pegging (from peg, to hook on to): the specific demand behind it, so you know which work order or order every kilo comes from. And if a planned work order is short of its primary material but its routing has a customer-approved alternative material in stock, MRP uses it before proposing a purchase.

The section has three views: Proposals, Coverage by item and Alerts.

#How it calculates

  1. 1Available stockWhat is available today. Blocked stock does not count; quarantined stock comes in as a planned receipt.
  2. 2DemandCustomer orders, spares and programme forecasts and work order consumption, on their dates.
  3. 3Planned receiptsOpen purchases (drafts included), the item's live work orders and material in quarantine.
  4. 4AlternativesIf the primary material falls short, the alternative approved in the routing that has stock.
  5. 5ProposalsBuy or make what is missing, with its pegging and its order date.
  6. 6GenerateDraft purchase orders by supplier and planned work orders.
Requirements planning, item by item. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#Proposals

MRP, Proposals view: the last run, the indicators, the filters and each proposal. 12345678
Figure 407. MRP, Proposals view: the last run, the indicators, the filters and each proposal.
  1. 1
    Last run: when it was made, how far it looks (the horizon), with which supplier criterion, whether it included forecasts and who ran it. Its ⓘ explains the calculation rule.
  2. 2
    Run MRP runs it again with current orders, work orders, purchases and stock (see below).
  3. 3
    The three views; the alerts one with its count.
  4. 4
    Pending proposals: those from the last run not yet converted or dismissed.
  5. 5
    To order today or late, Expected stock-outs and Late receipts: what is urgent. Clicking an indicator filters the list.
  6. 6
    Proposed amount: what buying everything proposed would cost (with «See costs»).
  7. 7
    Select visible ticks every proposal in the filtered list, to generate or dismiss them in one go.
  8. 8
    The filters: pending, order now, by type (raw material, subcontracting, tools, manufacturing), converted and dismissed.
The proposal columns: at the top, those that had to be ordered already. 1234567
Figure 408. The proposal columns: at the top, those that had to be ordered already.
  1. 1
    The checkbox to select it and the item, with the proposal type: purchase, manufacturing or operation subcontracting.
  2. 2
    Required by: the demand behind it (a work order, an order, a semi-finished item proposal or restoring safety stock) and how many more there are.
  3. 3
    The proposed quantity.
  4. 4
    Order: the order date («Order now», in amber, if it is today or already past) and when it is needed.
  5. 5
    The proposed supplier (or «In-house»).
  6. 6
    The status: on time, late order (the order date has passed) or stock-out (the balance goes negative), with the row in red.
  7. 7
    The amount at the supplier's price.

#A proposal's record: the pegging

Click a proposal to open its record. Here, the one for the 40 mm titanium plate (MP-TI-P040), which runs out of stock.

Record of a purchase proposal for titanium plate: where the requirement comes from and how the stock evolves. 1234567
Figure 409. Record of a purchase proposal for titanium plate: where the requirement comes from and how the stock evolves.
  1. 1
    The type and quantity, the status (here, stock-out), the item, the supplier and the order and need dates.
  2. 2
    Dismiss (the crossed-out circle) and Generate: they convert just this proposal.
  3. 3
    The banner: net requirement (what is really missing), proposed quantity (rounded to the lot and multiple), when to order and the amount.
  4. 4
    The pegging: each demand the proposal covers, with its quantity. Here, the proposal to make the SE-TI-001 titanium billet (a semi-finished item made from this plate) and restoring safety stock. Click a line to go to its work order or order.
  5. 5
    The item data: initial stock, projected minimum over the horizon, safety stock and lead time; its code opens the item record.
  6. 6
    The projected stock over the horizon: the blue step is the balance, the dashed line the safety stock, red dots stock-outs and green ones proposals.
  7. 7
    Each planned movement with its date and the balance it leaves: today's stock, the proposals, the material in quarantine that will come in once released, the work order consumption…

#Running MRP

MRP does not recalculate by itself: Purchasing or Planning run it when they want to see the current situation (for example, every morning or after accepting new orders).

The run options (not run). 12345
Figure 410. The run options (not run).
  1. 1
    What it does: recalculates the projected stock of every item. Pending proposals from the previous run are replaced.
  2. 2
    The horizon: how many days ahead it looks.
  3. 3
    Proposed supplier: each item's preferred one, the best price or the shortest lead time.
  4. 4
    Include forecasts: on top of firm orders, the forecast consumption of MRO spares (maintenance, repair and overhaul) and the programme forecasts (see below).
  5. 5
    Run starts the run: it takes a few seconds.

#Programme forecasts

A programme is the aircraft, engine or system you manufacture for (AR-90, TF-38…), with its rate: how many aircraft a month the customer assembles. On the programme record (see Programmes), Generate forecasts turns that rate into demand forecasts for its parts over the next 6 months: what the rate requires (parts per aircraft × aircraft per month) and is not yet ordered, on the 15th of each month. Each time it is clicked, it replaces that programme's previous forecasts.

Then run MRP here with Include forecasts: MRP will propose the work orders and material for those parts as if they were already ordered. That way long lead-time raw material (titanium, forgings) is ordered before the customer's order arrives. In a proposal's pegging they appear as Forecast, with the note «Programa …».

#Generating purchase orders and work orders

Generating the selected raw material proposals (not confirmed). 12345
Figure 411. Generating the selected raw material proposals (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    How many proposals are selected.
  2. 2
    With at least one selected, Dismiss … and Generate … appear.
  3. 3
    The ticked checkboxes.
  4. 4
    What will happen: purchases are grouped by supplier into draft purchase orders (Purchasing reviews and sends them) and manufacturing proposals become planned work orders, scheduled backwards from the need date.
  5. 5
    Generate creates the documents and shows the list to open them.
How to turn proposals into orders and work orders
  1. Review the last run (or click Run MRP if anything has changed since).

  2. Filter Order now to start with what is urgent, or by type (Raw material, Subcontracting…).

  3. Open the doubtful proposals and look at their pegging. Dismiss those that do not apply.

  4. Tick the ones you want (or Select visible) and click Generate; confirm.

  5. In the list of generated documents, open the purchase orders: review them and send them to the supplier in Purchasing.

The proposals move to Converted, each with its document number; the purchase orders are left as drafts with origin MRP and the work orders, planned in Work orders.

#Alternative materials

A part's routing may include customer-approved alternative materials: for example, AMP-1015 is made from 40 mm titanium plate, but its routing also has the 50 mm plate approved (more kilos per part and more cost, but valid). Before proposing a raw material purchase, MRP looks at the consumption of planned work orders and proposals: if the primary material drops below its safety stock and an approved alternative can supply it without dropping below its own, it moves that consumption to the alternative and flags it with the Covered by alternative alert.

MRP, Alerts view: stock-outs and late orders first. 1234
Figure 412. MRP, Alerts view: stock-outs and late orders first.
  1. 1
    The alerts of the last run; its ⓘ explains each type.
  2. 2
    Each alert: the item, the date and what happens. Click one to see the item's coverage.
  3. 3
    The type: stock-out (red), late order, overdue receipt, excess or covered by alternative.
  4. 4
    Overdue receipts, with the purchase order and the supplier: chase them, because MRP still counts on that material.
At the end of the alerts, the AMP-1015 work order covered with the 50 mm plate approved in its routing. 12
Figure 413. At the end of the alerts, the AMP-1015 work order covered with the 50 mm plate approved in its routing.
  1. 1
    Covered by alternative: the AMP-1015 work order is short of 40 mm plate, and MRP assigns it the 50 mm plate approved in the routing, which is in stock, instead of proposing a purchase. It says how many kilos of each material: the alternative needs more.
  2. 2
    Above, the overdue receipts: on an outside-processing line, the order is the one for the work order's external operation.

#Coverage by item

MRP, Coverage by item view: each item's summary over the horizon. 123456
Figure 414. MRP, Coverage by item view: each item's summary over the horizon.
  1. 1
    Search by item or supplier.
  2. 2
    The filters: with stock-out, below safety stock, by type and all.
  3. 3
    Initial stock and gross demand: what there is today and everything to be consumed over the horizon.
  4. 4
    Projected minimum: the lowest balance it will reach, in red if negative.
  5. 5
    Stock-out on: the first day the balance drops below zero even counting planned receipts.
  6. 6
    How many proposals it has and its alerts. Click the row to see its chart.
The coverage of the 40 mm titanium plate over the horizon. 123
Figure 415. The coverage of the 40 mm titanium plate over the horizon.
  1. 1
    Initial stock, projected minimum, safety stock and lead time.
  2. 2
    The chart: blue step = balance; dashed line = safety stock; red dots = negative balance; green = proposals. If the step crosses zero before a receipt, that receipt is late.
  3. 3
    The movements one by one: date, description (with its work order, purchase, lot or proposal), quantity and balance.

#What each profile sees

MRP as Javier (Management) sees it: he can look at everything, but neither run nor generate. 12
Figure 416. MRP as Javier (Management) sees it: he can look at everything, but neither run nor generate.
  1. 1
    Without Run MRP there is no Run MRP button.
  2. 2
    Without Generate orders there are no checkboxes and no Select visible: proposals can be viewed, not converted.

#Tips

Supply

Purchasing

Purchase orders —raw material, outside processing of work order operations, tooling, consumables, spare parts, calibrations and services— from draft to receipt: what Aeromec checks before they are sent, the requirements flowed down to the supplier, each lot's heat and 3.1 certificate with its documents, and the receiving inspection that validates the 3.1 point by point and releases or rejects the material.

Who uses it: Purchasing and planning; receiving, warehouse; quality for the inspectionAccess: «Purchasing» section; to create, send and confirm orders, «Edit purchasing»; to receive, «Receive»; to inspect, «Edit quality» and a receiving inspection stamp; prices, «See costs»

Purchasing handles everything bought in: raw material (bars, plates, billets) with its material certificate, outside processing of the operations a supplier performs (heat treating, anodising, non-destructive testing, shot peening…), tooling, consumables, machine spare parts (ordered by Maintenance: see Maintenance), calibrations and services.

An order starts in one of three ways: by hand, from MRP (which groups its proposals by supplier) or from a work order with external operations. On receipt, each type does its own thing:

  • Raw material comes in as a new lot in quarantine, with its heat and its 3.1 certificate, and cannot be used until Quality performs the receiving inspection.
  • Parts coming back from outside processing complete their work order operation, and the next one is queued.
  • Tooling, consumables and spare parts go straight to available.

Before an order is sent, Aeromec checks that what is being ordered may be bought from that supplier (its approval, its approved scope and the customer's approved sources), and when it is sent it flows down the requirements the supplier must meet.

#The order list

Purchasing: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the open orders. 1234567
Figure 417. Purchasing: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the open orders.
  1. 1
    Open orders: drafts, sent, confirmed and partially received.
  2. 2
    Late and the longest delay in days: orders whose date (the one confirmed by the supplier or, if none, the requested one) has passed without being received in full.
  3. 3
    Open amount: what is still to be received on open orders, before VAT (with «See costs»).
  4. 4
    Awaiting inspection: lots already received, waiting in quarantine for Quality to inspect them.
  5. 5
    The search box: by number, supplier, supplier reference or order type.
  6. 6
    New purchase order creates a draft by hand. To its left, Export CSV.
  7. 7
    The filters: open (the default), drafts, late, to receive, in inspection, outside processing, raw material, received and all.
The list columns: late orders are shaded red. 1234567
Figure 418. The list columns: late orders are shaded red.
  1. 1
    The number (PC-year-number), with the icon and the order type.
  2. 2
    The supplier, its code and the reference it gave when confirming.
  3. 3
    Date & delivery: how long until delivery or how many days late it is (in red), and the order date → the delivery date, with ✓ if the supplier confirmed it.
  4. 4
    The order status (see the table below).
  5. 5
    Received: the percentage by value, with its bar, and the lines received in full over the total.
  6. 6
    Source: Manual, MRP or WO (outside processing of operations).
  7. 7
    The amount and what is still to come.

The list footer adds up the orders, the amount, what is still to be received and how many are late. Orders with defence parts carry the purple shield and are only visible with the «Defence data» permission.

#The life of an order

  1. 1DraftBy hand, from MRP or from a work order. Lines are added and corrected.
  2. 2SentIf the supplier is approved for it, the PDF goes out with its requirements. The lines can no longer be changed.
  3. 3ConfirmedThe supplier gives its date and reference: that date is the one used for lateness.
  4. 4ReceiptWith the delivery note, each line's heat and 3.1, and their documents.
  5. 5InspectionQuality validates the 3.1 point by point and releases the lot or rejects it with a supplier NCR.
  6. 6InvoiceFinance records the supplier's invoice and matches it against what was received.
The path of a purchase order. Click a step to go to its explanation.
Status What it means What you can do
Draft (grey) Prepared, the supplier does not know about it yet. Add and change lines, edit its details, send it (if it passes the checks) or delete it.
Sent (blue) Sent to the supplier, awaiting confirmation. Record the confirmation, receive or cancel.
Confirmed (blue) The supplier has given its delivery date and reference. Receive, change the confirmed date or cancel.
Partially received (amber) Part has arrived: some lines are outstanding. Receive the rest.
Received (green) Everything has arrived. View it, inspect what is pending, record its invoice.
Cancelled (red) No longer expected. View it.

In addition, a sent, confirmed or partially received order whose date has passed carries the red N days late pill.

#Creating an order and its lines

MRP and work order orders arrive as drafts, with the dates production needs. To order something by hand, click New purchase order (or Create in the top bar).

Creating an order: it is created as a draft. 1234
Figure 419. Creating an order: it is created as a draft.
  1. 1
    The supplier (required).
  2. 2
    The type: raw material, outside processing, tooling, consumables, calibration or services.
  3. 3
    Delivery date: if left empty, today plus the supplier's lead time.
  4. 4
    Create and add lines saves it as a draft and opens its record.
A new line on a tooling draft. 1234
Figure 420. A new line on a tooling draft.
  1. 1
    Description: the process, the specification or the text for the supplier.
  2. 2
    Quantity; below, the supplier's minimum lot.
  3. 3
    Unit price: it comes from the supplier's price list (and when it was updated).
  4. 4
    The line's required date: if empty, the order's. It is the one that counts for OTD.

Clicking Add line first asks for the item: those on this supplier's price list come first, with their price and reference. On an outside-processing order, the line is the work order operation the supplier performs; Aeromec creates those lines when it generates the order from the work order.

The record of a draft order. 1234567
Figure 421. The record of a draft order.
  1. 1
    The number and type, the status, the supplier and the order and delivery dates.
  2. 2
    The shop icon opens the supplier record; Send to supplier is the main action, and the ⋮ menu has the rest.
  3. 3
    The banner: amount, % received, lines outstanding, delivery and amount invoiced.
  4. 4
    The status notice: in draft, the lines can be added or corrected; once sent, they cannot.
  5. 5
    Add line: choose the item and enter its quantity.
  6. 6
    The lines: item or operation, quantity, received, outstanding, price, amount, required date and whether it arrived on time. In draft, click one to change it.
  7. 7
    Order details: supplier and its approval, type, source, dates, confirmed delivery, supplier reference, last receipt and who created it.

#Before sending: what Aeromec checks

A draft order is not sent to just anyone. While it is a draft, its record warns of anything that would stop it being sent, and when you click Send to supplier Aeromec checks again:

Check If it is not met
The supplier is approved or conditional (not pending or suspended). It is not sent: Quality must approve it with a signed evaluation.
Its approval has not expired. It is not sent until its new evaluation.
In outside processing, each phase's special process is within the supplier's current scope. It is not sent: usually an expired Nadcap.
If the work order's customer only accepts its approved sources, the supplier is on its list for that process. It is not sent.

There are also warnings that do not stop the order but are worth reading: a conditional supplier (apply the controls of its evaluation), a distributor not authorised by the manufacturer (counterfeit risk: require traceability to the mill and a check test) and a scope that expires in less than 30 days. All of it is put right in Suppliers: the scope, the evaluation and each customer's sources.

PC-2026-0165 to Granallados de Precisión, in draft: its shot peening Nadcap has expired. 1234
Figure 422. PC-2026-0165 to Granallados de Precisión, in draft: its shot peening Nadcap has expired.
  1. 1
    An outside processing order in draft to Granallados de Precisión.
  2. 2
    The block, in red: the phase's process (shot peening) is not within the supplier's current scope. Its Nadcap has expired.
  3. 3
    The line: the work order phase being subcontracted, with its process and its specification.
  4. 4
    Send to supplier will not let it be sent.
On clicking «Send to supplier»: the purchase cannot be sent. 123
Figure 423. On clicking «Send to supplier»: the purchase cannot be sent.
  1. 1
    The purchase cannot be sent…
  2. 2
    …and why: the work order, the process and what is missing. If there are several problems, they are all listed.
  3. 3
    OK closes the warning: the order stays in draft.
What to do with a purchase that cannot be sent
  1. Read the warning on the record: it says what fails (approval, scope or customer sources) and in which work order.

  2. If it is an expired Nadcap, ask the supplier for the renewed certificate and have Quality record it in its Scope (see Suppliers).

  3. If the supplier is not approved or has expired, Quality must evaluate it and sign the decision.

  4. If the supplier cannot do it, change the supplier (Edit order) to one with the process in its scope and, if the customer requires it, on its list.

  5. Click Send to supplier again.

With everything in order, the order is sent and its requirements are flowed down.

#Sending and confirming

Sending the draft to the supplier (not confirmed). 12
Figure 424. Sending the draft to the supplier (not confirmed).
  1. 1
    The order becomes Sent with today's date, its lines can no longer be changed and its requirements are flowed down. Send the PDF to the supplier. Any warnings (conditional supplier, non-authorised distributor) appear here.
  2. 2
    Send to supplier marks it as sent.
Recording the supplier's confirmation (not saved). 12
Figure 425. Recording the supplier's confirmation (not saved).
  1. 1
    The delivery date the supplier confirms: from now on it is the one used for lateness.
  2. 2
    Its reference (its order or acknowledgement number).

The order PDF (⋮ menu → Order PDF) carries the lines with their prices, the payment terms and the requirements the supplier must meet, with their reference: the same ones as the Requirements tab (see below).

A confirmed raw material order that has not arrived on its date. 12345
Figure 426. A confirmed raw material order that has not arrived on its date.
  1. 1
    The Confirmed status and the red days late pill.
  2. 2
    The confirmed delivery and the supplier's reference.
  3. 3
    Receive, when the material arrives.
  4. 4
    The notice: chase the supplier and check whether any work order is waiting for this material.
  5. 5
    The line: the required date in red and the on time clock: «required date passed without full receipt».

Delays also show in the Late filter, in the Overdue receipt alerts in MRP and in the supplier's OTD in Suppliers.

#Requirements flowed down to the supplier

Each order tells the supplier what it must meet: its requirements, which come on their own from two places:

  • The company's for that purchase type: its quality system, the right of access for Aeromec, its customers and the authorities, record retention, how to report a nonconforming product, counterfeit-part prevention, approved special processes, no subcontracting or process changes without permission…
  • Those of the customers, programmes and parts being bought for: from each line's work order in outside processing, or from the parts that use that material in a raw material purchase (see Management system, Requirements view).

In a draft, the Requirements tab shows the ones that will be flowed down; when it is sent, a snapshot of what was flowed down is kept with its date, and it does not change even if a requirement is changed later. They also go on the order PDF.

The «Requirements» tab of a sent outside processing order: what was flowed down to the supplier. 1234567
Figure 427. The «Requirements» tab of a sent outside processing order: what was flowed down to the supplier.
  1. 1
    The Requirements tab, with how many were flowed down.
  2. 2
    Flowed down to the supplier on the day and time the order was sent: that snapshot no longer changes. Its ⓘ explains where they come from.
  3. 3
    A company requirement: code, title and text. Click it to open it.
  4. 4
    Counterfeit-part prevention: only material from the manufacturer or its authorised distributors, with its original certificate.
  5. 5
    A customer requirement, with the customer before the text: it appears because the line's work order is for one of its parts.
  6. 6
    A requirement of the part being subcontracted.
  7. 7
    The category and the reference: the customer's clause or the standard clause it comes from.

#Receiving raw material: heat and 3.1 certificate

When the material arrives, open the order (the To receive filter keeps those in the supplier's hands) and click Receive. For raw material, each line needs the heat number —the mill's melt number, marked on the material itself— and the number of the 3.1 certificate, the maker's inspection certificate per EN 10204 type 3.1, signed by its quality department, independent from production, with the actual chemistry and mechanical properties of that heat.

Receiving a 4340 steel bar with its heat and 3.1 certificate (not booked). 123456789
Figure 428. Receiving a 4340 steel bar with its heat and 3.1 certificate (not booked).
  1. 1
    What will happen: raw material comes in as a new lot in quarantine (receiving area) with its heat and 3.1, and cannot be used until the receiving inspection.
  2. 2
    The supplier delivery note.
  3. 3
    Attach the scanned delivery note (PDF or photo): it is kept in the receipt's documents.
  4. 4
    Each outstanding line, with its checkbox (untick it if it has not arrived), what is outstanding and the required date; on the right, Quarantine.
  5. 5
    Quantity received: as per delivery note (it comes filled with the outstanding quantity).
  6. 6
    Location: the slot it will go to after inspection; meanwhile, it stays in receiving. Automatic picks a free one.
  7. 7
    Heat no. (required): as marked on the material and on the certificate. Next to it, the 3.1 certificate no. (required).
  8. 8
    Attach the scanned 3.1 certificate: it is kept in the lot's documents, and from Traceability it opens with View 3.1.
  9. 9
    Book receipt records it all in one go.
How to receive a raw material order
  1. Filter To receive and open the order that has arrived. Click Receive.

  2. Enter the supplier delivery note number and attach the scanned delivery note (or drag the file onto the window).

  3. On each line, check the quantity received, copy the heat number marked on the bars or plates and the 3.1 certificate no., and attach the scanned certificate.

  4. If a line has not arrived, untick it. Choose the final location if you do not want the automatic one.

  5. Click Book receipt.

Each line creates a lot (L-year-number) in quarantine in the receiving area, the order becomes Received or Partially received, and Quality has a receiving inspection pending.

#Outside processing of operations

When a routing operation is performed by a supplier (heat treating, anodising, a penetrant test…), the work order generates an outside processing order, grouping several work orders' operations by supplier: each line is one work order's operation, with the process specification. When the parts come back, that operation is completed with the quantity received, and the next one is queued on its machine in Planning.

A partially received outside-processing order: each line is a work order operation. 12345
Figure 429. A partially received outside-processing order: each line is a work order operation.
  1. 1
    Outside processing, partially received and late.
  2. 2
    What has been received, the lines outstanding and the confirmed delivery.
  3. 3
    The work order and operation the supplier performs (click it to open the work order) and, below, the process to its specification.
  4. 4
    The required date, when it was received and whether it arrived on time (green ✓).
  5. 5
    What is outstanding, in amber: parts still at the supplier.
Receiving parts back from outside processing (not booked). 123
Figure 430. Receiving parts back from outside processing (not booked).
  1. 1
    Parts coming back complete their work order operation and the next one is queued.
  2. 2
    Each line: the part, what is outstanding, the required date and the work order and operation.
  3. 3
    The work order operation is completed with this quantity: enter the parts that have actually come back.

Tooling and consumables are received the same way, but go straight to available at the location you choose, without receiving inspection.

#The receiving inspection

The order's Receipts tab lists each receipt with its delivery note, who received it and, line by line, the lot created, the heat, the certificate, the location and the result of the receiving inspection. While a lot is pending, the order carries the amber N in inspection pill.

The receipt of a titanium plate, in quarantine awaiting inspection. 123456
Figure 431. The receipt of a titanium plate, in quarantine awaiting inspection.
  1. 1
    The order's in inspection pill.
  2. 2
    The notice: there is material in quarantine awaiting inspection. Anyone with «Edit quality» releases or rejects it from here.
  3. 3
    The receipt: number, date, supplier delivery note and who received it.
  4. 4
    The line: quantity, lot (click it to open its record in the Warehouse), heat, 3.1 certificate and final location.
  5. 5
    The result: Awaiting inspection.
  6. 6
    Inspect opens the receiving inspection.

Quality normally does it from Inspection & FAI, in the receiving inspections view; anyone with «Edit quality» and the Purchasing section can also do it here, with Inspect. Releasing or rejecting a lot is signed with your password and your inspection stamp with the receiving scope (see The electronic signature and the inspection stamps).

#The 3.1 certificate, point by point

For raw material, the 3.1 certificate is not accepted with a general «yes»: it is checked point by point against the order and against the material in front of you, and each point is answered Yes, No or N/A:

Point What is checked
Material and specification That the alloy, specification, temper and dimensions are those of the order.
Heat That the certificate's heat is the one marked on the bars or plates.
Chemical composition That each element is within the material specification (AMS, EN…).
Mechanical properties Tensile strength, yield strength, elongation and hardness within the specification.
Manufacturer's signature That it is signed by the manufacturer's authorised inspection representative, independent of production.
Traceable origin That it is issued by the manufacturer or an authorised distributor and has not been altered (crossings-out, data that does not add up, copies).

With any point answered No, the material cannot be released: the result switches to Reject on its own. For the other purchase types that are inspected, you only tick whether the certificate conforms.

The receiving inspection of the titanium plate, with the six points of the 3.1 validated and the result «Accept» (not saved or signed). 12345678
Figure 432. The receiving inspection of the titanium plate, with the six points of the 3.1 validated and the result «Accept» (not saved or signed).
  1. 1
    What is being inspected: item, supplier, quantity, heat, 3.1 certificate no. and receipt date. The scanned certificate is in the lot's documents.
  2. 2
    3.1 certificate: check it point by point against the order and the material.
  3. 3
    Mark the rest as «yes» answers «Yes» to those still unanswered: only use it after checking them.
  4. 4
    Each point, with what to look at and its Yes, No or N/A.
  5. 5
    Traceable origin: from the manufacturer or an authorised distributor and unaltered. A «No» here is a suspected counterfeit (see below).
  6. 6
    Measured hardness (optional), with its scale: «36 HRC».
  7. 7
    The result: Accept or Reject; below, the put-away location of the released lot and the notes.
  8. 8
    Release lot asks for your signature with the receiving stamp and moves the lot from quarantine to available.
How to perform the receiving inspection
  1. Open the order with the in inspection pill (In inspection filter) and its Receipts tab. You can also do it from Inspection & FAI, in the receiving inspections view.

  2. Click Inspect on the line.

  3. With the 3.1 certificate in front of you (it is in the lot's documents), answer the six points one by one; measure the hardness if the standard requires it.

  4. If everything is Yes (or N/A), choose Accept, pick the put-away location and click Release lot; if something fails, choose Reject, write the reason and click Reject lot.

  5. Sign with your password: the receiving stamp is filled in automatically.

Accept: the lot becomes available in its location and MRP and reservations can use it. Reject: it stays blocked in the quarantine area, with a supplier NCR open and the rejection in its PPM. The 3.1 validation is kept with the receipt.

#Suspected counterfeit material

If the certificate is not traceable —it is not issued by the manufacturer or an authorised distributor, its data does not add up or it looks altered—, answer No for Traceable origin. The dialog warns that it is a suspected counterfeit part and, when the lot is rejected, the NCR is opened with that cause.

With the certificate's origin answered «No»: suspected counterfeit (not saved). 123456
Figure 433. With the certificate's origin answered «No»: suspected counterfeit (not saved).
  1. 1
    Traceable origin answered No.
  2. 2
    The warning: rejecting it opens the NCR as a suspected counterfeit part, and it is not returned to the supplier.
  3. 3
    The result switches to Reject on its own: with a point answered «No» it cannot be released.
  4. 4
    The lot will be blocked in quarantine, with its supplier NCR.
  5. 5
    Rejection reason (required): what does not add up on the certificate.
  6. 6
    Reject lot blocks it, opens the NCR and asks for your signature.

This is how a rejected lot looks in the Receipts tab: the Inconel 718 bar whose certificate had titanium above the AMS maximum.

A rejected receipt: the Inconel 718 bar and its NCR. 123
Figure 434. A rejected receipt: the Inconel 718 bar and its NCR.
  1. 1
    The receipt and the Rejected line.
  2. 2
    The result: inspector, date, the 3.1 not OK, the hardness and the reason.
  3. 3
    The supplier NCR (open it in Nonconformances): from it, the corrective action is requested from the supplier (SCAR).

#The order's invoices

The «Invoices» tab of a received order: the three-way match and its invoice. 123
Figure 435. The «Invoices» tab of a received order: the three-way match and its invoice.
  1. 1
    The three-way match: what was ordered, received (valued at the order price), invoiced (net amounts before VAT) and received, not invoiced.
  2. 2
    Record invoice: the supplier's invoice (Finance, with «Edit payables»).
  3. 3
    Each invoice: supplier number, date, due date, payment status and total. Click it to open it in Payables.

#More options

The ⋮ menu of a draft. 123
Figure 436. The ⋮ menu of a draft.
  1. 1
    Add line and Edit order: supplier, type, dates and notes (draft only).
  2. 2
    Order PDF to send to the supplier.
  3. 3
    Delete draft: deletes it completely. On a sent order with no receipts, Cancel order.

The options depend on the status: on a sent order, Record confirmation and Receive appear; on a confirmed one, Change confirmed date; and on any order that is not a draft, Record invoice for Finance.

#What each profile sees

The same order as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: he receives, but without prices. 123
Figure 437. The same order as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: he receives, but without prices.
  1. 1
    He has Receive, but not Edit purchasing: no confirming or cancelling.
  2. 2
    Without See costs, the banner has no amount and no amount invoiced.
  3. 3
    Price and amount show a padlock.
The receipt in inspection as Inés (Purchasing) sees it. 12
Figure 438. The receipt in inspection as Inés (Purchasing) sees it.
  1. 1
    Without Edit quality, the notice says the material cannot be used until Quality inspects it…
  2. 2
    …and there is no Inspect button.

#Tips

Supply

Suppliers

The approved supplier list and its control: each supplier's approval and when it expires, its approved scope (special processes with their Nadcap, materials, calibrations, services), the signed evaluation that decides the approval, the corrective actions requested (SCAR), its 12-month punctuality (OTD) and quality (PPM), its prices, its purchases and invoices and its tax details.

Who uses it: Purchasing and quality; for reference, warehouse, planning and managementAccess: «Suppliers» section; to create and edit, «Edit suppliers»; scope, customers' sources and evaluation, «Approve suppliers»; contact details, «Contact data»; amounts, «See costs»

In aerospace you cannot buy from just anyone: EN 9100 / AS9100 (clause 8.4, control of externally provided products and services) requires an approved supplier list (ASL) with what each supplier is approved for, evaluating suppliers, monitoring how they perform and asking them for a corrective action when they fail. Suppliers is that control: each supplier with its approval (whether you may buy from it and until when), its approved scope (which processes, materials or services), its signed evaluations, its corrective actions and its terms.

The section has four views, chosen at the top: Suppliers (the supplier list), Approved list (each scope of each supplier with its expiry), Evaluations and SCAR. The one you choose is remembered for next time.

Acronyms you will see throughout the section:

  • OTD (On-Time Delivery): the share of order lines that arrived complete by their date.
  • PPM (parts per million): how many units were rejected per million received.
  • Nadcap: the aerospace industry accreditation for special processes (heat treating, chemical processing, non-destructive testing, shot peening…), process by process and with an expiry date.
  • SCAR (Supplier Corrective Action Request): the corrective action requested from a supplier for a nonconformity of theirs.

#The supplier list

Suppliers: the views, the indicators, the search box, the filters and each supplier with its approval and its rating. 12345678
Figure 439. Suppliers: the views, the indicators, the search box, the filters and each supplier with its approval and its rating.
  1. 1
    The section's four views: Suppliers, Approved list, Evaluations and SCAR. Its ⓘ explains what Aeromec checks when a purchase is sent.
  2. 2
    Approved suppliers: active suppliers with a valid approval against all active suppliers. They make up the approved supplier list.
  3. 3
    Average OTD and average PPM over 12 months, weighted by each supplier's lines and units.
  4. 4
    Approvals to renew: those expiring within 60 days or already expired (red if any has expired).
  5. 5
    Purchases 12 months: what was bought, before VAT (with «See costs»).
  6. 6
    The search box: by name, code, tax ID, VAT number, city, country or process («anodising», «NDT»…).
  7. 7
    New supplier adds one. To its left, Export CSV.
  8. 8
    The filters: active, by type (raw material, special processes, tooling, calibration & services), approval expiring or expired, conditional or suspended and inactive.
The list columns. 1234567
Figure 440. The list columns.
  1. 1
    The supplier: name, code, type and city.
  2. 2
    The approval (approved, conditional, pending or suspended) and its expiry: «Until…», in amber «Expires in N days» or in red «Expired N days ago».
  3. 3
    The certifications: hover over each acronym to see what it certifies.
  4. 4
    The special processes a special-process supplier can perform.
  5. 5
    12-month OTD and PPM, in green, amber or red; a dash if there is no data yet.
  6. 6
    The agreed lead time.
  7. 7
    What was purchased in 12 months: sort the column to see who you depend on most.

The certifications you will see:

Acronym What it certifies
AS9100 (EN 9100) Aerospace quality management system: ISO 9001 plus the industry's requirements (product safety, configuration management, counterfeit-part prevention).
ISO 9001 General quality management system.
NADCAP The aerospace industry accreditation for special processes, audited process by process by the PRI (Performance Review Institute): HT heat treating, CP chemical processing (anodising, passivation, conversion coating), NDT non-destructive testing, CT coatings.
ISO 17025 Competence of testing and calibration laboratories, accredited in Spain by ENAC.

The certifications on the list say what the supplier holds; what it is approved for with you, process by process and with its expiry, is its scope (see below).

#Approval: conditional and suspended suppliers

The «Conditional or suspended» filter: suppliers with restrictions. 123
Figure 441. The «Conditional or suspended» filter: suppliers with restrictions.
  1. 1
    The Conditional or suspended filter.
  2. 2
    A conditional supplier: you may buy from it applying the additional controls of its evaluation (tightened receiving inspection, monitoring of its deliveries); and its approval expires soon.
  3. 3
    A suspended supplier, with its approval expired (row in red): do not buy from it.
Status What it means
Approved (green) Accepted after assessing its quality system (audit or certificates) and its deliveries.
Conditional (amber) Accepted with restrictions: you may buy from it applying the additional controls set out in its evaluation.
Pending (grey) Under assessment: a new supplier starts like this until its first signed evaluation. No purchases are sent to it.
Suspended (red) You may not buy from it until a new signed evaluation approves it again.

An approval has an expiry date: the date by which the supplier must be re-evaluated. From 60 days before, it shows in amber on the list and counts in Approvals to renew; once past, in red. Status and expiry only change with a signed evaluation (see below): nobody changes them by hand. And when a purchase is sent, Aeromec checks that the supplier is approved or conditional and not expired (see Purchasing).

The record of a suspended supplier. 1234
Figure 442. The record of a suspended supplier.
  1. 1
    The code, the type and the Suspended and Inactive pills (inactive suppliers do not appear in the purchasing or routing pickers).
  2. 2
    Approval: status, expiry (here, overdue), the last evaluation (the extraordinary one that suspended it), the material source, how many scopes have expired and how many SCARs are overdue, its certifications and its special processes.
  3. 3
    The warning: no orders should be placed with it. If you tried to send one, Aeromec would not allow it.
  4. 4
    With no purchases in 12 months there is no OTD or PPM to work out.

#The supplier record: 12-month rating

The record of Metales Especiales Iberia, the titanium plate supplier. 12345678
Figure 443. The record of Metales Especiales Iberia, the titanium plate supplier.
  1. 1
    The code and type, the approval, the name and the city.
  2. 2
    Edit (the pencil): type, tax details, material source, certifications, processes and terms.
  3. 3
    The tabs: Summary, Items (prices), Scope, Evaluations, SCAR, Purchases, Invoices, Documents and Changes.
  4. 4
    The banner: 12-month OTD and PPM, open POs, open NCRs and 12-month purchases.
  5. 5
    Approval: status, expiry (and how long is left), the last evaluation with its score, the material source and the certifications.
  6. 6
    12-month rating: the OTD with its bar and the target mark (95%), the evaluated lines, the PPM with the units received and rejected, the open NCRs and the last order.
  7. 7
    Details & terms: lead time (the one MRP uses when the price entry has none of its own), minimum order, payment terms, and what is outstanding and overdue. Below, the contact details.
  8. 8
    Tax details: country, tax ID, VAT number, how VAT treats their invoices and which expense account they are posted to (see below).

#Material source

The material source says where what a supplier sells comes from: Manufacturer (the mill or the rolling plant), Authorised distributor of the manufacturer, Non-authorised distributor or Service or process (those who process your parts). Buying raw material from a non-authorised distributor is the first risk of counterfeit material: a copied certificate or a heat that is not what it claims. Aeromec shows it in amber on the record and warns when you buy raw material from it (see Purchasing); require traceability to the mill and, if in doubt, a check test.

Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS: conditional and a non-authorised distributor. 123
Figure 444. Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS: conditional and a non-authorised distributor.
  1. 1
    Conditional, with its expiry close.
  2. 2
    The material source: a non-authorised distributor, in amber. Its raw material purchases carry the counterfeit-risk warning.
  3. 3
    The expiry warning: it is time to re-evaluate it.

#The approved scope and the customers' sources

A supplier being approved does not mean you can order anything from it: its approved scope says what it is approved for and until when. Each scope is one of these types:

What is approved Example Who approves it
Special process Shot peening to AMS 2430, anodising to MIL-A-8625, penetrant testing to ASTM E1417 Nadcap for that process (or the customer itself)
Material 4340 and 15-5PH steels in forged bar Aeromec, with its audit or questionnaire
Calibration Dimensional and temperature ENAC (ISO 17025 accredited laboratory)
Service Electrical maintenance of machines Aeromec

When a work order phase is subcontracted, Aeromec looks at that phase's special process (set on the routing phase, see Routings & costing) and only lets the purchase be sent to a supplier with that process in force in its scope. If its Nadcap expires, its purchases for that process stop until the new certificate is recorded.

The «Scope» tab of Granallados de Precisión: its shot peening Nadcap has expired. 1234
Figure 445. The «Scope» tab of Granallados de Precisión: its shot peening Nadcap has expired.
  1. 1
    Approved scope: what the supplier is approved for; its ⓘ explains what is checked against it.
  2. 2
    New scope adds one (with «Approve suppliers»).
  3. 3
    Each scope: the process and its specification, who approves it (Nadcap), the certificate and the expiry, with its status: in force, expiring soon or expired, as here. Shot peening purchases from this supplier stop (PC-2026-0165, in Purchasing). Click it to edit it.
  4. 4
    Approved by customers: the customers that have it on their approved sources list for a process, with their clause (here, Aerointegra, QR-14 annex B).
Editing the expired scope to record the renewed certificate (not saved). 1234567
Figure 446. Editing the expired scope to record the renewed certificate (not saved).
  1. 1
    What is approved: special process, material, service or calibration.
  2. 2
    The special process: the same catalogue as the routing phases, so that Aeromec can compare them.
  3. 3
    The scope: specifications, materials or classes it covers.
  4. 4
    Approved by: Nadcap, the customer, Aeromec (audit or questionnaire), ENAC or other.
  5. 5
    The certificate or approval reference: the renewed Nadcap number goes here.
  6. 6
    From and Expires: with the new expiry date, the scope is in force again.
  7. 7
    Active: untick it if the supplier stops doing that process. Delete, at the bottom, removes it.
How to record a supplier's renewed Nadcap
  1. Ask the supplier for the renewed Nadcap certificate and upload it to the Documents tab of its record.

  2. In the Scope tab, click the expired scope.

  3. Type the new certificate number in Certificate or reference and set its new date in Expires.

  4. Click Save.

The scope is in force again and purchases for that process can be sent: in the demo data, PC-2026-0165 to Granallados de Precisión.

Some customers only accept their own subcontractors for each special process (Aerointegra in its QR-14, Halcón in its PQA-110). Those customer-approved sources are kept on the customer's record, Approved sources tab (see Customers), and shown here under Approved by customers. If the customer requires them, a purchase of a phase of its parts from a supplier that is not on its list for that process is not sent, even if the supplier is approved.

#The approved supplier list

Suppliers, «Approved list» view: each scope of each supplier with its approval and its expiry. 1234567
Figure 447. Suppliers, «Approved list» view: each scope of each supplier with its approval and its expiry.
  1. 1
    Approved suppliers: those with some scope in force, not counting suspended or inactive ones.
  2. 2
    Special processes in force: how many processes you have covered with their approval in force.
  3. 3
    Expiring in 60 days and Expired: what must be renewed now.
  4. 4
    The search box: by supplier, process, specification or certificate number.
  5. 5
    The filters: in force, special processes, expiring in 60 days, expired and all.
  6. 6
    Export CSV: the list for the auditor or to send to a customer.
  7. 7
    The scope, the approval (certificate and body) and the expiry, with its status: expiring soon in amber, expired in red. Click a row to open the supplier.

#The supplier evaluation

The evaluation is the periodic review of each supplier with the period's data (the last 12 months): its OTD, its PPM, its NCRs (nonconformances), the SCARs requested and how many expired without a response, and its expired scopes. With them Aeromec works out a score and a rating (A, B or C) and proposes a decision. Quality decides and signs (see The electronic signature):

  • Approve, until a date (by default, one year from now).
  • Conditional, until a date and with the additional controls written in the comments.
  • Suspend, with the reason.

It is the only way to change the approval and its expiry, and it stays in the supplier's signed history. There are three types: initial (a new supplier, which starts as pending), periodic (every year, before it expires) and extraordinary (after a serious problem: that is how Tratamientos Superficiales Levante was suspended).

Suppliers, «Evaluations» view: all the signed evaluations, most recent first. 12345
Figure 448. Suppliers, «Evaluations» view: all the signed evaluations, most recent first.
  1. 1
    The search box, by number (EVP-…) or supplier.
  2. 2
    The filters: signed, due (approval expiring within 60 days: the periodic evaluation is due) and draft.
  3. 3
    The evaluation: number, supplier, type and date.
  4. 4
    OTD, PPM and the score with its rating (A in green, B in amber, C in red); a dash if there were no purchases in the period.
  5. 5
    The signed decision (approve, conditional or suspend), until when, and who signed it.
The «Evaluations» tab of Granallados de Precisión: its approval expires this month. 123
Figure 449. The «Evaluations» tab of Granallados de Precisión: its approval expires this month.
  1. 1
    Approval and its expiry are only changed by the signed evaluation.
  2. 2
    Evaluate prepares the evaluation with the last 12 months' data (with «Approve suppliers»).
  3. 3
    The history: each signed evaluation with its type, date, score, OTD, PPM, approval end date, comments, who signed it and the decision.

Clicking Evaluate opens the Evaluate the supplier dialog: at the top, the period and the type (initial, periodic or extraordinary); below, a band with the OTD, the PPM, the NCRs, the SCARs (and the overdue ones) and the score with its rating, the formula, and a warning if it has expired scopes or if there were no purchases in the period (then the decision is based on the audit or questionnaire). Then the decision with Aeromec's proposal, the Approved until date and the comments, required for conditional or suspend. Sign the evaluation asks for your password.

How to re-evaluate a supplier
  1. In the Evaluations view, filter Due (60 days) (or, in Suppliers, Approval expiring or expired) and open the supplier.

  2. Ask for the renewed certificates (AS9100, Nadcap for its processes) or carry out the audit, and upload them to Documents. If a process certificate has changed, update it in Scope.

  3. In the Evaluations tab, click Evaluate and review the figures, the score and the proposal.

  4. Choose the decision and the Approved until date; if it is conditional or suspend, write why and which controls apply.

  5. Click Sign the evaluation and sign with your password.

The approval and its expiry change, the evaluation is signed in the history (and in the Signatures tab) and the supplier leaves Approvals to renew.

#SCAR: the supplier's corrective action

When a supplier delivers something nonconforming (a supplier NCR, in Nonconformances), Quality asks it for a corrective action: the SCAR. It is created from the NCR with Request corrective action (SCAR) and goes through these statuses:

Status What it means What you do
Not sent Created from the NCR, with its response due date (30 days by default). Send to supplier, with the PDF for the supplier.
Sent Waiting for the response; overdue if the due date passes without it. Record the response: containment, root cause, corrective and preventive action.
Responded To verify. Close with verification (effective or not, signed) or Reject the response with the reason and a new due date: back to Sent.
Closed Verified and signed. Look it up.

Overdue and ineffective SCARs count in the supplier's evaluation.

Suppliers, «SCAR» view: the open corrective actions. 1234567
Figure 450. Suppliers, «SCAR» view: the open corrective actions.
  1. 1
    Open SCARs: not sent, sent and responded.
  2. 2
    Overdue: sent, past their due date and without a response.
  3. 3
    Responded, to verify: it is up to Quality to close or reject them.
  4. 4
    Effective (closed): how many of the closed ones were effective.
  5. 5
    The filters: open, overdue, to verify and all. The search box finds by number, supplier, NCR or part.
  6. 6
    Each SCAR: number, supplier, its NCR with the part, the response due date and the status. The one for Tratamientos Térmicos Andaluces is responded…
  7. 7
    …and the one for Tratamientos Superficiales Levante is overdue: the due date says how many days ago.
The Tratamientos Térmicos Andaluces SCAR, with the supplier's response to be verified. 123456
Figure 451. The Tratamientos Térmicos Andaluces SCAR, with the supplier's response to be verified.
  1. 1
    The number, the supplier and the status; below, the NCR, the part and the nonconformity.
  2. 2
    Opens the NCR it comes from.
  3. 3
    Close with verification, the next action; in the ⋮ menu, Reject the response and PDF for the supplier.
  4. 4
    The tabs: the SCAR, its Signatures (the closure is signed) and its Documents (the supplier's response, its evidence).
  5. 5
    Nonconformity: what happened, the requirement not met, the NCR, the part, the date and the response due date.
  6. 6
    Supplier response: the containment, the root cause, the corrective action and the preventive one, and when it responded.
Closing the SCAR with the verification of its effectiveness (not saved or signed). 123
Figure 452. Closing the SCAR with the verification of its effectiveness (not saved or signed).
  1. 1
    Effectiveness check (required): how you have confirmed that the action works; for example, the hardness of the following lots.
  2. 2
    Effective: untick it if it was not; an ineffective SCAR counts in its evaluation.
  3. 3
    Save asks for your signature and closes the SCAR: it no longer changes.
How to request and close a SCAR
  1. In the supplier's NCR (in Nonconformances), click Request corrective action (SCAR): it is created with its due date and opened.

  2. Click Send to supplier and send it the PDF for the supplier (⋮ menu).

  3. When it responds, Record the response: containment, root cause, corrective and preventive action. Attach its report in Documents.

  4. If the response is not enough, Reject the response with the reason and a new due date.

  5. When you can check it (the following lots, an audit), Close with verification: write how you verified it, tick whether it was effective and sign.

The SCAR is closed and signed, and counts in the supplier's next evaluation.

#Prices, purchases and invoices

The «Items» tab: the supplier's prices. 123
Figure 453. The «Items» tab: the supplier's prices.
  1. 1
    Prices are added and changed from the item record, Suppliers tab (Items).
  2. 2
    Each item: the supplier reference, its lead time, the minimum lot and the price.
  3. 3
    Preferred: the supplier MRP proposes by default for that item.
The «Purchases» tab: every order placed with the supplier. 12
Figure 454. The «Purchases» tab: every order placed with the supplier.
  1. 1
    Each purchase order: number, type and date. Click it to open it in Purchasing.
  2. 2
    Its status and amount.
The «Invoices» tab: the supplier's invoices with their order and payment status. 12
Figure 455. The «Invoices» tab: the supplier's invoices with their order and payment status.
  1. 1
    Each invoice: the supplier's number, the date and the order it relates to. Click it to open it in Payables.
  2. 2
    Its payment status (unpaid, paid, overdue) and its total.

#Tax details and expense account

The Tax details card says how the Tax Agency treats the supplier's invoices, and their country decides it:

  • Spain: a domestic purchase, with input VAT that is deducted.
  • Another EU country: an intra-Community acquisition. The invoice arrives without VAT and the company self-assesses it: it declares it both as output VAT and as deductible VAT (it costs nothing, but it is declared on form 303). It also goes to the SII, form 349 and, for goods, Intrastat. Their VAT number is needed (the intra-EU VAT number, with their country prefix: FR, DE, IT…).
  • Outside the EU: an import. VAT is paid at customs with the import declaration (SAD), not on the supplier's invoice.

The expense account is the sub-account of the Spanish chart of accounts in which Accounting posts their invoices. Blank, it is chosen by the purchase order type (raw material, tools, subcontracting, calibration); for overhead suppliers (power, maintenance, rent, insurance) it is worth setting it so their invoices do not end up in «Other services».

Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS (Toulouse): intra-Community acquisitions. 1234
Figure 456. Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS (Toulouse): intra-Community acquisitions.
  1. 1
    The country, with the EU badge.
  2. 2
    Their VAT number, with the FR prefix.
  3. 3
    Its invoices: without VAT, which is self-assessed on form 303; they go to the SII, form 349 and Intrastat.
  4. 4
    Expense account: no account of its own, so the one for each purchase type.
Electricidad Industrial del Aljarafe: an overhead supplier with its expense account. 12
Figure 457. Electricidad Industrial del Aljarafe: an overhead supplier with its expense account.
  1. 1
    A domestic supplier: its VAT is deducted.
  2. 2
    Its expense account: 62800000 «Electricity, water and gas», where Accounting posts its invoices.

#Editing a supplier

Editing a supplier (not saved). 1234567
Figure 458. Editing a supplier (not saved).
  1. 1
    The type: raw material, special processes, tooling, calibration or services. Next to it, the code; below, name, tax ID and city.
  2. 2
    Tax details: the country (from a list: it decides the VAT on their invoices) and the VAT number, with their country prefix, required by the SII and form 349.
  3. 3
    Expense account: the group 6 sub-account their invoices go to; blank, by the type of each purchase.
  4. 4
    The material source: manufacturer, authorised or non-authorised distributor, or service. With a non-authorised distributor, Aeromec warns when you buy raw material from it.
  5. 5
    The certifications it holds: click them to tick or untick.
  6. 6
    The special processes it can perform (only for processing suppliers). What it is approved for in each one goes in its scope.
  7. 7
    The terms (lead time, payment, minimum order) and, further down, the contact, the active status and the notes.

Approval and its expiry are no longer on this form: at the bottom, a notice reminds you that the signed evaluation changes them (see above). A new supplier starts as pending until its initial evaluation.

#What each profile sees

The same supplier as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: no costs, no contact details and no editing. 1234
Figure 459. The same supplier as José Luis (Warehouse) sees it: no costs, no contact details and no editing.
  1. 1
    Without the Payables section there is no Invoices tab; without the audit log, no Changes either. And without Edit suppliers, no pencil.
  2. 2
    The banner without Purchases 12 months.
  3. 3
    Without See costs: the minimum order shows a padlock, and there is no outstanding or overdue amount.
  4. 4
    Without Contact data: «Hidden by your access profile».

#Tips

Resources

Work centres

The shop's machines and workstations: their capacity, working days and hours, status (operational, under maintenance or down), hourly rate, who is qualified to work on each one and the qualification it requires.

Who uses it: Shop supervisor, planning, engineering office and managementAccess: «Work centres» section; to add, edit, change the status and qualify people, «Edit centres & people»; to see the rate, «See costs»

A work centre is every place where a routing operation is done: a machine (the saw, the 3- and 5-axis mills, the CNC lathe, the mill-turn, the wire EDM, the grinder, the drill), a manual station (the fitting and marking bench) or a measuring station (the CMM, coordinate measuring machine, and the final inspection area).

For each centre Aeromec keeps what the other sections need:

  • Capacity and calendar: how many shifts it works, which days, when its working day starts and its exceptions (a Saturday, a maintenance stop). With that, Planning works out the hour-by-hour forecast of each queue and the load map.
  • Status: operational, under maintenance or down. A centre that is not operational adds no capacity.
  • Hourly rate: what an hour of machine time costs (without the operator). The routing cost breakdown and the actual cost of the work orders (WOs) use it.
  • Qualified people: who can work on it and at what level. The shop-floor terminal does not let anyone start an operation if they are not qualified.
  • Required qualification: the one anyone working on it must hold in force (in the demo, the 5-axis one on F5-01 and F5-02). Without it, the terminal does not let them start either.
  1. 1CentreShifts, working days, shift start, rate and status.
  2. 2CalendarHolidays, stoppages, maintenance and special shifts for the plant or the machine.
  3. 3PlanningThe machine queue with its hour-by-hour forecast and the load against capacity.
  4. 4QualificationsWho can work on the machine, at what level and with which qualification in force.
  5. 5Shop-floor terminalThe qualified machinist books the operation; the machine counts its time.
  6. 6Actual costMachine hours × rate, plus each person's labour.
What a centre's data is used for. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The list of centres

Work centres: the capacity and load indicators, the search box, the filters and the list of machines and stations. 12345678
Figure 460. Work centres: the capacity and load indicators, the search box, the filters and the list of machines and stations.
  1. 1
    Centres running: the active centres working normally, out of all active centres.
  2. 2
    Weekly capacity: the hours the running centres can deliver in a normal week (those in maintenance or down do not add up).
  3. 3
    Open hours on WOs: the work still to do on the operations assigned to the centres, in planned, released or in-progress WOs.
  4. 4
    In maintenance or down: how many centres are not running right now; amber if there is any.
  5. 5
    The search box finds a centre by its code, name, machine model, building or type.
  6. 6
    The filters group by type (Machining, Turning, Inspection & measuring) and isolate those In maintenance or down and the Inactive ones. Each one shows its count.
  7. 7
    Export CSV downloads the centres you are looking at, to open them in a spreadsheet.
  8. 8
    New work centre adds a machine or a station (with the «Edit centres & people» permission).

Centres are listed in the order of the part flow (the saw first, inspection last), set with the Sort order field of each centre. Click a row to open its record on the right.

The list columns: status, capacity, qualified people, open load, hours worked and rate. 1234567
Figure 461. The list columns: status, capacity, qualified people, open load, hours worked and rate.
  1. 1
    A centre in maintenance is highlighted and its Status says since when and why (the full reason when you hover over it).
  2. 2
    Capacity: hours per week and number of shifts.
  3. 3
    Qualified: how many people may work on the centre. With only one (or none) the ⚠ warning shows: if that person is absent, the machine stops.
  4. 4
    Open hours and weeks of load: the bar fills up with one week of work and turns green, amber or red (bottleneck).
  5. 5
    Hours 30 d: what the machine has worked (booked hours) in the last 30 days.
  6. 6
    Rate €/h: the cost of one machine hour. Only shown with the «See costs» permission.
  7. 7
    The footer counts the centres you see and adds up their capacity and open hours.

#A centre's record

The record has the Summary, Qualified people, Gauges, Calendar, Documents (manuals, maintenance plans, photos…) tabs and, with the audit permission, Changes (who changed what and when). The Summary brings together the essentials of the machine in cards (in Identification, the required qualification, if any). With the Maintenance section, the Maintenance button in the header opens its equipment (its plans, its work orders and its history; see Maintenance) and a line warns of its open work order and its next maintenance.

Record of centre F5-02, «Summary» tab: a 5-axis machine working Monday to Saturday. 123456789
Figure 462. Record of centre F5-02, «Summary» tab: a 5-axis machine working Monday to Saturday.
  1. 1
    Code and type, status (running, maintenance or down), name, machine model and building.
  2. 2
    The Edit pencil opens the centre form: shifts, working days, shift start, rate…
  3. 3
    Maintenance: its equipment record, with its plans and its history.
  4. 4
    The tabs: qualified people, gauges at the station, calendar, documents and changes.
  5. 5
    The key figures: weekly capacity, shifts, qualified people, open hours and hours in the last 30 days.
  6. 6
    Current status with its date and reason; Change status switches it to maintenance, down or running.
  7. 7
    Working days (the company's or the machine's own, as here, Monday to Saturday), shift start and plannable capacity per day and per week.
  8. 8
    Load & utilisation: open operations and hours, weeks of load, hours worked in 30 days and utilisation.
  9. 9
    Machine rate: the hourly cost without labour (which is added separately with each person's cost).
Capacity & shifts field What it is
Shifts and Hours per shift How many shifts the machine works and the productive hours of each one (the company's, in Settings).
Nominal capacity Shifts × hours per shift × 5 days: the yardstick the load is compared with.
Working days The company's or the machine's own (for example, Monday to Saturday).
Shift start The time from which each day's capacity is counted; empty, the company's first shift.
Plannable capacity The one planning really uses: shift length × planning efficiency on each of the machine's working days.
How to put a machine into maintenance (or bring it back to running)
  1. Open the centre and, on the Current status card, click Change status.

  2. Choose the Status: Running, Maintenance (planned stop: preventive, spindle replacement…) or Down (breakdown or unplanned stop).

  3. Type the Reason: what is happening and until when («spindle replacement, back on Thursday»). It is shown in the list of centres.

  4. Click Save. The current date and time become the start of the new status.

While it is not running, the centre adds no capacity and its record warns not to schedule work on it. When it goes back to running, the previous reason is cleared.
Change status of the wire EDM EDM-01, in maintenance. 123
Figure 463. Change status of the wire EDM EDM-01, in maintenance.
  1. 1
    Status: running, maintenance or down. Changing it records the current date and time.
  2. 2
    Reason: what is happening and until when.
  3. 3
    Save applies the change; Cancel closes without touching anything.

#Adding or editing a centre

Edit centre: identification, required qualification, capacity and shifts, own calendar and rate. 123456789
Figure 464. Edit centre: identification, required qualification, capacity and shifts, own calendar and rate.
  1. 1
    Centre Code and Name (required). The code is the one shown in routings, queues and the terminal.
  2. 2
    Centre type: saw, 3- or 5-axis milling, lathe, mill-turn, EDM, grinder, drill, bench work, CMM or inspection. It decides to which machines an operation can be moved in the queues.
  3. 3
    Sort order: lowest first, following the part flow.
  4. 4
    Active: inactive centres do not appear in pickers or planning. Deactivate rather than delete: history is kept.
  5. 5
    Shifts: 1, 2 or 3. Nominal capacity comes from here: shifts × shift hours × 5 days.
  6. 6
    Shift start: from what time each day's capacity counts. Empty, the company's first shift.
  7. 7
    Required qualification: the one anyone working on the machine must hold in force (see below). Left empty, being qualified on the machine is enough.
  8. 8
    The machine's own working days (here, Monday to Saturday). If you tick the same ones as the company, it has no calendar of its own.
  9. 9
    Hourly rate: depreciation, energy and maintenance per machine hour, excluding labour. Only with «See costs».

Adding a centre works the same from New work centre: fill in at least the code, name, type and shifts. Capacity is no longer typed in: Aeromec works it out from the shifts, the company's hours per shift and the calendar. A centre can only be deleted while it has no open operations, no booked hours and no qualified people; otherwise, deactivate it.

#Qualified people

«Qualified people» tab of centre F5-01. 12345
Figure 465. «Qualified people» tab of centre F5-01.
  1. 1
    The tab shows the number of people qualified on the machine.
  2. 2
    Qualify a person adds someone with their level.
  3. 3
    The ⓘ explains the qualification levels.
  4. 4
    Each person with their role, since when they have been qualified and their level: 1 · supervised, 2 · independent or 3 · trainer. Click the row to open their record.
  5. 5
    The pencil changes the level or removes the qualification.

A qualification is the same thing seen from both sides: what you add here appears in the person's Machine qualifications tab (People), and vice versa.

New qualification on the centre: person, level and date. 1234
Figure 466. New qualification on the centre: person, level and date.
  1. 1
    Person: only those not yet qualified on this centre are listed.
  2. 2
    Level: 1 supervised, 2 independent (the one suggested) or 3 trainer.
  3. 3
    Qualified since: the date of the training or assessment (today by default).
  4. 4
    Save creates the qualification.

#The qualification the machine requires

Some machines, besides being qualified on them, require a qualification in force: a 5-axis centre, for example, may only be run by someone who has passed the 5-axis training and assessment and renews it every two years. It is chosen in the Required qualification field of the centre form and shows in the Identification card of its record.

Work centre F5-01 requires the 5-axis qualification (CP-01). 12
Figure 467. Work centre F5-01 requires the 5-axis qualification (CP-01).
  1. 1
    Required qualification: the code and name of the qualification anyone working here must hold in force.
  2. 2
    Who is qualified: on top of that, each of them needs the qualification in force to start.

With a required qualification, when an operation is started or resumed on the machine Aeromec checks that whoever is doing it holds it in force that day: if it has expired or been revoked, the terminal does not let them («Your qualification for this has expired») and, when they identify themselves, it warns them which machines they cannot work on (Shop-floor terminal). In the demo, David Fernández has an expired 5-axis qualification and cannot start on F5-01 or F5-02 until his requalification. Each person's qualifications, their expiry dates and the training that renews them are kept in Competence & training and shown in the Competences tab of People.

#Gauges at the station

«Gauges» tab of centre F5-02: the measuring equipment at the station and its calibration. 123
Figure 468. «Gauges» tab of centre F5-02: the measuring equipment at the station and its calibration.
  1. 1
    The measuring instruments kept at the station (calipers, micrometers, gauges…).
  2. 2
    A warning if any is overdue or out of service: it cannot be used for measuring until it is recalibrated or withdrawn.
  3. 3
    Each gauge with its type, its range, the next calibration and its status: in date, due soon, overdue or out of service. Click to open its record in Gauges.

#The machine calendar

The Calendar tab shows the load for the next 14 days and everything that changes the machine's working day: its own exceptions (a stoppage, maintenance, a Saturday), those for the whole plant (a closure for a stock count) and the holidays. It is the same work calendar as in Planning, filtered for this machine.

«Calendar» tab of centre F5-01: two weeks of load and the machine and plant exceptions. 123456
Figure 469. «Calendar» tab of centre F5-01: two weeks of load and the machine and plant exceptions.
  1. 1
    Load over the next 14 days: one bar per day, with the queue's occupation against that day's capacity (days without a shift are left empty).
  2. 2
    The next exception affecting the machine and how far off it is.
  3. 3
    Show past days and Holidays show or hide those rows.
  4. 4
    A holiday, with its scope. Holidays are changed in Settings; here they carry a padlock.
  5. 5
    A machine exception: here, a special 8 h shift on a Saturday (6.8 h of capacity with the efficiency), with who created it.
  6. 6
    New exception adds a stoppage, maintenance or a special shift (with the «Edit calendar» permission).
New calendar exception, already scoped to the machine. 123456
Figure 470. New calendar exception, already scoped to the machine.
  1. 1
    From and To (optional): one day or a range (one exception is created per day; one year at most).
  2. 2
    Scope: this machine, another one or the whole plant.
  3. 3
    Type: closure (whole plant only), stoppage, maintenance or special shift.
  4. 4
    Shift hours: 0 = no work; with a special shift, that day's working hours (capacity applies the efficiency).
  5. 5
    Reason: preventive maintenance, catch-up Saturday, stock-count closure…
  6. 6
    Save: the queue forecast and the load map take it into account at once.

#What changes with your profile

The same record seen by Antonio (shop supervisor): without the «See costs» permission, the rate is hidden. 12
Figure 471. The same record seen by Antonio (shop supervisor): without the «See costs» permission, the rate is hidden.
  1. 1
    Capacity, calendar and load look the same.
  2. 2
    Without See costs the rate is not read: the database returns it empty and a padlock is shown instead.

Resources

People

The people in the shop: which machines they can work on and at what level, which processes they can sign off, their qualifications and training with their validity, how they identify themselves at the shop-floor terminal (badge and PIN), what they are doing right now and how many hours they have worked.

Who uses it: Shop supervisor, administration and managementAccess: «People» section; to add, edit and qualify, «Edit centres & people»; to see the hourly cost, «See staff rates»; for email and phone, «Contact data»; the Competences tab, with the «Competence & training» section

People is the shop's workforce: operators, CNC programmers, inspectors and every other role. For each person Aeromec keeps:

  • Their machine qualifications, with a level (1 · supervised, 2 · autonomous, 3 · trainer). The shop-floor terminal does not let anyone start an operation on a machine they are not qualified on.
  • Their process qualifications: what they can do or sign off besides running machines, such as releasing an FAI (first article inspection per EN 9102 / AS9102), signing the CoC (certificate of conformity that goes with each shipment), programming the CMM or doing dye penetrant non-destructive testing (NDT).
  • Their competences: the qualifications, training and awareness they hold, with when they expire. An expired qualification prevents what it enables (working on a machine that requires it, signing with a stamp…).
  • How they identify themselves at the shop-floor terminal: a badge with their barcode and a 4-digit PIN.
  • Their cost per hour (company cost), used to work out the labour in the actual cost of each work order.
  • What they are clocked on to right now and their hours over the last 30 days.

#The list of people

People: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the list with what each person is doing now. 12345678
Figure 472. People: the indicators, the search box, the filters and the list with what each person is doing now.
  1. 1
    Active people: the current workforce (leavers are deactivated and appear under the Inactive filter).
  2. 2
    Working now: how many people have an open time record at the shop-floor terminal right now.
  3. 3
    Hours logged 30 d: the hours booked to people on the time records of the last 30 days.
  4. 4
    Labour cost 30 d: those hours times each person's hourly cost (only with «See staff rates»).
  5. 5
    The search box finds a person by name, employee code, role, a machine they are qualified on or the WO they are booking.
  6. 6
    The filters by role (Machinists, Programmers, Inspectors, Others), Working now and Inactive, with their counts.
  7. 7
    Badges for the terminal: prints the barcode badges of the people you choose.
  8. 8
    New person adds someone to the workforce.
The list columns: shift, machines, processes, what they are doing now, hours and hourly cost. 1234567
Figure 473. The list columns: shift, machines, processes, what they are doing now, hours and hourly cost.
  1. 1
    Person: name, employee code and role. Click the row to open their record.
  2. 2
    Shift: morning, afternoon, night or day shift.
  3. 3
    Qualified machines: the codes of the machines they may work on (from the fifth on, «+n»).
  4. 4
    Process qualifications in short (Release FAI, Sign CoC, CNC prog.…); the full name when you hover over it.
  5. 5
    Now: the WO and machine of the latest time record they have open and since when (with several tasks at once, «(+1 task)»). The row is highlighted in green.
  6. 6
    Hours 30 d: the hours booked to the person in the last 30 days.
  7. 7
    Cost/h: their hourly cost, only with «See staff rates».

#A person's record

Record of Rafael Moreno Castillo, machinist: qualified on four machines and in the marking process. 12345678
Figure 474. Record of Rafael Moreno Castillo, machinist: qualified on four machines and in the marking process.
  1. 1
    Employee code and role, name, shift and start date. If they are booking time, a green «Working» label.
  2. 2
    Terminal badge: prints their barcode badge.
  3. 3
    Edit: role, shift, cost, contact, process qualifications and new PIN.
  4. 4
    The Machine qualifications tab, with the number of machines, and the Competences tab (see below).
  5. 5
    The key figures: qualified machines and processes, 30-day hours and, with permission, hourly cost and 30-day cost.
  6. 6
    Role & cost: code, role, shift, start date, length of service, hourly cost and cost over the last 30 days.
  7. 7
    Qualifications: each machine with its level («F5-01 · 3» means trainer on F5-01) and the processes they may perform or sign.
  8. 8
    App & shop-floor terminal: their app user, if any, and the PIN, which is never shown.

If the person is clocked on, a green notice appears below the figures: «Working now on OF-… · F5-01, since 08:12» and, if they have several tasks open at once at the terminal, how many. The Competences (see below), Documents (training certificates, NDT qualifications…) and Changes (with the audit permission) tabs complete the record.

#Machine and process qualifications

«Machine qualifications» tab: each machine with its level and since when. 1234
Figure 475. «Machine qualifications» tab: each machine with its level and since when.
  1. 1
    Qualify on a centre adds a machine with its level and date.
  2. 2
    The ⓘ explains the three levels.
  3. 3
    Each machine with its type, since when they have been qualified and their level. Click the row to open the machine.
  4. 4
    The pencil changes the level (or removes the qualification).
Level What it means
1 · Supervised Still learning: only works on the machine with someone of level 2 or 3 on the shift.
2 · Independent Sets up the machine and runs it alone.
3 · Trainer May also train others on that machine.

Process qualifications are ticked in the person's form: receiving inspection, in-process inspection, release FAI, sign CoC, CNC programming, CMM programming, NDT by liquid penetrant (level 2), marking and assembly. For example, Carmen has «Release FAI» and can approve an FAI in Inspection & FAI; anyone without it cannot.

#Competences: qualifications and training

The Competences tab brings together what the person knows how to do and can demonstrate, with its validity: those their role requires and any others they hold. There are three kinds: qualifications (running the 5-axis, inspecting, programming…, renewed every so often), training (drawing reading, load handling…) and awareness (FOD —foreign object damage—, counterfeit parts, product safety, export control). They are managed in Competence & training; here you see one person's.

«Competences» tab of David Fernández León: the 5-axis qualification, expired, and his requalification scheduled. 123456
Figure 476. «Competences» tab of David Fernández León: the 5-axis qualification, expired, and his requalification scheduled.
  1. 1
    The Competences tab (with the Competence & training section).
  2. 2
    Those their role requires or that they hold, and their training hours.
  3. 3
    Record competence (or click a row to renew it), with «Edit training».
  4. 4
    Each competence with when it was obtained, when it expires, its level and who requires it: their role or a machine («required by F5-01 · F5-02»). This one, expired: he cannot work on those machines.
  5. 5
    An awareness competence (FOD), in force: it is renewed every year.
  6. 6
    Their training: the 5-axis requalification, scheduled; the others, passed or not.
Status What it means
In force They hold it and it is in date.
Expiring soon It expires within the next 30 days: its renewal has to be planned.
Expired or Revoked It no longer counts: it blocks what it enables until it is renewed.
Missing Their role requires it and they do not hold it.

Some qualifications enable something and, unless they are in force, Aeromec does not allow it:

  • Working on a machine that requires it (Work centres): the terminal does not let them start or resume an operation on it and warns them when they identify themselves (Shop-floor terminal). That is what happens to David on F5-01 and F5-02.
  • Signing with a scope of the inspection stamp (receiving, in-process, final, FAI, MRB, CoC, calibration; see the stamps).
  • Validating CNC programs (Documentation) and closing internal audits (Management system).

When someone passes training that grants a qualification (David's requalification), closing it in Competence & training renews the qualification automatically.

#Adding or editing a person

Edit person: role, shift, cost, contact, processes and terminal PIN. 12345678
Figure 477. Edit person: role, shift, cost, contact, processes and terminal PIN.
  1. 1
    Name (required) and employee code: the code is the one on their barcode badge.
  2. 2
    Role and shift (morning, afternoon, night or day shift).
  3. 3
    Hourly cost: employer cost (gross salary + social security ÷ effective hours per year). Only with «See staff rates».
  4. 4
    Active: leavers are deactivated; that way their time records are kept and they do not appear in pickers.
  5. 5
    Contact: email and phone, only with «Contact data».
  6. 6
    Process qualifications: tick what they may do or sign.
  7. 7
    New terminal PIN: exactly 4 digits. Empty, the current one is kept (nobody can read it).
  8. 8
    Save applies the changes.
How to add a person and get them ready for the terminal
  1. In People, click New person. Type the name, the employee code (EMP-…), the role and the shift.

  2. If your profile allows it, enter the hourly cost and the contact details.

  3. Tick their process qualifications and type a 4-digit PIN for the terminal. Click Save.

  4. Open their record, Machine qualifications tab, and click Qualify on a centre for each machine they may work on, with their level.

  5. Print their badge with the Terminal badge icon in the header.

They can now identify themselves at the shop-floor terminal (with the badge or by tapping their name) and their PIN, and start operations on the machines they are qualified on. They do not need an app user: users are only created by an administrator in Users, for people who also work in the office.

#Badges for the terminal

Badges for the terminal: tick the people and their badges are printed with the code as a Code128 barcode. 123
Figure 478. Badges for the terminal: tick the people and their badges are printed with the code as a Code128 barcode.
  1. 1
    The badge carries the employee code as a Code128 barcode, the name and the role. At the terminal it is scanned and then the PIN is typed.
  2. 2
    All active people with a code come ticked: untick those you do not want to print.
  3. 3
    Print (with the number of badges) opens the print preview.

You can also print a single person's badge with the Terminal badge icon on their record. The badge does not replace the PIN: at the terminal, scanning the badge only selects the person; to book time, their PIN has to be typed.

#Person hours and machine hours

Every time someone starts an operation at the terminal a time record is opened (set-up, run or rework), which is closed when they pause or finish. A time record gives two kinds of hours:

  • Machine hours: the full duration of the record. These count for capacity, load, OEE (overall equipment effectiveness) and machine cost (hours × the centre's rate).
  • Person hours (booked hours): those charged to that person and to their labour cost. If they had only one record open, they match the machine hours.

Someone tending several machines at once can have several tasks open at the terminal (one per machine, up to the maximum the administrator sets in Settings). The person's time is then booked according to the company's booking rule:

Rule From 8:00 to 10:00 with two tasks open (F5-01 and F5-02)
Proportional Each moment is split between the open tasks: 1 h to each WO. The person totals 2 h booked, the time they were there. It is the real labour cost.
Full Each task counts the whole time: 2 h to each WO. The person totals 4 h booked, more than their working day. It says how long each WO had someone tending it.

In both cases, each machine counts its full 2 h.

#What changes with your profile

Rafael's record seen by Antonio (shop supervisor): without «See staff rates» or «Contact data». 1234
Figure 479. Rafael's record seen by Antonio (shop supervisor): without «See staff rates» or «Contact data».
  1. 1
    Antonio can edit (he has «Edit centres & people»), but the form neither shows him nor lets him change the cost or the contact.
  2. 2
    The key figures without the hourly cost or the 30-day cost.
  3. 3
    The hourly cost shows a padlock: the database does not return it to him.
  4. 4
    Email and phone stay hidden without «Contact data».

Resources

Competence & training

People's competence: what each role and each machine requires, what each person holds and when it expires, and the training sessions with their attendees and the assessment of their effectiveness. An expired qualification blocks what it enables: signing with a stamp scope, validating CNC programs, closing internal audits or working on a machine.

Who uses it: Shop supervisor, quality and administration (people); management and area managers, read-onlyAccess: «Competence & training» section; to record competences and manage training, «Edit training»

An auditor's first question on the shop floor is usually “who made this part and how do you know they are qualified?”. Competence & training holds the answer: the catalogue of competences —qualifications (5-axis operator, final inspection, FAI, MRB, CMM, internal auditor…), training and awareness (FOD, counterfeit parts, product safety, export control)—, what each role and each machine requires, what each person holds with its expiry date, and the training sessions given.

Some competences enable something, and without them in force Aeromec does not allow it: signing with a scope of the inspection stamp (receiving, in-process, final, FAI, MRB, CoC, calibration), validating CNC programs, closing an internal audit or starting work on a machine that requires it (also at the shop-floor terminal, which warns operators of what is about to expire).

The section has four views: Matrix, Expiries, Competences and Training. Each person's competences can also be found on their People record (Competences tab).

  1. 1CompetenceWhat it enables, how often it is renewed and which roles and machines require it.
  2. 2MatrixEach person: in force, expiring soon, expired or missing.
  3. 3TrainingIt is planned, people are invited and those who passed are marked.
  4. 4ClosureWhoever passes gains or renews the competence.
  5. 5EffectivenessDoes it show in the work? It is assessed afterwards.
From the competence that is needed to the qualified person.

#The competence matrix

Competence & training → Matrix, with Antonio (shop supervisor). 12345678
Figure 480. Competence & training → Matrix, with Antonio (shop supervisor).
  1. 1
    The four views: matrix, expiries, competences and training.
  2. 2
    Competences in force, those expiring in 30 days, those expired and those missing (required by the role and not held).
  3. 3
    Filter the columns by area: production, inspection, engineering, management system, product safety, logistics, maintenance.
  4. 4
    One column per competence (hover to see its name).
  5. 5
    One row per person, with their role.
  6. 6
    David's 5-axis qualification, expired: he cannot work on F5-01 or F5-02. Press a cell to renew or record it.
  7. 7
    The days left on one that is expiring soon (Laura's).
  8. 8
    One that is missing: the role requires it and the person does not hold it (Iván missed the training).
Cell What it means
Green ✓ In force
Amber with a number Expiring soon: the days left (30 or fewer)
Red ✕ Expired (or revoked)
Empty red circle Missing: required by the person's role (or by the machine they work on) and not held
Blank Neither held nor required
Renewing David's 5-axis qualification (not saved). 12345
Figure 481. Renewing David's 5-axis qualification (not saved).
  1. 1
    The person.
  2. 2
    The competence and the level: in training, autonomous or trainer.
  3. 3
    When it was obtained (or renewed).
  4. 4
    When it expires; if left blank, according to the competence's «renew every».
  5. 5
    Who assessed it.

To withdraw a competence before it expires (a bad practice, a change of role), open it and enter the revoked date with the reason: from that day it blocks the same things as an expired one.

#Expiries

Competence & training → Expiries: what needs attention. 12345
Figure 482. Competence & training → Expiries: what needs attention.
  1. 1
    Search by person, competence or machine.
  2. 2
    Filters: those that need attention (expired, about to expire or missing), those expiring in 90 days, those blocking something and all.
  3. 3
    David's 5-axis qualification: F5-01 and F5-02 require it, and it expired 12 days ago.
  4. 4
    One expiring soon: what it enables (signing final inspection) and the days left.
  5. 5
    The status: expired, expiring soon, revoked or missing.

#The competence catalogue

Competence & training → Competences. 123456
Figure 483. Competence & training → Competences.
  1. 1
    New competence: code, name, type, area, standard, how often it is renewed, what it enables and which roles require it.
  2. 2
    Filters by type (qualification, training, awareness) and those that enable something.
  3. 3
    Each competence with its type, area and reference standard or instruction.
  4. 4
    What it enables (a stamp scope, validating programs, closing audits) or which machines require it.
  5. 5
    How often it is renewed and the roles that require it.
  6. 6
    The people: in force, expired, about to expire and missing.

Whether a machine requires a qualification is decided on its work centre (Work centres, field Required qualification): without it in force nobody can start work on that machine, not even from the terminal.

#Training sessions

Competence & training → Training. 123456
Figure 484. Competence & training → Training.
  1. 1
    Training hours over 12 months, sessions planned and not yet assessed for effectiveness.
  2. 2
    New training: title, type (internal, external or on the job), date, hours, trainer and the competence it gives.
  3. 3
    Filters: all, planned and effectiveness not assessed.
  4. 4
    David's requalification, planned.
  5. 5
    The attendees: invited, or how many passed.
  6. 6
    The effectiveness (effective, not effective or not assessed) and the status.
David's requalification, with «Passed» selected (not closed). 1234
Figure 485. David's requalification, with «Passed» selected (not closed).
  1. 1
    Invite: choose the attendees.
  2. 2
    Close training with what has been marked.
  3. 3
    The competence it gives: whoever passes gains or renews it.
  4. 4
    For each attendee: passed, not passed or absent.
How to give a training session and renew the competence
  1. In Training, New training with its date, its hours, the trainer and the competence it gives.

  2. On its record, Invite the people (those whose competence has expired, is about to expire or who need it).

  3. Once the training has taken place (not before its date), mark each attendee Passed, Not passed or Absent and press Close training.

  4. After a while, Assess effectiveness: how it has been checked that it was useful (in the work, in the results) and whether it was effective.

Whoever passed gains or renews the competence (with the training date and its new expiry) and what was blocked is allowed again: David can work on F5-01 and F5-02 again.

Finance

Invoices

Your invoices to customers: those raised from each shipped delivery note, advances on an order and credit notes; payments received, what is overdue, debt ageing, each invoice's status with the Spanish Tax Agency (SII or VeriFactu) and the PDF.

Who uses it: Administration and managementAccess: «Invoices» section; to issue invoices, advances and credit notes, «Invoice»; to record payments, «Collect»; to see amounts, «See prices»; to send to the Tax Agency, «File with the Tax Agency» (in Tax)

Invoices gathers everything you invoice your customers and what they owe you. In a shop like Aeromec the invoice comes from the delivery note: when a shipment leaves with its parts, its heats and its certificate of conformity (CoC), that delivery note is invoiced at the order prices, without typing any lines. On long runs or with expensive material, the customer may pay an advance on the order beforehand, which is deducted automatically when its delivery notes are invoiced. And if an invoice goes out with a mistake, it is corrected with a credit note.

You also keep track of payments here: you record each payment you receive (or the bank reconciliation records it, in Banking) and Aeromec works out what is outstanding, what is overdue, how long each debt has been waiting and how many days your customers take to pay on average.

Each issued invoice is also recorded for the Spanish Tax Agency (AEAT), through SII or VeriFactu depending on the company's scheme, and posted automatically, with its journal entry, in Accounting. At this pre-implementation stage sending to the Tax Agency is simulated: the records have the real format, but they do not go out (see Tax).

  1. 1OrderThe customer orders parts with their scheduled deliveries.
  2. 2Advance (optional)A % of the order the customer pays before receiving the parts.
  3. 3Shipped delivery noteThe parts leave with their CoC and certificates.
  4. 4InvoiceFrom the delivery note, at the order prices and less any advances.
  5. 5AEATIt is recorded for SII (within 4 working days) or VeriFactu, and posted to the accounts.
  6. 6PaymentYou record the payment when it reaches the bank, in full or in parts.
  7. 7Follow-upAnything late shows under Overdue and in the debt ageing.
Invoicing an order, from start to finish. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The list of invoices

Invoices: the two views, the collection indicators and the list (on entry, those still to be collected). 12345678
Figure 486. Invoices: the two views, the collection indicators and the list (on entry, those still to be collected).
  1. 1
    The two views: Invoices (the list) and Debt ageing (what is outstanding by bucket and by customer). The chosen view is remembered.
  2. 2
    Outstanding: everything you are owed today on issued invoices, VAT included.
  3. 3
    Overdue: the part of the outstanding amount whose due date has passed, in red. Click the card to see the debt ageing.
  4. 4
    Invoiced this month (excl. VAT) and, next to it, the change against the same days of the previous month.
  5. 5
    Average days to collect: how long your customers take to pay on average against the agreed terms.
  6. 6
    The search box finds an invoice by its number, the customer, the order, the customer PO or the delivery note.
  7. 7
    Export CSV downloads the invoices you see (with the filter and search applied) for a spreadsheet.
  8. 8
    New invoice: invoices a shipped delivery note or issues an advance on an order. To its left, Programme shows only the invoices of one programme.

The indicators are always calculated with all invoices, not only those you see. The list, on the other hand, follows the filter and the search box: on entry you see the invoices still to be collected, from the one due first to the one due last.

The Programme button shows only the invoices of one programme (those of the orders for its parts; see Programmes), and then the indicators are also those of that programme. The programme code appears on each row, next to the customer code. Go back to All programmes to clear it.

#Filters, columns and statuses

«Overdue» filter: the invoices whose due date has passed and which have not been paid in full. 12345678
Figure 487. «Overdue» filter: the invoices whose due date has passed and which have not been paid in full.
  1. 1
    The filters: Outstanding, Overdue, Due in 30 days, Paid, Advances, Credit notes & void, the two tax ones (below) and All, with their counts. Swipe the row to see the last ones.
  2. 2
    Each row: number and type (invoice, advance or credit note), customer with their code and issue date. Click to open the record.
  3. 3
    Due date and how long is left («due in 3 days», amber if a week or less is left) or how long ago it fell due («overdue 40 days», red).
  4. 4
    Delivery / order: the invoiced delivery note, our order and the customer's PO number.
  5. 5
    Payment: the payment status (table below).
  6. 6
    AEAT: the invoice's status with the Tax Agency (accepted, to send, with errors…) and through which system, SII or VeriFactu.
  7. 7
    Outstanding: what is still to be collected (total incl. VAT minus payments), red if overdue. Click a column title to sort.
  8. 8
    The footer counts the invoices you see and adds up their net amount, VAT, total and what is outstanding.

The last two filters before All are about tax: EU & export gathers the invoices to customers outside Spain, and AEAT to handle those that need attention with the Tax Agency: those not yet sent and those the Tax Agency has rejected or accepted with errors, so you can correct them.

«EU & export» filter: invoices to customers in other EU countries (or outside the EU), with their status with the Tax Agency. 123456
Figure 488. «EU & export» filter: invoices to customers in other EU countries (or outside the EU), with their status with the Tax Agency.
  1. 1
    EU & export: intra-Community supplies and exports, which carry no VAT.
  2. 2
    AEAT to handle: what is still to be sent to the Tax Agency and what has to be corrected.
  3. 3
    The EU (or Export) badge next to the customer; hover over it to see the transaction type and the country.
  4. 4
    With errors: the Tax Agency accepted this Linha Técnica MRO invoice with errors (its VAT number lacks the country prefix). Open it to see what to do.
  5. 5
    Accepted by SII, the system it was sent through.
  6. 6
    At the foot, the VAT on these invoices: zero, because they are exempt.
Payment status What it means
Pending Issued, no payments and still within terms.
Part paid Issued, within terms and with some payment that does not settle it.
Overdue The due date has passed and something is still to be collected (even with part payments).
Paid The amount collected reaches the total.
Credit note An issued credit note: it subtracts from the amount invoiced and is not collected.
Void Voided by a credit note: kept with its number, but not counted as outstanding.
Draft Not issued yet: it does not count as invoiced and cannot be collected.
Tax Agency status What it means
To send Recorded, waiting for the next submission from Tax; below, the deadline.
Accepted The Tax Agency has accepted it: it counts as filed and has its receipt (CSV).
With errors Accepted, but with data to correct (usually the customer's VAT number): an amendment must be sent.
Rejected It does not count as filed: correct the data and retry before the deadline.
Not sent It does not go to the Tax Agency (for example, because it predates the company's current scheme).

#Debt ageing

The Debt ageing view splits what is outstanding by how many days it is overdue (the buckets: not yet due, up to 30 days, 31 to 60, 61 to 90 and over 90) and by customer. It is the view for reviewing receivables with Management or preparing collection calls.

Debt ageing: what is outstanding by overdue bucket and each customer's debt. 12345
Figure 489. Debt ageing: what is outstanding by overdue bucket and each customer's debt.
  1. 1
    Not yet due: what is still within terms, with the number of invoices and its % of the total.
  2. 2
    Each overdue bucket with its amount. Click a bucket to see its invoices below.
  3. 3
    Debt by customer: each customer's outstanding amount in each bucket, largest total first; overdue amounts in the colour of their bucket. Click to open the customer.
  4. 4
    A defence customer carries its badge: only visible to those with the «Defence data» permission.
  5. 5
    The Total row adds up each bucket.
Clicking a bucket lists its invoices below, from the most overdue to the least. 12
Figure 490. Clicking a bucket lists its invoices below, from the most overdue to the least.
  1. 1
    Each invoice in the bucket: number, customer, due date, how long ago it fell due and the delivery note; on the right, what is outstanding. Click to open it.
  2. 2
    The ✕ closes the list (or click the bucket again).
Below: invoiced against collected each month and the days each customer takes to pay. 123
Figure 491. Below: invoiced against collected each month and the days each customer takes to pay.
  1. 1
    Invoiced vs collected (12 months), incl. VAT: if month after month less is collected than invoiced, the debt grows. The current month is shaded.
  2. 2
    Days to collect by customer: the average days each customer takes to pay against their agreed terms; those furthest over come first.
  3. 3
    Red, more than 5 days over the agreed terms; amber, somewhat over; green, within terms.

#Invoicing a delivery note

New invoice asks what you want to do. From a shipped delivery note lists the delivery notes already shipped that have no invoice yet (if there are none left, it says so below: «No shipped delivery notes waiting to be invoiced»). Advance on an order issues an advance (next section).

New invoice: from a delivery note or an advance. 12
Figure 492. New invoice: from a delivery note or an advance.
  1. 1
    From a shipped delivery note: below, how many delivery notes are left to invoice.
  2. 2
    Advance on an order: a % of the order, deducted when its delivery notes are invoiced.
Choosing the order for the advance. 12
Figure 493. Choosing the order for the advance.
  1. 1
    Type part of the number, the customer or their reference to find the order.
  2. 2
    The open orders, newest first, with the customer, their PO number, the amount and the date.
How to invoice a shipped delivery note
  1. Click New invoice → From a shipped delivery note and choose the delivery note. You can also invoice it from its record, in Shipments.

  2. Read the confirmation: «An invoice to … for the N parts on the delivery note (amount + VAT) will be issued today, due according to their payment terms». If the order has advances not yet deducted, it says so too.

  3. Click Issue invoice. The invoice is created already issued, with its number (FV-year-counter), and its record opens.

The invoice has one line per delivery note line (part, drawing and revision, quantity and order price) and, if there were advances, a negative «Descuento del anticipo …» (advance deduction) line for each one. It falls due according to the customer's payment terms.

#Advances

Advance on an order: the percentage and, below, the order net amount and what has already been advanced. 1234
Figure 494. Advance on an order: the percentage and, below, the order net amount and what has already been advanced.
  1. 1
    The order, the customer and their PO number.
  2. 2
    Percentage of the order: it suggests 30 %; change it if you have agreed another (between 0 and 100).
  3. 3
    The order net amount (excl. VAT), what has already been advanced and how much each 10 % is.
  4. 4
    Issue advance creates the advance invoice already issued and opens its record.

#The invoice record

Header and summary of an overdue invoice with no payments. 1234567
Figure 495. Header and summary of an overdue invoice with no payments.
  1. 1
    Number and type, payment status, customer, issue date and due date.
  2. 2
    Invoice PDF: generates the invoice and opens the preview to print or save it.
  3. 3
    Record payment: records a payment from the customer (only if something is outstanding).
  4. 4
    More options (⋮): Issue credit note, as long as it has no payments.
  5. 5
    The Lines and Payments tabs, with their counts.
  6. 6
    The figures: net, VAT, total, collected and outstanding.
  7. 7
    The overdue notice: how many days and how much is left, with a shortcut to Record payment.
The summary cards: the customer and their terms, the due date and payment, the origin and the tax details. 1234
Figure 496. The summary cards: the customer and their terms, the due date and payment, the origin and the tax details.
  1. 1
    Customer & payment terms: tax details, payment terms and method and the account to pay into (the company's IBAN).
  2. 2
    Due date & payment: issue date, due date, terms, days overdue, last payment and the bar of what has been collected. Once paid, it says how many days it took.
  3. 3
    Delivery note & order: the invoiced delivery note, our order and the customer PO; click to open them.
  4. 4
    Tax & AEAT: the transaction type (here, domestic, with VAT) and the invoice's record in SII or VeriFactu (see below).

Other cards and notices appear depending on the case: Other invoices on the order (the other invoices and advances on the same order, with their status), Advance invoice (on an advance, where it was deducted), Advances deducted (on the invoice that deducts them), Correction (on a credit note or a void invoice, with the reason and the link to the other invoice) and the green notice «Paid in full on …, N days after issue». On invoices for customers who buy through SAP Business Network (Ariba), the header also has the Generate the cXML invoice icon (see Integrations).

«Lines» tab: one line per delivery note line and the totals with VAT broken down. 123
Figure 497. «Lines» tab: one line per delivery note line and the totals with VAT broken down.
  1. 1
    The columns: description, quantity, price, VAT % and amount.
  2. 2
    Each line with the part (click to open it), the drawing and its revision and the delivery note it comes from.
  3. 3
    Net amount, VAT by rate, total and, if there are payments, what has been collected and what is outstanding.

#The invoice and the Tax Agency

On issue, each invoice is recorded for the AEAT (the Spanish Tax Agency) through one of these two systems, depending on the company's scheme in Settings:

  • SII (Suministro Inmediato de Información, immediate supply of information): the VAT books are kept on the Tax Agency's website and each invoice is sent to it within 4 working days. It is mandatory above €6,010,121.04 of turnover; the demo company has opted in voluntarily.
  • VeriFactu (Royal Decree 1007/2023): each invoice generates an unalterable record, chained to the previous one with a hash, and carries a QR code the customer can use to check it on the Tax Agency's website.

A company in SII does not use VeriFactu: never both. Submissions are made in batches from Tax; here you see how each invoice stands and what to do if something has gone wrong.

An intra-Community supply to Linha Técnica MRO (Portugal) that the Tax Agency accepted with errors. 12345
Figure 498. An intra-Community supply to Linha Técnica MRO (Portugal) that the Tax Agency accepted with errors.
  1. 1
    The status with the Tax Agency and the system: here, SII · Accepted with errors.
  2. 2
    The EU badge: an intra-Community supply, to a customer in another EU country.
  3. 3
    VAT (exempt): the lines are at 0 %, because the supply is exempt.
  4. 4
    The notice: what the Tax Agency answered and what it means (with errors, it counts as filed, but the data must be corrected).
  5. 5
    Tax opens its record in the Tax section, from where it is resent.
The «Tax & AEAT» card of that invoice. 123456
Figure 499. The «Tax & AEAT» card of that invoice.
  1. 1
    Transaction: domestic, intra-Community or export, with what it means for VAT.
  2. 2
    The customer's VAT number; here, in amber, because it lacks its country prefix.
  3. 3
    System and register (SII · issued invoices) and status.
  4. 4
    The CSV, the Tax Agency's receipt; when it was sent and the deadline it had.
  5. 5
    The error the Tax Agency returned and what to do to correct it.
  6. 6
    Open in Tax: the full record, with its file and its submissions.

The Tax & AEAT card brings together what the Tax Agency knows about the invoice:

  • The transaction type, decided by the customer's country: domestic (with VAT), intra-Community (to another EU country, exempt) or export (outside the EU, exempt).
  • The customer's VAT number (their intra-EU VAT number, with their country prefix: PT, FR…), which the exemption requires.
  • The system and its status, the CSV (código seguro de verificación, the receipt the Tax Agency returns), when it was sent and the deadline it had. With VeriFactu, the record's hash appears instead of the CSV.
  • If something went wrong, the error with its code and what to do.

An invoice not yet sent says «It goes in the next submission from Tax» and the deadline; once it has passed, it warns in red.

What to do with an invoice with errors or rejected
  1. Filter AEAT to handle and open the invoice with errors or rejected: the notice and the Tax & AEAT card state the error and what to correct.

  2. Correct the data where it is, usually in the customer's record: in the example, Linha Técnica MRO's VAT number with its prefix (button Fix: PT509876543, see Customers).

  3. Click Open in Tax and, in its record, Retry: it goes back to the queue with the corrected data. Send it with Send now (or in the next submission of pending records). An invoice accepted with errors is filed as an amendment.

When the Tax Agency accepts it, the invoice becomes Accepted, with its new CSV, and leaves the AEAT to handle filter.

#Recording a payment

«Payments» tab of an invoice with a part payment. 12345
Figure 500. «Payments» tab of an invoice with a part payment.
  1. 1
    With a payment that does not settle it and still within terms, the invoice is Part paid.
  2. 2
    How much has been collected out of what, the bar and what is outstanding with its due date.
  3. 3
    Record payment is here too.
  4. 4
    Each payment: method, date, reference, how many days after the invoice it arrived and amount. Click it to correct it.
  5. 5
    The bin deletes a payment recorded by mistake (it asks for confirmation).
How to record a payment
  1. Open the invoice (for example, from the Overdue filter or from a debt ageing bucket) and click Record payment.

  2. Amount received suggests the whole outstanding amount; if the customer has paid part of it, type it or click Half. It cannot exceed what is outstanding.

  3. Check the Payment date (today by default; between the invoice date and today) and choose the Payment method: bank transfer, confirming, promissory note, direct debit or card. The customer's usual one is preselected.

  4. Enter the Reference (the transfer, promissory note or remittance number) and click Record.

If the payment settles the invoice, Aeromec says «Payment recorded: invoice paid in full» and it becomes Paid; otherwise it stays Part paid (or remains Overdue if its due date has passed). The indicators and the debt ageing update at once.
Record payment: the amount suggests what is outstanding and does not allow going over it. 1234567
Figure 501. Record payment: the amount suggests what is outstanding and does not allow going over it.
  1. 1
    The invoice total, what has already been collected and what is outstanding.
  2. 2
    Amount received: the outstanding amount by default; below, the maximum allowed.
  3. 3
    Full outstanding or Half fill it in with one tap.
  4. 4
    Payment date: when the money arrived.
  5. 5
    Payment method: bank transfer, confirming, promissory note, direct debit or card.
  6. 6
    Reference: transfer, promissory note or remittance no., to reconcile it with the bank.
  7. 7
    Record saves the payment.

#Issuing a credit note

An issued invoice is neither deleted nor edited: if it went out with a wrong price, quantity, customer or tax details, a credit note is issued that cancels it, followed by the correct invoice.

More options of an issued invoice with no payments. 1
Figure 502. More options of an issued invoice with no payments.
  1. 1
    Issue credit note, in red: cancels the invoice completely.
Issue credit note: the reason and the button that issues the credit note. 123
Figure 503. Issue credit note: the reason and the button that issues the credit note.
  1. 1
    The invoice and its total: a credit note for the full amount in negative will be issued.
  2. 2
    Reason (required): shown on both invoices and on the PDF.
  3. 3
    Issue credit note.
How to correct an issued invoice with a mistake
  1. If the invoice has payments, delete them first (Payments tab): an invoice with payments cannot be corrected.

  2. Open the invoice and click More options (⋮) → Issue credit note.

  3. Type the Reason (for example, «Wrong unit price, see accepted quote») and click Issue credit note.

  4. The delivery note goes back to not invoiced: invoice it again with New invoice → From a shipped delivery note.

The credit note copies every line of the original with a negative price and today's date; the original becomes Void. Together they add up to zero invoiced and both appear under the Credit notes & void filter.

#The invoice PDF

The Invoice PDF icon in the header generates the invoice and opens the browser's print preview, from which you print it or save it as a PDF to send it. It includes:

  • The company header (name, registered name, tax ID, address, contact details and certifications, as they are in Settings) and the title Invoice, Advance invoice or Credit note with its number.
  • The issue and due dates, and a Paid, Void, Credit note or Draft stamp when applicable.
  • Bill to (the customer's tax details and, for a customer in another EU country, their VAT number), the references (delivery note, our order, their PO and, on a credit note, the invoice it corrects) and the payment method with the IBAN.
  • The details (description, quantity, price, VAT and amount), the reason or notes, the net amount, VAT by rate, the total and, if there are payments, what has been collected and what is outstanding.
  • For a supply to the EU or an export, the lines say Exempt instead of the VAT % and the VAT treatment section carries the wording the law requires: «Intra-Community supply exempt from VAT (art. 25 of Spanish VAT Act 37/1992)» or «Export exempt from VAT (art. 21 of Spanish VAT Act 37/1992)».
  • With VeriFactu, at the top, the tax QR code with the captions «VERI*FACTU» and «Factura verificable en la sede electrónica de la AEAT» (in Spanish even on an English invoice, as the ministerial order requires). With SII the invoice has no QR code.
  • At the foot, the invoice terms from Settings (for example, late-payment interest).

#What changes with your profile

The debt by customer seen by Sergio (Administration): without «Defence data», defence customers do not appear. 1
Figure 504. The debt by customer seen by Sergio (Administration): without «Defence data», defence customers do not appear.
  1. 1
    The same amounts for each civil customer, but without the defence customers (in Elena's figure, Halcón Defensa Sistemas): for Sergio their invoices do not exist and the totals do not count them either. The same goes for the indicators, the list and the reports.

Finance

Payables

The invoices your suppliers send you and the payments you make: what falls due this week, what is overdue, the check of each invoice against its purchase order and what was received, its record in the SII received-invoices register and each transfer, confirming or promissory note.

Who uses it: Administration, purchasing and managementAccess: «Payables» section; to record invoices and payments, «Edit payables»; to see amounts, «See costs»; to send to the Tax Agency, «File with the Tax Agency» (in Tax)

Payables is the other side of Invoices: here you record the invoices you receive (for raw material, subcontracted work such as heat treatment, anodising or non-destructive testing, tools or other expenses) and the payments you make on each one. Aeromec works out what is outstanding, what is overdue and what falls due in the coming days, and helps you check each invoice against its purchase order: what was ordered, what was received and what has already been invoiced against that order, so you do not pay for material that has not arrived or was rejected at receiving inspection.

Like those in Invoices, received invoices are recorded for the Tax Agency (in the SII received-invoices register; with VeriFactu they are not sent, because it only records issued invoices) and posted automatically in Accounting; payments can also be recorded when reconciling the statement in Banking. At this pre-implementation stage, sending to the Tax Agency is simulated.

#The list of supplier invoices

Payables: the indicators of what you owe suppliers and the list of unpaid invoices. 12345678
Figure 505. Payables: the indicators of what you owe suppliers and the list of unpaid invoices.
  1. 1
    Payable: what you owe your suppliers today, VAT included.
  2. 2
    Overdue: the part whose due date has passed. It should be zero.
  3. 3
    Due in 7 days: the week's payment forecast, to prepare the payment run.
  4. 4
    Paid this month: the payments recorded since the 1st.
  5. 5
    The search box: invoice number, supplier, purchase order, description or notes.
  6. 6
    The filters: Unpaid, Overdue, Due this week, Paid, the tax ones (EU & import and AEAT to handle: what is still to be sent and what was rejected or accepted with errors) and All.
  7. 7
    Export CSV downloads the invoices you see.
  8. 8
    Record invoice: adds an invoice you have received.
The columns: the supplier invoice, its purchase order, the due date, the status, the AEAT status and the amounts. 1234567
Figure 506. The columns: the supplier invoice, its purchase order, the due date, the status, the AEAT status and the amounts.
  1. 1
    Supplier invoice: the number the supplier gave it and the supplier's name. Click the row to open the record.
  2. 2
    The Purchase order it belongs to (click the link to open it) and the description: for example, the subcontracted operation of a WO.
  3. 3
    Due date: «Overdue N days» in red, «tomorrow» or «in N days» (amber if this week) or the day it was paid.
  4. 4
    Status: pending, part paid, overdue, paid or void.
  5. 5
    AEAT: the invoice's status in the SII received-invoices register (to send, accepted, with errors…), as in Invoices.
  6. 6
    Total and outstanding (incl. VAT), only with «See costs».
  7. 7
    The footer counts the invoices and adds up their total and what is outstanding.

#A supplier invoice record

Record of an overdue supplier invoice: amounts, notice, details, payment status and check against the order. 12345678
Figure 507. Record of an overdue supplier invoice: amounts, notice, details, payment status and check against the order.
  1. 1
    Supplier code, their invoice number, status, supplier, date and purchase order.
  2. 2
    Shortcuts to the supplier and purchase order records.
  3. 3
    Record payment: records a transfer, a confirming or a promissory note.
  4. 4
    More options (⋮): Edit invoice and Void invoice (as long as it has no payments).
  5. 5
    The figures: net amount, VAT with its rate, total, paid and outstanding.
  6. 6
    The notices: overdue (and how much is left), due soon («include it in the next payment run») or material rejected on the order.
  7. 7
    Payment status: the bar of what has been paid, how many payments and the last one.
  8. 8
    Purchase order: status, % received, order amount, received (valued) and invoiced against order. Before paying, check that they match.

#The received invoice and the Tax Agency

The Invoice details card brings together what the supplier's invoice says and the booking date: the day you enter it in the accounts. Below, Tax & AEAT shows its record in the SII received-invoices register, as in Invoices: status, CSV (the Tax Agency's receipt), when it was sent and the deadline. If the Tax Agency rejects it or accepts it with errors, the error and what to do appear, and the invoice goes into the AEAT to handle filter.

An invoice from Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS (France): an intra-Community acquisition. 1234567
Figure 508. An invoice from Distribution Aéronautique de Métaux SAS (France): an intra-Community acquisition.
  1. 1
    Booking date: the 4 working days for SII run from it.
  2. 2
    VAT: 0 %, self-assessed.
  3. 3
    Transaction: intra-Community acquisition, without VAT, which is self-assessed.
  4. 4
    The supplier's VAT number, with their country prefix.
  5. 5
    Self-assessed VAT: 21 % of the net amount, output and deductible at once.
  6. 6
    The SII record: received-invoices register, status, CSV, submission and deadline.
  7. 7
    Open in Tax opens its record.

#Recording a supplier invoice

Invoices are recorded from Record invoice (you choose the supplier first) or, better, from the purchase order record in Purchasing: that way the invoice is linked to the order and the suggested net amount is what has been received and not yet invoiced.

First, the supplier of the invoice. 12
Figure 509. First, the supplier of the invoice.
  1. 1
    Type part of the name or the code.
  2. 2
    Each supplier with their code and town.
The invoice details. 123456
Figure 510. The invoice details.
  1. 1
    Supplier invoice no.: as it appears on their invoice (e.g. MET/26/1194).
  2. 2
    Purchase order: one of this supplier's (optional, but recommended).
  3. 3
    Booking date: when you enter it in the accounts (today by default); the 4 working days for SII run from it.
  4. 4
    Due date: empty, the invoice date plus the supplier's payment terms.
  5. 5
    Net amount (excl. VAT; negative for a credit note) and VAT.
  6. 6
    Save records the invoice as unpaid.
How to record the invoice for a purchase order
  1. Open the purchase order in Purchasing and choose Record invoice. (From Payables: Record invoice and the supplier.)

  2. Type the Supplier invoice no. and the Invoice date. The Purchase order and the Description are already filled in.

  3. Leave the Booking date as today (the day you enter it) or set the real one if you booked it on another day: it cannot be earlier than the invoice date.

  4. Check the Net amount: Aeromec suggests what has been received on the order and not yet invoiced (or what was ordered, if nothing has arrived). Correct it if the invoice says otherwise, and the VAT.

  5. Leave the Due date empty to have it worked out from the supplier's terms, or type the one on the invoice. Click Save.

The invoice appears under Unpaid, with its due date; when a week is left before it falls due, it enters Due this week and the Due in 7 days indicator. In its Documents tab you can attach the PDF the supplier sent you.
The invoice of a French supplier: no VAT field. 1234
Figure 511. The invoice of a French supplier: no VAT field.
  1. 1
    The supplier and the type of transaction: Intra-EU.
  2. 2
    Booking date, as on any invoice.
  3. 3
    Only the net amount: no VAT rate is asked.
  4. 4
    The notice: the invoice comes without Spanish VAT, which is self-assessed at 21 %.

With a supplier in another EU country (an intra-Community acquisition), the invoice arrives without Spanish VAT: Aeromec does not ask for the VAT rate and self-assesses it at 21 %, both as output and as deductible VAT, so it costs nothing but it is declared (form 303) and also goes on form 349 and, for goods, in Intrastat.

With a supplier outside the EU (an import), VAT is paid at customs with the import declaration (SAD, Single Administrative Document), not on their invoice: the form reminds you below the VAT field.

The country in the supplier's record decides it (see Suppliers).

#Recording a payment

Record payment: the date and the outstanding amount are filled in. 12345
Figure 512. Record payment: the date and the outstanding amount are filled in.
  1. 1
    Payment date: today by default.
  2. 2
    Amount: the outstanding amount (shown below for reference); change it if you pay part of it.
  3. 3
    Payment method: bank transfer, confirming, promissory note, direct debit or card.
  4. 4
    Bank reference (e.g. TRF-2026-0412), to reconcile it with the bank.
  5. 5
    Record payment saves it.
«Payments» tab of an invoice already paid. 123
Figure 513. «Payments» tab of an invoice already paid.
  1. 1
    Paid in full: the status becomes Paid and Record payment disappears.
  2. 2
    The Payments tab with its count.
  3. 3
    Each payment: date, method, reference and amount. Click it to correct or delete it.
How to prepare the week's payment run
  1. In Payables, click the Due this week filter (and also check Overdue).

  2. Open each invoice and check the Purchase order card: that the amount invoiced does not exceed what was received and that there are no rejected-material notices.

  3. Make the transfers at the bank and, for each one, click Record payment with the date, the amount and the bank reference.

The paid invoices become Paid, and the Overdue, Due in 7 days and Paid this month indicators update at once.

#What changes with your profile

Payables seen by Inés (Purchasing): she sees the invoices and their amounts, but cannot record invoices or payments. 12
Figure 514. Payables seen by Inés (Purchasing): she sees the invoices and their amounts, but cannot record invoices or payments.
  1. 1
    With «See costs» she sees the amounts; without that permission, the indicators show a padlock.
  2. 2
    Without «Edit payables» there is no Record invoice button (nor Record payment on the records).

Finance

Banking

Your bank account up to date: you import the statement (Norma 43 or CSV), Aeromec suggests which receipt, payment, invoice or account each transaction matches, reconciles only the clear-cut ones and leaves the bank balance and the book balance explained item by item.

Who uses it: Administration (reconciles) and management (views)Access: «Banking» section; to import statements, reconcile and maintain the rules, «Reconcile» (plus «Collect» or «Edit payables» when reconciling with invoices)

What the bank says and what Aeromec says do not always match on the same day: a customer pays an invoice you had not recorded yet, the bank charges the payroll, the social security contributions, the form 303 or a fee, or you record a payment today that the bank will not show until tomorrow. Reconciling means matching each transaction on the statement with what explains it in Aeromec: a credit with the receipt of its invoice, a debit with the payment to a supplier, a transfer with several invoices from the same customer, or a charge with no invoice (a fee, social security) with its ledger account.

In Banking you import the statement you download from online banking, Aeromec suggests what to match each transaction with (with a score from 0 to 100), reconciles only the clear-cut ones and lets you review the rest. What you reconcile is posted at the same time: if you match a credit with an invoice that is still open, its receipt is recorded; if you match it with an account, the entry against the bank is made. At the end of the day, the bank balance and the one in Accounting are explained item by item.

  1. 1StatementYou import the Norma 43 (or CSV) file from online banking.
  2. 2Auto-reconciliationThe clear-cut ones are matched automatically: receipts and payments already recorded, invoices by their amount, and rules.
  3. 3Reconcile the restWith the suggestions, by hand or against an account.
  4. 4AccountingReceipts, payments and entries reach the bank's 572 account.
  5. 5Balances explainedBank and books agree, except for what is in transit.
The daily work with the bank. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The account and its balances

At the top is the bank account: its name, the IBAN, the 572 ledger account it is posted to and how the balance has moved over the last 90 days. If the company has several accounts, you switch between them by clicking the name.

The account card: identification, balance trend and the section's actions. 12345
Figure 515. The account card: identification, balance trend and the section's actions.
  1. 1
    The account: name, IBAN (its ⓘ explains each part) and the chart-of-accounts ledger account (57200001) its receipts, payments and entries are posted to.
  2. 2
    Balance · 90 days: how the balance per bank has moved at the end of each day.
  3. 3
    Import statement: upload the Norma 43 or CSV file downloaded from the bank.
  4. 4
    Auto-reconcile: matches in one go everything that has a clear suggestion.
  5. 5
    More options (⋮): the demo Sample statement (on narrow screens, also the other buttons).
The account indicators and the section's four tabs. 123456
Figure 516. The account indicators and the section's four tabs.
  1. 1
    Balance per bank: the one left by the last imported transaction, exactly as the statement gives it.
  2. 2
    Book balance: the balance of the 572 account in Aeromec's accounts (what there should be according to what has been recorded).
  3. 3
    Difference: book − bank. It is explained by what is unreconciled and what is in transit; green when it is zero.
  4. 4
    Unreconciled: how many transactions are still open and their net amount. Click to go and reconcile them.
  5. 5
    Last statement: when it was imported; amber if more than 7 days ago. Click to see the history.
  6. 6
    The tabs: Reconcile (with the open ones), Transactions, Statements and Rules. The one you choose is remembered.

#Reconciling a transaction

The Reconcile tab shows on the left the bank transactions waiting to be reconciled, oldest first, each with the score of its best suggestion; on the right, the selected transaction with its suggestions and the tools to reconcile it by hand. Credits (money in) are green and debits (money out) red.

Reconcile: the unreconciled transactions and, on the right, the selected one with its suggestion. 12345678
Figure 517. Reconcile: the unreconciled transactions and, on the right, the selected one with its suggestion.
  1. 1
    Unreconciled and how many are left. Its ⓘ explains the list. Once you reconcile some, a bar counts how many you have done in the session.
  2. 2
    The search box: by the bank description, a reference (the invoice number usually comes in it) or the amount.
  3. 3
    The filters: all, credits, debits, with suggestion and no suggestion, with their counts.
  4. 4
    Each transaction: description, date, reference, amount and the score of its best suggestion (or «No suggestion»). Click it to see it on the right.
  5. 5
    The selected transaction: description, credit or debit, amount and the bank data (date, common concept, references and document number).
  6. 6
    The suggestion: what Aeromec proposes (here, an already recorded receipt of the invoice the bank quotes), with its score.
  7. 7
    Reconcile matches the transaction with the suggestion in one click. The settings icon to its left takes it to manual reconciliation to change amounts.
  8. 8
    Reconcile by hand: find receipts, payments or invoices, or post it against an account, until the assigned amount matches.

Each suggestion says what it is and what will happen when you reconcile:

Suggestion When it appears When you reconcile
Recorded receipt / Recorded payment A receipt or payment recorded in Aeromec for the same amount and on a nearby date It is just linked to the transaction: nothing new is recorded
Open invoice / Open supplier invoice An invoice with that amount open, not yet collected or paid in Aeromec Its receipt or payment is recorded with the bank date
Several invoices Two or three open invoices of the customer named in the description that add up to the amount The receipt of all of them is recorded
Automatic rule A rule whose text appears in the description (fees, payroll, social security, taxes) The entry of the rule's account against the bank is made

Besides receipts and payments already recorded (100 points), the demo data include one case of each kind:

A transfer for an invoice not yet collected in Aeromec. 12
Figure 518. A transfer for an invoice not yet collected in Aeromec.
  1. 1
    A customer transfers the amount of an invoice and quotes its number in the description and the reference, but in Aeromec the invoice has not been collected yet.
  2. 2
    Open invoice (60 + 30 + 8 = 98): reconciling records its receipt with the bank date.
A customer paying two invoices with a single transfer. 12
Figure 519. A customer paying two invoices with a single transfer.
  1. 1
    A customer pays several invoices at once without quoting any of them («PAGO FACTURAS»).
  2. 2
    Several invoices: two of that customer's open invoices add up to exactly the amount transferred. Reconciling records the receipt of both.
A recurring charge with no invoice, handled by a rule. 12
Figure 520. A recurring charge with no invoice, handled by a rule.
  1. 1
    The month's social security contributions (common concept 15 · Payroll and social security).
  2. 2
    Automatic rule «Seguridad Social»: an entry of 47600000 Social security payable against the bank.
A credit that matches nothing. 12
Figure 521. A credit that matches nothing.
  1. 1
    A €240 credit with the description «ABONO VARIOS» (common concept 99 · Miscellaneous).
  2. 2
    No suggestions: no receipt, payment, invoice or rule fits. It is reconciled by hand against an account, or ignored.
How to reconcile the bank transactions
  1. Import the day's statement (see Importing a statement) and click Auto-reconcile: the clear-cut ones are reconciled.

  2. In Reconcile, go through what is left. For each transaction, read the suggestion: what it is and what reconciling will do (link a receipt, record an invoice's receipt, make an entry).

  3. If it is right, click Reconcile. If the amount does not quite match (a partial receipt, a fee deducted), click the settings icon and correct the items under Reconcile by hand.

  4. If there is no suggestion, look up the receipt, payment or invoice with Find receipt or invoice, or post it Against an account. If it should not be posted, Ignore transaction with its reason.

The transaction leaves the list and the session bar moves on. A notice with Undo appears in case you made a mistake. The Unreconciled and Difference indicators go down, and the receipts, payments and entries created are already in the accounts.

#Reconciling by hand

When there is no suggestion or it is not the right one, Reconcile by hand lets you match the transaction with one or several items that add up to its amount: receipts or payments already recorded (they are just linked), open invoices (their receipt or payment is recorded for the amount you enter, even a partial one) or a ledger account (an entry against the bank is made). The bar turns green when the assigned amount matches the transaction amount; until then, Reconcile stays disabled.

Finding receipts and invoices for the transfer that pays several invoices. 1234
Figure 522. Finding receipts and invoices for the transfer that pays several invoices.
  1. 1
    Search by number, customer or amount. At the top, the transaction amount and what is left to assign.
  2. 2
    Open invoices (exact amounts first) or Recorded receipts within 60 days of the transaction.
  3. 3
    Tick one or several: each with its due date and what it has open.
  4. 4
    Add brings them in as items of the transaction.
Posting the €240 credit against a ledger account. 1234
Figure 523. Posting the €240 credit against a ledger account.
  1. 1
    The entry that will be made: for a credit, debit the bank and credit the chosen account.
  2. 2
    The common accounts: 769 Other financial income, 555 Suspense items (if you do not know yet what it is), 626 Bank fees…
  3. 3
    Or search any ledger account by its code or name.
  4. 4
    The description the journal will show, and the item amount.
How to reconcile an unknown credit
  1. Choose the transaction (for example, the €240 credit «ABONO VARIOS»). It has no suggestion.

  2. If you know what it is, click Against an account and choose the account: bank interest goes to 769 Other financial income. If you do not know yet, to 555 Suspense items, to reclassify it later with a manual entry.

  3. Check the entry description and click Add; then Reconcile.

The entry against the bank is posted (572 debited and the chosen account credited) and the transaction is reconciled. Its record, in Transactions, shows the entry.
How to reconcile a transfer that pays several invoices
  1. Choose the transaction. If Aeromec finds the combination, the Several invoices suggestion proposes it: click Reconcile.

  2. If it does not find it (or the customer deducted something), click Find receipt or invoice, tick the invoices and click Add. Click an item to change its amount: if an invoice is paid in part, enter only what arrived.

  3. When the bar says Balanced, click Reconcile.

A receipt is recorded on each invoice for its amount, with the bank date. Whatever was not collected stays open on the invoice.
Ignoring a transaction that should not be posted. 12
Figure 524. Ignoring a transaction that should not be posted.
  1. 1
    The reason is mandatory: duplicated by the bank, transfer between own accounts already posted, reversed by the bank…
  2. 2
    Ignore takes it out of the unreconciled list without posting anything, with your name and the date.

#Auto-reconciliation

Before reconciling automatically, Aeromec explains what it is going to do (not run). 12
Figure 525. Before reconciling automatically, Aeromec explains what it is going to do (not run).
  1. 1
    All the open transactions are reviewed and only those with a clear suggestion are reconciled: the best one scoring 85 or more, with no tie.
  2. 2
    Reconcile the clear ones: when it finishes, it says how many it reconciled and how many are left.

Anything doubtful stays open for you to review: a transaction with no suggestion, a suggestion under 85 points (such as several invoices, worth 75) or two suggestions with the same score (two identical payments to the same supplier). In the demo data, auto-reconciliation would match the receipts and payments already recorded, the transfer quoting an open invoice (recording its receipt) and the payroll, social security, form 303 and fee charges (through their rules), and would leave the transfer that pays several invoices and the €240 credit for you to review by hand. Each automatic reconciliation carries its mark in Transactions and can be undone.

#The transaction history

Transactions: the account's full history, here filtered to the reconciled ones. 1234567
Figure 526. Transactions: the account's full history, here filtered to the reconciled ones.
  1. 1
    Search by description, reference, document number or amount.
  2. 2
    Choose a month or all of them.
  3. 3
    Export CSV downloads what you see.
  4. 4
    The filters: unreconciled, reconciled, automatic, ignored, credits and debits.
  5. 5
    Matched with: the receipt, payment, invoices or account it was matched with.
  6. 6
    Status: unreconciled, reconciled (with a wand if auto-reconciliation did it) or ignored.
  7. 7
    Amount and the balance the account was left at according to the bank. The footer adds up credits, debits and net.

Click a transaction to open its record: the data as the bank gives them, what it was reconciled with and the entry that was made.

Record of a fee reconciled automatically by its rule. 12345
Figure 527. Record of a fee reconciled automatically by its rule.
  1. 1
    Account, status (reconciled), description, date and amount.
  2. 2
    Undo reconciliation: the transaction goes back to unreconciled (see below).
  3. 3
    Bank data: common concept (a code that is the same at every bank), own concept, references, document number and the statement it came in with.
  4. 4
    Reconciliation: when, who, and whether it was by hand or auto-reconciliation.
  5. 5
    Matched with: here, the entry against account 626 Bank fees, with its debit and credit. For a receipt or a payment, the invoice, with Open invoice.

#Importing a statement

The statement is downloaded from online banking in Norma 43 (the standard format of Spanish banks, the AEB's Cuaderno 43, AEB being the Spanish Banking Association; .n43, .q43 or .txt files) or in CSV (one line per transaction: date;description;amount, with the date as DD/MM/YYYY and a decimal comma). Norma 43 is preferable: it carries the references, the document number and the balance after each transaction, so the suggestions are more accurate.

Statements: the files imported for the account, newest first. 12345
Figure 528. Statements: the files imported for the account, newest first.
  1. 1
    The accepted formats; their ⓘ (on the right) explains each Norma 43 record and the CSV.
  2. 2
    Download the sample: the demo statement, to open in a text editor.
  3. 3
    Import statement: choose the file downloaded from the bank.
  4. 4
    Each statement: file and format, period, opening and closing balance, transactions (and how many were new) and who imported it. Click it to see its transactions.
  5. 5
    The footer counts the statements and their transactions.
The demo sample statement, record by record (not imported). 1234
Figure 529. The demo sample statement, record by record (not imported).
  1. 1
    The Norma 43 record types, each in its colour: 11 account header, 22 transaction, 23 description, 33 account totals (with the totals that are checked) and 88 end of file.
  2. 2
    The file: 80-character lines, each starting with its record type. It carries the transactions of the last few days.
  3. 3
    Download the file.
  4. 4
    Import imports it as if it came from the bank, to practise reconciling.
How to import the bank statement
  1. From online banking, download the account statement in Norma 43 format (or CSV) since the last one you imported.

  2. In Banking, click Import statement and choose the file. Aeromec recognises the format from its content.

  3. Read the result: how many transactions it carried, how many are new and how many were already there (from another overlapping statement: they are not duplicated).

  4. Click Go to reconcile (or Auto-reconcile) to reconcile the new ones.

The new transactions are waiting to be reconciled, the Balance per bank is updated with the last transaction's and the statement appears in Statements.

#Automatic rules

Some charges repeat every month with no invoice: fees, payroll, social security, withholdings and VAT. A rule recognises them by a text in their description and reconciles them against their ledger account: it shows up as an 85-point suggestion and auto-reconciliation applies it.

Rules: the demo ones, with the unreconciled transactions they would apply to today. 123456
Figure 530. Rules: the demo ones, with the unreconciled transactions they would apply to today.
  1. 1
    New rule.
  2. 2
    The filters: all, active, with matching unreconciled transactions, and inactive.
  3. 3
    Rule: its name and, in quotes, the text that must appear in the description (case- and accent-insensitive).
  4. 4
    Applies to debits, credits or both.
  5. 5
    Account: the bank's counterpart in the entry, and the description it will carry.
  6. 6
    Matching unreconciled: how many unreconciled transactions it would apply to today. Click a row to edit it.
New rule (not saved). 12345
Figure 531. New rule (not saved).
  1. 1
    Text in the description: a word or phrase that only appears in that kind of transaction («COMISION», «TGSS», «MODELO 303»).
  2. 2
    Applies to debits, credits or both.
  3. 3
    Ledger account: 626 fees, 465 payroll, 476 social security, 475 tax authority…
  4. 4
    Order: if several match, the one with the lower number is suggested first.
  5. 5
    Active: an inactive rule is neither suggested nor applied by auto-reconciliation.
How to create a rule
  1. In Rules, click New rule.

  2. Enter a name («Bank fees») and the text in the description that identifies the transaction («COMISION»). Choose whether it applies to debits, credits or both.

  3. Choose the counterpart ledger account and, if you like, the entry description. Click Save.

  4. Check the Matching unreconciled column: if the rule catches transactions it should not, refine the text.

From then on, the matching transactions come up with the Automatic rule suggestion and auto-reconciliation reconciles them with their entry.

#What changes with your profile

Banking as Javier (Management) sees it: he can view the reconciliation but cannot reconcile or import. 1234
Figure 532. Banking as Javier (Management) sees it: he can view the reconciliation but cannot reconcile or import.
  1. 1
    Read only: without the «Reconcile» permission.
  2. 2
    No import, auto-reconcile or sample statement buttons.
  3. 3
    He sees the suggestions, but without the Reconcile button.
  4. 4
    Instead of manual reconciliation, a notice explains which permission is missing.

Finance

Accounting

The bookkeeping Aeromec does by itself with the Spanish chart of accounts (PGC): every invoice, receipt, payment, payroll, depreciation and VAT settlement posts its entry; the journal, the ledger, the trial balance, the balance sheet and the profit and loss account, each month's closing, the fixed assets and the export to the accountants.

Who uses it: Administration (posts and closes) and management (views)Access: «Accounting» section; for manual entries, closing, fixed assets and export, «Post entries»

Everything that happens in Aeromec is reflected in the accounts: an issued invoice is a sale and a debt owed by the customer, a heat-treatment invoice is an expense and a debt owed to the supplier, a receipt moves money from the customer to the bank. In Accounting, Aeromec makes those journal entries by itself, with the Plan General de Contabilidad (PGC, the Spanish chart of accounts), at the moment each transaction happens: nobody types them and there is no need to wait for the accountants to key in the invoices.

An entry records a transaction by double entry: what is charged to some accounts (the debit) equals what is credited to others (the credit). An invoice for €1,000 plus €210 VAT debits €1,210 to the customer (account 430) and credits €1,000 to sales (70) and €210 to output VAT (477). Each month the closing entries are completed (the depreciation of the machines, the inventory adjustment and the VAT settlement), the month is closed and exported to the accountants or the accounting software.

  1. 1DocumentsInvoices, receipts, payments and bank reconciliations.
  2. 2Automatic entriesEach document posts its entry with the PGC, without typing it.
  3. 3Month-end closingDepreciate, adjust inventory, settle VAT and close.
  4. 4ExportThe entries CSV for the accountants or the accounting software.
  5. 5ReportsTrial balance, balance sheet, profit and loss and analysis.
Each month's accounting cycle. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The indicators and the views

The accounting indicators and its seven views. 1234567
Figure 533. The accounting indicators and its seven views.
  1. 1
    Go-live: from that day on everything is posted in Aeromec; what came before is picked up by the opening entry.
  2. 2
    Journal entries since go-live, from every source (including those your profile does not see in detail). Click to go to the journal.
  3. 3
    Not exported: those the accountants do not have yet; amber if any belong to months already closed.
  4. 4
    Last closed month: neither that one nor the earlier ones accept new entries or changes.
  5. 5
    Debit − credit check of all the accounts: always €0.00 (an entry that does not balance cannot be saved).
  6. 6
    The views: Journal, Ledger, Trial balance, Balance & P&L, Closing, Fixed assets and Export. The one you choose is remembered.
  7. 7
    Refresh reloads the figures.

#The journal

The journal gathers all the entries in date order, with their sequential number for the year, the description, the document they come from, the status and the amount.

The journal: the most recent entries first. 12345678
Figure 534. The journal: the most recent entries first.
  1. 1
    Search by description, document (FV-2026-0185, ALU/26/1497…) or entry number.
  2. 2
    Source: issued or received invoice, receipt, payment, depreciation, inventory, bank, payroll, VAT settlement, opening or manual.
  3. 3
    A month or all of them.
  4. 4
    New entry: a manual entry.
  5. 5
    The filters: all, not exported, exported, and reversed with their counter-entries.
  6. 6
    Each entry: number, date, description with the icon of its source, and the document. Click to open it.
  7. 7
    Status: not exported, exported, reversed or counter-entry. A padlock means its month is closed.
  8. 8
    The footer: how many entries, the total debit (equal to the total credit) and how many are not exported.

Each entry comes from a source:

Source When it is made The entry
Issued invoice When it is issued The customer (430) debited for the total; sales (70) and output VAT (477) credited
Received invoice When it is recorded The purchase or service (group 6: raw material, subcontracting…) and input VAT (472) debited; the supplier (400 or 410) credited. For a purchase from another EU country, the VAT is self-assessed: 472 and 477 for the same amount
Receipt / Payment When it is recorded (or reconciled in Banking) The bank (572) against the customer, or the supplier against the bank
Bank When a transaction is reconciled against an account The bank against the chosen account: fees (626), payroll (465), social security (476), tax authority (4750)…
Payroll Every month Wages (640) and employer's social security (642) debited; wages payable (465), social security (476) and withholdings (4751) credited
Depreciation At month-end closing Depreciation of fixed assets (681) debited; each asset's accumulated depreciation (281) credited
Inventory When adjusted The change in stock value between inventories (31, 33, 35) and their change accounts (61, 71)
VAT settlement At month-end closing Offsets output VAT (477) against input VAT (472) and leaves the result payable (4750) or to be carried forward (4700)
Opening Once, at go-live The balances on that date: customers, suppliers, bank, fixed assets, inventories, capital and reserves
Manual By hand Adjustments, provisions, reclassifications or an expense with no invoice

Ledger accounts have 8 digits and are created automatically when needed: one per customer (43000001, 43000002…), per supplier (400…), per bank (57200001) and per asset (213…).

#The record of an entry

Record of the entry for an issued invoice. 123456
Figure 535. Record of the entry for an issued invoice.
  1. 1
    The entry's number in the year, status (not exported), description, date, document and source.
  2. 2
    Open document opens the invoice, receipt, payment or bank transaction it comes from.
  3. 3
    Debit and credit (always equal), number of postings and whether its month is open or closed.
  4. 4
    Each posting: the ledger account (click to see its ledger), the description and the amount in debit or credit. Here, the customer debited and sales and VAT credited.
  5. 5
    Total debit and credit: Balanced.
  6. 6
    Details: number, date, source, document (link), who recorded it (Aeromec, if automatic), when it was saved and its export. Below, how it is corrected.
How to look up an entry and its document
  1. In the Journal, search for the document (for example, the invoice number) or filter by source and month.

  2. Click the entry. Check its postings: which accounts it debits and credits, and by how much.

  3. Click a ledger account to see its ledger (all its movements in the year) or Open document to open the invoice, receipt or payment.

#Manual entries

New manual entry (not posted). 12345
Figure 536. New manual entry (not posted).
  1. 1
    Date: in an open month. The entry description next to it.
  2. 2
    Each line: an 8-digit ledger account (search it by code or name), its description and the amount in debit or credit.
  3. 3
    Add line (at least two are needed).
  4. 4
    The totals of debit and credit and whether it balances; if not, a button adds the difference on a line.
  5. 5
    Post is only enabled when the entry is complete and balances.

#The ledger and the chart of accounts

The ledger of account 572 (the banks): its closing balance is the «Book balance» in Banking. 1234567
Figure 537. The ledger of account 572 (the banks): its closing balance is the «Book balance» in Banking.
  1. 1
    The period: this or last year, quarter or month, or the dates you choose.
  2. 2
    The chart of accounts: search by code or name; With movements hides the unused ones.
  3. 3
    From group (1 digit) to ledger account (8 digits), with today's balance: D debit, H credit. Click one to see its ledger.
  4. 4
    The selected account: a group code gathers all its ledger accounts (430, all the customers).
  5. 5
    Opening balance, debit and credit for the period, and closing balance.
  6. 6
    Export CSV of the ledger.
  7. 7
    Each posting: date, document, description, ledger account, debit, credit and the running balance. Click to open its entry.

#Trial balance

Last month's trial balance, by 3-digit accounts: the report the accountants ask for to review the month. 123456
Figure 538. Last month's trial balance, by 3-digit accounts: the report the accountants ask for to review the month.
  1. 1
    The period: here, last month.
  2. 2
    The level: accounts (3 digits), sub-groups (4) or ledger accounts (8).
  3. 3
    Debits = credits: the check that everything balances.
  4. 4
    Filter by PGC group: 1 basic financing, 2 fixed assets, 3 inventories, 4 creditors and debtors, 5 financial accounts, 6 expenses and 7 income.
  5. 5
    For each account: opening balance, debit and credit for the period and closing balance, debit or credit.
  6. 6
    The footer: total debit equals total credit, and total debit balances equal total credit balances.

#Balance sheet, profit and loss and analysis

Balance & P&L for this year: the key figures and the balance sheet. 12345678
Figure 539. Balance & P&L for this year: the key figures and the balance sheet.
  1. 1
    The period: the balance sheet is at its last day and the profit and loss covers the whole period.
  2. 2
    Export CSV of the balance sheet and the profit and loss.
  3. 3
    Revenue: the period's sales (account 70), excluding VAT.
  4. 4
    Profit before tax and its % of revenue (the net margin).
  5. 5
    Total assets at the date.
  6. 6
    Cash: the book balance of the banks (group 57).
  7. 7
    Assets: fixed assets net of depreciation, inventories, customers, tax receivable and cash.
  8. 8
    Equity and liabilities: capital, reserves and profit for the year; debts to suppliers, staff, the tax authority and social security. The Balanced mark checks they add up to the same as the assets.
Below the balance sheet: the profit and loss account, its monthly trend and the analysis by customer. 123456
Figure 540. Below the balance sheet: the profit and loss account, its monthly trend and the analysis by customer.
  1. 1
    Profit and loss in the abridged format: revenue, change in inventories, materials, staff, other expenses and depreciation, with their % of sales.
  2. 2
    Profit before tax: corporate income tax is calculated at the year-end closing, outside this bookkeeping.
  3. 3
    Monthly trend: revenue, expenses and profit for each month (the current month, highlighted and incomplete).
  4. 4
    Analysis: income allocated to each customer or part, and expenses to each supplier.
  5. 5
    Each customer with its share of revenue. Click to open its record.
  6. 6
    Without «Defence data», a defence customer counts, but with its name hidden.

#Month-end closing

The Closing view has one row per month since go-live, with what has been posted at each closing step and the actions to complete it. A closed month accepts no new entries or changes: anything that arrives late (an overdue invoice, a corrected document) is posted in the first open month.

Closing: September, open and ready to close; August and July, closed but not exported. 1234567
Figure 541. Closing: September, open and ready to close; August and July, closed but not exported.
  1. 1
    Notice of past months still open.
  2. 2
    The closing steps: depreciation, inventory and VAT. Green, done; empty circle, pending; «—», not adjusted that month.
  3. 3
    The current month cannot be closed until it ends. In an open month, the Actions menu (⋮) has the missing steps: depreciate, adjust inventory and settle VAT (the latter only once the month has ended).
  4. 4
    September, open, with the three steps done: ready to close.
  5. 5
    Closed: when and by whom.
  6. 6
    Not exported in amber: a closed month the accountants do not have yet.
  7. 7
    Reopen a closed month if it needs correcting.
Closing September: Aeromec warns of what is missing and what is not exported (not closed). 12
Figure 542. Closing September: Aeromec warns of what is missing and what is not exported (not closed).
  1. 1
    What closing means: nothing new dated in that month; anything late goes to the first open month. It can be reopened.
  2. 2
    If a step is missing (depreciation, VAT) or there are entries not exported, it says so here.
How to close a month
  1. Depreciate: on the month's row, open the Actions menu (⋮) and choose Depreciate: it posts the charge for every machine and piece of equipment in service (681 against each asset's 281).

  2. Adjust inventory if there is a stock count or it is quarter- or year-end: in the same menu, Adjust inventory values the stock (raw material and finished goods at average price; work in progress at the actual cost accumulated on open WOs) and takes the difference to the profit and loss.

  3. Review the month's form 303 draft in Tax and choose Settle VAT in the menu: it offsets output VAT against input VAT and leaves the result in 4750 (payable) or 4700 (to carry forward).

  4. Click Close and confirm.

  5. Export the month's entries to the accountants (see Exporting to the accountants).

The month becomes Closed with the date and your name, the Last closed month indicator moves on and no entry dated in that month can be created, changed or deleted.

#Fixed assets

Fixed assets: the company's machines and equipment with their depreciation. 1234567
Figure 543. Fixed assets: the company's machines and equipment with their depreciation.
  1. 1
    Acquisition cost: what was invested (before depreciation).
  2. 2
    Accumulated depreciation: what has already gone to expenses.
  3. 3
    Net book value: cost − depreciation; it is the fixed assets figure on the balance sheet.
  4. 4
    Monthly depreciation: the fixed cost of each month (no cash goes out, but it counts when setting the machines' hourly rate).
  5. 5
    New asset: a machine, tooling or IT equipment.
  6. 6
    The filters: in use, fully depreciated, disposed and all.
  7. 7
    Each asset with its machine (work centre), date in service and useful life, cost, monthly charge, % depreciated and net value.
Asset record for the 5-axis centre no. 1. 12345
Figure 544. Asset record for the 5-axis centre no. 1.
  1. 1
    Code and type, status (being depreciated, fully depreciated or disposed), machine and date in service.
  2. 2
    Edit the asset (for example, to dispose of it when it is sold or scrapped).
  3. 3
    Cost, depreciated, net value and monthly charge.
  4. 4
    Depreciation: % depreciated, monthly and annual charge, useful life, residual value and the last charge.
  5. 5
    Details: machine, date in service, cost and its two ledger accounts: the asset's (213…) and its accumulated depreciation's (281…).

#Exporting to the accountants

Export: two quarters sent, and July and August, already closed, still not exported. 123456
Figure 545. Export: two quarters sent, and July and August, already closed, still not exported.
  1. 1
    The notice: entries from closed months the accountants do not have yet, with its Export button.
  2. 2
    Not exported: all those that are in no export.
  3. 3
    Not exported from closed months: it should be zero.
  4. 4
    Last export and how many there have been.
  5. 5
    Export a period.
  6. 6
    Each export: file, period, entries, who and when. Click it to download it again.
Export entries (not exported). 12345
Figure 546. Export entries (not exported).
  1. 1
    From and To: it proposes the closed months not yet exported.
  2. 2
    Format: entries CSV or CSV with the analysis (customer, supplier and part).
  3. 3
    Only entries not yet exported: turn it off to resend a whole period.
  4. 4
    Mark as exported: turn it off for a test.
  5. 5
    Export and download the file.
How to close September and send the third quarter to the accountants
  1. In Closing, check that September has depreciation, inventory and VAT in green and click Close.

  2. In Export, click Export. Set From 1 July and To 30 September.

  3. Choose the format (with analysis if the accountants use it), leave Only entries not yet exported and Mark as exported on, and click Export and download.

  4. Send the file to the accountants.

The entries from July to September are marked as exported (with the file name), the notice and the Not exported from closed months indicator drop to zero and the export appears in the list.

#What changes with your profile

Javier's journal (Management): he sees a defence customer's entries, but cannot post. 12
Figure 547. Javier's journal (Management): he sees a defence customer's entries, but cannot post.
  1. 1
    Without «Post entries», the bar has no New entry, and the other views have no closing, fixed asset or export actions: view only.
  2. 2
    With «Defence data» he sees the entries of defence customers, with their badge. Without that permission (like Sergio) they do not appear in the lists, but they do count in the balances and the reports, with the name hidden.

Finance

Tax

Invoices and the tax authority: the SII records (Immediate Supply of Information) with their deadlines, the submission to the AEAT and how to fix what comes back with errors, VeriFactu, the drafts of VAT forms 303 and 349, and the Intrastat returns.

Who uses it: Administration (sends and files) and management (views)Access: «Tax» section; to send to the AEAT and to prepare and file Intrastat, «File with the Tax Agency»

Every invoice you issue and every supplier invoice you record has to reach the tax authority. Aeromec Precisión is in the SII (Suministro Inmediato de Información, the Spanish immediate VAT reporting system): the VAT record books are not kept on paper or in a separate program, but in the e-office of the AEAT (Agencia Estatal de Administración Tributaria, the Spanish Tax Agency), invoice by invoice and almost in real time. Aeromec generates the record of each invoice when it is issued or recorded, warns you of the deadline (4 working days), sends it and keeps the tax authority's response: accepted, accepted with errors or rejected, with the error and where to fix it.

With the same data, Aeromec prepares the VAT drafts (form 303, the VAT return, and form 349, the transactions with companies in other EU countries) and the Intrastat returns, the statistics on goods coming in from and going out to the EU. All of it to review with the tax adviser and file without keying anything in again.

  1. 1InvoiceIssued to a customer or received from a supplier.
  2. 2SII recordAeromec generates it with the AEAT keys and its deadline.
  3. 3SubmissionSend pending: batches per book, with the response and the CSV.
  4. 4CorrectionWhatever comes back with errors is fixed in its record and retried.
  5. 5Forms 303 and 349The month's VAT drafts, for the tax adviser.
  6. 6AccountingThe VAT settlement closes the month.
From the invoice to the tax authority. Click a step to go to its explanation.

#The regime and the indicators

The Tax indicators, the four tabs and the position with the AEAT. 12345678
Figure 548. The Tax indicators, the four tabs and the position with the AEAT.
  1. 1
    Regime and environment: «SII · Test» = the company is in the SII and works against the AEAT's test environment.
  2. 2
    To send: records that have not yet gone to the AEAT.
  3. 3
    Due now: pending records whose deadline ends today or tomorrow. If it is not zero, send them today.
  4. 4
    Overdue: pending records whose deadline has passed.
  5. 5
    Errors: rejected · accepted with errors. «0 · 1» = no rejections and one with errors.
  6. 6
    Sent in the current month and accepted by the AEAT.
  7. 7
    The tabs: SII (the records), Submissions, VAT (forms 303 and 349) and Intrastat.
  8. 8
    Voluntary SII, VeriFactu: not applicable (its ⓘ explains why) and Simulated submission (no certificate).

Each indicator has its ⓘ with what it counts, how it is calculated and what to do. They count all the records, including those of defence customers or parts even if your profile does not see them in the list.

The regime is chosen by the administrator in Settings, on the Invoice reporting to the tax agency card: SII, VeriFactu or no submission; the environment (test or production); whether the company has joined the SII voluntarily, and the name of the electronic certificate in the secure store (empty = simulated submission).

The regime with the AEAT, in Settings (administrator only; not saved). 1234
Figure 549. The regime with the AEAT, in Settings (administrator only; not saved).
  1. 1
    Regime: SII, VeriFactu or no submission. When it changes, whatever was pending under the previous regime stops being sent (it asks for confirmation).
  2. 2
    Environment: test (no tax effect) or production.
  3. 3
    Voluntary enrolment: if the company is below the threshold and joined with form 036.
  4. 4
    Electronic certificate: its name in the secure store (the certificate is never stored in the database). Empty, the submission is simulated.

#The SII records

The SII tab has one record per issued or received invoice (and another for an amendment or a withdrawal if it is later amended or withdrawn). On entry you see those to act on: the ones pending submission and those that came back with errors.

SII: the invoices waiting to be sent and one accepted with errors. 12345678
Figure 550. SII: the invoices waiting to be sent and one accepted with errors.
  1. 1
    Filter by book (issued or received), month and operation (new, amendment, withdrawal).
  2. 2
    Search by invoice number, customer or supplier, tax ID or CSV.
  3. 3
    Send pending to the AEAT, with their number.
  4. 4
    The filters: to act on, pending, rejected or with errors, late, accepted and all.
  5. 5
    Deadline: until when it can be sent; amber the day before and red if it has passed. Once sent, whether it was on time.
  6. 6
    Status and, on the right, the CSV (Código Seguro de Verificación, secure verification code) the AEAT gives each accepted record.
  7. 7
    An invoice accepted with errors: the triangle warns that the customer's EU VAT number lacks its country prefix. Click to open the record.
  8. 8
    The footer counts the records and adds up their tax base, VAT and total.
Status What it means
Pending Generated when the invoice is issued or recorded; goes out with the next submission
Accepted The AEAT considers it reported; it has its CSV
Accepted with errors Reported, but with a piece of data to fix (for example, an EU VAT number without its country prefix)
Rejected The AEAT does not consider it reported (for example, a tax ID not on the register): it must be fixed and resent
Not sent The company's regime changed before it was sent and the record was discarded

#Sending to the AEAT

Sending the pending records (not sent). 12
Figure 551. Sending the pending records (not sent).
  1. 1
    They are sent grouped by book (issued and received), as the AEAT web service requires. In the demo, submission is simulated.
  2. 2
    Send: when it finishes, the Tax Agency response: accepted, rejected and submissions made.
How to send the day's records
  1. In SII, look at the Due now and Overdue indicators: they should be at zero.

  2. Click Send pending and confirm with Send.

  3. Read the Tax Agency response: how many it accepted and how many it rejected. Click a submission to see the full request and response.

  4. If any comes back rejected or with errors, fix it (see below) before its deadline.

The accepted records become Accepted with their CSV and submission date, the To send indicator drops to zero and the submission stays in the Submissions tab.

#Fixing a record with errors

In the demo data, the invoice to Linha Técnica MRO (a customer in Portugal) came back accepted with errors with code 2011: its EU VAT number was saved as 509876543, without the PT prefix. The sale is VAT-exempt as an intra-EU supply, and that exemption depends on the customer's EU VAT number being valid: it has to be fixed.

Record accepted with errors: what the AEAT answered and how to fix it. 12345678
Figure 552. Record accepted with errors: what the AEAT answered and how to fix it.
  1. 1
    System, book and operation (SII · Issued invoices · New), status, invoice number, customer and date.
  2. 2
    Simulate response (demo): forces an AEAT response to see how it is handled.
  3. 3
    Retry: puts the record back in the queue with the current data.
  4. 4
    Net, VAT (0 %: exempt), total and deadline. The tabs above show the Record XML and the Tax Agency response.
  5. 5
    The error: 2011 · The counterparty's EU VAT number lacks its country prefix. Below, what it means and what to do.
  6. 6
    Fix in the customer record opens it directly.
  7. 7
    Invoice: number (link), date, book, period and the keys: F1 · 01 · E5 (exempt as an intra-EU supply).
  8. 8
    Customer: the EU VAT number saved, in amber, and what it should be (PT509876543).
The customer record, opened from the tax record: the warning and the one-click fix (not saved). 123
Figure 553. The customer record, opened from the tax record: the warning and the one-click fix (not saved).
  1. 1
    The warning: the EU VAT number lacks the country prefix and the AEAT accepts its invoices with errors.
  2. 2
    Fix: PT509876543 adds the prefix in one click. It can also be fixed with the pencil (Edit), EU VAT number field.
  3. 3
    Tax details: country (in the EU), tax ID, EU VAT number in amber and how its invoices are treated (intra-EU: exempt, to the SII, to form 349 and to Intrastat).
How to fix a record accepted with errors
  1. In SII, click the Rejected or with errors filter and open the record (the invoice to Linha Técnica MRO).

  2. Read the error and what has to be done. Click Fix in the customer record.

  3. In the customer record, click Fix: PT509876543 (or edit the EU VAT number field) and close the record.

  4. In the tax record, click Retry: it goes back to the queue with the current data. Then Send now (or wait for the next Send pending).

The record is sent as an amendment with the corrected EU VAT number and comes back Accepted with its CSV; the Errors indicator drops to «0 · 0». If you retry without fixing it, the AEAT returns the same error.
The AEAT's response to the submission of that record. 12
Figure 554. The AEAT's response to the submission of that record.
  1. 1
    Copy or Download the XML, for technical support or the tax adviser.
  2. 2
    The record status (AceptadoConErrores) and code 2011 with its description. The response carries simulada="true".
Simulate response: for the demo only. 12
Figure 555. Simulate response: for the demo only.
  1. 1
    It changes nothing at the tax authority: it shows how each response is handled.
  2. 2
    Accepted, accepted with errors (register warning) or rejected (tax ID not on the register).

#The submissions

The Submissions tab keeps every call to the AEAT web service: a batch of records from the same book (up to 1,000), with the request that was sent and the response the tax authority returned.

Submissions: two a day, morning and afternoon. 123456
Figure 556. Submissions: two a day, morning and afternoon.
  1. 1
    Search by CSV or by user.
  2. 2
    The filters: with rejections, issued invoices and received invoices.
  3. 3
    Book (issued or received), system and environment.
  4. 4
    Records in the submission, accepted and rejected.
  5. 5
    Status: correct (all accepted), partially correct or incorrect (all rejected).
  6. 6
    CSV: the submission receipt. Click a row to open it.
Record of a submission: the summary, the SOAP request and the response. 1234
Figure 557. Record of a submission: the summary, the SOAP request and the response.
  1. 1
    System and environment, status, book, date and time, CSV and user.
  2. 2
    Request (SOAP XML): the envelope sent to the web service (in production, signed with the certificate). Tax Agency response: what it returned.
  3. 3
    Submission: system, book, environment, date, user, CSV and the simulated submission note.
  4. 4
    Records in the submission, with their status; click one to open it.

#VeriFactu

VeriFactu is the other invoice reporting system, the one for invoicing software: each issued invoice generates, when it is issued, a record with a hash chained to the previous record's, which is sent to the AEAT, and the invoice carries a QR code so that the customer can check it on the tax authority's website. VeriFactu records are never deleted or changed: an error is corrected with a corrective invoice, with its own record.

Whoever keeps their books through the SII is outside VeriFactu: their invoices already reach the AEAT through the SII. That is why Aeromec Precisión shows VeriFactu: not applicable and there are no VeriFactu records. If the company left the SII (the administrator changes it in Settings), the following invoices would have their chained VeriFactu record, and each record would show its hash, the previous one's and the QR address.

The VeriFactu ⓘ explains why it does not apply to a company in the SII. 12
Figure 558. The VeriFactu ⓘ explains why it does not apply to a company in the SII.
  1. 1
    VeriFactu: not applicable: the company is in the SII.
  2. 2
    What it is, why it does not apply (art. 3 of the regulation) and how an invoice is corrected under VeriFactu.

#VAT: forms 303 and 349

The VAT tab computes the drafts of the two VAT returns from the period's invoices: form 303, the VAT return (the VAT charged to customers minus the VAT paid to suppliers), and form 349, the recapitulative statement of transactions with companies in other EU countries. On entry it proposes the last completed period, which is the one due for filing.

The September form 303 draft. 12345678
Figure 559. The September form 303 draft.
  1. 1
    Monthly or quarterly: monthly in the SII.
  2. 2
    The period: the month (or quarter) being declared.
  3. 3
    Export the form 303 boxes or the form 349 traders, for the tax adviser.
  4. 4
    It is a draft: it does not include what does not go through Aeromec (other invoices, pro rata, capital goods, amounts carried forward from earlier periods).
  5. 5
    Output VAT (27), deductible (45) and result (46) payable or to carry forward.
  6. 6
    Output VAT: sales at 21 % (07-09), intra-EU acquisitions (10-11) and corrective invoices (14-15). Each row with its ⓘ.
  7. 7
    Deductible VAT: domestic purchases (28-29) and intra-EU acquisitions (36-37).
  8. 8
    Result (46 = 27 − 45). Below, the additional information: intra-EU supplies (59) and exports (60).
The August form 349 draft: an intra-EU acquisition. 1234
Figure 560. The August form 349 draft: an intra-EU acquisition.
  1. 1
    Key: E supplies (sales to EU customers) or A acquisitions (purchases from EU suppliers).
  2. 2
    Country, EU VAT number and trader name.
  3. 3
    Invoices and tax base for the period.
  4. 4
    Matches form 303: the supplies (E) add up to box 59 and the acquisitions (A) to box 10.
How to review the month's VAT with the tax adviser
  1. In VAT, check that the period is the month due for filing (on entry, the last completed one).

  2. Review each group of boxes of the 303 with its ⓘ: where it comes from and what to check (for example, that box 09 matches the SII issued invoice book).

  3. If there are EU transactions, check that the 349 matches the 303 and that every EU VAT number carries its country prefix.

  4. Export the boxes and the traders and send them to the tax adviser, who adds what does not go through Aeromec (amounts carried forward, pro rata, capital goods) and files.

  5. In Accounting, settle the month's VAT; when the bank charges the payment, reconcile it in Banking against 4750 (the «MODELO 303» rule does it).

#Intrastat

Intrastat is the monthly statistics on trade in goods with other EU countries: purchases are arrivals and sales are dispatches. Aeromec prepares a draft per flow and month with the shipments to EU customers and the receipts from EU suppliers, grouped by the boxes the AEAT asks for, and flags any missing data.

Intrastat: the year-to-date total against the threshold and the months with movements. 1234567
Figure 561. Intrastat: the year-to-date total against the threshold and the months with movements.
  1. 1
    Dispatches (sales to the EU): the year-to-date total against the €400,000 threshold, the movements and last year's figure. «Not required».
  2. 2
    Arrivals (purchases from the EU), likewise.
  3. 3
    The year and Export CSV.
  4. 4
    The filters: with movements, dispatches, arrivals or all months.
  5. 5
    Each month and flow: movements, value, net mass and the year to date with its % of the threshold.
  6. 6
    Required and deadline (the 12th of the following month, «not required» below the threshold).
  7. 7
    Return: not prepared, draft (with its warnings) or filed; Prepare or Redo. Click the row to open it.
The May dispatches return, in draft. 12345678
Figure 562. The May dispatches return, in draft.
  1. 1
    Flow, status (draft or filed), month, lines, value and mass.
  2. 2
    Redo: recalculates it with the current data (after completing a CN code or an EU VAT number).
  3. 3
    File (simulated): saves the file and generates a receipt. Not possible while there are warnings.
  4. 4
    Download the file for the AEAT e-office.
  5. 5
    The tabs: Return, Lines (one per item, with its boxes) and File.
  6. 6
    Invoiced value, net mass, lines and warnings (what is missing: CN code, weight, EU VAT number).
  7. 7
    Below the threshold, it is not required: the draft is for checking the data.
  8. 8
    How it is prepared: what each line groups and where each piece of data comes from.
A line of the return, with all its boxes. 12
Figure 563. A line of the return, with all its boxes.
  1. 1
    Member State of destination, customer and CN code (Combined Nomenclature: 88073000, aircraft parts).
  2. 2
    Province, delivery terms (Incoterm), nature, transport, country of origin, regime, mass, units, values, EU VAT number and the delivery note.
The return file: one line per item. 12
Figure 564. The return file: one line per item.
  1. 1
    Copy or Download.
  2. 2
    The boxes separated by «;» in the order of the AEAT form.
How to prepare a month's Intrastat return
  1. In Intrastat, find the month and the flow. If it is not prepared, click Prepare; if there is already a draft, Redo to recalculate it with today's data.

  2. Open the return and check the warnings: an item's CN code or weight is missing (completed on its record, in Items) or a customer's EU VAT number lacks its country prefix (on its record, in Customers).

  3. Fix what is missing and click Redo until there are no warnings left. Check the lines and the file.

  4. If the company is required to file, click File before the 12th of the following month and keep the receipt with the file.

The return becomes Filed with the date, your name and the (simulated) receipt, and can no longer be redone: a correction would be a replacement return.

#What changes with your profile

Tax as Javier (Management) sees it: he can view everything, but not send. 12
Figure 565. Tax as Javier (Management) sees it: he can view everything, but not send.
  1. 1
    Without «File with the Tax Agency» there is no Send pending; in the records, no Retry or Send now either, and in Intrastat nothing can be prepared or filed.
  2. 2
    With «Defence data», Javier also sees the records of defence invoices: his list has more records than Sergio's.

Finance

Reports

Seven reports on recent months —on-time delivery, scrap and cost of poor quality, actual profitability, OEE, hours, purchasing and stock turnover—, each one exportable to CSV, and the free analysis: a pivot table to cross your data any way you like.

Who uses it: Management and administrationAccess: «Reports» section; profitability needs «See costs»; amounts, «See costs» or «See prices»; exporting, «Export CSV»

Reports answers the underlying questions: do we deliver on time?, how much does not getting it right first time cost us?, do parts cost what the cost breakdown says?, how well do the machines perform?, who works where?, how do suppliers behave?, which stock is sitting idle? There is nothing to fill in: choose the report and the period and read its blocks from top to bottom. Every figure and every chart has its ⓘ help with what it shows, how it is calculated (with an example) and how to read it.

For anything not covered by a fixed report you have the free analysis, a pivot table on your data (WOs, operations, hours, NCRs, deliveries, quotes, purchases, invoices…) where you choose the rows, the columns and what is measured.

#Choosing the report and the period

Reports: the list of reports on the left and, on the right, the chosen report (on entry, on-time delivery over the last 12 months). 1234567
Figure 566. Reports: the list of reports on the left and, on the right, the chosen report (on entry, on-time delivery over the last 12 months).
  1. 1
    The reports, grouped: service and quality, costs, shop floor, purchasing and stock and, at the end, the free analysis. One with a padlock needs a permission your profile does not have.
  2. 2
    The report title with its ⓘ (what it shows overall) and, below, the exact dates of the period.
  3. 3
    The period: 3 months, 6 months, 12 months or Year to date. It starts on the 1st of the month and runs until today; it applies to every report.
  4. 4
    Refresh recalculates the report with the data as it is right now.
  5. 5
    Export CSV downloads the report's tables for a spreadsheet.
  6. 6
    At the top, the period's key figures, compared with their target (✓ or ✗).
  7. 7
    Below, the charts and tables. Hover over a chart to see the details; the current month is shaded because it is not closed yet.
Report What it answers
On-time delivery (OTD) What share of deliveries went out on their date, by month and by customer.
Scrap and COPQ How many parts are scrapped, what poor quality costs and its causes (Pareto).
Actual profitability What the parts really cost against their cost breakdown, and the actual margin.
OEE by machine Each machine's effectiveness: availability × performance × quality.
Hours Hours worked by person and by machine: production, set-up and rework.
Purchasing and suppliers How much is bought from whom and how each supplier performs (OTD, PPM, approval).
Stock turnover What stock there is, how much is used and what has not moved for months.

Aeromec remembers the last report and the last period you chose.

Export CSV, with a report that has several tables. 1
Figure 567. Export CSV, with a report that has several tables.
  1. 1
    If the report has several tables, you choose which one: here, the customer table or the monthly series.

The CSV opens straight in Excel (with semicolons and the decimal comma) and its name carries the report and the dates of the period. It exports every row, also those hidden when the table is collapsed under «Show all N rows».

#On-time delivery (OTD)

OTD (on-time delivery) is the indicator aerospace customers use to rate their suppliers: what share of the order lines due in the period shipped complete on their date or earlier.

On-time delivery: the key figures and the month-by-month trend. 123456
Figure 568. On-time delivery: the key figures and the month-by-month trend.
  1. 1
    OTD for the period against the company target (Settings).
  2. 2
    Deliveries rated: the lines due in the period, on time and late.
  3. 3
    Average delay of the late deliveries already shipped.
  4. 4
    Customers below target: how many have an OTD below the target.
  5. 5
    OTD by month: the bars against the green target line.
  6. 6
    On-time and late deliveries each month: with few lines, a single delay moves the OTD a lot.
The «OTD by customer» table. 1234
Figure 569. The «OTD by customer» table.
  1. 1
    Each customer's lines rated, on time and late.
  2. 2
    The customer's OTD: green if it meets the target, amber if it falls short by less than 10 % and red otherwise.
  3. 3
    Average delay of their late deliveries and parts delivered.
  4. 4
    Defence customers carry their badge and only show with «Defence data». Click a row to open the customer.

#Scrap and COPQ

Scrap is the parts thrown away (they cannot be reworked or delivered under a customer concession) and COPQ (cost of poor quality) is what not getting it right first time has cost: scrap, rework and customer claims.

Scrap and COPQ: the key figures and the scrap rate of each month. 123456
Figure 570. Scrap and COPQ: the key figures and the scrap rate of each month.
  1. 1
    The period's scrap rate against its target.
  2. 2
    Parts scrapped out of those made.
  3. 3
    COPQ in euros and its % of sales.
  4. 4
    Rework: hours of rework time records and their cost.
  5. 5
    Top cause of the scrapped parts and its share.
  6. 6
    Scrap by month with the target. Below come COPQ by month and type and the Pareto charts.
Pareto by cause: the scrap causes from largest to smallest, with the cumulative percentage. 123
Figure 571. Pareto by cause: the scrap causes from largest to smallest, with the cumulative percentage.
  1. 1
    The summary: how many causes add up to 80 % of scrapped parts.
  2. 2
    The red bars reach up to 80 % cumulative: they are the few causes to act on first (80/20 rule); the grey ones are the rest.
  3. 3
    The blue line adds up the percentages and the dashed red one marks 80 %. Hover over a bar to see its parts and its share.

Below are the Pareto by part and the Pareto by machine (with what each one's scrap has cost) and the Breakdown by cause table. Always start with the Pareto: two or three causes almost always explain 80 %, and that is where a corrective action (CAPA, see Nonconformances) pays off most.

#Actual profitability

It compares what the WOs closed in the period really cost with what the cost breakdown said (the part cost calculated from its routing), and the margin they left against the company's target margin.

Actual profitability: the variance against the cost breakdown and the ten parts that deviate most. 123456
Figure 572. Actual profitability: the variance against the cost breakdown and the ten parts that deviate most.
  1. 1
    Variance vs. cost breakdown in % and in euros: above zero, more was spent than planned.
  2. 2
    Closed WOs in the period and their good parts.
  3. 3
    Actual cost against planned.
  4. 4
    Parts over cost: those costing more than 5 % above the cost breakdown.
  5. 5
    Average actual margin after overheads, against the target.
  6. 6
    The top 10 parts by variance: actual against planned per part; red if they cost more, green if less.
The «Profitability by part» table. 123
Figure 573. The «Profitability by part» table.
  1. 1
    Planned/unit (the cost breakdown) and Actual/unit (what each good part cost).
  2. 2
    Variance: actual ÷ planned − 1; over 10 %, red.
  3. 3
    Each part's price and actual margin. Click a row to open the part with its cost breakdown and its WOs.

#OEE by machine

OEE (overall equipment effectiveness) says what share of the time a machine had work is turned into good parts at standard speed. It is the product of three factors: availability (how much of that time it was actually machining), performance (at what speed, against the routing times) and quality (what share of the parts came out good).

OEE by machine: the three factors and the shop's monthly trend. 123456
Figure 574. OEE by machine: the three factors and the shop's monthly trend.
  1. 1
    The shop's OEE (each machine weighted by its booked hours) against the target.
  2. 2
    Availability: running hours out of booked hours.
  3. 3
    Performance: standard hours of what was produced ÷ actual hours.
  4. 4
    Quality: good parts ÷ parts made.
  5. 5
    OEE target and how many machines reach it.
  6. 6
    Shop OEE by month. Below, each machine's OEE with its three factors.
The «OEE components by machine» table. 1234
Figure 575. The «OEE components by machine» table.
  1. 1
    Booked hours and utilisation of nominal capacity («use 41 % of 1,888 h»).
  2. 2
    Availability, performance and quality, with their bars.
  3. 3
    The machine's OEE: green if it meets the target, amber if close and red otherwise.
  4. 4
    Hours of set-up, of incident stops and of rework. Click a row to open the machine.

#Hours

Hours: the period's key figures and the split between production, set-up and rework. 123456
Figure 576. Hours: the period's key figures and the split between production, set-up and rework.
  1. 1
    Hours logged on time records, with how many people and machines.
  2. 2
    Time on production against set-up and rework.
  3. 3
    Average performance: standard hours ÷ actual hours.
  4. 4
    Good parts and rejected parts declared on the time records.
  5. 5
    Cost of hours: labour (with «See staff rates») and machine.
  6. 6
    Hours split: ideally almost everything is production.
The «Hours by person» table: the hours booked to each person and their split. 1234
Figure 577. The «Hours by person» table: the hours booked to each person and their split.
  1. 1
    Hours booked to the person; if they had several tasks at once, their machine record hours appear below.
  2. 2
    Split between production, set-up and rework (hover to see the hours).
  3. 3
    Performance: green from 95 %, amber from 85 % and red below.
  4. 4
    Good, rejected and the labour cost. Click a person to open their record.

#Purchasing and suppliers

Purchasing and suppliers: what was bought in the period, from whom and the state of their approval. 123456
Figure 578. Purchasing and suppliers: what was bought in the period, from whom and the state of their approval.
  1. 1
    Purchase spend and number of purchase orders in the period.
  2. 2
    Suppliers with orders in the period, out of the active ones.
  3. 3
    Open supplier NCRs: material or treatments rejected and not yet closed.
  4. 4
    Approval to review: conditional, pending or suspended suppliers.
  5. 5
    The top 8 suppliers by spend: orders and amount.
  6. 6
    The approval status of all active suppliers.

Below, the Purchasing by supplier table gives, for each active supplier, their orders and spend in the period, their OTD and PPM over the last 12 months (parts rejected per million received), their approval and their open NCRs, with filters to see those below target or with their approval to review. OTD and PPM come from the 12-month supplier rating, whatever period you choose. See Suppliers.

#Stock turnover

Stock turnover: the value of the stock, what is idle and how long the current stock lasts. 1234567
Figure 579. Stock turnover: the value of the stock, what is idle and how long the current stock lasts.
  1. 1
    Stock value and items in stock.
  2. 2
    No movement > 180 days: idle stock and its value.
  3. 3
    No usage in the period: items in stock that did not go out.
  4. 4
    Average turnover: how many times the current stock was used up in the period.
  5. 5
    Median coverage: how many days the stock lasts at current usage.
  6. 6
    Age of last movement, by bucket: over 180 days in red.
  7. 7
    Stock value by type: parts, raw material, tools, consumables.
The «Turnover by item» table. 123
Figure 580. The «Turnover by item» table.
  1. 1
    Usage in the period (issues to WOs and shipments) and turnover = usage ÷ stock.
  2. 2
    Coverage: days the stock lasts at the period's rate of usage.
  3. 3
    An item with no usage and more than 180 days without moving shows in red: it is tied-up money. Click the row to open the item.

#Free analysis

The free analysis is a pivot table on your data: you choose what to analyse (the source: WOs, WO operations, hours and time bookings, incidents, NCRs, scrap, inspections, order deliveries, quotes, purchase orders or invoices), how to group it into rows and columns (customer, programme, part, machine, person, month, week…) and what to measure (the number of records, a sum or an average). Click any cell and you see the records behind it, with a link to their record. It comes with ready-made layouts and you can save your own.

WOs, NCRs, order deliveries and invoices can be grouped by Programme (AR-90, TF-38…; see Programmes): for example, the OTD or the invoicing of each programme by quarter. Whatever belongs to no programme shows as «No programme».

It respects your profile like the rest of Aeromec: only the sources of the sections you can see are offered, defence data does not appear without «Defence data» and the costs, prices and margins you cannot see show a padlock.

Free analysis: the header and the «What to analyse» card with the built-in layout «WOs by customer and month». 12345678
Figure 581. Free analysis: the header and the «What to analyse» card with the built-in layout «WOs by customer and month».
  1. 1
    Below the title: the layout loaded, the source and the dates of the period.
  2. 2
    Layouts: the built-in ones and yours, and Save current layout….
  3. 3
    Data source (each record is a WO, an operation, a time booking…) and reference date, which decides which records fall in the period.
  4. 4
    The period: 3, 6 or 12 months, year to date or a date range (which may reach into the future, for example expected deliveries).
  5. 5
    Rows, sub-rows (optional, a breakdown of each row) and columns (optional). Time dimensions carry a calendar icon: month, ISO week, quarter, year.
  6. 6
    Swap rows and columns in one click.
  7. 7
    Measure: the number of records or a numeric field (hours, parts, amount…) with its calculation: sum or average.
  8. 8
    Add filter: limits the records to some values (a customer, some statuses…).
The pivot table: one row per customer, one column per month and, in each cell, the number of WOs. 123456
Figure 582. The pivot table: one row per customer, one column per month and, in each cell, the number of WOs.
  1. 1
    How many records are included, the rows × columns and the total of the measure.
  2. 2
    Sort the rows: by value (highest or lowest first) or by label.
  3. 3
    The rows header: click it to sort them by label.
  4. 4
    Each column: click it to sort the rows by its value (again, the other way round). With many columns, the table scrolls sideways with the labels fixed.
  5. 5
    Each cell, shaded according to its value. Click it to see the records behind it.
  6. 6
    The Total row adds up each column; to the right of each row, its total.
Below the table, the totals as a chart: by the row dimension and by the column dimension. 1
Figure 583. Below the table, the totals as a chart: by the row dimension and by the column dimension.
  1. 1
    Totals by the row dimension, largest first (the top 10). Below, those of the columns.
How to build an analysis: hours on each machine by week
  1. In Reports, open Free analysis.

  2. In Data source, choose Hours and time bookings; the Reference date becomes the booking start.

  3. Choose the period (3 m), Rows = Machine and Columns = ISO week.

  4. In Measure, choose Hours and the calculation Sum.

  5. If you only want production, click Add filter → Booking type and leave Production ticked. Click Apply.

That is the built-in layout «Hours by machine and week». Everything is recalculated at once without reading the data again, and Aeromec remembers the last configuration in your profile.
The «Layouts» menu. 123
Figure 584. The «Layouts» menu.
  1. 1
    The 12 built-in layouts: WOs by customer and month, hours by machine and week, NCRs by cause and month, OTD by customer and quarter, invoicing by customer and quarter…
  2. 2
    My layouts: the ones you have saved (with a bin to delete them).
  3. 3
    Save current layout…
Save layout. 12
Figure 585. Save layout.
  1. 1
    The layout name. With a name that already exists, it is replaced.
  2. 2
    Save: you will have it under «My layouts» on any device.

The source, reference date, period, rows and columns, measure, filters and sort order are saved in your profile. Layouts are personal: each person has their own.

Filter by «WO status». 123
Figure 586. Filter by «WO status».
  1. 1
    All or None in one click.
  2. 2
    Each value with its number of records: tick the ones you want to see.
  3. 3
    Apply the filter; it appears as a chip under «Filters», with its ✕ to remove it.
Clicking a cell: its records. 12
Figure 587. Clicking a cell: its records.
  1. 1
    The source, the cell (row · column) and how many records it contains.
  2. 2
    Each record: click to open its record (here, the WO).

#Free analysis with person hours

The layout «Hours by person and booking type»: source «Hours and time bookings», rows by person and columns by booking type. 1234
Figure 588. The layout «Hours by person and booking type»: source «Hours and time bookings», rows by person and columns by booking type.
  1. 1
    The Hours and time bookings source: one record per time booking (set-up, run or rework).
  2. 2
    The measure: this design uses Hours booked to the person (those of the allocation rule); Hours would be those of the time record, that is, machine time. There are also parts, costs and performance.
  3. 3
    Sum or average. Amounts per part, percentages and days only allow the average.
  4. 4
    One column per booking type and the total per person: it matches the Hours report.

Administration

Users and profiles

Who can sign in to Aeromec and what each person can see and do: user accounts, access profiles with one switch per permission and the keys each person uses to connect Claude.

Who uses it: Administrators onlyAccess: being an administrator (it does not depend on any profile)

Users and profiles is where you decide who signs in to Aeromec and what each person sees. It has three views:

  • Users: the accounts (name, email, job title, password), the access profiles of each one and, if needed, the end date of their access. There is no self sign-up: only an administrator can create accounts.
  • Profiles: each access profile is a set of switches, one per permission: which menu sections it sees, which sensitive data (costs, prices, margins, staff rates, contact details, defence), what it can do, which Dashboard blocks it gets and what it can do from Claude.
  • Claude: the access keys each user has connected Claude to Aeromec with, and what Claude has done with them (see Connect to Claude).

This section is for administrators only. Administrators see everything and need no profiles; every other user sees exactly what their profiles allow, and the database enforces it on every query, not just the screen. The full catalogue of permissions, the ready-made profiles and the demo accounts are in the appendix Profiles and permissions.

#Where to find it

On a computer, Users, Settings and Audit log are not in the side bar: they open from your user menu, at the top right (Users and Settings only appear to administrators). On a phone they are at the bottom of the side menu (☰), in the Administration group.

On a computer: your user menu, at the top right. 1234
Figure 589. On a computer: your user menu, at the top right.
  1. 1
    Click your name to open the menu.
  2. 2
    Users: accounts, access profiles and Claude keys.
  3. 3
    Settings: the company details and settings (see Settings).
  4. 4
    Audit log: who changed what and when (see Audit log).
On a phone: at the bottom of the side menu. 1
Figure 590. On a phone: at the bottom of the side menu.
  1. 1
    The Administration group: Users and Settings (administrators only) and Audit log (with its permission).

#The list of users

Aeromec's users, with their job title, their access profiles and how many permissions they have. 12345678
Figure 591. Aeromec's users, with their job title, their access profiles and how many permissions they have.
  1. 1
    Users, Profiles and Claude: the three views of the section, with how many users and profiles there are. The ⓘ explains each one.
  2. 2
    New user creates an account.
  3. 3
    The indicators: users, how many are active and how many are administrators.
  4. 4
    Without a profile: active users who are not administrators and have no profile, so they would see nothing. In red if there are any.
  5. 5
    Your own account is tagged You. Under the name, the email used to sign in; to its right, the job title.
  6. 6
    An administrator: has every permission and needs no profiles.
  7. 7
    Everyone else, with their access profiles and how many of the total permissions they get.
  8. 8
    Click any user to change their details, profiles, status or password.

A disabled user is tagged Inactive and their name is greyed out: they cannot sign in, but their name is kept on quotes, work orders, inspections and the change log. If someone shows No profile in red, they will not see anything yet when they sign in: assign them at least one profile.

#Creating a user

How to give someone access
  1. Open your user menu → Users and click New user.

  2. Type their name, the email they will sign in with and, if you like, their job title.

  3. Type a password of at least 8 characters, or click the wand to have Aeromec generate one (it is shown so you can copy it).

  4. Tick one or more access profiles and check in Effective access what they will be able to see and do.

  5. Click Create user and give them their email and password securely.

The account is ready: they can sign in straight away and will only see what their profiles allow.
Adding an inspector with the Calidad (quality) profile: the Effective access box shows what she will be able to see and do. 12345678
Figure 592. Adding an inspector with the Calidad (quality) profile: the Effective access box shows what she will be able to see and do.
  1. 1
    Name, email (used to sign in; it cannot be changed later) and job title.
  2. 2
    Password: the wand generates a strong one and the eye shows or hides it. At least 8 characters.
  3. 3
    Administrator: sees everything and manages users, profiles and settings. If you turn it on, the profiles disappear because they do not apply.
  4. 4
    The access profiles: click the ones you want to give (they show a ✓). Hover over one to read who it is for.
  5. 5
    Effective access: what they will have with the profiles ticked, and how many permissions that is out of the total.
  6. 6
    Under Sensitive data, whatever they will not be able to see is struck through with a padlock: those figures will reach them empty.
  7. 7
    Assistant (Claude): whether they will be able to use Aeromec from Claude and whether Claude will be able to make changes on their behalf.
  8. 8
    Create user creates the account (it was not clicked for the screenshot).
A temporary contractor with Jefe de taller + Sin defensa: the second profile removes defence parts and customers. 1234
Figure 593. A temporary contractor with Jefe de taller + Sin defensa: the second profile removes defence parts and customers.
  1. 1
    Two profiles ticked: Jefe de taller (shop supervisor) and Sin defensa (no defence).
  2. 2
    Aeromec reminds you of the rule: with two profiles they only get what both switch on.
  3. 3
    They now have 34 permissions, one fewer than with Jefe de taller alone (35).
  4. 4
    Defence data, struck through: defence or export-controlled parts and customers will not exist for them.

#Changing a user: profiles, status and password

Click a user in the list to open their record. You can change their name, job title, whether they are an administrator and their profiles (the email cannot be changed: it is their sign-in identifier). At the end is the Account block, with their status and password; at the very bottom, Save changes applies whatever you have changed.

The record of Marta Gil Herrera, sales manager: her profile, what she sees and her account. 12345
Figure 594. The record of Marta Gil Herrera, sales manager: her profile, what she sees and her account.
  1. 1
    The email she signs in with: it cannot be changed.
  2. 2
    Her profiles: tick or untick to change them. The effective access below is recalculated instantly.
  3. 3
    What she does not see with her profile, struck through: here, costs, margins, staff rates, defence and the audit log.
  4. 4
    Active · can sign in: turn it off to cut off her access at once. Her name is kept on quotes, work orders, inspections and the change log.
  5. 5
    Reset sets a new password (if she has forgotten it or someone else knows it).
Resetting a user's password. 123
Figure 595. Resetting a user's password.
  1. 1
    Type the new password (at least 8 characters)…
  2. 2
    …or generate one with the wand; the eye shows it so you can copy it.
  3. 3
    Reset changes it straight away: the old one stops working. Give it to the user securely.
Your own administrator record: you cannot remove your own administrator rights or disable yourself. 123
Figure 596. Your own administrator record: you cannot remove your own administrator rights or disable yourself.
  1. 1
    An administrator cannot remove their own administrator rights: another administrator has to do it. That way you are never left without anyone who can manage Aeromec.
  2. 2
    Administrators have no profiles applied: they see every section and every figure.
  3. 3
    You cannot disable your own user either.

#The access end date and the external auditor

For a user who only needs access for a while —an external auditor for certification or for a customer, a consultant, someone on a placement— set an access end date in the Account block of their record. Until that day they sign in as normal (and their menu reminds them); from the following day they cannot see or do anything, even though they keep their profile, and when they sign in they are told their access has ended. In the user list they carry the tag «Access until …» (or «Access ended on …»).

The record of Teresa Lozano, external auditor: the External auditor profile and her access end date. 12345
Figure 597. The record of Teresa Lozano, external auditor: the External auditor profile and her access end date.
  1. 1
    Her job title: external auditor for EN 9100 certification.
  2. 2
    Her profile, External auditor: read only (hover over it to read its description).
  3. 3
    Access until …: the last day she can sign in. The database enforces it.
  4. 4
    End date picks it from a calendar; the ✕ to its left removes it (access with no end date).
  5. 5
    Save changes applies it (it was not pressed in the screenshot). It is recorded in the access change log.

The External auditor profile comes ready for an audit: read only access to what an audit reviews —parts, routings, WOs, inspection and FAI, nonconformances, gauges, traceability, shipments, customers and sales orders, suppliers and purchasing, programmes and changes, people, machines and maintenance, the management system, documentation, the standard, competence and training and the change audit log—, without amounts, contact details, defence or any action: they cannot create, change or sign anything, and they have no dashboard. In the demo, Teresa Lozano has it.

#Access profiles

The Profiles view holds the permission matrix: each row is a permission and each column a profile; the switch in each cell turns that permission on or off for that profile. The 103 permissions are grouped into Menu sections, Sensitive data, Actions, Dashboard blocks and Assistant (Claude). The administrator is not listed because they have everything. If not all the profiles fit, the matrix scrolls sideways (with the bar at the bottom or with the mouse); the last one is External auditor.

The quality system brought new permissions in every group: the sections Programmes, Changes, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training; actions such as «Manage stamps», «Review contracts», «Edit requirements», «Approve suppliers», «Manage changes» and «Approve changes», «Edit documentation» and «Approve documents», «Edit the management system» and «Approve the management review», or «Edit training»; and the dashboard blocks Programmes, Management system and Competence & training. What each one allows and which profiles have it out of the box is in the appendix Profiles and permissions.

The profile matrix: one switch per permission and profile. 12345678
Figure 598. The profile matrix: one switch per permission and profile.
  1. 1
    The Profiles view.
  2. 2
    New profile creates an empty one or one that copies the switches of another.
  3. 3
    Each column is a profile, with how many users have it and how many permissions it turns on. Hover over the name to read its description.
  4. 4
    The ⋯ menu of each profile: edit its name, duplicate it or delete it.
  5. 5
    Permissions are grouped: first, the menu sections the profile sees.
  6. 6
    Each permission's ⓘ explains what it allows, where it applies and what is left out.
  7. 7
    Each switch: on (in colour), the profile has that permission; off (grey), it does not. The change is saved as soon as you click it.
  8. 8
    Here, the Oficina técnica (engineering office) profile does not see the Quotes section.
Further down the matrix: the sensitive data. The columns keep the same order: Dirección, Oficina técnica, Comercial, Planificación, Jefe de taller and Operario de planta. 1234567
Figure 599. Further down the matrix: the sensitive data. The columns keep the same order: Dirección, Oficina técnica, Comercial, Planificación, Jefe de taller and Operario de planta.
  1. 1
    Sensitive data: which figures and delicate data the profile sees, whether it can export and whether it sees the audit log.
  2. 2
    Comercial (sales) does not see costs…
  3. 3
    …but it does see selling prices: it quotes with the suggested price without knowing what the part costs.
  4. 4
    See margins only works together with "See costs" and "See prices": a margin next to a price would reveal the cost.
  5. 5
    Without Defence data, defence or export-controlled parts and customers do not exist for the profile.
  6. 6
    See the change audit log: out of the box, only Dirección.
  7. 7
    Actions: what it can create or change (quotes, routings, work orders, quality, warehouse, purchasing, invoices…).

At the end of the matrix come the Dashboard blocks (which cards the profile sees on its Dashboard) and the Assistant (Claude) group, with what each profile can do from a chat with Claude (see Connect to Claude):

  • Use from Claude: connecting Claude to Aeromec and asking it about anything the profile can see. Without it, none of that user's keys works, not even the ones they already have.
  • Make changes from Claude: letting Claude create, change and delete on the user's behalf, only in what their actions already allow in the app. Without it, Claude can only look things up.

Out of the box, every profile has both except Operario de planta (shop-floor operator: it only uses the terminal) and Administración (finance), which can only look things up: invoices, payments received and payables are issued in the app, with the whole document in view.

The end of the matrix: the last dashboard blocks and the Assistant (Claude) group. 12345
Figure 600. The end of the matrix: the last dashboard blocks and the Assistant (Claude) group.
  1. 1
    The dashboard blocks: each one is a card on the Dashboard. Their amounts still depend on "See costs" and "See prices".
  2. 2
    Assistant (Claude): what each profile can do from a chat with Claude.
  3. 3
    Use from Claude: without it, the user cannot use Aeromec from Claude.
  4. 4
    Make changes from Claude: without it, Claude can only look things up, even if the user can edit in the app.
  5. 5
    Operario de planta does not have it: the shop-floor terminal is never used from a chat.
A permission's ⓘ help: what it allows, where it applies and what is left out. 123
Figure 601. A permission's ⓘ help: what it allows, where it applies and what is left out.
  1. 1
    What it allows: what you can see or do with the permission switched on.
  2. 2
    Where it applies: the sections and screens where it takes effect.
  3. 3
    What is left out: what depends on another permission or cannot be seen without it, so there are no surprises.
How to change what a profile can see or do
  1. Your user menu → Users → Profiles.

  2. Find the permission's row (click its ⓘ if you are not sure what it does) and the profile's column.

  3. Click the switch. The change saves itself and applies to every user with that profile on their next query.

For example, switching on "See costs" in "Comercial" lets sales staff see the cost breakdown when quoting; and with "See margins", the margin too.

#Creating, duplicating, renaming and deleting profiles

The ⋯ menu of a profile. 123
Figure 602. The ⋯ menu of a profile.
  1. 1
    Edit profile: change its name and description.
  2. 2
    Duplicate: create another one with the same switches.
  3. 3
    Delete profile is only possible if no user has it assigned; otherwise it is greyed out.
Duplicating the Jefe de taller profile. 1234
Figure 603. Duplicating the Jefe de taller profile.
  1. 1
    The profile's name (up to 60 characters). When duplicating, Aeromec suggests the original's name with "(copy)": change it to one that says who it is for.
  2. 2
    A description: who it is for and what it leaves out.
  3. 3
    Copy permissions from: the starting profile, or "Start with no permissions".
  4. 4
    Create profile; then you adjust its switches in the matrix.
  • New profile opens this form empty: name, description and Copy permissions from (if you choose "Start with no permissions", the profile starts with everything off and you turn things on in the matrix).
  • Duplicate opens the same form already filled in: the original's name with "(copy)", its description and itself as the starting profile.
  • Edit profile only changes the name and description; permissions are changed in the matrix.
  • Delete profile asks for confirmation and deletes the profile with all its switches. First you have to remove it from all its users.

#The change log

Below the matrix: the rule for several profiles and the recent changes to access. 123
Figure 604. Below the matrix: the rule for several profiles and the recent changes to access.
  1. 1
    With several profiles the most restrictive wins, with an example: «Jefe de taller» + «Sin defensa».
  2. 2
    Recent changes: the last 20 changes to access, with who made them and how long ago (hover over the time to see the exact date).
  3. 3
    Here, the administrator revoking one of Pablo Serrano's Claude keys.

Recent changes records every change to access:

  • profiles created (or copied from another), edited or deleted;
  • switches turned on or off ("Switched on “See costs” in “Comercial”");
  • users created, with the profiles assigned to them, who was made an administrator or had it removed, who was disabled or re-enabled and whose password was reset;
  • Claude keys created and revoked, with their name and whose they are.

The system itself writes it whenever there is a change, and nobody can edit it from the application. As long as nothing has been changed, the card says "Nothing has been changed yet". Changes to data (quotes, work orders, routings, calibrations…) are not recorded here but in the Audit log.

#Every user's Claude keys

The Claude view brings together the access keys each person has connected Claude to Aeromec with, and what Claude has done with them. Each user sees and revokes their own in their Connect to Claude panel (in their user menu); here the administrator sees everyone's and can revoke any of them, for example when someone leaves the company or loses their laptop.

Users → Claude: every user's keys and the latest activity. 1234567
Figure 605. Users → Claude: every user's keys and the latest activity.
  1. 1
    The Claude view.
  2. 2
    The indicators: active keys, how many users use Claude, calls in total and changes made from Claude in the last 7 days.
  3. 3
    Your own Connect to Claude panel, to create or revoke your keys.
  4. 4
    Each key with its owner, the start of the key, how it was created, when it expires, when it was last used, its calls and its changes in 7 days.
  5. 5
    Revoke cuts off that key's access on Claude's next request, whoever it belongs to. It asks for confirmation.
  6. 6
    The revoked and expired keys, with who revoked them and when.
  7. 7
    Everyone's latest activity: what Claude has looked up or changed, when, for whom and with which key.
Revoking a key asks for confirmation. 12
Figure 606. Revoking a key asks for confirmation.
  1. 1
    Revoking cannot be undone: a new key will be needed to connect Claude again.
  2. 2
    Revoke cuts off the key (it was not clicked for the screenshot).
Claude's activity: look-ups, changes and denied requests. 12
Figure 607. Claude's activity: look-ups, changes and denied requests.
  1. 1
    A change made from Claude: Marta asked it to send a quote.
  2. 2
    Denied: Claude asked for a part's cost breakdown and Marta's profile cannot see costs, so the database did not return it.
How to cut off someone's Claude access
  1. Your user menu → Users → Claude view.

  2. Find their key in Access keys of every user and click Revoke.

  3. Confirm it. If the person has other active keys, revoke them too.

Claude loses access with those keys on its next request, and the revocation is recorded in Recent changes. To stop them connecting it again, turn off "Use from Claude" in their profile or disable their user.

#Tips

  • One profile per job, not per person. Use profiles such as «Calidad» or «Jefe de taller» and assign them; if someone needs something different, duplicate the closest profile.
  • To narrow access, add a profile. «Sin defensa» works as an add-on: added to another profile, it removes everything to do with defence and export control (contractors, trainees, audit visits from a civil customer).
  • Disable rather than delete. When someone leaves the company, disable their user: they will not be able to sign in, their Claude keys stop working and their name is kept on everything they did.
  • Always have two administrators, in case one is away: nobody can remove their own administrator rights.
  • Review the Claude view from time to time and revoke keys that have not been used for a long time or that belong to people who no longer need them.

Administration

Settings

The company parameters the whole application uses: tax details and certifications, costs and pricing for cost breakdowns, quality and delivery targets, calendar and capacity, public holidays with their scope, MRP, tasks at once at the terminal and the booking rule, document texts, document numbering, the Tax Agency reporting scheme, Intrastat and the accounting start-up, and the retention of signed records.

Who uses it: Administrator onlyAccess: being an administrator (it does not depend on any profile)

Settings holds the company details and the values Aeromec uses everywhere: the header of quotes, delivery notes, certificates of conformity (CoC) and invoices; the overheads and margin used to work out each part's target price; the targets that decide whether an indicator shows green, amber or red; the calendar the plant is planned with; how many tasks at once a person may run at the terminal and how their time is booked; the prefix of each document type; how the company reports to the Spanish Tax Agency (SII or VeriFactu), the Intrastat values and the accounting start-up; and how many years signed quality records are retained.

It is an administrator-only section: it is opened from your user menu, at the top right.

Settings is opened from your user menu. 12
Figure 608. Settings is opened from your user menu.
  1. 1
    Click your name, at the top right.
  2. 2
    Settings (only if you are an administrator). Next to it are Users and Audit log.

Each card on the screen is changed with its Edit button and saved at once in the company's single record: it applies to everything calculated or issued from then on. Quotes already sent, invoices already issued and documents already numbered do not change.

Each value has its ⓘ help with what it is, how it is used (with an example) and what to bear in mind.

#The screen and the company details

Company settings: the header and the first cards, Company and Calendar and capacity. 1234567
Figure 609. Company settings: the header and the first cards, Company and Calendar and capacity.
  1. 1
    The screen is for administrators only; changes affect the whole company.
  2. 2
    The general ⓘ explains what is on each card and from when a change applies.
  3. 3
    Company: trade name, legal name, tax ID, address, contact details, IBAN and certifications. They head quotes, delivery notes, CoCs and invoices.
  4. 4
    Each card has its own Edit, which opens its form.
  5. 5
    The IBAN is masked; the eye shows it for a moment.
  6. 6
    The certifications (EN 9100, ISO 9001…) printed on the documents.
  7. 7
    Calendar and capacity: working days, shifts, hours per shift, efficiency and shipping buffer (further down).
The form with the company details. 1234567
Figure 610. The form with the company details.
  1. 1
    Trade name: the one shown in the sidebar and on documents.
  2. 2
    Legal name and Tax ID: the tax details.
  3. 3
    Address and contact: address, postcode, town, country, email, phone and website.
  4. 4
    Collection IBAN: printed on invoices for payment by bank transfer (Aeromec checks that it is valid).
  5. 5
    Certifications: tick the ones the company holds…
  6. 6
    …and type others separated by commas, with their edition (e.g. «ISO 50001:2018»).
  7. 7
    Save: documents generated from now on use the new details.

#Costs and pricing

The «Costs and pricing» card, with a worked example recalculated with the company's values. 12345
Figure 611. The «Costs and pricing» card, with a worked example recalculated with the company's values.
  1. 1
    Overheads: the % added to the manufacturing cost (structure, energy, office).
  2. 2
    Target margin: the margin wanted on the selling price (less than 100 %).
  3. 3
    Labour cost: the standard machinist hour in cost breakdowns.
  4. 4
    Invoice VAT rate: the standard rate.
  5. 5
    The worked example: from €100 of manufacturing to the target price and to the amount invoiced with VAT, with your values.

#Quality and delivery targets

The targets that decide the colour of the indicators, with each one's traffic light. 12345
Figure 612. The targets that decide the colour of the indicators, with each one's traffic light.
  1. 1
    Edit to change them.
  2. 2
    OTD · on-time delivery: minimum share of order lines shipped on their date. Below, the traffic light: green, amber and red.
  3. 3
    PPM · defects per million: maximum parts rejected by the customer per million delivered.
  4. 4
    Scrap: maximum parts scrapped out of those made.
  5. 5
    OEE · overall equipment effectiveness: minimum availability × performance × quality.

#Calendar and capacity

The «Calendar and capacity» card: the time planning counts on. 12345
Figure 613. The «Calendar and capacity» card: the time planning counts on.
  1. 1
    Edit opens the calendar dialog.
  2. 2
    The company's working days (machines may have their own, in Work centres).
  3. 3
    Shop shifts with their hours and length. How many shifts each machine works is set on each centre.
  4. 4
    Hours per shift (productive, without breaks), planning efficiency (the share of capacity that is planned) and shipping buffer (working days between the end of the WO and the delivery).
  5. 5
    The worked example for a two-shift machine: capacity per day and per week and how many days a 40 h operation takes.
Editing the company calendar and capacity. 1234567
Figure 614. Editing the company calendar and capacity.
  1. 1
    Working days: tick the days the shop works.
  2. 2
    Add shift (morning, afternoon, night or day shift, with suggested hours).
  3. 3
    Each shift with its start and end (if it ends the next day, that is understood); the bin removes it.
  4. 4
    Hours per shift: the productive ones, without breaks (between 1 and 24).
  5. 5
    Planning efficiency: the share of nominal capacity that is planned; the rest is slack.
  6. 6
    Shipping buffer: working days between the end of the WO and the delivery date (between 0 and 60).
  7. 7
    The worked example is recalculated as you change the values.

#Public holidays

The public holidays of the current and the following year, with their scope. 1234567
Figure 615. The public holidays of the current and the following year, with their scope.
  1. 1
    Add holiday.
  2. 2
    The year: the current one and the next, with how many holidays each has; next to it, how many fall on a working day.
  3. 3
    The next holiday and how far off it is.
  4. 4
    The bin removes the holiday (it asks for confirmation).
  5. 5
    If it falls on a non-working day, it says so: «Non-working day: no capacity lost».
  6. 6
    Each holiday with its weekday and its scope: national, regional (Andalusia), local (La Rinconada) or company (past ones in grey). Click to change it.
  7. 7
    Calendar exceptions: stoppages, maintenance and special shifts for the plant or a machine are in Planning → Work calendar.
Add holiday: date, description and scope. 1234
Figure 616. Add holiday: date, description and scope.
  1. 1
    Date: in the current year or the next; there cannot be two holidays on the same day.
  2. 2
    Description: local holiday, bridge day, summer closure…
  3. 3
    Scope: national, regional, local or company (bridge days, closures).
  4. 4
    Save.

#Shop-floor terminal: tasks at once and booking

A machinist tending two or three machines can have several tasks open at once at the shop-floor terminal: one time record per machine. Here you decide the maximum and the booking rule used to split their time between them (booking means charging each WO with the share of the person's hours that belongs to it).

The «Shop-floor terminal» card. 1234
Figure 617. The «Shop-floor terminal» card.
  1. 1
    Edit to change it.
  2. 2
    Tasks at once: how many time records a person may have open (1 = one at a time, as always).
  3. 3
    Proportional: the person's time is split between their open tasks. The selected one is the rule in force.
  4. 4
    Full: each task counts the whole time; booked hours may exceed the working day.
The shop-floor terminal form. 123
Figure 618. The shop-floor terminal form.
  1. 1
    Tasks at once: between 1 and 6.
  2. 2
    Person time with several tasks: proportional or full.
  3. 3
    Save: it applies to the time records opened from now on.
Opening the field shows the two rules. 12
Figure 619. Opening the field shows the two rules.
  1. 1
    Proportional: with 2 tasks at once, each hour counts half on each one.
  2. 2
    Full: each task counts the whole time.
From 8:00 to 10:00, with F5-01 and F5-02 open at once (€28/h) Proportional Full
Hours booked to each WO 1 h 2 h
Hours booked to the person 2 h (the time they were there) 4 h (more than their working day)
Labour on each WO €28 €56
Hours of each machine (capacity, OEE, machine cost) 2 h 2 h

Proportional gives the real cost of labour; full, the time each WO had a person tending it. Machines always count their full time.

#MRP

The default values for material requirements planning. 12
Figure 620. The default values for material requirements planning.
  1. 1
    Horizon: how many days ahead the calculation looks, and up to what date that reaches today.
  2. 2
    Supplier selection for each purchase proposal: the preferred one in the item's price list, the cheapest or the fastest.

MRP (material requirements planning) crosses the requirements of WOs and orders within the horizon with the stock, pending purchases and safety stock, and proposes purchases and WOs (see MRP). A short horizon leaves out long lead-time materials (forgings, titanium); a long one brings purchases and stock forward. These are defaults: each MRP run can use other values without changing them here.

#Document texts

The «Documents» card: quote validity and terms, invoice terms and the CoC statement. 12345
Figure 621. The «Documents» card: quote validity and terms, invoice terms and the CoC statement.
  1. 1
    Edit the texts.
  2. 2
    Quote validity: the days a new quote keeps its prices.
  3. 3
    Quote terms: the text printed on every quote.
  4. 4
    Invoice terms: at the foot of every invoice (for example, late-payment interest).
  5. 5
    CoC preview: the certificate of conformity statement above the table of certified parts.

#Document numbering

The prefix of each document type. 123
Figure 622. The prefix of each document type.
  1. 1
    The document, its prefix and a sample number.
  2. 2
    Click a row (or its pencil) to change the prefix.
  3. 3
    Changing a prefix only affects new documents.
Changing the invoice prefix. 123
Figure 623. Changing the invoice prefix.
  1. 1
    Prefix: 1 to 8 letters or digits, no spaces, different from the others.
  2. 2
    How the first document of the year will be numbered.
  3. 3
    Save.

#Taxes and accounting

At the bottom of the page, the Taxes and accounting block brings together how the company reports to the Tax Agency, how Aeromec identifies itself as invoicing software, the Intrastat defaults and the accounting start-up. What you see here is used by the Tax, Accounting and Banking sections.

The «Taxes and accounting» block: Tax Agency and invoicing system on the left; Intrastat and accounting on the right. 12345678
Figure 624. The «Taxes and accounting» block: Tax Agency and invoicing system on the left; Intrastat and accounting on the right.
  1. 1
    Reporting scheme with the Tax Agency: SII (the one ticked), VeriFactu or no reporting, with what each one means.
  2. 2
    SII enrolment (voluntary or mandatory), the environment (test or production), the electronic certificate and how many records are still to be sent.
  3. 3
    Without a certificate, the records have the Tax Agency's real format, but sending and the response are simulated.
  4. 4
    Invoicing system (SIF): how the software identifies itself in each VeriFactu record (producer, name, identifier, version and installation).
  5. 5
    Intrastat: the company's province and the reporting threshold (€400,000 a year per flow).
  6. 6
    What goes by default on each shipment: Incoterm, transport mode and nature of transaction.
  7. 7
    Accounting: since when Aeromec posts the accounts (start-up), the share capital and how many entries it has.
  8. 8
    The company's bank accounts with their ledger sub-account; they are viewed here and worked on in Banking.
Tax Agency reporting scheme. 1234
Figure 625. Tax Agency reporting scheme.
  1. 1
    Scheme: SII, VeriFactu or no reporting. Never the first two at once.
  2. 2
    Environment: the Tax Agency's test environment, with no tax effect, or the real one.
  3. 3
    Voluntary SII enrolment: if the company is below the SII threshold and opted in with form 036.
  4. 4
    Electronic certificate: its name in the secure store (it is never kept in the database). Blank, simulated sending.
Intrastat. 1234
Figure 626. Intrastat.
  1. 1
    Province of origin of what is shipped and of destination of what arrives.
  2. 2
    Threshold: above it, that flow has to be declared every month.
  3. 3
    Default Incoterm and transport mode, for delivery notes that have none of their own.
  4. 4
    Nature of transaction: 11, outright purchase or sale, for normal sales and purchases.

#Record retention

At the very bottom, the Quality & records block says how long each type of signed record must be retained (inspections, FAIs, NCRs, CAPAs, calibrations, routing revisions, CoCs, document revisions, audits, supplier evaluations, contract reviews, changes…) and from when the years count: from the record date or from the last delivery of the part it refers to. Each signed record shows the result on its Signatures tab, as «Retain until» (see The Signatures tab).

The «Record retention» card: years and starting point for each type of signed record. 123
Figure 627. The «Record retention» card: years and starting point for each type of signed record.
  1. 1
    Edit the years and the starting point of each type.
  2. 2
    Each type of record: how many years and from when (here, 10 years from the part's last delivery).
  3. 3
    If a customer requires more years, they are set on their record: the longest period applies.
Editing retention: the years and the starting point of each type of record. 123
Figure 628. Editing retention: the years and the starting point of each type of record.
  1. 1
    Years of retention for the type of record (at least 1).
  2. 2
    From: the record date or the part's last delivery.
  3. 3
    Save: it applies at once; each record's «Retain until» date is calculated with these values.

Administration

Audit log

Who created, changed or deleted each thing and when, with every field's value before and after; sign-ins and sign-outs, the person who worked at the shop-floor terminal and what was done from Claude.

Who uses it: Management and administratorsAccess: "See the change audit log"; for amounts, also "See costs" or "See prices"; for defence records, "Defence data"

The Audit log answers the question "who changed this, and when?". Whenever someone creates, changes or deletes a record, Aeromec stores who did it, when and, for changes, each field's value before and after. It also records every sign-in and sign-out.

  • The database itself writes it at the moment of the change, so it cannot be bypassed or edited from the app or from outside: not even an administrator can delete or correct an entry.
  • It covers the master records (customers and their contacts, suppliers, items, supplier prices, work centres, people and their qualifications, gauges and calibrations, Settings, holidays and numbering series), engineering and sales (routings, operations, control plan and materials; programmes; quotes and sales orders with their lines, requirements and contract reviews; change requests and part revisions), production and quality (work orders and their operations, incidents, NCRs with their mutilations and escape notices, complaints, CAPAs, FAIs, inspections, tooling, FOD and customer property; inspection stamps), the management system (objectives, risks, audits, management review, documents and their revisions, competences and training), suppliers (scopes, evaluations, SCARs and customer-approved sources), logistics, purchasing and finance (lots, shipments, purchase orders, receipts, invoices, payments received, supplier invoices and payments) and documents.
  • At the shop-floor terminal the account is shared, so the person who identified with their PIN is recorded too.
  • What Claude does on someone's behalf is flagged from Claude (see Connect to Claude).
  • The correction of a signed record is just another change: the previous and the new value are kept here, and the record's Signatures tab shows who corrected it, why and with their signature (see The Signatures tab).

PINs, document contents and the XML files of the integrations are never stored. Data loads and automatic processes that are not run by a person with their own session leave no trace either. Changes to users, profiles and permissions are not recorded here but in the change log of Users and profiles.

#Where to find it

The user menu of Javier Ortega (Dirección, management): he has the audit log, but not Users or Settings. 12
Figure 629. The user menu of Javier Ortega (Dirección, management): he has the audit log, but not Users or Settings.
  1. 1
    Click your name, at the top right.
  2. 2
    Audit log appears to anyone with the "See the change audit log" permission (out of the box, Dirección and the external auditor) and to administrators.

On a computer it opens from your user menu; on a phone, at the bottom of the side menu (☰), in the Administration group. If you cannot see it, your profile does not have the "See the change audit log" permission. The External auditor profile has it, read only and without amounts: it is usually the first thing anyone auditing the shop asks for.

#The change log

The audit log: the last 90 days, most recent first. 12345678
Figure 630. The audit log: the last 90 days, most recent first.
  1. 1
    The indicators: records today (its ⓘ explains what is recorded), users who have done something today and deletions in the last 90 days.
  2. 2
    The search box: by person, type of record, reference (OF-2026-0182, NC-2026-0017…) or field name ("fecha entrega").
  3. 3
    Export CSV: what you see in the list, with all the changes of each entry (with the "Export CSV" permission).
  4. 4
    The filters, with their counts: All, Today, Changes, Created, Deleted, Sign-ins and sign-outs, From the shop-floor terminal and From Claude.
  5. 5
    Who: the person; underneath, from Claude if Claude did it on their behalf…
  6. 6
    …or, at the shop-floor terminal, the person who entered their PIN (the account, Rafael Moreno, is the tablet's).
  7. 7
    Action: Created (green), Changed (blue), Deleted (red), Sign-in or Sign-out (grey).
  8. 8
    What: the type of record and its reference; Fields: the ones that changed. Click the row to see the detail.

The list shows the last 90 days, most recent first; click a column header to sort by it. On a phone, each entry is a card with the action, the record, the time and who.

Filter What it shows
Today What has been recorded today.
Changes, Created, Deleted Only changes to records that already existed, only new records, or only deleted ones.
Sign-ins and sign-outs Every time someone signs in to Aeromec or signs out.
From the shop-floor terminal What was done at the shop-floor terminal: starting and finishing operations, incidents, gauge loans… with the person who identified with their PIN.
From Claude What Claude has created or changed on someone's behalf.

#The detail of an entry

The detail of a change: the quote that Marta Gil sent to the customer from Claude. 1234
Figure 631. The detail of a change: the quote that Marta Gil sent to the customer from Claude.
  1. 1
    The action, the type of record and its reference.
  2. 2
    When (date and time), who and, where applicable, from Claude or the person at the terminal.
  3. 3
    Before: each field's previous value, struck through in red (— if it was empty).
  4. 4
    After: the new value, in green. Here, the quote went from draft to sent and the sending date was filled in.

A creation shows every field that has a value, with the "Before" column empty; a deletion, the other way round. Sign-ins and sign-outs have no fields. Field names and values appear exactly as the database stores them, in Spanish (for example, a status "en_cola" → "en_curso", queued → in progress), and references to other records are shortened.

#What was done from Claude and at the terminal

The "From Claude" filter: what Claude has created or changed on behalf of each person. 123
Figure 632. The "From Claude" filter: what Claude has created or changed on behalf of each person.
  1. 1
    The From Claude filter, with how many entries there are.
  2. 2
    Claude acts on behalf of a person, with their key and their permissions: here, Marta Gil sent a quote by asking Claude.
  3. 3
    And Pablo Serrano created a work order from a chat.

Claude can only do what the person's profile allows, and only if the profile has "Make changes from Claude". Every call is also recorded in the key's activity (in Users and profiles → Claude), including look-ups and denied requests.

From the shop-floor terminal shows what was done at the shop-floor terminal. The workshop tablet signs in with a shared account (in the demo, Rafael Moreno's), but every action asks for the PIN of whoever does it, and that is the name shown underneath: "at the terminal: Manuel Jiménez Ortiz".

#The Changes tab of each record

The Changes tab of a quote: its own changes, most recent first. 123
Figure 633. The Changes tab of a quote: its own changes, most recent first.
  1. 1
    The Changes tab, after Documents. It only appears with the "See the change audit log" permission.
  2. 2
    Each change to this record: the fields that changed, when, who and whether it was from Claude or at the terminal.
  3. 3
    Click it to see the detail, with each field before and after.

The Changes tab is found on the records that have a Documents tab: customers, suppliers, items, routings, quotes, sales orders, work orders, lots, receipts, purchase orders, shipments, NCRs, CAPAs, FAIs, inspections, gauges, calibrations, supplier invoices, work centres, people, and maintenance equipment and work orders. Changes to everything else (programmes, change requests, objectives, risks, audits, system documents, training…) are found in the Audit log section by their number or name. It shows the record's own changes (up to the latest 200): on a work order, those of the order itself (its release, dates, priority); what is done on each of its operations at the terminal can be seen in the Audit log section, by searching for the work order number or with From the shop-floor terminal. If a record has no changes made from the app, the tab says so: "No changes recorded".

How to find out who changed something
  1. Open the record (for example, the work order or the quote) and click the Changes tab; or open Audit log from your user menu and type its reference in the search box.

  2. If you are looking for a type of change, use the filters (Changes, Created, Deleted…) or type the field name ("fecha entrega", "prioridad").

  3. Click the entry: you will see each field with its value before and after, who did it and when.

For example, to find out who released OF-2026-0182 and when: its Changes tab shows "Estado, Fecha lanzamiento" (status, release date), with the planner and the time.

Tips

  • Before asking "who has touched this?", look at the record's Changes tab: it is the quickest way.
  • Use Sign-ins and sign-outs to check someone's access (for example, after they leave the company).
  • Review From Claude and Deleted from time to time: they are the entries worth knowing about.
  • The section shows the last 90 days; a record's Changes tab, its latest 200 changes, however old they are.

Appendices

Profiles and permissions

Who sees what in Aeromec: the access profiles that come ready-made, the demo accounts, the full catalogue of permissions explained, how they combine when someone has more than one profile and what changes when Aeromec is used from Claude.

Everyone who signs in to Aeromec sees the application tailored to them: the sections of their job, the figures that concern them and the buttons for what they are allowed to do. It works like this:

  • Administrators see everything, manage users, profiles and settings, and cannot be restricted in any way.
  • Everyone else has one or more access profiles. Each profile is a list of permissions, each turned on with a switch: which menu sections they see, which sensitive data (costs, prices, margins, staff rates, contact details, defence, export, audit log), which actions they can perform, which dashboard blocks they get and what they can do from Claude.
  • A user with no profile at all sees nothing: on signing in, Aeromec tells them to ask an administrator to assign one.
  • A user may have an access end date (an external auditor, a temporary collaborator): after that day they can neither see nor do anything, even if they keep their profiles, until an administrator extends or removes it.

Profiles are created and adjusted in Users and profiles → Profiles.

#The ready-made profiles

Aeromec comes with thirteen starting profiles, designed for the jobs in an aerospace machining shop. Their names are part of the data, so they appear in Spanish (with their meaning in brackets). You can change their switches, rename them, duplicate them or create new ones. In the sample data, each one is held by one user:

Profile Sample user Sees Can do Does not see
Dirección (management) Javier Ortega Molina, operations director Every section except the shop-floor terminal (Banking, Accounting and Tax, read-only), and the full dashboard Approve routings, concessions, changes and documents, review contracts, approve suppliers, run the management system and approve the management review, and edit the work calendar; does not edit day-to-day work — (costs, prices, margins, staff rates, contact details, defence and the audit log: everything)
Oficina técnica (engineering office) Lucía Romero Vega, head of engineering Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Items, Routings & costing, Changes, Work orders, Inspection & FAI, Traceability, Suppliers, Work centres, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training Items, routings (and sending them to the customer), work centres, people and gauges, requirements, change requests and documentation; export Selling prices and margins, staff rates, contact details
Comercial (sales) Marta Gil Herrera, sales manager Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Quotes, Sales orders, Items, Changes, Shipments, Management system, Documentation and Integrations Customers, items, quotes and sales orders, programmes, requirements and reviewing contracts; export Costs and margins, staff rates, defence
Planificación (planning) Pablo Serrano Díaz, production planner Dashboard, Programmes, Sales orders, Items, Routings, Changes, Work orders, Planning, Monitor, Maintenance (read-only), Warehouse, MRP, Purchasing, Suppliers, Work centres, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training Create, plan and release work orders, calendar, programmes, MRP and generating orders, purchasing; export Selling prices and margins, staff rates, contact details
Jefe de taller (shop supervisor) Antonio Delgado Ramos Dashboard, Programmes, Routings, Changes, Work orders, Planning, Shop-floor terminal, Monitor, Maintenance, Inspection & FAI, Gauges, Warehouse, Work centres, People, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training Work orders (create, release and close), calendar, maintenance, work centres and people, training, booking at the terminal Costs, prices, margins, staff rates and contact details; no export
Mantenimiento (maintenance) Tomás Rivas Ortega, maintenance manager Dashboard, Items, Planning, Monitor, Maintenance, Warehouse, Purchasing, Suppliers, Work centres, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training Equipment, plans, work orders, corrective actions and ordering tools and spare parts; export Selling prices and margins, staff rates, contact details, defence
Operario de planta (shop-floor operator) Rafael Moreno Castillo, CNC operator Only the shop-floor terminal: the app opens straight into it, with no menu Booking at the terminal, with each person's PIN Everything else; does not use Claude either
Calidad (quality) Carmen Vidal Campos, quality manager Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Items, Routings, Changes, Work orders, Maintenance (read-only), Inspection & FAI, Nonconformances, Gauges, Warehouse, Traceability, Shipments, Suppliers, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training Inspections and calibrations, release FAIs, disposition NCs, manage stamps, receive purchases, review contracts, approve suppliers, requirements, manage and approve changes, prepare and approve documents, the management system and training; export Selling prices and margins, staff rates
Almacén (warehouse) José Luis Prieto Sanz, warehouse and shipping manager Dashboard, Items, Work orders, Warehouse, Traceability, Shipments, Purchasing, Suppliers, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training Move stock and run counts, receive and ship Costs, prices, margins, staff rates and contact details; no export
Compras (purchasing) Inés Márquez Ferrer, buyer Dashboard, Programmes, Items, Changes, Maintenance (read-only), Warehouse, MRP, Purchasing, Suppliers, Payables, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training Purchasing and suppliers, MRP and generating orders, receiving; export Selling prices and margins, staff rates
Administración (finance) Sergio Blanco Iglesias, administration and finance Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Sales orders, Shipments, Purchasing, Suppliers, People, Invoices, Payables, Banking, Accounting, Tax and Reports, Integrations, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training Customers and suppliers, invoicing, collecting and payables, reconciling the bank, posting entries and filing with the Tax Agency, training; export Defence and the audit log; from Claude it can only look things up
Sin defensa (no defence) — (add-on) Everything Everything Defence or export-controlled parts and customers
Auditor externo (external auditor) Teresa Lozano Marín, external auditor (EN 9100 certification) Read-only, what an audit asks for: Customers, Programmes, Sales orders, Items, Routings, Changes, Work orders, Inspection & FAI, Nonconformances, Gauges, Traceability, Shipments, Purchasing, Suppliers, Maintenance, Work centres, People, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training, plus the change audit log; no Dashboard Nothing: no actions, not even from Claude Amounts (costs, prices, margins, staff rates), contact details and defence; no export

The administrator in the sample data, Elena Navarro Ruiz (managing director), has no profiles: she is an administrator.

The sensitive data of each profile at a glance:

Profile See costs See prices See margins Staff rates Contact Defence Export CSV Audit log
Dirección ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Oficina técnica ✓ — — — — ✓ ✓ —
Comercial — ✓ — — ✓ — ✓ —
Planificación ✓ — — — — ✓ ✓ —
Jefe de taller — — — — — ✓ — —
Mantenimiento ✓ — — — — — ✓ —
Operario de planta — — — — — ✓ — —
Calidad ✓ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ —
Almacén — — — — — ✓ — —
Compras ✓ — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ —
Administración ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ —
Sin defensa ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓
Auditor externo — — — — — — — ✓

And the dashboard blocks each one sees on their Dashboard:

Profile Dashboard blocks
Dirección and Sin defensa All sixteen
Oficina técnica WOs in progress & late, Machine load, Open NCRs
Comercial Deliveries this week, OTD this month, Quotes & win rate, Programmes
Planificación WOs in progress & late, Deliveries this week, OTD this month, Machine load, Urgent MRP proposals, Stock in quarantine, Maintenance, Programmes
Jefe de taller WOs in progress & late, Machine load, Open NCRs, Scrap & COPQ this month, Overdue calibrations, Maintenance, Competence & training
Mantenimiento Machine load, Maintenance
Operario de planta None (no Dashboard)
Calidad OTD this month, Open NCRs, Scrap & COPQ this month, Stock in quarantine, Overdue calibrations, Management system, Competence & training
Almacén Deliveries this week, Stock in quarantine
Compras Urgent MRP proposals, Stock in quarantine
Administración OTD this month, Overdue invoices, Invoiced this month, Competence & training
Auditor externo None (no Dashboard)

#The demo accounts

The demo comes with thirteen accounts: the administrator and one per profile (except the Sin defensa add-on). They all sign in with their email (account@aeromec.demo) and the password demo1234; on the sign-in screen you just click the person (see Signing in to Aeromec). At the shop-floor terminal, everyone's PIN is 1234.

Account Person Job title Profile What they see, in short
elena Elena Navarro Ruiz Managing director Administrator Everything, plus Users and profiles, Settings and Audit log
javier Javier Ortega Molina Operations director Dirección The whole business with costs, prices and margins; the full dashboard and the audit log
lucia Lucía Romero Vega Head of engineering Oficina técnica Items, routings and cost breakdowns (costs yes, target price no), work orders and quality
marta Marta Gil Herrera Sales manager Comercial Customers, quotes, sales orders, shipments and integrations, with prices but no costs or margins, and no defence
pablo Pablo Serrano Díaz Production planner Planificación Work orders, planning, MRP, purchasing and warehouse
antonio Antonio Delgado Ramos Shop supervisor Jefe de taller Work orders, planning, terminal, monitor, routings, work centres and quality, with no money figures
rafael Rafael Moreno Castillo CNC operator · shop-floor terminal Operario de planta Only the shop-floor terminal (kiosk mode)
carmen Carmen Vidal Campos Quality manager Calidad Inspections, FAIs (she can release them), NCRs, CAPAs, gauges, traceability, stamps, the management system, documentation and the standard
jose José Luis Prieto Sanz Warehouse and shipping manager Almacén Warehouse, receipts, shipments and traceability, with no costs
ines Inés Márquez Ferrer Buyer Compras Purchasing, suppliers, MRP and payables
tomas Tomás Rivas Ortega Maintenance manager Mantenimiento Machine maintenance (equipment, plans, work orders, actions, tools and spare parts), monitor, work centres, planning, warehouse and purchasing, with costs and no defence
sergio Sergio Blanco Iglesias Administration and finance Administración Invoices, payments received, payables, banking, accounting, tax and integrations, with no defence
teresa Teresa Lozano Marín External auditor (EN 9100 certification) Auditor externo Read-only, what an audit asks for: parts, routings, work orders, quality, NCRs, suppliers, purchasing, people, management system, documentation and the standard, with no amounts or defence; her access ends after 30 days

#The catalogue of permissions

There are 103 permissions in five groups. In the profile matrix, each one has its ⓘ button explaining what it allows, where it applies and what is left out.

Menu sections (35). Each section of the side bar is a permission: Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Quotes, Sales orders, Customer integrations, Items, Routings & costing, Changes, Work orders, Planning, Shop-floor terminal, Shop-floor monitor, Maintenance, Inspection & FAI, Nonconformances, Gauges, Management system, Documentation, Standard, Warehouse, Traceability, Shipments, MRP, Purchasing, Suppliers, Work centres, People, Competence & training, Invoices, Payables, Banking, Accounting, Tax and Reports. A section also lets you read what it needs from others (a work order shows its customer and its routing; a quote, its items), but not change it or open those sections. If a profile's only section is the Shop-floor terminal, the app opens straight into it, with no menu. Users and profiles and Settings have no switch: they are for administrators only.

Sensitive data (8). The most delicate:

Permission What it shows Without it
See costs Cost breakdowns, machine rates, purchase prices, stock valuation, actual work order cost, scrap and NC cost, purchases and supplier payments. Those figures arrive empty (padlock). It does not include selling prices or each person's rate.
See prices Selling prices and customer amounts: quotes, sales orders, delivery notes, invoices, payments received, backlog and customer balances. No selling amounts. It does not include costs or margins.
See margins The margin (in euros and %) of quotes, sales orders, work orders and profitability reports. Only works together with "See costs" and "See prices": a margin next to a price would reveal the cost, so it needs all three.
See staff rates Each person's hourly cost and the cost of their hours. Kept apart from costs: a supervisor can see a work order's labour cost (with "See costs") without knowing each person's rate.
Contact data Phones, emails and addresses of customers, contacts, suppliers and staff. You see the contact's name, but not how to reach them.
Defence data Parts classified as defence or export-controlled and defence-sector customers, with everything attached to them (work orders, quotes, sales orders, lots, NCRs, shipments, documents, audit log). Those records do not exist for the user: not shown, not searchable and not counted in the Dashboard totals.
Export CSV The export button of every list and report. No button. The file contains exactly what the user sees, with hidden figures left empty.
See the change audit log The Audit log section and the Changes tab of records. They cannot see who changed what. Amounts in the audit log still need "See costs" or "See prices", and defence records, "Defence data".

Actions (42). What they can create or change: Edit customers, Edit suppliers, Edit items, Edit centres & people (gauges too), Edit routings (and send them for review or to the customer), Approve routings (record the customer's approval or rejection), Edit quotes (and accept them, which creates the sales order), Edit sales orders, Edit work orders (create, plan, reschedule), Edit calendar (closures, stoppages and special shifts), Edit maintenance (equipment, plans, work orders, corrective actions and orders for tools and spare parts), Release work orders, Close work orders, Book on the shop floor (at the terminal, with a PIN), Edit quality (inspections, NCRs, CAPAs, calibrations), Release FAI, Disposition NCs, Approve concession, Edit warehouse, Receive, Ship, Run MRP, Generate orders, Edit purchasing, Invoice, Collect, Edit payables, File with the Tax Agency, Post entries and Reconcile, plus the twelve quality-system ones explained below. An action without the matching section is of no use, and none of them gives access to data the profile cannot see.

The six permissions of Banking, Accounting and Tax (the three finance sections added to Invoices and Payables):

Permission What it allows Who has it
Banking (section) Seeing the bank accounts, their statements and transactions and whether they are reconciled. Dirección, Administración and Sin defensa
Accounting (section) Seeing the integrated accounts: journal entries, ledger, trial balance, balance sheet, profit and loss, cost analysis, fixed assets and months. Dirección, Administración and Sin defensa
Tax (section) Seeing the Tax Agency (AEAT) records (SII or VeriFactu), the drafts of forms 303 and 349 and the Intrastat returns. Each invoice's tax status is also shown with Invoices or Payables. Dirección, Administración and Sin defensa
Reconcile Importing statements (Norma 43 or CSV), reconciling transactions, undoing reconciliations, ignoring transactions and maintaining the rules. Matching with an invoice records its receipt or payment, so it also needs "Collect" or "Edit payables". Administración and Sin defensa
Post entries Manual entries and their cancellation, depreciation, inventory and the VAT settlement, closing and reopening months, adding fixed assets and exporting the accounts. Entries for invoices, receipts and payments are posted by Aeromec automatically. Administración and Sin defensa
File with the Tax Agency Sending SII or VeriFactu records, retrying rejected ones and filing Intrastat (at this stage, sending is simulated). Administración and Sin defensa

Dirección sees the three sections read-only: their figures, without being able to reconcile, post entries or send anything. Without "Defence data", the records, entries and transactions of defence customers and parts are not shown, but the totals (balance sheet, profit and loss, trial balance, Tax Agency summary) do include them, with the account name hidden: the accounts have to add up for everyone.

The quality system permissions (the Programmes, Changes, Management system, Documentation, Standard and Competence & training sections, with their actions):

Permission What it allows Who has it
Programmes (section) Seeing programmes (the aircraft, engine or system the parts are made for) with their parts, rate, demand, orders, production, quality, milestones, reviews and long-term agreement, and the rate simulator; also the Programme column of sales orders, work orders, NCRs, FAIs, shipments and invoices. Everyone except Mantenimiento, Almacén and the operator
Edit programmes Creating and changing programmes, their customers, parts, rates, milestones, reviews, actions and long-term agreements, and generating MRP forecasts. Comercial, Planificación
Changes (section) Seeing change requests with their impact and approval, and the parts' Configuration tab. Dirección, Oficina técnica, Comercial, Planificación, Jefe de taller, Calidad, Compras and the auditor
Manage changes Recording change requests, evaluating their impact, recording the customer's approval, implementing, closing and cancelling them. Oficina técnica, Calidad
Approve changes Approving or rejecting an evaluated change request with a signature (the signed record includes its impact). Dirección, Calidad
Management system (section) Seeing objectives, risks and opportunities, audits, management review, satisfaction, processes, context, requirements and actions. Everyone except the operator
Edit the management system Processes, context, objectives, risks, the audit programme and its findings (closing an audit with a signature), opening CAPAs from findings, preparing the management review and actions. Dirección, Calidad
Approve the management review Approving the management review minutes with a signature; from then on they do not change. Dirección
Documentation (section) Seeing the master list, external documents and revisions, and confirming you have read what you have to read. Everyone except the operator
Edit documentation Creating documents, preparing revisions and sending them for review, signing the review of a document you did not write and deciding its distribution. Oficina técnica, Calidad
Approve documents Approving or rejecting document revisions with a signature and withdrawing a document. Dirección, Calidad
Standard (section) Seeing the ISO 9001 and EN 9100 compliance matrix and validation (version, tests, backups). Read-only for everyone. Dirección, Oficina técnica, Calidad, Administración and the auditor
Competence & training (section) Seeing the competence matrix, expiries, the catalogue and training courses, and each person's Competences tab. Everyone except Comercial and the operator
Edit training Recording, renewing and revoking competences, maintaining the catalogue, planning and closing training courses and assessing their effectiveness. Jefe de taller, Calidad, Administración
Review contracts Performing and signing the contract review of a quote or an order. Without it signed, the quote cannot be sent and the order's work orders cannot be released. Dirección, Comercial, Calidad
Edit requirements The requirements of the company, customers, programmes and parts, with their clause and whether they are flowed down to suppliers. Oficina técnica, Comercial, Calidad
Approve suppliers Evaluating suppliers and signing the decision (approve, conditional or suspend), their approved scope and each customer's approved sources. Dirección, Calidad
Manage stamps Issuing, changing the scope of and withdrawing people's inspection stamps. Calidad

(Sin defensa has them all, as always.)

Dashboard blocks (16). WOs in progress & late, Deliveries this week, OTD this month, Machine load, Open NCRs, Scrap & COPQ this month, Quotes & win rate, Urgent MRP proposals, Stock in quarantine, Overdue calibrations, Overdue invoices, Invoiced this month, Maintenance, Programmes, Management system and Competence & training. Each block also needs the Dashboard section, and its amounts still depend on the data permissions (without them, only counts are shown).

Assistant (Claude) (2). What the user can do from a chat with Claude (see Connect to Claude):

Permission What it allows
Use from Claude Connecting Claude (claude.ai, the desktop and mobile apps, Claude Code) to Aeromec and asking it about anything the profile can see: work orders, machine queues, quotes and sales orders, routings, quality, stock, traceability, purchasing, invoices… Claude enters with the user's personal key and the database applies their profiles to every request, exactly as in the app. Without this permission, none of the user's keys works, not even the ones they already have.
Make changes from Claude Letting Claude create, change and delete, and run operations such as sending or accepting a quote, creating or releasing a work order, receiving a purchase order, dispositioning an NCR, shipping or invoicing, on the user's behalf. Only what the profile's actions already allow in the app; Claude asks before deleting, releasing, shipping or invoicing. Without this permission, Claude can only look things up, even if the user can edit in the app.

This is how the ready-made profiles come:

Profile Use from Claude Make changes from Claude
Dirección, Oficina técnica, Comercial, Planificación, Jefe de taller, Mantenimiento, Calidad, Almacén and Compras ✓ ✓
Administración ✓ —
Operario de planta and Auditor externo — —
Sin defensa (add-on) ✓ ✓

Administración can only look things up because invoices, payments received and payables are tax documents and money: they are issued in the app, with the whole document in view (an administrator can switch it on if preferred). Operario de planta does not have it because the shop-floor terminal is never used from a chat; Auditor externo, because their access is read-only in the app and for a limited time. Sin defensa has both because it only serves to remove defence data (and it removes it from Claude too).

#With several profiles the most restrictive wins

If a user has more than one profile, they only get the permissions that all of them switch on (the intersection). That is why adding a profile never gives more access: it can only narrow it. If someone needs to see more, edit their profile or assign them one that has what they need (instead of the one they have).

User's profiles Result
Jefe de taller 35 permissions: the shop sections, with defence data and no money figures.
Jefe de taller + Sin defensa 34: the same, without defence parts and customers.
Calidad + Almacén 15: only what both have (Dashboard, Items, Work orders, Warehouse, Traceability, Shipments, Suppliers, Management system, Documentation and Competence & training, with defence data, receiving purchases and the quarantine block). No costs, no inspections, no shipping.
Comercial + Oficina técnica 12: Dashboard, Customers, Programmes, Items, Changes, Management system and Documentation, editing items and requirements, export and both Claude permissions. Neither prices nor costs: each profile removes what the other lacks.

When you create or edit a user, the Effective access box works out on the spot what they will get with the profiles ticked (see Users and profiles).

#The database enforces it, not just the screen

Permissions do more than hide buttons: Aeromec's database enforces them on every query. What a user cannot see never reaches their device, not even in an exported file, and what they cannot do is rejected even if someone tried to bypass the app. On screen it shows like this:

  • The sections they do not have do not appear in the side bar or in the search.
  • Figures they cannot see disappear or show a padlock (hover over it: "Hidden by your access profile"); in the audit log, as "(hidden by your profile)".
  • Defence parts and customers do not exist for anyone without "Defence data": not in lists, search or totals.
  • The buttons to create, edit, release, approve or ship only appear with their action permission, and the database checks every rule again (the PIN and qualification at the terminal, the approved routing when releasing, the FAI when shipping…).
  • What is signed is also checked by the database: the password, the current stamp with its scope and the signer's current qualification; and what is signed can no longer be changed or deleted, whatever permission the person trying has.
  • After their access end date, a user has no permissions at all, even if they keep their profiles.
  • A change of permissions takes effect on the user's next query, without signing out; their menu and buttons adjust when they switch section.

#The same screen seen by different profiles

This is how Aeromec changes depending on who signs in. First, the side bar: each profile only sees its own sections.

The menu of the Jefe de taller profile. 1
Figure 634. The menu of the Jefe de taller profile.
  1. 1
    Jefe de taller sees the shop sections: work orders, planning, terminal, monitor, maintenance, quality, gauges, warehouse, work centres, people and competences, plus programmes, changes, the management system and documentation; nothing from quotes, purchasing or finance.
The menu of the Comercial profile. 1
Figure 635. The menu of the Comercial profile.
  1. 1
    Comercial sees customers, programmes, quotes, sales orders, integrations, items, changes and shipments, plus the management system and documentation; nothing from production or purchasing.
The Auditor externo (external auditor) profile's menu. 1
Figure 636. The Auditor externo (external auditor) profile's menu.
  1. 1
    Auditor externo sees, read-only, what gets audited, from customers to purchasing, with the Quality system group (management system, documentation and standard); no Dashboard, no finance and no terminal.

The external auditor goes straight into the first section of their menu (they have no Dashboard) and sees everything read-only: no button to create, edit, sign or export, not a single amount, nothing from defence. They also see the change Audit log, because it is the first thing an auditor asks for: who changed what and when.

Their access has an end date: the administrator sets it on their user and, after that day, Aeromec tells them on signing in that their access has ended. That way it does not stay open after the audit.

A quote seen by Dirección and by Comercial. Sales staff need the prices to negotiate with the customer, but they do not see what each part costs to make or the margin.

The quote, seen by Dirección. 12
Figure 637. The quote, seen by Dirección.
  1. 1
    The unit cost of each quantity break (from the cost breakdown) and the margin.
  2. 2
    And the Changes tab, because Dirección can see the audit log.
The same quote, seen by Comercial. 12
Figure 638. The same quote, seen by Comercial.
  1. 1
    Quantity, unit price and amount: what the customer sees, without cost or margin.
  2. 2
    No Changes tab: this profile cannot see the audit log.

And the customers list seen by Dirección and by Comercial. Comercial does not have "Defence data": the two defence-sector customers do not exist for her, in the list, the indicators or the search.

The customers, seen by Dirección. 123
Figure 639. The customers, seen by Dirección.
  1. 1
    All the active customers, defence ones included…
  2. 2
    …with their Defence filter…
  3. 3
    …and the shield next to the name: Centinela Sistemas Navales y Aéreos and Halcón Defensa Sistemas.
The same customers, seen by Comercial. 123
Figure 640. The same customers, seen by Comercial.
  1. 1
    Two fewer active customers, and the backlog to ship and the amount outstanding without the defence ones.
  2. 2
    No trace of the Defence filter or of those customers.
  3. 3
    On the other hand, Comercial can create customers ("Edit customers"); Dirección cannot.

#What changes when Aeromec is used from Claude

With the connector, Claude works as the person who connected it: it enters with their access key and the database applies exactly their profiles to every request, defence data and costs included. In addition:

  • Without Use from Claude it sees nothing, even with a valid key; without Make changes from Claude, all actions are removed and it can only look things up.
  • The shop-floor terminal is never used through Claude (shop-floor bookings are made on the tablet, with each person's PIN), and neither is administration: users, profiles, permissions, keys and Settings, not even with an administrator's key.
  • The key is checked on every request: if it is revoked, expires or the user is disabled, access is cut off at that moment.
  • Every call is recorded in the key's activity (denied ones too) and every change in the Audit log, flagged from Claude.
  • Claude never signs: whatever inspects, releases, dispositions or approves (and shipping with its CoC, the contract review, a supplier evaluation…) is signed by the person in the app (see Connect to Claude).

For example, if Marta (Comercial) asks Claude for a part's cost breakdown, the request is denied: her profile cannot see costs, and neither can Claude.

Appendices

Glossary

The machining, maintenance, aerospace quality (EN 9100 and its associated standards), logistics, management, tax and accounting terms Aeromec uses, explained in one line and with the chapter where you will find them.

Term What it means in Aeromec Where
3.1 certificate Material inspection certificate under EN 10204, type 3.1: issued by the mill or the distributor with the composition and properties of that heat. Warehouse, Traceability
Access key Personal code (starting with «aeromec_») with which Claude gets into Aeromec as you. Aeromec only stores its fingerprint, so it is shown only once; it expires, or is revoked with one click. Connect to Claude
Access profile Set of permissions (sections, data, actions, Dashboard blocks, use from Claude) that decides what each user sees and can do. Profiles and permissions
AEAT The Spanish Tax Agency (Agencia Estatal de Administración Tributaria). It receives the record of each invoice (through SII or VeriFactu) and the VAT and Intrastat returns. At this pre-implementation stage, sending from Aeromec is simulated. Tax, Invoices
Alternative material A material other than the primary one that the customer accepts for a part (another standard or another form). It can be used when releasing a WO, sometimes with a partial FAI. Routings & costing
Approved scope What a supplier is approved to do: special processes (with their Nadcap), materials, calibrations (with ENAC) or services, each with its expiry date. A purchase outside its current scope cannot be sent. Suppliers, Purchasing
Approved sources The suppliers a customer accepts for each special process. If the customer requires it, the outsourced operation can only be bought from one of them. Customers, Suppliers
ASL Approved Supplier List: the approved suppliers, with what each one may do and until when. Suppliers
Availability The time the machines were able to work over the total: running hours ÷ (running + breakdown downtime). Maintenance
Bank reconciliation Matching each transaction on the bank statement with the receipt, payment or journal entry it belongs to, so that the bank balance and the book balance agree. Banking
Booking date The day a supplier invoice is entered in the accounts. The SII deadline for received invoices runs from it, and it decides in which month its VAT is deducted. Payables
Calibration Periodic check of a measuring instrument against a reference standard, in an accredited laboratory (ENAC, ISO/IEC 17025). With an overdue calibration the gauge can be neither lent nor used to measure. Gauges
CAPA / 8D Corrective And Preventive Action: analyses the root cause of a problem (5 whys, Ishikawa and the rest of the EN 9136 analysis), sets actions and verifies that they have been effective; it is closed with a signature. Nonconformances
Change request The record of a change (drawing, process, material, supplier, CNC program, tooling…) with its impact, the customer's approval if it requires one, its signed approval and its implementation (CAM-…). Changes
Claude Anthropic's artificial intelligence assistant. With the Aeromec connector it works with your data from a chat (claude.ai, the desktop and mobile apps, Claude Code), with your own permissions. Connect to Claude
CN code (Combined Nomenclature) The 8-digit code that classifies goods in the EU (88073000, aircraft parts), the basis of the TARIC tariff. Intrastat requires it. Items
CoC Certificate of Conformity: the document that goes with each shipment, in which the company declares that the parts meet the order, the drawing and the specifications. It is signed on shipping by a person holding a CoC inspection stamp. Shipments
Competence What a person is accredited to do —a qualification, a training course, an awareness session— with its validity. An expired qualification prevents signing with its scope and working on the machine that requires it. Competence & training, People
Compliance matrix Each clause of ISO 9001 and EN 9100 with what it requires, how Aeromec covers it, where it is, its evidence and its tests, and what remains in the company's hands. Standard
Concession The customer's permission to deliver a part that does not meet the drawing as it stands («use as is»). It is one of the dispositions of an NCR and must be approved by the customer. Nonconformances
Configuration Knowing which drawing revision each part was made to (configuration management). Aeromec freezes the revision on the work order when it is released and carries it to its lots, to traceability and to the CoC. Items, Changes
Connector (MCP) The connection between Claude and Aeromec. MCP (Model Context Protocol) is the open standard that artificial intelligence assistants use to connect to other applications; the address of the Aeromec connector ends in /mcp. Connect to Claude
Containment What is done immediately when a problem appears so that it does not reach (or stops reaching) the customer: hold, segregate, check the stock and what has been shipped. A complaint has a deadline for it. Nonconformances
Contract review Checking, before committing, that all the requirements of a quote or an order can be met (EN 9100 8.2.3). It is signed; without it the quote cannot be sent and the order's work orders cannot be released. Quotes, Sales orders
Control chart The individuals and moving range (I-MR) chart of a characteristic, with its control limits: it warns (Western Electric rules) when the process drifts, before parts are made out of tolerance. Inspection & FAI
Control plan What is measured at each operation: every characteristic on the drawing (dimension, tolerance, roughness…), with which type of gauge and how often. Routings & costing, Inspection & FAI
Controlled document A quality-system document (manual, procedure, instruction, form) on the master list, with its current revision: each revision is approved with a signature, the previous one becomes obsolete and whoever must read it confirms it. Documentation
Corrective action What is done to correct something found wrong on a machine (in an inspection, a verification, a recurring breakdown or the operator's check), with an owner, a due date and a check of its effectiveness (MC-…). If it affects the product, it is escalated to a CAPA. Maintenance
Corrective maintenance Maintenance that repairs a breakdown. A machine stop reported on the terminal opens its urgent corrective work order; when it is closed, the cause is recorded. The opposite is preventive maintenance. Maintenance
Cost breakdown (should-cost) The theoretical cost of a part based on its routing: material, set-up and machine hours, outside processing, fixtures and overheads, for any quantity. The suggested prices in quotes come from it. Routings & costing
Counterfeit Material or a part that is not what its documentation says (untraceable origin, dubious certificate). A suspicion opens an NCR that cannot be accepted by concession, reworked or returned to the supplier. Purchasing, Nonconformances
Cpk Process capability index: compares the spread of the measurements of a dimension with its tolerance. Above 1.33 the process is capable with margin to spare. Inspection & FAI
Critical part A part whose failure affects safety. It gets reinforced release: it is only shipped from a work order with a conforming final inspection, and the CoC says so. Items, Shipments
Criticality (A, B, C) How much a piece of equipment matters to production: A, without it production or a customer comes to a stop; B, important; C, normal. Maintenance
CSV (secure verification code) The receipt the Tax Agency returns when it accepts a submission of invoices: it proves they are in its register. (Not to be confused with the CSV file that «Export CSV» downloads.) Invoices, Tax
Customer approval In aerospace, the customer approves the manufacturing routing of each part before it goes into series production. Only an approved routing revision can be released to the shop floor. Routings & costing
Customer complaint A customer's formal complaint (quality, delivery, documentation), with deadlines for containment and response, its NCR, its CAPA and a signed closure. Nonconformances, Customers
Customer property What the customer leaves at the shop (material, tooling, gauges, drawings): it is recorded with its condition and location, and the customer is told if it is damaged or lost. Warehouse
cXML The format of the electronic orders, advance ship notices and invoices of purchasing networks such as SAP Business Network (Ariba). Integrations
Defence Parts and customers from defence programmes: only those with permission can see them. The «Sin defensa» (no defence) add-on removes them from a profile. Profiles and permissions
Depreciation Spreading the cost of a machine or equipment (the fixed assets) over the years of its useful life. Aeromec posts it every month, in equal parts. Accounting
Disposition The MRB's decision on the parts of a nonconformance: rework, repair, concession («use as is»), scrap or return to supplier. It is signed; until the disposition is made, the WO may stay blocked. Nonconformances
ECN The customer's Engineering Change Notice: a part's drawing moves to a new revision. In Aeromec it comes in as a drawing change request. Changes
Electronic signature A person's signature on a quality record: they type their password again, state what it means (performed, released, approved…) and, if it releases product, it carries their inspection stamp. What is signed cannot be changed or deleted: it is corrected with a reason and another signature. The screen
EN 9100 / AS9100 The quality management system standard for the aerospace and defence sector: ISO 9001 plus the sector's own requirements (product safety, configuration, counterfeit parts, FAI, key characteristics…). Aeromec is designed to conform to it, helps you comply and keeps a record of every step; certification belongs to the company, after an audit by an accredited body. Standard, Management system
EN 9102 The first article inspection (FAI) standard, which replaces AS9102: three forms (the part; its materials, special processes and tests; every drawing characteristic measured) and the reasons why it must be repeated. Inspection & FAI
EN 9103 The standard for managing the variation of key characteristics: identifying them, measuring them and keeping their process under control. Inspection & FAI
EN 9131 The standard for nonconformance data: which characteristic, what was required, what was found, where it was detected, to which drawing revision and what was decided. Nonconformances
EN 9136 The root cause analysis standard: 5W2H, Ishikawa, 5 whys, why it was not detected, systemic cause, human factors, extent to other products and lessons learnt. Nonconformances
Equipment A machine or a piece of auxiliary equipment (compressor, overhead crane, air conditioning, coolant system, fire protection, electrical switchboard) seen from the maintenance side: its record, its plans, its history and its KPIs. Maintenance
Escape Nonconforming product that has already left for the customer. Aeromec lists the affected shipped parts and prepares the notification to each customer, with its acknowledgement. Nonconformances
Export control Parts subject to export licences (dual-use, for example). Like defence parts, only authorised profiles can see them. Items, Profiles and permissions
External auditor Read-only profile for whoever audits the company (the certification body or a customer): they see the records without amounts or defence data, and their access ends on a set date. Profiles and permissions, Users and profiles
FAI First Article Inspection, per EN 9102 / AS9102: done on the first piece of a new part or after a change of drawing, process, location, tooling, CNC program or supplier, after a corrective action or after two years without making it. A full FAI cannot be approved without all its characteristics measured. Inspection & FAI
Finding What an audit finds: major or minor nonconformity, observation, opportunity for improvement or strength. Management system
Fingerprint (SHA-256) A mathematical digest of a record's content: change a single comma and the fingerprint changes. Aeromec stores it when signing, chained to the previous one, and uses it to check that the record is still intact. The screen
Finite capacity Planning that takes into account the real hours of each machine (shifts, holidays, maintenance) and what it already has in its queue, instead of assuming that everything fits. Planning
Fixtures The part-specific workholding and tools (UT-…). Their cost is spread over the parts in the cost breakdown; they are validated before use and verified periodically, with a signature, and one not validated or with an expired verification prevents the WO from being released. Items, Routings & costing
FOD Foreign Object Debris/Damage: screws, swarf or forgotten tools that can end up damaging a part or an aircraft. It is prevented with controlled areas, checks and periodic inspections. Inspection & FAI
Form 303 The VAT return for each period: the VAT charged on sales minus the VAT paid on purchases. Aeromec prepares a draft to review with your tax adviser. Tax
Form 349 The return of transactions with customers and suppliers in other EU countries, by EU VAT number. Aeromec prepares a draft. Tax
Gauge Each measuring instrument (caliper, micrometer, plug gauge, CMM…), with its code (INS-003…), its calibration and who it is on loan to. Gauges
Gauge loan When an operator takes a gauge from the metrology lab using the terminal; it stays in their name until they return it. Gauges, Shop-floor terminal
Geometric verification Measuring the accuracy of a machine tool according to ISO 230 (positioning, straightness, squareness, circularity with a ballbar). If it fails, whatever was machined since the last passed verification must be reviewed. Maintenance
Heat Each melt of a material at the mill, identified by a number (A26M3807…). All the material from a heat shares the same 3.1 certificate; if it causes problems, Aeromec tells you which WOs, parts and customers carry it. Traceability
Incoterm The delivery terms agreed with the customer (ICC Incoterms 2020): who pays for transport and insurance and where the risk passes. EXW, FCA, DAP, DDP… Shipments, Tax
Inspection stamp The personal number (AM-Q05…) with which a person signs what they release, with its scope (receiving, in-process, final, FAI, MRB, CoC, calibration). A number is never reused. Inspection & FAI
Internal audit An audit the company carries out on its own processes under its audit programme; its findings are closed with actions or CAPA and the closure is signed. Not to be confused with Aeromec's change audit log (who changed what). Management system, Audit log
Intrastat The monthly statistics on trade in goods with other EU countries: dispatches (sales) and arrivals (purchases). It is filed when a flow exceeds €400,000 a year. Tax, Items
Inventory adjustment The month-end entry that takes the change in stock value (raw material, work in progress and finished goods) to the income statement. Accounting
ISO 9001 The international standard for quality management systems. EN 9100 includes all of it and adds the aerospace requirements. Standard
Journal entry The accounting record of a transaction: accounts on the debit and credit side for the same amount. Aeromec posts by itself those of invoices, receipts, payments, payroll, depreciation, inventory and VAT. Accounting
Key characteristic (KC) A drawing characteristic whose variation affects the fit, function or safety of the part. It is monitored with the control chart and Cpk (EN 9103). Inspection & FAI, Items
Ledger The book with all the postings of an account and its running balance: for example, everything debited and credited to a customer's account. Accounting
Long-term agreement (LTA) A long-term contract with the customer: the agreed price and the committed quantity of each part per year. Aeromec tracks what has been used and warns when a quote or an order carries a different price. Programmes
Lot Each receipt of a material into the warehouse, with its heat, its certificate, its location and how much is left. Warehouse
Machine queue The WO operations waiting at a work centre, in the order in which they will be done. The planner reorders it and the operator sees it on the terminal. Planning, Shop-floor terminal
Maintenance work order (OT) A maintenance job on a piece of equipment (preventive, corrective, statutory, verification or improvement), with its tasks, its spare parts, its hours and its cost (OT-…). Not to be confused with the WO, the production work order. Maintenance
Management review Top management's periodic review of the quality system, with its inputs (objectives, audits, customers, suppliers, risks…) and its decisions. The minutes are approved with a signature. Management system
MRB Material Review Board: the people authorised to decide what is done with nonconforming product. Its disposition is signed with the MRB stamp. Nonconformances
MRP Material Requirements Planning: works out what has to be bought or made, how much and when, from orders, forecasts and stock. MRP
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures: machine running hours ÷ number of breakdowns. The higher, the better. Maintenance
MTTR Mean Time To Repair: breakdown downtime hours ÷ number of breakdowns. The lower, the better. Maintenance
Mutilation Making a scrapped part unusable (cutting it, marking it) so that it cannot get back into the supply chain by mistake. It is signed, and without it the scrap NCR cannot be closed. Nonconformances
Nadcap The accreditation programme for aerospace special processes (heat and surface treatments, non-destructive testing, shot peening…). Many customers require the subcontractor to hold it current. Suppliers, Purchasing
NCR Non-Conformance Report: the record of something that does not conform (a dimension out of tolerance, defective material, a complaint), with its cause, its disposition and its closure. Nonconformances
Norma 43 The Spanish banking standard (AEB) format for account statements: the file downloaded from online banking that Aeromec imports to reconcile. Banking
Operation Each step of a routing (cutting, milling, bench work, treatment, inspection…), with its work centre, its times, its CNC program and what is measured at it. Routings & costing, Work orders
OTD On-Time Delivery: percentage of customer deliveries shipped complete on their date. Dashboard, Reports
Outside processing An operation done by a supplier (heat treatment, anodising, non-destructive testing…): the material is sent out and comes back with its certificate. Purchasing, Routings & costing
Pegging The «thread» that links each MRP requirement to what covers it: which sales order calls for which WO and which purchase. MRP
PGC The Spanish chart of accounts (Plan General de Contabilidad): the account structure and accounting rules. Aeromec uses its accounts, with 8-digit sub-accounts (43000001 a customer, 57200001 a bank…). Accounting
PIN Four-digit code with which each person identifies themselves on the shop-floor terminal, without closing the tablet's session. Shop-floor terminal
Pp / Ppk Capability indices calculated with the full spread of the measurements over time (Cp and Cpk use the short-term spread). If Ppk is well below Cpk, the process is drifting. Inspection & FAI
Preventive maintenance Maintenance planned so that the machine does not fail: every so many days or every so many machine hours (whichever comes first), with its tasks and its spare parts. Maintenance
Programme The aircraft, engine or system the parts are made for (AR-90, TF-38…), with its rate, its parts, its milestones and its long-term agreement. Programmes
Quantity price breaks The breaks of a quote: a price per part for each quantity (10, 25, 50…), because the set-up is spread over more parts. Quotes
Rate The aircraft (or engines) per month a programme builds. Multiplied by the shipset, it gives the parts it calls for each month. Programmes
Record retention How many years each type of quality record is kept (or what each customer requires, if longer), counted from its date or from the part's last delivery. Settings
Releasing a WO Sending it to the shop floor: Aeromec freezes the routing revision, chooses the material (primary or approved alternative), reserves the heat and decides whether an FAI is needed. Work orders
Reorder point The stock level below which you must order so that it arrives in time: daily usage × supplier lead time + safety stock. Maintenance, MRP
Repair A disposition that makes the part usable with an approved procedure, even though it does not end up as the drawing says. Like a concession, it awaits the customer's approval. Nonconformances
Requirement A demand from the company, a customer (its quality clauses), a programme or a part, with its reference and whether it must be flowed down to suppliers in purchase orders. Customers, Management system
Reversing entry An entry that cancels another one with the same amounts on the opposite side. Aeromec uses it to correct what is already in a closed or exported month, instead of changing it. Accounting
Revision The version of a drawing or of a routing (A, B, C…). Changing revision requires a new approval and, often, an FAI; the drawing revision changes through a change request and is frozen on each WO when it is released. Routings & costing, Changes
Rework Putting parts through an operation again to correct them. It is an NCR disposition and generates its own time records. Nonconformances
RFQ The customer's Request For Quotation: the starting point of a quote. Quotes
Risk and opportunity What may go wrong (or better) in the system or in a programme, rated by probability × impact, with its treatment, its residual risk and its actions. Management system
Routing A part's process sheet: the sequence of operations it is made with, its material and its control plan. Routings & costing
SCAR Supplier Corrective Action Request: raised from a supplier NCR; the supplier replies with its cause and actions, and it is closed with a signature once they are verified as effective. Suppliers
Scrap Discarded parts that cannot be recovered. Aeromec measures their percentage and their cost. Nonconformances, Dashboard
Self-assessed VAT On a purchase from a supplier in another EU country the invoice arrives without VAT and the company declares it both as output and as deductible VAT (reverse charge): it costs nothing, but it is declared. Payables
Serial number Unique identifier of each part made. From it, Aeromec rebuilds its complete history: heat, operations, machines, operators, gauges, delivery note and CoC. Traceability
Shelf life How long a material (sealants, adhesives, paints…) can be used from its manufacture. An expired lot can be neither consumed nor shipped. Warehouse, Items
Shipment Parts leaving for a customer: delivery note, serial numbers, CoC and material certificates. It deducts the stock and leaves the invoice ready. Shipments
Shipset How many units of a part each aircraft (or engine) of a programme carries. Programmes
Shop-floor terminal The screen on the shop's tablets: each machine's queue, drawing, CNC program, control plan, time records, incidents and gauges. Shop-floor terminal
SII Immediate Supply of Information (Suministro Inmediato de Información): the VAT books kept on the Tax Agency's website. Each issued or received invoice is sent within 4 working days. Invoices, Payables, Tax
Spare part A replacement part for a machine or piece of equipment (filters, bearings, guideways, seals…), with its stock in the tool store. Maintenance, Items
Start-of-shift check Autonomous maintenance: at the start of the shift, the operator checks their machine on the terminal (levels, pressure, alarms, guards, emergency stop button). If anything is wrong, a notice to maintenance is opened. Shop-floor terminal, Maintenance
Supplier approval Authorising a supplier to work for the company: approved until a date, conditional or suspended. Without a current approval no purchases are sent to it. Suppliers
Supplier evaluation A supplier's periodic score (OTD, PPM, NCRs and SCARs over the period) with its A, B or C rating. It is signed, and it is the only thing that changes the supplier's approval. Suppliers
Time allocation How the hours of a person working on several machines at once are split: proportional (each time record gets its share of the time) or full (each time record counts the whole time). Shop-floor terminal, Settings
Time record What the operator books on the terminal: which operation, on which machine, since when, how many good and rejected parts. It gives the machine hours and the person's hours. Shop-floor terminal
Tool life The machine minutes a cutting tool lasts until it is changed. The reference life is set by maintenance; the actual life comes from the changes recorded on the terminal. Maintenance, Shop-floor terminal
TPM Total productive maintenance: the operator looks after their machine (shift check), maintenance is planned so as not to stop production, and it is measured (availability, MTBF, MTTR). Maintenance
Traceability Knowing where each part comes from and where it has gone: backwards (part → heat, machines, people, gauges) and forwards (heat → WOs, parts and customers). Traceability
Trial balance The report with what has been debited, credited and the balance of each account in a period. If the accounts add up, total debits equal total credits. Accounting
Validated CNC program A new or changed CNC program is on trial until someone validates it with their signature after a conforming first part; meanwhile the terminal warns, and once validated it no longer changes. Documentation, Shop-floor terminal
VAT number (NIF-IVA) The intra-EU VAT identification number, with its country prefix (FR38823456781, PT509876543). Without it, an EU customer cannot be invoiced without VAT. Customers, Suppliers
VeriFactu The verifiable invoicing system of Royal Decree 1007/2023: each invoice generates an unalterable record, chained to the previous one with a hash, and carries a QR code to check it with the Tax Agency. Companies in SII do not use it. Invoices, Tax
VIES The EU register of VAT numbers (VAT Information Exchange System): where you check that an EU customer's or supplier's VAT number is valid. Customers
WO Work order: how many pieces of which item are made, with which routing revision and for which order or delivery. Work orders
Work centre A machine or workstation in the shop (F5-01, T-01, AJ-01…), with its capacity, its schedule, its hourly rate and the qualified people. Work centres

Appendices

Frequently asked questions

Quick answers to the most common questions, with a link to the chapter where each thing is explained in detail.

#Access and permissions

I cannot see a section, a button or a figure that a colleague can see

It is decided by your access profile: each profile turns on certain sections, data (prices, costs, defence…), actions (releasing WOs, approving routings, deciding NCR dispositions…) and Dashboard blocks. If you need something more, ask an administrator. See Profiles and permissions.

I see a padlock instead of an amount

It is data your profile is not allowed to see (for example, costs and margins for sales staff, or selling prices for the shop floor). If you hover over it, it tells you so. It is not an error: the database itself does not send it to you.

Some parts or customers do not appear in any list

They are probably defence items or subject to export control: only authorised profiles can see them, and for everyone else they do not appear in any list, search or report. See Profiles and permissions.

An administrator has given me a new permission and I cannot see it

Permissions are reloaded when you change section: click any section in the sidebar (or sign in again) and the sidebar, the buttons and the figures adjust.

I have forgotten my password

Ask an administrator to set a new one for you from Users; then you can sign in with it. The shop-floor terminal does not need a password: each person uses their PIN.

When I sign in it says I have no access profile

Your user exists but has no profile assigned yet, so it cannot see anything. An administrator has to assign you one in Users.

When I sign in it says my access has ended

Your user has an access end date (it is set for external auditors and temporary collaborators) and it has passed: you can neither see nor do anything, even though you keep your profiles. If you need to carry on, ask an administrator to extend or remove it in Users.

An auditor is coming: how do I give them access?

Create their user in Users with the Auditor externo (external auditor) profile and give it an access end date (the last day of the audit, or a few days later). They will see, read-only, what gets audited —parts, routings, work orders, inspections, FAIs, NCRs, suppliers, purchasing, people and competences, the management system, documentation, the standard and the change audit log—, with no amounts, no contact or defence data, and without being able to change, sign or export anything. See Profiles and permissions.

#Engineering and quotes

Where do the suggested prices of a quote come from?

From the cost breakdown of the part's routing: the total cost per part for that quantity (material, machine, labour, outside processing, fixtures, expected scrap and overheads) divided by (1 − target margin). That is why it goes down with the quantity: the set-up is spread over more parts. Suggest prices puts them in each break and you can then adjust them. See Routings & costing and Quotes.

Why has the cost breakdown changed if I have not touched the routing?

Because it is calculated live with the latest price of each material and the current rate of each work centre. If you want to keep a snapshot of the cost, save a version of the cost breakdown.

Can sales staff quote without seeing the costs?

Yes: they see the suggested price and the quantity price breaks, which come from the cost breakdown, but not the costs or the margins behind them. That way they quote with sound judgement without revealing the cost structure.

Why can I not release a WO?

The most common reason: the current revision of the routing is not approved and the customer requires approval («Request approval in Routings»), or the part has no routing. Nor can the WO of a sales order be released without its contract review signed (the order's or its quote's), or one that uses a fixture not validated or with an expired verification: the warning says which and what to do. You also need the «Release work orders» permission. See Work orders.

It will not let me send a quote to the customer

It is missing its contract review: before committing, someone with the «Review contracts» permission checks, on the quote's Contract review tab, the requirements that apply (the customer's, the programme's, the part's and the company's) and the checklist (drawing, key characteristics, special processes, capacity and lead time, material, documentation, export, risks), decides the outcome and signs it. Once it is signed and accepted, the quote can be sent and accepted. See Quotes.

#Production and shop floor

A WO shows as «Blocked (NCR)»

It has an open nonconformance without a disposition. Once Quality decides what to do with the parts (rework, concession, scrap or return), the WO carries on. See Nonconformances.

Why does planning say a WO is going to be late?

Because it calculates at real capacity: each machine's schedule and holidays, its maintenance and everything ahead of it in its queue. If the forecast for the last operation goes past the delivery date, it warns you. You can reorder the queue, move the WO to another machine or talk to the customer. See Planning.

How are hours counted if I work on two machines at once?

Machine hours are always the duration of each time record. The person's hours are split according to the company's rule: proportional (each time record gets its share of the time, so nothing is counted twice) or full. An administrator chooses it in Settings. See Shop-floor terminal.

The operator cannot measure with a gauge

The gauge's calibration is overdue, it is out of service or it is not on loan to them. Aeromec does not accept a measurement taken with a gauge that is out of calibration: they should take another one from the terminal, or Quality should send it for calibration. See Gauges.

Can a person have several tasks open at once?

Yes, one per machine and up to the maximum the company sets in Settings. The terminal shows all their machines at the top, in Your machines.

An operator cannot start work on a machine

If the machine requires a qualification (the 5-axis one, for example) and that person's has expired or is missing, Aeromec does not let them start on it: the terminal warns them as soon as they enter with their PIN. It has to be renewed —a training course closed as passed— in Competence & training, or another qualified person does the work. It also warns beforehand, when it is about to expire.

A CNC program does not show at the terminal, or it shows «on trial»

The terminal only shows current drawings and programs: one marked obsolete no longer reaches it. A new or changed program shows on trial until someone with the qualification validates it with their signature after a conforming first part; meanwhile the operator sees it with the warning. See Documentation.

#Maintenance

A machine has broken down: what do I do?

The operator reports it from the terminal (Incident → Machine down): Aeromec automatically opens an urgent work order for that machine and shows the machine as down on the monitor and in the queues. Maintenance sees it at the top of its list, starts it and, when it is closed with the solution and the cause, the machine goes back to producing. See Maintenance.

How do I stop a machine for its preventive maintenance without delaying orders?

With Schedule on its work order: for each day of the next three weeks it tells you how much work would be pushed out and suggests the day with the least. When you accept it, the stop goes into the machine's calendar and the queues are recalculated. See Maintenance.

How do I know if I am going to run out of cutters?

In Maintenance → Tools & spares: each tool with its actual usage, the forecast from the load in its machines' queues and how many days' stock is left. Order what is missing creates draft purchase orders. For this to work, the operator records every tool change on the terminal. See Maintenance.

A machine verification has «failed»: which parts should I check?

The ones machined on it since the last passed verification: the impact lists them (WOs, operations, parts and serials already shipped) and from there, together with Quality, you open whatever NCRs are needed. See Maintenance.

#Quality and traceability

When is an FAI needed?

If the customer requires it: with a new part, with a change of drawing or process revision, of location, of fixture, of CNC program or of supplier, after a corrective action, after more than two years without making it and, as a partial FAI, the first time an alternative material flagged that way is used (the EN 9102 reasons). Aeromec opens it when the WO is released and does not let the parts be shipped until Quality releases it with their signature; a full FAI cannot be approved with characteristics left unmeasured. See Inspection & FAI.

A mill warns us of a problem with a heat: what do we do?

In Traceability, search for the heat: Aeromec tells you at once which lots, WOs, serial numbers and customers carry it, and what is still in the warehouse. From there you put the open WOs on hold and block the remaining material; if appropriate, open the nonconformance in Nonconformances.

I cannot ship a part

Read the warning: the FAI of its WO not yet released, a critical part whose WO does not have a conforming final inspection, an expired lot or not enough stock. And shipping is signed: a current inspection stamp with CoC scope is needed. See Shipments.

I cannot close a scrap NCR

First the parts have to be mutilated (cut or marked so that they cannot get back into the supply chain) and that has to be recorded, with a signature, on the NCR itself. See Nonconformances.

Who changed this data?

Every record has its history, and whoever has the permission sees the full Audit log: who, when, which field and what value it had before, including what Claude has done.

#Electronic signature and records

Why does it ask for my password again?

Because what you are about to do is signed: inspecting, releasing, dispositioning, approving or shipping. Typing your password again shows that you are the one signing (not someone using your open session), and the signature stays bound to the record with its meaning, the date and time and, if you release product, your inspection stamp. See The electronic signature.

It says I have no inspection stamp

To release product (a final inspection, an FAI, an MRB disposition, a shipment's CoC…) you need a current inspection stamp with that scope, on top of the permission. Quality issues them in Inspection & FAI → Stamps & signatures. And if the scope requires a qualification, it has to be current. See Inspection & FAI.

I got my password wrong several times and it will not let me sign

After 5 failed attempts signing is locked for 15 minutes: wait and try again with the password you use to sign in to Aeromec. If you have forgotten it, an administrator can set a new one for you in Users.

I made a mistake in an inspection that is already signed: do I delete it?

You cannot: what is signed cannot be changed or deleted. Open its Signatures tab and press Correct: you change the value, give the reason and sign the correction. The previous value stays on the Changes tab and the correction among the signatures. See The Signatures tab.

What does «Altered» mean on the Signatures tab?

That the record's content is no longer what was signed: something changed it without going through Correct, which is only possible by editing the database by hand, bypassing its rules. Tell Quality: this is exactly what the integrity check is there to catch. «Intact» is normal; «Being edited» is a record that has gone back to draft (a rejected routing, for example).

Can Claude sign for me?

No. A signature belongs to a person and states what it means; Claude can prepare the work and explain what is missing, but whatever is signed, you sign it in the app. See Connect to Claude.

#The quality system and the standard

Does Aeromec certify us to EN 9100?

No: certification belongs to the company, and it is granted by an accredited body after auditing it. Aeromec is designed to conform to ISO 9001 and EN 9100: it helps you comply (approved routings, contract review, approved suppliers, FAI per EN 9102, gauges in calibration, competences, traceability, configuration, NCR and CAPA, electronic signatures…) and keeps a record of every step, which is what the auditor asks for. What it cannot do for you —the policy, leadership, things being done the way they are recorded— remains the organisation's responsibility.

How do we know which clauses of the standard Aeromec covers?

In Standard, the compliance matrix: each clause of ISO 9001 and EN 9100 with what it requires, how Aeromec covers it («covered by Aeromec», «shared» or «the organisation's»), where it is —one click takes you to the section—, the evidence counted in your data and the tests that check it.

What do I show the auditor?

Give them a user with the Auditor externo profile and an access end date: they will see for themselves, read-only, the records they ask for. To start with, the Standard (compliance matrix and validation), the Management system (objectives, risks, audits, management review), Documentation and, from there, any record with its Signatures tab.

How do we know the backups work?

In Standard → Validation, each daily backup carries its fingerprint and its verified restore: it is restored into a separate database and checked to have the same rows in every table and all signatures still intact. You also see the version in service with the tests it passed when deployed (and, in your menu, About Aeromec).

#Purchasing, warehouse and invoicing

MRP proposes buying something we already have in stock

It only counts available stock: what is in quarantine comes in as an expected receipt and blocked stock does not count. Besides, it proposes when the balance drops below the safety stock, adding up the demand for the following three weeks and rounding up to the supplier's minimum lot. Open the line to see its detail (pegging). See MRP.

Material has arrived but cannot be used

It goes into quarantine until the receiving inspection is done (with its 3.1 certificate). Meanwhile it can be neither reserved nor consumed. See Warehouse.

It will not let me send a purchase order to a supplier

Before sending it, Aeromec checks that the supplier is approved (or conditional) and not expired, that each outsourced operation is within its current approved scope (its Nadcap for the process, for example) and, if the WO's customer requires it, that the supplier is among its approved sources. The warning says what fails: renewing the scope or evaluating the supplier is up to Quality. See Suppliers and Purchasing.

I cannot release the material at receiving

To release raw material, the 3.1 certificate must be validated point by point and none of them can be «no». If the material's origin cannot be traced, it is rejected and the NCR is opened as suspected counterfeit: it is not accepted by concession, reworked or returned to the supplier. See Purchasing.

Can I invoice parts that have not been shipped yet?

A normal invoice comes from the shipped delivery note. If the customer pays part in advance, an advance invoice is issued against the order, and the final invoice deducts it. See Invoices.

#Tax, accounting and banking

Does Aeromec really send invoices to the Tax Agency?

Not yet. Every invoice is recorded for the Spanish Tax Agency (AEAT) in the real SII format (or VeriFactu) and you can see its status, its deadline and its response, but at this pre-implementation stage sending is simulated: nothing goes out to the Tax Agency. To send for real, the company's electronic certificate has to be installed and the test environment switched to production, something done during roll-out. See Tax.

What happens if the Tax Agency rejects an invoice or accepts it with errors?

The invoice appears under the AEAT to handle filter in Invoices (or in Payables), and its Tax & AEAT card states the error and what to correct; it is nearly always the customer's or supplier's tax ID or EU VAT number, fixed in their record. The submission is then retried from Tax. With errors counts as filed and is corrected with an amendment; rejected does not count, so it must be resent before the deadline.

Why does an invoice to a French or Portuguese customer carry no VAT?

Because it is an intra-Community supply: if the customer has a valid VAT number from another EU country, the sale is exempt from Spanish VAT (art. 25 of the VAT Act) and the customer declares it in their own country. The invoice says so explicitly, and the transaction also goes on form 349 and in Intrastat. A customer outside the EU is invoiced as an export, also exempt. The country in the customer's record decides it. See Customers.

Does Aeromec replace my accounting software or my accountants?

No. Aeromec's accounting is integrated: it posts by itself the entries for what happens in the shop (invoices, receipts, payments, payroll, depreciation, inventory and VAT) so you have an up-to-date balance sheet, income statement and cost analysis by customer or part. But it does not replace the official accounts: the books that are filed and the annual accounts are still kept by your accounting software or your accountants, from what you export from Aeromec. Forms 303 and 349 are drafts to review with your tax adviser. See Accounting.

How do I pass the accounts to my accountants?

In Accounting, Export view: choose the period and download the file (CSV with the journal or with the cost analysis), which opens in a spreadsheet or can be imported into their software. Exported entries are marked: if something has to be corrected later, Aeromec does not touch them but posts a reversing entry. The exact format of your accountants' software (A3, Sage, SAP…) is set up during roll-out.

How do I reconcile the bank?

In Banking, import the statement you download from your online banking (Norma 43 or CSV). For each transaction Aeromec suggests the receipt, payment or invoice it belongs to, with a score; Auto-reconciliation matches everything unambiguous in one go and you confirm the rest one by one. Matching an incoming payment with an outstanding invoice records its receipt (or its payment, if it is a supplier's), so you do not need to enter it by hand first.

#Claude

Is it safe to connect Claude to Aeromec?

Yes. Claude gets in as you, with a personal key: Aeromec applies your access profiles to every request, just as in the app, so it can never see or do more than you (the defence data, costs or prices your profile cannot see, Claude cannot see either). Aeromec does not store the key, only a fingerprint of it; you can revoke it whenever you like, and every call from Claude is recorded in the activity log and in the audit log. From a chat you cannot manage users, profiles or keys, nor use the shop-floor terminal. See Connect to Claude.

What does Claude see of my data?

The same as you see in the app, no more and no less, and only what it looks up to answer you. What it looks up goes into your conversation, which stays in your Claude account. Without the «Export CSV» permission, it receives at most 50 rows per query.

I have lost a key or I think someone has seen it

Revoke it in your user menu → Connect to Claude → My access keys: Claude can no longer get in with it from its next request. Aeromec cannot show it to you again (it only stores its fingerprint), so create another one or connect Claude to your user again. If you cannot sign in to Aeromec, ask an administrator to revoke it from Users → Claude.

Can Claude change or delete things?

Only if your profile has «Make changes from Claude» and you can do that same thing in the app; Claude follows the same rules as the app (it does not release a WO with an unapproved routing, it does not adjust stock by hand). Even so, it asks you to confirm before deleting something or taking an important step, and everything is recorded. If you want a profile to only look things up, remove «Make changes from Claude» from it.

Do I need a paid Claude account?

No. Custom connectors are available on every Claude plan: Free (with a single custom connector), Pro, Max, Team and Enterprise. On Team and Enterprise, an owner of the organisation adds the connector once and then each person connects it with their Aeromec user.

Claude says it can no longer get into Aeromec

The key has been revoked or has expired, or your profile no longer has «Use from Claude». Check the status of your keys in Connect to Claude and connect Claude again with your user or with a new key. In the public demo the data goes back to its initial state every day at 8:00, but the keys are kept.

#General use

Can I get the data into Excel?

Yes: lists have the Export CSV button, which downloads what you see (with the filters applied) as a file that Excel opens. It appears if your profile has the export permission.

Does it work on a phone or a tablet?

Yes. The shop-floor terminal is designed for tablets. On small screens the sidebar becomes a drop-down menu (☰ button), lists turn into cards and records take up the whole screen. See The screen and common features.

How do I change the language or switch to dark mode?

With the globe and the moon in the top bar, or in «My profile» from your user menu. Aeromec is available in Spanish and English, and it remembers your choice in each browser.

I am lost on a screen: is there help inside the application?

Yes: the Help menu at the foot of the sidebar opens this manual at the chapter for the screen you are on, and the F1 key opens the interactive guides for that screen. The ⓘ icons next to each indicator explain what it shows and how it is calculated.